Adept

PSS/ADEPT 5
USERS MANUAL
April 2004
1482 Erie Boulevard

Schenectady, NY 12301-1058
518.395.5000
www.pti-us.com
Copyright 1998-2004 Shaw Power Technologies, Inc.

Information in this manual and any software described herein is confidential and subject to change
without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Shaw Power Technologies, Inc.
The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure
agreement and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. No part
of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, for any purpose other than the purchasers personal use, without the
express written permission of Shaw Power Technologies, Inc.
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Visual C++ are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
1.1
About the PSS/ADEPT Application .............................................................................1-1

1.1.1 Application Capabilities ..................................................................................1-1
1.1.2 Optional Features ...........................................................................................1-1
1.2
Getting Help ................................................................................................................1-2

1.2.1 Using This Documentation .............................................................................1-2
1.2.2 Using the Online Help ....................................................................................1-3
1.2.3 Contacting PTI for Support .............................................................................1-3
1.2.4 Submitting Bug Reports and Feature Requests .............................................1-4
1.3
Installing and Using PSS/ADEPT ................................................................................1-5
1.4
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window .........................................................................1-6

1.4.1 Views ..............................................................................................................1-6
1.4.2 The Status Bar .............................................................................................1-16
1.4.3 The Main Menu ............................................................................................1-17
1.4.4 Toolbars .......................................................................................................1-18
1.5
Setting PSS/ADEPT Program Properties ..................................................................1-27
1.6
Setting Diagram View Properties ..............................................................................1-32

1.6.1 Setting Default Diagram Properties ..............................................................1-34
1.6.2 Resetting Diagram Properties ......................................................................1-34
1.7
Setting Default Item Properties .................................................................................1-35
1.8
Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT ................................................................1-38

1.8.1 Opening Native PSS/ADEPT Files ...............................................................1-38
1.8.2 Opening PSS/U Raw Data Files ...................................................................1-39
1.8.3 Opening PSS/Engines Hub Files .................................................................1-39
1.8.4 Saving Files ..................................................................................................1-40
1.8.5 Merging Files ................................................................................................1-40
1.8.5.1 Duplicate Node Names Not Allowed ............................................1-42
1.8.5.2 Duplicate Node Names Allowed ...................................................1-43
Chapter 2 - Creating a Network Model

2.1
Overview: Creating a Network Model ..........................................................................2-1
2.2
Creating a New Diagram .............................................................................................2-1
2.3
Setting Network Model Properties ...............................................................................2-2
2.4
Adding a Node .............................................................................................................2-4
2.5
Adding a Shunt Device ................................................................................................2-5
2.6
Adding a Branch ..........................................................................................................2-6
2.7
Defining a Group .........................................................................................................2-8
Confidential
Shaw Power Technologies, Inc.
Table of Contents
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
2.8
Defining a Load Category ..........................................................................................2-11
2.9
Defining Network Economics ....................................................................................2-14
2.10 Defining Item Ordering Method .................................................................................2-15

2.11 Completing the Network Diagram .............................................................................2-18
2.12 Saving the Network Model ........................................................................................2-19
2.13 Printing the Diagram ..................................................................................................2-20
2.13.1 Specifying Print Options ...............................................................................2-20
2.13.2 Specifying Print Settings ..............................................................................2-21
2.13.3 Previewing the Diagram Before Printing ......................................................2-22
2.13.4 Printing a Network Diagram .........................................................................2-23
2.14 Adjusting the PSS/ADEPT Display ............................................................................2-23
2.14.1 Hiding Views .................................................................................................2-23
2.14.2 Docking Views ..............................................................................................2-24
2.14.3 Floating the Progress View ..........................................................................2-25
2.14.4 Zooming the Diagram ...................................................................................2-26
2.14.5 Scaling/Offsetting Diagram Coordinates ......................................................2-27
2.14.6 Panning the Diagram ....................................................................................2-28
2.14.7 Navigating Using the Mouse Wheel .............................................................2-28
2.14.8 Centering Items in the Diagram View ...........................................................2-28
2.14.9 Saving Diagram Views .................................................................................2-28
2.14.10 Working with Layers .....................................................................................2-29
2.14.11 Importing and Exporting Image Files ............................................................2-31
2.14.12 Using Knee Points ........................................................................................2-32
2.14.13 Locking the Diagram ....................................................................................2-34
2.14.14 Working with Item Labels .............................................................................2-34
2.14.14.1 Setting Multiple Label Fonts .........................................................2-36
2.14.14.2 Controlling Result Label Visibility .................................................2-37
2.14.14.3 Configuring Point Node Labels ....................................................2-37
2.14.14.4 Applying Separate Labels to Node Names and Results ..............2-38
2.14.14.5 Positioning Branch Result Labels ................................................2-38
2.15 Autopositioning Diagram Symbols ............................................................................2-39
2.16 Rotating Diagram Items .............................................................................................2-39
2.17 Using Ports and Links ...............................................................................................2-39
Chapter 3 - Editing a Network Model

3.1
ii
Overview: Editing a Network Model ............................................................................3-1

3.1.1 Basic Editing Features ...................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Editing Item Properties ...................................................................................3-2
3.1.3 Using the Grid Editor ......................................................................................3-2
3.1.3.1 Opening the Grid Editor .................................................................3-3
3.1.3.2 Modifying Network Items ................................................................3-4
3.1.3.3 Using Copy and Paste in the Grid View .........................................3-7
3.1.3.4 Finding Data in a Cell .....................................................................3-8
3.1.3.5 Exporting the Grid View .................................................................3-8
3.1.3.6 Changing Format and Display Settings of Grid Cells .....................3-9
3.1.3.7 Printing the Grid View ..................................................................3-11
3.1.3.8 Zooming Capabilities ....................................................................3-14
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
3.2
Opening an Existing Network Diagram .....................................................................3-15
3.3
Selecting Items ..........................................................................................................3-15

3.3.1 Selecting a Single Item .................................................................................3-16
3.3.2 Selecting Multiple Adjacent Items ................................................................3-17
3.3.3 Selecting Multiple Nonadjacent Items ..........................................................3-18
3.3.4 Selecting All Items ........................................................................................3-19
3.3.5 Deselecting All Items ....................................................................................3-19
3.3.6 Selecting a Group .........................................................................................3-19
3.3.7 Selecting an Island .......................................................................................3-20
3.3.8 Selecting by Load Category .........................................................................3-21
3.3.9 Selecting Nodes in a Given Base Voltage Range ........................................3-22
3.3.10 Selecting a Tree ...........................................................................................3-23
3.3.11 Selection Filters ............................................................................................3-24
3.4
Annotating the Diagram .............................................................................................3-25
3.5
Editing Nodes ............................................................................................................3-27

3.5.1 Moving Nodes ..............................................................................................3-27
3.5.2 Copying Nodes .............................................................................................3-27
3.5.3 Resizing Nodes ............................................................................................3-29
3.5.4 Deleting Nodes .............................................................................................3-29
3.5.5 Toggling Node Symbols ...............................................................................3-29
3.5.6 Changing Node Properties ...........................................................................3-30
3.6
Editing Branches .......................................................................................................3-32

3.6.1 Moving Branches ..........................................................................................3-32
3.6.2 Copying Branches ........................................................................................3-33
3.6.3 Deleting Branches ........................................................................................3-33
3.6.4 Changing Line Properties .............................................................................3-34
3.6.5 Changing Switch Properties .........................................................................3-38
3.6.6 Changing Transformer Properties ................................................................3-41
3.6.7 Changing Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties ............................................3-50
3.7
Editing Shunt Devices ...............................................................................................3-54

3.7.1 Moving Shunt Devices ..................................................................................3-54
3.7.2 Copying Shunt Devices ................................................................................3-55
3.7.3 Deleting Shunt Devices ................................................................................3-55
3.7.4 Changing Static Load Properties ..................................................................3-56
3.7.5 Changing MWh Load Properties ..................................................................3-60
3.7.6 Changing Source Properties ........................................................................3-63
3.7.7 Changing Induction Machine Properties ......................................................3-67
3.7.8 Changing Synchronous Machine Properties ................................................3-74
3.7.9 Changing Capacitor Properties ....................................................................3-81
3.7.10 Changing Standard Fault Properties ............................................................3-83
3.8
Workspace Management ..........................................................................................3-85
3.9
Load and Machine Scaling ........................................................................................3-87

3.9.1 Load Scaling .................................................................................................3-87
3.9.2 Machine Scaling ...........................................................................................3-89
3.9.3 MWh Load Scaling .......................................................................................3-90
3.9.4 Automatic Load Scaling ................................................................................3-91
3.10 Rephasing the Network .............................................................................................3-98

3.10.1 Device Rephasing Details ............................................................................3-99
3.11 Creating Load Snapshots ........................................................................................3-102
Confidential
iii
Table of Contents
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Chapter 4 - Analyzing Network Models

4.1
Overview: Analyzing Network Models .........................................................................4-1

4.1.1 PSS/ADEPT Analysis Conventions ................................................................4-2
4.2
Built-In Data Validation Options ..................................................................................4-2

4.2.1 Automatic Validation of Input Data .................................................................4-2
4.2.2 User-Initiated Network Validation ...................................................................4-4
4.3
Viewing Results on the Diagram .................................................................................4-5

4.3.1 Setting General Analysis Options ...................................................................4-5
4.3.2 Color Coding the Analysis Results .................................................................4-7
4.3.3 Reporting Results on the Network Diagram ...................................................4-8
4.3.3.1 Flow Arrows ...................................................................................4-8
4.3.3.2 Load Flow and Short Circuit Result Options ..................................4-9
4.4
Calculating Load Flow ..............................................................................................4-15

4.4.1 Setting Load Flow Analysis Options .............................................................4-15
4.4.2 Performing a Load Flow Analysis .................................................................4-19
4.4.3 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Load Flow Solutions ......................................4-20
4.5
Calculating Short Circuits ..........................................................................................4-25

4.5.1 Setting Short Circuit Analysis Options ..........................................................4-26
4.5.2 Performing a Short Circuit Analysis ..............................................................4-28
4.5.3 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Short Circuit Solutions ...................................4-29
4.5.4 Thevenin Equivalent Impedance ..................................................................4-30
4.6
Calculating Motor Starting .........................................................................................4-33

4.6.1 Setting Motor Starting Analysis Options .......................................................4-33
4.6.2 Performing a Motor Starting Analysis ...........................................................4-34
4.6.3 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Motor Starting Solutions ................................4-35
4.7
Optimal Capacitor Placement (CAPO) ......................................................................4-37

4.7.1 Setting CAPO Network Economics ..............................................................4-37
4.7.2 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates CAPO Financials ...........................................4-38
4.7.3 Setting CAPO Analysis Options ...................................................................4-39
4.7.4 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Capacitor Placement .....................................4-40
4.7.5 Performing an Optimal Capacitor Placement Analysis .................................4-43
4.7.6 Reporting CAPO Analysis Results ...............................................................4-43
4.8
Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) ........................................................................4-44

4.8.1 Setting TOPO Network Economics ..............................................................4-45
4.8.2 Setting TOPO Analysis Options ...................................................................4-45
4.8.3 Performing a Tie Open Point Optimization Analysis ....................................4-46
4.8.4 Reporting TOPO Analysis Results ...............................................................4-47
4.9
How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Voltage and Current Unbalances ...............................4-48

4.9.1 Voltage Unbalance .......................................................................................4-48
4.9.2 Current Unbalance .......................................................................................4-51
4.10 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Power Factor Limits ...................................................4-54
Chapter 5 - Results Reporting
iv
5.1
Overview: Reporting Results .......................................................................................5-1
5.2
Selectable Tabular Reports .........................................................................................5-1

5.2.1 Branch Current Reports .................................................................................5-2
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
5.2.12
5.2.13
5.2.14
5.2.15
Table of Contents
Branch Power Report .....................................................................................5-2

Branch Power Losses Report .........................................................................5-2
Input List of Network Data Report ..................................................................5-2
Node Voltage Reports ....................................................................................5-2
Shunt Current Reports ...................................................................................5-3
Shunt Power Report .......................................................................................5-4
Status Reports ................................................................................................5-4
Network Summary Report ..............................................................................5-4
Power Flow Summary ....................................................................................5-4
Power Flow Details .........................................................................................5-5
Fault All Current Report ..................................................................................5-5
Capacitor Placement Optimization (CAPO) Report ........................................5-5
Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) Report .................................................5-5
Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA) Report ................................................5-5
5.3
Setting the Report File Location ..................................................................................5-5
5.4
Setting Report Units ....................................................................................................5-6
5.5
Setting Report Options ................................................................................................5-8
5.6
Reporting on a Selection .............................................................................................5-9
5.7
Previewing the Report .................................................................................................5-9
5.8
Exporting a Report to Another Format ......................................................................5-10
5.9
Creating and Designing Reports Using Crystal Reports ...........................................5-11
Chapter 6 - Line Properties Calculator

6.1
Overview: Line Properties Calculator ..........................................................................6-1

6.1.1 Nomenclature .................................................................................................6-2
6.2
Using the Line Properties Calculator ...........................................................................6-3

6.2.1 Corridor View ..................................................................................................6-5
6.2.2 Status Bar .....................................................................................................6-12
6.2.3 Menu Bar ......................................................................................................6-12
6.2.3.1 File Menu .....................................................................................6-12
6.2.3.2 Edit Menu .....................................................................................6-12
6.2.3.3 View Menu ...................................................................................6-12
6.2.3.4 Analysis Menu ..............................................................................6-12
6.2.3.5 Options Menu ...............................................................................6-12
6.2.3.6 Window Menu ..............................................................................6-12
6.2.3.7 Help Menu ....................................................................................6-13
6.2.4 Toolbar .........................................................................................................6-13
6.2.5 Zoom and Refresh Capabilities ....................................................................6-13
6.2.6 Setting Options .............................................................................................6-14
6.2.6.1 Users Options ..............................................................................6-14
6.2.6.2 Circuit Options ..............................................................................6-16
6.2.6.3 Corridor Options ...........................................................................6-17
6.3
Corridor Files .............................................................................................................6-21

6.3.1 Opening/Saving/Printing Corridor Files ........................................................6-21
6.3.1.1 Opening a Corridor File ................................................................6-21
6.3.1.2 Saving a Corridor File ...................................................................6-22
6.3.1.3 Printing a Corridor File .................................................................6-23
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
6.3.2
6.3.3
Modifying Corridor Files ...............................................................................6-25

6.3.2.1 Selecting a Circuit ........................................................................6-25
6.3.2.2 Adjusting Circuit Properties ..........................................................6-26
6.3.2.3 Copying a Circuit ..........................................................................6-26
6.3.2.4 Pasting a Circuit ...........................................................................6-27
6.3.2.5 Deleting a Circuit ..........................................................................6-27
6.3.2.6 Deleting All Circuits ......................................................................6-28
Analyzing Corridor Files ...............................................................................6-28
6.3.3.1 Automatic Validation ....................................................................6-28
6.3.3.2 User-Initiated Validation ...............................................................6-29
6.3.3.3 Performing an Analysis ................................................................6-29
6.3.3.4 Calculation Results ......................................................................6-32
6.3.3.5 Saving Output to a File .................................................................6-39
6.3.3.6 Saving Impedances to the Construction Dictionary .....................6-40
Chapter 7 - Protection and Coordination
vi
7.1
Overview: Protection and Coordination .......................................................................7-1
7.2
Adding Protection Equipment Packs ...........................................................................7-1
7.3
Editing Protection Equipment Packs ...........................................................................7-3

7.3.1 Editing Selected Devices ................................................................................7-9
7.3.1.1 Editing Fuses ...............................................................................7-11
7.3.1.2 Editing Relays ..............................................................................7-12
7.3.1.3 Editing Transformer Damage Curves ...........................................7-14
7.3.1.4 Editing Cable/Conductor Damage Curves ...................................7-18
7.3.1.5 Editing Reclosers .........................................................................7-21
7.3.1.6 Editing Machine Protection Curves ..............................................7-24
7.4
Performing a Coordination Study ..............................................................................7-27

7.4.1 Preparing for a Coordination Study ..............................................................7-27
7.4.2 The Coordination View .................................................................................7-27
7.4.2.1 The Coordination Menu Bar .........................................................7-29
7.4.2.2 Coordination Curve Plot Annotation .............................................7-29
7.4.2.3 Changing Protective Device Settings ...........................................7-29
7.4.2.4 The Coordination List View ..........................................................7-30
7.4.2.5 Printing the Coordination View .....................................................7-31
7.5
The Protective Device Database ...............................................................................7-32

7.5.1 Fuse Tables ..................................................................................................7-32
7.5.1.1 Fuse .............................................................................................7-32
7.5.1.2 Fuse Catalog ................................................................................7-33
7.5.1.3 Fuse Curve ...................................................................................7-34
7.5.2 Relay Tables ................................................................................................7-35
7.5.2.1 Relay ............................................................................................7-35
7.5.2.2 Relay Catalog ...............................................................................7-36
7.5.2.3 Relay Curve .................................................................................7-37
7.5.3 Recloser Table .............................................................................................7-38
7.5.3.1 RecloserMfrSpecs ........................................................................7-38
7.5.3.2 RecloserRatings ...........................................................................7-39
7.5.3.3 RecloserTCCCurve ......................................................................7-40
7.5.4 Using the Protective Device Database Interface ..........................................7-41
7.5.4.1 Adding Fuses ...............................................................................7-42
7.5.4.2 Adding Relays ..............................................................................7-43
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
7.5.5
7.5.6
7.5.4.3 Adding Reclosers .........................................................................7-44

7.5.4.4 Viewing and Modifying Fuses .......................................................7-45
7.5.4.5 Viewing and Modifying Relays .....................................................7-46
7.5.4.6 Viewing and Modifying Reclosers ................................................7-47
7.5.4.7 Updating Device Manufacturers ...................................................7-48
7.5.4.8 Removing Devices .......................................................................7-49
Printing the Contents of the Database .........................................................7-52
Importing Customized Database Tables ......................................................7-53
Chapter 8 - Harmonic Analysis

8.1
Overview: Harmonic Analysis ......................................................................................8-1
8.2
Adding Harmonic Injections .........................................................................................8-2

8.2.1 Adding Harmonic Injections to Shunt Items ....................................................8-3
8.2.2 Adding Harmonic Injections to Transformers .................................................8-4
8.2.3 Adding Harmonic Injections to Nodes ............................................................8-5
8.3
Editing Harmonic Injections .........................................................................................8-6
8.4
Adding Harmonic Filters ..............................................................................................8-7
8.5
Editing Harmonic Filters ..............................................................................................8-8
8.6
Setting Harmonic Analysis Options ...........................................................................8-10
8.7
Performing a Harmonic Analysis ...............................................................................8-11
8.8
Viewing Results of a Harmonic Analysis ...................................................................8-12

8.8.1 Harmonic Voltage .........................................................................................8-13
8.8.2 Harmonics Spectrum ....................................................................................8-15
8.8.3 Impedance versus Frequency ......................................................................8-16
8.8.4 Nodal Impedance .........................................................................................8-17
8.9
Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT ....................................................................8-18

8.9.1 Static Loads ..................................................................................................8-18
8.9.2 Induction Machines ......................................................................................8-19
8.9.3 Synchronous Machines ................................................................................8-20
8.9.4 Shunt Capacitors ..........................................................................................8-21
8.9.5 Lines and Cables ..........................................................................................8-22
8.9.6 Transformers ................................................................................................8-24
Chapter 9 - Distribution Reliability Analysis

9.1
Overview: Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA) ........................................................9-1

9.1.1 Nomenclature .................................................................................................9-1
9.2
Using the Distribution Reliability Analysis Module .......................................................9-3
9.3
Using DRA Protection Equipment and Switches .........................................................9-5

9.3.1 Specifying Automatic Reclosing Devices .......................................................9-5
9.3.2 Specifying Breakers .......................................................................................9-5
9.3.3 Specifying Switches .......................................................................................9-6
9.3.4 Specifying Fuses ............................................................................................9-6
9.3.5 Specifying FuseSwitches ...............................................................................9-6
9.3.6 Specifying Tie Switches .................................................................................9-6
9.4
Specifying Reliability Parameters and Device Types ..................................................9-7

9.4.1 Entering Reliability Parameters: Default .........................................................9-8
Confidential
vii
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
Entering Reliability Parameters: Property Sheet ..........................................9-14

Entering Reliability Parameters: Construction Dictionary .............................9-17
Entering Reliability Parameters: Static Loads ..............................................9-19
9.5
Network and Analysis Limitations ..............................................................................9-21
9.6
Setting DRA Analysis Options ...................................................................................9-22
9.7
Setting DRA Analysis Result Display Options ...........................................................9-24
9.8
Performing a DRA Analysis .......................................................................................9-26
9.9
Calculating Reliability Indices: Application Examples ...............................................9-26

9.9.1 Using DRA for Basic Historical Analysis ......................................................9-26
9.9.2 Example of Basic Analysis ...........................................................................9-27
9.9.3 Example of Predictive Analysis ....................................................................9-29
Appendix A - Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT
viii
A.1
Transformer Modeling ................................................................................................ A-1

A.1.1 Transformer Changes From PSS/U to PSS/ADEPT ..................................... A-1
A.1.2 Transformers in PSS/ADEPT ........................................................................ A-1
A.1.3 Reading Transformers From PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT .......... A-6
A.1.3.1 Conversion of Transformer Types ................................................. A-6
A.1.3.2 Calculation of Transformer Grounding Impedance ....................... A-8
A.1.4 Transformer Conversions Not Supported ...................................................... A-8
A.2
Transformer Modeling Rules and Hints .................................................................... A-10

A.2.1 Specifying Transformer Size ....................................................................... A-10
A.2.2 Transformer Impedance .............................................................................. A-10
A.2.3 Three-Winding Transformers ...................................................................... A-10
A.2.4 Three-Legged Core Transformers ............................................................... A-11
A.2.5 Regulating Transformers ............................................................................. A-12
A.2.6 Grounding Transformers ............................................................................. A-13
A.2.7 Autotransformers ......................................................................................... A-13
A.3
Machine Modeling .................................................................................................... A-14

A.3.1 Synchronous Machines ............................................................................... A-14
A.3.1.1 Synchronous Machine Load Flow Behavior ................................ A-14
A.3.1.2 Comparison of Synchronous Machine Load Flow Calculations .. A-15
A.3.1.3 Synchronous Machine Short Circuit Behavior ............................. A-15
A.3.1.4 Comparison of Synchronous Machine Short Circuit Calculation
Between PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U .............................................. A-15
A.3.1.5 Synchronous Machine Starting in PSS/ADEPT .......................... A-16
A.3.1.6 Comparison of Synchronous Machine Starting Between
PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U ............................................................. A-18
A.3.2 PSS/ADEPT Induction Machine Model and Changes from PSS/U ............. A-18
A.3.2.1 PSS/ADEPT Induction Machine Model ....................................... A-18
A.3.2.2 The Basic Method to Specify an Induction Machine ................... A-19
A.3.2.3 The Available Induction Machine Designs .................................. A-20
A.3.2.3.1 NEMA Designs ........................................................ A-20
A.3.2.3.2 IEC Designs ............................................................. A-21
A.3.2.4 Induction Machine Loadflow Comparison
of PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U ......................................................... A-21
A.3.2.5 Locked Rotor Codes and Motor Starting Comparison ................ A-22
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
A.3.2.6
A.3.2.7
A.3.2.8
A.3.2.9
PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U Induction Machine Modeling

or Short Circuit Calculations ........................................................ A-23
Advanced Machine Specification ................................................ A-25
Relationship between the New PSS/ADEPT Model
and the PSS/U Raw Data File ..................................................... A-26
Examples of Induction Machine Specification ............................. A-27
A.3.2.9.1 Induction Machine Short Circuit Behavior ................ A-30
A.3.2.9.2 Induction Machine Starting Behavior ....................... A-30
A.4
Data and Parameter File Differences ....................................................................... A-31
A.5
Editing Data Dictionaries .......................................................................................... A-31
A.6
Diagram Differences ................................................................................................. A-32

A.6.1 Transformer Symbol Types ......................................................................... A-32
A.6.2 Node Labels ................................................................................................ A-32
A.6.3 Load and Branch Labels ............................................................................. A-32
A.6.4 Load Flow Results ....................................................................................... A-32
A.6.5 Shunt Device Labels ................................................................................... A-33
A.7
Acceleration Factors ................................................................................................. A-33
A.8
Unique Name Identifiers ........................................................................................... A-33
A.9
Network Limits .......................................................................................................... A-33

A.9.1 Network Size/Number of Loops ................................................................... A-33
A.9.2 Loads ........................................................................................................... A-33
A.10 MWh Loads .............................................................................................................. A-34

A.11 Sources .................................................................................................................... A-34
A.11.1 Source Angle ............................................................................................... A-34
A.11.2 Multiple In-Service Sources ......................................................................... A-34
A.12 Load Categories and Device Groups ....................................................................... A-34
A.13 Network Economics .................................................................................................. A-34
A.14 Load Snapshots ....................................................................................................... A-34
A.15 Static Loads .............................................................................................................. A-35
Appendix B - PSS/U Input File Formats

B.1
PSS/U Raw Data File Format ..................................................................................... B-1

B.1.1 Sample Three-Phase Feeder Raw Data File ................................................. B-1
B.1.2 Title Section ................................................................................................... B-2
B.1.3 System Parameters Section .......................................................................... B-2
B.1.4 Node Declaration Section .............................................................................. B-3
B.1.5 Source Data Section ..................................................................................... B-3
B.1.6 Branch Data Section ..................................................................................... B-4
B.1.6.1 Line or Cable Data ........................................................................ B-4
B.1.6.2 Switch Data ................................................................................... B-5
B.1.6.3 Tie Switch Data ............................................................................. B-5
B.1.6.4 Series Capacitor or Series Reactor Data ...................................... B-6
B.1.6.5 Transformer Data .......................................................................... B-6
B.1.6.5.1 Rules: ......................................................................... B-6
B.1.7 Transformer Tap Changing Data Section ...................................................... B-7
B.1.8 Transformer Type Codes .............................................................................. B-8
Confidential
ix
Table of Contents
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
B.1.9
Load Data Section ....................................................................................... B-10

B.1.9.1 Load Categories .......................................................................... B-10
B.1.9.2 Load Type Definitions ................................................................. B-10
B.1.9.3 kW, kvar Load ............................................................................. B-11
B.1.9.3.1 kW, kvar Load - Unbalanced
(types 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13) ......................................... B-11
B.1.9.3.2 kW, kvar Load - Balanced
(types 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 33) ................................... B-11
B.1.9.4 Machine Loads ............................................................................ B-12
B.1.9.4.1 Rules ........................................................................ B-12
B.1.9.4.2 Asynchronous Machine Load
(types 51-90, 151-190) ............................................ B-12
B.1.9.4.3 Synchronous Machine Load
(types 91-99, 191-199) ............................................ B-12
B.1.10 MWh Load Data Section ............................................................................. B-13
B.1.10.1 MWh Load Data - Unbalanced (types 5, 6, 15, 16) ..................... B-13
B.1.10.2 MWh Load Data - Balanced (types 25, 26, 35, 36) ..................... B-14
B.1.11 Capacitor Data Section ............................................................................... B-14
B.1.11.1 Fixed Capacitors ......................................................................... B-14
B.1.11.2 Switched Capacitors ................................................................... B-14
B.2
Construction Data Dictionary File Format ................................................................ B-15

B.2.1 General Information ..................................................................................... B-15
B.2.2 Data Assumptions ....................................................................................... B-15
B.2.3 Typical Construction Dictionary Data Record .............................................. B-16
B.2.4 Basic Data Record ...................................................................................... B-16
B.2.5 Two-Phase Data Records
(if different from three-phase values) .......................................................... B-17
B.2.6 One-Phase Data Records
(if different from three- or two-phase values) .............................................. B-17
B.2.7 Rating Data Record ..................................................................................... B-17
B.2.8 Reliability Data Record ................................................................................ B-17
Appendix C - Validation Criteria

C.1
Data Validation Criteria .............................................................................................. C-1
C.2
User-Specified Network Validation Criteria ................................................................ C-4
Appendix D - Modeling
D.1
Nodes ......................................................................................................................... D-1

D.1.1 Three-Phase Node ........................................................................................ D-1
D.2
Sources ...................................................................................................................... D-2

D.2.1 Three-Phase Source ..................................................................................... D-2
D.3
Loads .......................................................................................................................... D-5

D.3.1 Single-Phase Load ........................................................................................ D-6
D.3.2 Three-Phase Load ......................................................................................... D-6
D.4
Shunt Capacitors ........................................................................................................ D-7

D.4.1 Three-Phase Shunt Capacitor ....................................................................... D-7
D.5
Shunt Capacitor Controllers ....................................................................................... D-8

D.5.1 Controller for a Three-Phase Shunt Capacitor .............................................. D-8
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
D.6
Synchronous Machines .............................................................................................. D-9

D.6.1 Three-Phase Synchronous Machine ........................................................... D-10
D.6.2 Short Circuit Model of Synchronous Machine ............................................. D-13
D.6.3 Simplified Synchronous Machine Modeling ................................................. D-15
D.7
Induction Machines .................................................................................................. D-16

D.7.1 Three-Phase Induction Machine ................................................................. D-17
D.8
Lines ......................................................................................................................... D-18

D.8.1 Single-Phase Line ....................................................................................... D-18
D.8.2 Three-Phase Line ........................................................................................ D-18
D.9
Switches ................................................................................................................... D-19

D.9.1 Three-Phase Switch .................................................................................... D-19
D.10 Transformers ............................................................................................................ D-20

D.10.1 Transformer Node Connection .................................................................... D-20
D.10.2 Transformer Taps ........................................................................................ D-20
D.10.3 Transformer Phasing ................................................................................... D-20
D.10.4 Transformer Grounding ............................................................................... D-21
D.10.5 Summary of Transformers Types ................................................................ D-22
D.11 Transformer Details .................................................................................................. D-26
D.11.1 Wye-Wye Transformers ............................................................................... D-26
D.11.2 Delta-Delta Transformers ............................................................................ D-27
D.11.3 Wye-Delta Transformers ............................................................................. D-27
D.11.4 Delta-Wye Transformers ............................................................................. D-29
D.11.5 Wye Autotransformer .................................................................................. D-30
D.11.6 Autoregulators ............................................................................................. D-31
D.11.7 Specifying the Impedance of the Autoregulator Transformers .................... D-33
D.11.8 Center-Tapped Split-Phase Transformers ................................................... D-34
D.11.9 Z-Wye (ZY) Transformers (Zig-zag) ............................................................ D-36
D.11.10 All Transformers Single-Phase, Two-Phase and Three-Phase ................... D-38
D.12 Transformer Tap Controllers .................................................................................... D-51
D.13 Series Capacitor/Reactor ......................................................................................... D-52
D.13.1 Three-Phase Series Capacitor/Reactor ....................................................... D-53
D.14 Faults ........................................................................................................................ D-53
D.14.1 Line-to-Line Fault ........................................................................................ D-53
D.14.2 Line-to-Ground Fault ................................................................................... D-54
D.14.3 Line-to-Line-to-Ground Fault ....................................................................... D-55
Appendix E - NEMA Machine Classes

Appendix F - Device Properties Summary
F.1
Network ...................................................................................................................... F-1
F.2
Nodes ......................................................................................................................... F-3
F.3
Lines/Cables ............................................................................................................... F-4
F.4
Transformers .............................................................................................................. F-5
F.5
Static Loads ................................................................................................................ F-9
F.6
MWh Loads .............................................................................................................. F-11
Confidential
xi
Table of Contents
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
F.7
Source ...................................................................................................................... F-13
F.8
Induction Machines .................................................................................................. F-14
F.9
Synchronous Machines ............................................................................................ F-16
F.10 Shunt Capacitors ...................................................................................................... F-20

F.11 Switches ................................................................................................................... F-22
F.12 Series Capacitors/Reactors ...................................................................................... F-23
F.13 Standard Faults ........................................................................................................ F-24
F.14 Protection Equipment ............................................................................................... F-25
F.15 Fuses ........................................................................................................................ F-26
F.16 Over Current Relays ................................................................................................. F-27
F.17 Transformer Damage ............................................................................................... F-29
F.18 Conductor/Cable Damage ........................................................................................ F-31
F.19 Reclosers ................................................................................................................. F-33
F.20 Machines .................................................................................................................. F-34
Appendix G - Database Field Formats

G.1
Branch Results ........................................................................................................... G-1

G.1.1 Filename: branch.dbf ..................................................................................... G-1
G.2
Capacitor Placement Optimization Results ................................................................ G-4

G.2.1 Filename: capo.dbf ........................................................................................ G-4
G.3
Capacitor Placement Optimization Summary ............................................................. G-4

G.3.1 Filename: caposum.dbf ................................................................................. G-4
G.4
Capacitor Placement Optimization Switching Schedule ............................................. G-5

G.4.1 Filename: caposw.dbf ................................................................................... G-5
G.5
Capacitor Properties ................................................................................................... G-5

G.5.1 Filename: cap.dbf .......................................................................................... G-5
G.6
Device Groups ............................................................................................................ G-6

G.6.1 Filename: group.dbf ...................................................................................... G-6
G.7
Device Limits ..............................................................................................................G-6

G.7.1 Filename: limits.dbf ....................................................................................... G-6
G.8
Fault All Current Results ............................................................................................ G-7

G.8.1 Filename: fault.dbf ......................................................................................... G-7
G.9
Induction Machine Properties ..................................................................................... G-8

G.9.1 Filename: indmach.dbf .................................................................................. G-8
G.10 Line/Cable Properties ................................................................................................. G-9

G.10.1 Filename: line.dbf .......................................................................................... G-9
G.11 Load Flow Summary ................................................................................................ G-10
G.11.1 Filename: lfsum.dbf ..................................................................................... G-10
xii
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
G.12 Load Properties ........................................................................................................ G-11

G.12.1 Filename: load.dbf ....................................................................................... G-11
G.12.2 Filename: mwh.dbf ...................................................................................... G-11
G.13 Load Snapshots .......................................................................................................G-12
G.13.1 Filename: snap.dbf ...................................................................................... G-12
G.14 Network Economics .................................................................................................. G-12
G.14.1 Filename: econ.dbf ...................................................................................... G-12
G.15 Node Properties .......................................................................................................G-13
G.15.1 Filename: bus.dbf ........................................................................................ G-13
G.16 Node Results ............................................................................................................ G-13
G.16.1 Filename: node.dbf ...................................................................................... G-13
G.17 Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties ........................................................................ G-15
G.17.1 Filename: reactor.dbf .................................................................................. G-15
G.18 Shunt Status ............................................................................................................. G-16
G.18.1 Filename: shunt.dbf ..................................................................................... G-16
G.19 Source Properties ..................................................................................................... G-18
G.19.1 Filename: source.dbf ................................................................................... G-18
G.20 Standard Fault Properties ........................................................................................ G-19
G.20.1 Filename: stdfault.dbf .................................................................................. G-19
G.21 Static Load Summary ............................................................................................... G-19
G.21.1 Filename: lsum.dbf ...................................................................................... G-19
G.22 MWh Load Summary ................................................................................................ G-20
G.22.1 Filename: mwhsum.dbf ............................................................................... G-20
G.23 Switch Properties ..................................................................................................... G-21
G.23.1 Filename: switch.dbf .................................................................................... G-21
G.24 Synchronous Machine Properties ............................................................................ G-22
G.24.1 Filename: synmach.dbf ............................................................................... G-22
G.25 System Totals ........................................................................................................... G-23
G.25.1 Filename: count.dbf ..................................................................................... G-23
G.26 Tie Open Point Optimization Results ....................................................................... G-24
G.26.1 Filename: topo.dbf ....................................................................................... G-24
G.27 Titles and Comments ............................................................................................... G-25
G.27.1 Filename: comment.dbf ............................................................................... G-25
G.28 Transformer Properties ............................................................................................ G-25
G.28.1 Filename: trnsfrmr.dbf ................................................................................. G-25
G.29 Voltage Levels .......................................................................................................... G-28
G.29.1 Filename: volts.dbf ...................................................................................... G-28
G.30 Distribution Reliability Analysis Results .................................................................... G-28
G.30.1 Filename: dra.dbf ........................................................................................ G-28
Appendix H - Conductor Database
Confidential
xiii
This page intentionally left blank.
xiv
Confidential
List of Figures
Figure 1-1.
Report a Bug or Feature Request Window ............................................................1-4
Figure 1-2.
PSS/ADEPT Application Window Views ...............................................................1-6
Figure 1-3.
View Drop-Down Menu ..........................................................................................1-7
Figure 1-4.
Diagram View Pop-Up Menu .................................................................................1-8
Figure 1-5.
Equipment List View ............................................................................................1-10
Figure 1-6.
Item Type Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu .........................................1-11
Figure 1-7.
Expanded Item Type Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu ........................1-12
Figure 1-8.
Individual Item Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu ..................................1-13
Figure 1-9.
Progress View .....................................................................................................1-14
Figure 1-10. Progress View Pop-Up Menu ..............................................................................1-14

Figure 1-11. Report Preview Window ......................................................................................1-15
Figure 1-12. Application View After a Load Flow Analysis .......................................................1-16
Figure 1-13. Main Menu and Available Toolbars .....................................................................1-17
Figure 1-14. Network Diagram with Tooltips ............................................................................1-19
Figure 1-15. Customize Dialog: Toolbars Tab .........................................................................1-20
Figure 1-16. Save Workspace Dialog ......................................................................................1-22
Figure 1-17. File Toolbar ..........................................................................................................1-23
Figure 1-18. Diagram Toolbar ..................................................................................................1-23
Figure 1-19. Program Settings Dialog ......................................................................................1-24
Figure 1-20. Analysis Toolbar ..................................................................................................1-25
Figure 1-21. Zoom Toolbar ......................................................................................................1-26
Figure 1-22. Results Toolbar ...................................................................................................1-26
Figure 1-23. Reports Toolbar ...................................................................................................1-27
Figure 1-24. Program Settings: Selecting a Dictionary ............................................................1-29
Figure 1-25. Tooltip Settings Dialog .........................................................................................1-31
Figure 1-26. Diagram Property Sheet ......................................................................................1-32
Figure 1-27. Default Items Options ..........................................................................................1-35
Figure 1-28. Default Node Property Sheet ...............................................................................1-36
Figure 1-29. Default Transformer Property Sheet ....................................................................1-37
Figure 1-30. Selecting a PSS/ADEPT File ...............................................................................1-38
Figure 1-31. Merging Feeders .................................................................................................1-41
Figure 1-32. Common Tie Switch List ......................................................................................1-42
Figure 1-33. Duplicate Node Names Allowed ..........................................................................1-43
Figure 2-1.
Network Property Sheet: System Tab ...................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2.
Network Property Sheet: Reliability Tab ................................................................2-3
Figure 2-3.
Diagram Toolbar: Node Symbols ..........................................................................2-4
Confidential
Shaw Shaw Power Technologies, Inc.
xv
List of Figures
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 2-4.
Creating a Vertical Node on the Diagram ..............................................................2-5
Figure 2-5.
Diagram Toolbar: Shunt Device Symbols ..............................................................2-5
Figure 2-6.
Creating Shunt Devices .........................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-7.
Diagram Toolbar: Branch Symbols ........................................................................2-6
Figure 2-8.
Creating a Multipoint Branch .................................................................................2-7
Figure 2-9.
Groups Dialog ........................................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-10. Group Membership Dialog .....................................................................................2-9

Figure 2-11. Add Item(s) to Group Dialog ................................................................................2-10
Figure 2-12. Load Categories Dialog .......................................................................................2-11
Figure 2-13. Load Category Membership Dialog .....................................................................2-12
Figure 2-14. Add Load(s) to Category Dialog ..........................................................................2-13
Figure 2-15. Economics Dialog ................................................................................................2-14
Figure 2-16. Sample Network to Illustrate Item Ordering Methods ..........................................2-16
Figure 2-17. Ordering Method Dialog ......................................................................................2-17
Figure 2-18. Completed Sample Network Diagram .................................................................2-18
Figure 2-19. Save As Dialog ....................................................................................................2-19
Figure 2-20. Print Options Dialog .............................................................................................2-20
Figure 2-21. Print Setup Dialog ................................................................................................2-21
Figure 2-22. Print Preview Window ..........................................................................................2-22
Figure 2-23. Progress View "Docked" in PSS/ADEPT Application Window ............................2-24
Figure 2-24. Progress View "Floated" in PSS/ADEPT Application Window ............................2-25
Figure 2-25. Zooming the Diagram ..........................................................................................2-26
Figure 2-26. Zoom Toolbar ......................................................................................................2-26
Figure 2-27. Adjust Coordinates Dialog ...................................................................................2-27
Figure 2-28. Saved Views Dialog .............................................................................................2-28
Figure 2-29. Layers Dialog .......................................................................................................2-30
Figure 2-30. Image Property Sheet ..........................................................................................2-31
Figure 2-31. Knee Points .........................................................................................................2-32
Figure 2-32. Knee Point Selected ............................................................................................2-33
Figure 2-33. Knee Point Selection for Delete ...........................................................................2-34
Figure 2-34. Label Property Sheet ...........................................................................................2-35
Figure 2-35. Apply Font Dialog ................................................................................................2-36
Figure 2-36. Label Configurations ............................................................................................2-38
Figure 2-37. Ports and Links ....................................................................................................2-40
Figure 2-38. Port After Selection of Line Segment ..................................................................2-40
Figure 3-1.
Grid Editor View .....................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-2.
Transformer Grid Editor View ................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-3.
Drop Down List ......................................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-4.
Sorting Data in a Column ......................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-5.
Accessing a Network Item Property Sheet ............................................................3-7
Figure 3-6.
Find Dialog ............................................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-7.
Cell Format Dialog .................................................................................................3-9
xvi
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
List of Figures
Figure 3-8.
Display Settings Dialog ........................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-9.
Page Setup Dialog ...............................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-10. Header/Footer Options Dialog .............................................................................3-13

Figure 3-11. Print Preview Window ..........................................................................................3-14
Figure 3-12. Open Dialog .........................................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-13. Single Item Selected ............................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-14. Multiple Adjacent Item Selection .........................................................................3-17
Figure 3-15. Multiple Nonadjacent Item Selection ...................................................................3-18
Figure 3-16. Select Groups Dialog ...........................................................................................3-19
Figure 3-17. Select Load Categories Dialog ............................................................................3-21
Figure 3-18. Select Nodes Dialog ............................................................................................3-22
Figure 3-19. Select Tree Dialog ...............................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-20. Selection Filters Dialog ........................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-21. Diagram Showing Annotations ............................................................................3-25
Figure 3-22. Text Annotation Property Sheet ..........................................................................3-26
Figure 3-23. Copying and Pasting a Node ...............................................................................3-28
Figure 3-24. Node Property Sheet ...........................................................................................3-30
Figure 3-25. Moving a Branch ..................................................................................................3-32
Figure 3-26. Line Property Sheet: Main Tab ............................................................................3-34
Figure 3-27. Line Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab ..................................................................3-36
Figure 3-28. Line Property Sheet: DRA Tab ............................................................................3-37
Figure 3-29. Switch Property Sheet: Main Tab ........................................................................3-38
Figure 3-30. Switch Property Sheet: DRA Tab ........................................................................3-40
Figure 3-31. Transformer Property Sheet: Main Tab ...............................................................3-41
Figure 3-32. Transformer Property Sheet: Tap Control Tab ....................................................3-44
Figure 3-33. Transformer Property Sheet: Regulation Tab ......................................................3-45
Figure 3-34. Delta Autoregulator with AB Phasing ..................................................................3-47
Figure 3-35. Transformer Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab ......................................................3-48
Figure 3-36. Transformer Property Sheet: DRA Tab ...............................................................3-49
Figure 3-37. Series Capacitor/Reactor Property Sheet: Main Tab ..........................................3-50
Figure 3-38. Series Capacitor/Reactor Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab .................................3-52
Figure 3-39. Series Capacitor/Reactor Property Sheet: DRA Tab ...........................................3-53
Figure 3-40. Moving a Shunt Device ........................................................................................3-54
Figure 3-41. Static Load Property Sheet: Main Tab .................................................................3-56
Figure 3-42. Static Load Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab .......................................................3-58
Figure 3-43. Static Load Property Sheet: DRA Tab .................................................................3-59
Figure 3-44. Mwh Load Property Sheet ...................................................................................3-61
Figure 3-45. Source Property Sheet: Main Tab .......................................................................3-64
Figure 3-46. Source Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab ..............................................................3-66
Figure 3-47. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Main Tab .....................................................3-68
Figure 3-48. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Impedances Tab ..........................................3-70
Figure 3-49. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Start-Up Tab ................................................3-72
Confidential
xvii
List of Figures
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 3-50. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab ............................................3-73

Figure 3-51. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Main Tab ...............................................3-74
Figure 3-52. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Impedances Tab ...................................3-76
Figure 3-53. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Start-Up Tab .........................................3-79
Figure 3-54. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab ......................................3-80
Figure 3-55. Capacitor Property Sheet: Main Tab ...................................................................3-81
Figure 3-56. Fault Property Sheet ............................................................................................3-84
Figure 3-57. Open Workspace Dialog ......................................................................................3-85
Figure 3-58. Scale Loads Dialog: Magnitude Scaling ..............................................................3-87
Figure 3-59. Scale Loads Dialog: Reactive Power Scaling ......................................................3-88
Figure 3-60. Scale Machines Dialog ........................................................................................3-89
Figure 3-61. Scale MWh Loads Dialog ....................................................................................3-90
Figure 3-62. Automatic Load Scaling Dialog ............................................................................3-93
Figure 3-63. Warning Message ................................................................................................3-93
Figure 3-64. Options Dialog .....................................................................................................3-95
Figure 3-65. Load Scaling Results Dialog ................................................................................3-96
Figure 3-66. Continue Dialog ...................................................................................................3-97
Figure 3-67. Example of Incorrect Rephasing .........................................................................3-98
Figure 3-68. Unbalanced Load Changes for "Rotate Forward" Situation ................................3-99
Figure 3-69. Rephasing Dialog ..............................................................................................3-101
Figure 3-70. Load Snapshots Dialog .....................................................................................3-102
Figure 4-1.
Raw Data File Validation .......................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-2.
Network Validation .................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-3.
Analysis Options Property Sheet: General Tab .....................................................4-5
Figure 4-4.
Diagram Property Sheet: Color Tab ......................................................................4-7
Figure 4-5.
Diagram Result Display Options ............................................................................4-9
Figure 4-6.
Analysis Options: Reports Tab ............................................................................4-12
Figure 4-7.
TOPO Diagram Displaying New Configuration Results .......................................4-13
Figure 4-8.
CAPO Diagram Displaying Optimized Network Results ......................................4-14
Figure 4-9.
Analysis Options Property Sheet: Load Flow Tab ...............................................4-15
Figure 4-10. Detailed Convergence Monitor Progress Messages ...........................................4-16

Figure 4-11. Solution Paused Dialog .......................................................................................4-16
Figure 4-12. Graphical Convergence Monitor ..........................................................................4-18
Figure 4-13. Sample Load Flow Analysis Diagram ..................................................................4-19
Figure 4-14. Reactive Capability Curve for a Synchronous Machine ......................................4-22
Figure 4-15. Analysis Options Property Sheet: Short Circuit Tab ............................................4-26
Figure 4-16. Sample Short Circuit Analysis Diagram ...............................................................4-28
Figure 4-17. Thevenin Equivalent ............................................................................................4-30
Figure 4-18. Use of Thevenin Equivalent to Get Short Circuit Current ....................................4-31
Figure 4-19. Line-to-Line Fault Currents ..................................................................................4-32
Figure 4-20. Analysis Options Property Sheet: Motor Starting Tab .........................................4-33
Figure 4-21. Sample Motor Starting Analysis Diagram ............................................................4-34
xviii
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
List of Figures
Figure 4-22. Machine Property Sheet Showing Series Starting Autotransformer Option ........4-36
Figure 4-23. Analysis Options Property Sheet: CAPO Tab .....................................................4-39
Figure 4-24. Diagram and Progress Views After Optimal Capacitor Placement ......................4-43
Figure 4-25. Analysis Options Property Sheet: TOPO Tab .....................................................4-45
Figure 4-26. Diagram and Progress Views After TOPO Analysis ............................................4-47
Figure 5-1.
Voltage Profile .......................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2.
Report Units Dialog ...............................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-3.
Report Options Dialog ...........................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-4.
Report Preview Window ........................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-5.
Export Dialog .......................................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-6.
Open File Dialog ..................................................................................................5-11
Figure 6-1.
Example Corridor for Illustration of Line Property Calculations .............................6-3
Figure 6-2.
Initial Corridor View ...............................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-3.
Add New Circuit Dialog ..........................................................................................6-5
Figure 6-4.
Initial Circuit View ..................................................................................................6-6
Figure 6-5.
Circuit_1 Properties Sheet .....................................................................................6-7
Figure 6-6.
Circuit_2 Properties Sheet .....................................................................................6-8
Figure 6-7.
Conductor Bundle Diagram ...................................................................................6-9
Figure 6-8.
Select Conductor Type Dialog .............................................................................6-10
Figure 6-9.
Corridor View .......................................................................................................6-11
Figure 6-10. LineProp Menu Bar ..............................................................................................6-12

Figure 6-11. LineProp Toolbar .................................................................................................6-13
Figure 6-12. LineProp Options Dialog: User Tab .....................................................................6-14
Figure 6-13. LineProp Options Dialog: Circuit Tab ..................................................................6-16
Figure 6-14. LineProp Options Dialog: Corridor Tab ...............................................................6-17
Figure 6-15. Equivalent Circuit for Short Transmission Line ....................................................6-18
Figure 6-16. Pi-Form Transmission Line Equivalent Circuit .....................................................6-18
Figure 6-17. "Exact" Pi-Equivalent Circuits for 400-Mile Length of Example
Transmission Line at 60 and 65 Hz (Skin Effect Neglected) ...............................6-19
Figure 6-18. Difference Between 60 and 65 Hz Values of Rex, Lex, and Cex
as a Function of Line Length ...............................................................................6-20
Figure 6-19. Open Dialog .........................................................................................................6-21
Figure 6-20. Save As Dialog ....................................................................................................6-22
Figure 6-21. Print Preview .......................................................................................................6-23
Figure 6-22. Print Dialog ..........................................................................................................6-24
Figure 6-23. Selected Circuit View ...........................................................................................6-25
Figure 6-24. Current Circuit Properties Sheet ..........................................................................6-26
Figure 6-25. Copy Circuit Dialog ..............................................................................................6-27
Figure 6-26. Verify Circuit to Delete Message Box ..................................................................6-27
Figure 6-27. Verify to Delete All Circuits Message Box ...........................................................6-28
Figure 6-28. Validation of Circuit Properties ............................................................................6-29
Figure 6-29. Corridor Circuit Data ............................................................................................6-30
Confidential
xix
List of Figures
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 6-30. Sample Zero- and Positive-Sequence Impedances Report ................................6-32

Figure 6-31. Sample Zero- and Positive-Sequence Admittance Report ..................................6-33
Figure 6-32. Sample Self and Mutual Impedances Report ......................................................6-34
Figure 6-33. Sample Self and Mutual Admittances Report ......................................................6-35
Figure 6-34. Sample Average Mutual Impedance and Admittance Report ..............................6-36
Figure 6-35. Sample Corridor Impedance Report ....................................................................6-37
Figure 6-36. Sample Corridor Admittance Report ....................................................................6-38
Figure 6-37. Save Results Dialog ............................................................................................6-39
Figure 6-38. Update Construction Dictionary Dialog ................................................................6-40
Figure 7-1.
Branch with Two Protection Equipment Packs ......................................................7-2
Figure 7-2.
Protection Equipment Pack Property Sheet ..........................................................7-4
Figure 7-3.
Curve Plot View .....................................................................................................7-5
Figure 7-4.
Protection Equipment Pack Plot Options Tab .......................................................7-7
Figure 7-5.
Plot Options Tab ....................................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-6.
More Info Tab ......................................................................................................7-10
Figure 7-7.
Fuse Property Sheet ............................................................................................7-11
Figure 7-8.
Overcurrent Relay Property Sheet ......................................................................7-12
Figure 7-9.
Transformer Damage Curve Tab .........................................................................7-16
Figure 7-10. Conductor Damage Curve Tab ............................................................................7-20

Figure 7-11. Protection Equipment Pack Showing Two Recloser Curves ...............................7-22
Figure 7-12. Recloser Properties Sheet ...................................................................................7-23
Figure 7-13. Machine Starting Curve Property Sheet ..............................................................7-25
Figure 7-14. Coordination View ...............................................................................................7-28
Figure 7-15. Coordination View Menu .....................................................................................7-29
Figure 7-16. Print Parameters Dialog ......................................................................................7-31
Figure 7-17. Prompt to Print the List View ...............................................................................7-31
Figure 7-18. Main Switchboard ................................................................................................7-41
Figure 7-19. Add Fuse Form ....................................................................................................7-42
Figure 7-20. Add Relay Form ...................................................................................................7-43
Figure 7-21. Add Recloser Manufacturer Form .......................................................................7-44
Figure 7-22. Add Recloser Form ..............................................................................................7-44
Figure 7-23. View/Modify Fuse Form .......................................................................................7-45
Figure 7-24. View/Modify Relay Form ......................................................................................7-46
Figure 7-25. View/Modify Recloser Form .................................................................................7-47
Figure 7-26. Delete Fuse Records Form .................................................................................7-49
Figure 7-27. Delete Relay Records Form ................................................................................7-50
Figure 7-28. Delete Recloser Records Form ...........................................................................7-51
Figure 7-29. Verify Removal of Recloser Ratings Records .....................................................7-51
Figure 7-30. Delete Recloser Curve Form ...............................................................................7-52
Figure 8-1.
Harmonic Injection Symbol on a Shunt Item .........................................................8-3
Figure 8-2.
Harmonic Injection Symbol on a Transformer .......................................................8-4
Figure 8-3.
Harmonic Injection Symbol on a Node ..................................................................8-5
xx
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
List of Figures
Figure 8-4.
Harmonic Injection Property Sheet ........................................................................8-6
Figure 8-5.
Harmonic Filter Property Sheet .............................................................................8-8
Figure 8-6.
Analysis Options Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab ..............................................8-10
Figure 8-7.
Sample Harmonics Analysis Diagram .................................................................8-11
Figure 8-8.
Harmonic Plot Dialog ...........................................................................................8-12
Figure 8-9.
Harmonics Toolbar ..............................................................................................8-12
Figure 8-10. Harmonic Voltage Waveform ...............................................................................8-13

Figure 8-11. Harmonic Voltage Waveform (extra detail) ..........................................................8-14
Figure 8-12. Harmonics Spectrum ...........................................................................................8-15
Figure 8-13. Impedance versus Frequency .............................................................................8-16
Figure 8-14. Nodal Impedance Plot .........................................................................................8-17
Figure 9-1.
Illustration of Protection Zones ..............................................................................9-3
Figure 9-2.
Default Items Tree View .....................................................................................9-8
Figure 9-3.
Default Items Expanded Tree View ....................................................................9-9
Figure 9-4.
Default Line Properties Sheet ..............................................................................9-10
Figure 9-5.
Default Line Properties Sheet - Modifying the Construction Type .......................9-11
Figure 9-6.
Default Line Properties Sheet DRA Tab, from the Construction Dictionary .....9-12
Figure 9-7.
Default Line Properties Sheet DRA Tab, New Values

for the Reliability Parameters ..............................................................................9-13
Figure 9-8.
Line Property Sheet: Main Tab ............................................................................9-14
Figure 9-9.
Line Property Sheet: DRA Tab, New Values for Reliability Parameters ..............9-15
Figure 9-10. Selecting a Construction Type .............................................................................9-18

Figure 9-11. DRA Tab Indicating Parameters Obtained from Dictionary .................................9-19
Figure 9-12. Static Load Property Sheet: DRA Tab .................................................................9-21
Figure 9-13. DRA Analysis Options Property Sheet ................................................................9-22
Figure 9-14. DRA Result Options ............................................................................................9-24
Figure 9-15. Example of a Simple Distribution System ............................................................9-27
Figure 9-16. Fault at Line9 .......................................................................................................9-27
Figure 9-17. Fault at Line3 .......................................................................................................9-28
Figure 9-18. Expansion of the Circuit Mainline ........................................................................9-29
Figure 9-19. DRA Results Shown with Text Labels and Color-Coding ....................................9-30
Figure 9-20. Expansion of the Circuit Mainline with Protection Added ....................................9-31
Figure 9-21. DRA Results with New Protection Device Added ................................................9-32
Figure 9-22. DRA Results with Specified Customers Served ..................................................9-33
Figure A-1.
Transformer Conversion During the Read Operation ........................................... A-9
Figure A-2.
Modeling of Three-Winding Transformer ............................................................ A-11
Figure A-3.
Induction Machine Model .................................................................................... A-19
Figure A-4.
ISO and US Transformer Types ......................................................................... A-32
Figure A-5.
Power Flow ......................................................................................................... A-33
Figure B-1.
Node Name Orientation Key ................................................................................. B-3
Figure B-2.
PSSUT Transformer Bank Connections ............................................................... B-9
Figure D-1.
Nodes ................................................................................................................... D-1
Confidential
xxi
List of Figures
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure D-2.
Sequence Representation of a Three-Phase Source ........................................... D-3
Figure D-3.
Three-Phase Representation of Source ............................................................... D-4
Figure D-4.
Single-Phase and Three-Phase Loads ................................................................. D-6
Figure D-5.
Shunt Capacitors .................................................................................................. D-7
Figure D-6.
Phase Representation of Synchronous Machine ............................................... D-11
Figure D-7.
Sequence Representation of a Synchronous Machine ...................................... D-12
Figure D-8.
Sequence Representation of Induction Machine ................................................ D-16
Figure D-9.
Single-Phase and Three-Phase Lines ................................................................ D-18
Figure D-10. Three-Phase Switches ....................................................................................... D-19

Figure D-11. Wye-Wye Transformer with ABC Phasing .......................................................... D-26
Figure D-12. Delta-Delta Transformer with ABC Phasing ....................................................... D-27
Figure D-13. Delta-Delta Transformer with A Phasing ............................................................ D-27
Figure D-14. Wye-Delta Transformer with ABC Phasing ........................................................ D-28
Figure D-15. Wye-Delta Transformer with A Phasing ............................................................. D-28
Figure D-16. Wye-Delta +30 Transformer with ABC Phasing ................................................ D-29
Figure D-17. Delta-Wye Transformer with ABC Phasing ........................................................ D-29
Figure D-18. Wye Autotransformer with ABC Phasing ............................................................ D-30
Figure D-19. Delta Autoregulator with ABC Phasing ............................................................... D-31
Figure D-20. Delta Autoregulator with AB Phasing ................................................................. D-32
Figure D-21. Center-Tapped Delta with A Phasing ................................................................. D-35
Figure D-22. "A Phase" Center-Tapped Delta and "BC Phase" Delta-Delta
in Parallel to make a Three-Phase Bank ............................................................ D-35
Figure D-23. Center-Tapped Wye with A Phasing .................................................................. D-36
Figure D-24. Center-Tapped Delta -30 with A Phasing .......................................................... D-36
Figure D-25. Z-Wye -30 Transformer with Voltage on the TO Side 30 Behind FROM Side . D-37
Figure D-26. Three-Phase Series Capacitors/Inductors .......................................................... D-52
Figure D-27. Line-to-Line Faults .............................................................................................. D-53
Figure D-28. Line-to-Ground Faults ......................................................................................... D-54
Figure D-29. Line-to-Line-to-Ground Faults ............................................................................ D-55
Figure E-1.
xxii
Induction Machine Equivalent Circuit ................................................................... E-1
Confidential
List of Tables
Table 2-1.
Iteration Order of Nodes .......................................................................................2-16
Table 2-2.
Iteration Order of Branches ..................................................................................2-17
Table 3-1.
Device Rephasing Starting from ABC

for All Devices but Wye-Delta and Delta-Wye Transformers................................3-99
Table 3-2.
Changes to Delta-Wye Transformers .................................................................3-100
Table 3-3.
Changes to Wye-Delta Transformers .................................................................3-100
Table 7-1.
Transformer Categories
Minimum Nameplate kVA .....................................................................................7-14
Table 7-2.
Transformer Damage Curve Points......................................................................7-15
Table 7-3.
ANSI Factors ........................................................................................................7-15
Table 7-4.
Recommended Conductor Temperatures ............................................................7-18
Table 7-5.
Fuse Table............................................................................................................7-32
Table 7-6.
Fuse Catalog Table ..............................................................................................7-33
Table 7-7.
Fuse Curve Table .................................................................................................7-34
Table 7-8.
Relay Table ..........................................................................................................7-35
Table 7-9.
Relay Catalog Table .............................................................................................7-36
Table 7-10.
Relay Curve..........................................................................................................7-37
Table 7-11.
RecloserMfrSpecs ................................................................................................7-38
Table 7-12.
RecloserRatings Table .........................................................................................7-39
Table 7-13.
RecloserTCCCurve Table ....................................................................................7-40
Table 9-1.
Data Item Requirements for DRA...........................................................................9-7
Table 9-2.
Sample Reliability Data ..........................................................................................9-7
Table 9-3.
Construction Type Mapping..................................................................................9-17
Table A-1.
PSS/ADEPT Transformer Types ........................................................................... A-2
Table A-2.
Conversion of Transformers from PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT .......... A-6
Table A-3.
PSS/U Transformer/Phasing That Will Be Changed After PSS/ADEPT

Read Operation on Raw Data File......................................................................... A-9
Table A-4.
Synchronous Machine Short Circuit Calculation Results .................................... A-16
Table A-5.
............................................................................................................................. A-20
Table A-6.
............................................................................................................................. A-21
Table A-7.
............................................................................................................................. A-22
Table A-8.
............................................................................................................................. A-24
Table A-9.
............................................................................................................................. A-25
Table A-10. PSS/U Dictionary................................................................................................. A-29

Table B-1.
System Parameters ............................................................................................... B-2
Table B-2.
Node Data ............................................................................................................. B-3
Table B-3.
Source Data........................................................................................................... B-3
Confidential
Shaw Shaw Power Technologies, Inc.
xxiii
List of Figures
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table B-4.
Line or Cable Data................................................................................................. B-4
Table B-5.
Switch Data ........................................................................................................... B-5
Table B-6.
Tie Switch Data ..................................................................................................... B-5
Table B-7.
Series Capacitor or Series Reactor Data .............................................................. B-6
Table B-8.
Transformer Data .................................................................................................. B-7
Table B-9.
Transformer Tap Changing Data Section.............................................................. B-7
Table B-10. PSS/U Transformer Types .................................................................................... B-8

Table B-11. Load Categories .................................................................................................. B-10
Table B-12. kW, kvar Load - Unbalanced (types 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13) ...................................... B-11
Table B-13. kW, kvar Load - Balanced (types 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 33) .................................... B-12
Table B-14. Asynchronous Machine Load (types 51-90, 151-190)......................................... B-12
Table B-15. Synchronous Machine Load (types 91-99, 191-199)........................................... B-13
Table B-16. MWh Load Data - Unbalanced (types 5, 6, 15, 16) ............................................. B-13
Table B-17. MWh Load Data - Balanced (types 25, 26, 35, 36) ............................................. B-14
Table B-18. Fixed Capacitors or Switched Capacitors Data ................................................... B-15
Table B-19. Basic Data Record............................................................................................... B-16
Table B-20. Two-Phase Data Record ..................................................................................... B-17
Table B-21. One-Phase Data Records ................................................................................... B-17
Table B-22. Rating Data Record ............................................................................................. B-17
Table B-23. Reliability Data Record ........................................................................................ B-18
Table E-1.
Impedance Values for NEMA Machines................................................................ E-2
Table F-1.
Network Properties: System .................................................................................. F-1
Table F-2.
Network Properties: Reliability............................................................................... F-2
Table F-3.
Node Properties..................................................................................................... F-3
Table F-4.
Lines/Cables Properties ........................................................................................ F-4
Table F-5.
Transformer Properties: General........................................................................... F-5
Table F-6.
Transformer Properties: Tap Control..................................................................... F-7
Table F-7.
Transformer Properties: Regulation ...................................................................... F-8
Table F-8.
Load Properties: Rectangular Representation ...................................................... F-9
Table F-9.
Load Properties: Polar Representation ............................................................... F-10
Table F-10.
MWh Load Properties.......................................................................................... F-11
Table F-11.
Source Properties................................................................................................ F-13
Table F-12.
Induction Machines: General............................................................................... F-14
Table F-13.
Induction Machines: Impedances ........................................................................ F-15
Table F-14.
Induction Machines: Start-Up .............................................................................. F-15
Table F-15.
Synchronous Machines: General ........................................................................ F-16
Table F-16.
Synchronous Machines: Impedances.................................................................. F-18
Table F-17.
Synchronous Machines: Start-Up........................................................................ F-19
Table F-18.
Shunt Capacitor Properties ................................................................................. F-20
Table F-19.
Switch Properties................................................................................................. F-22
Table F-20.
Series Capacitors/Reactors Properties ............................................................... F-23
Table F-21.
Fault Properties ................................................................................................... F-24
xxiv
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
List of Figures
Table F-22.
Protection Equipment Properties......................................................................... F-25
Table F-23.
Fuses: General .................................................................................................... F-26
Table F-24.
Fuses: Plot Options ............................................................................................. F-26
Table F-25.
Over Current Relays: General ............................................................................. F-27
Table F-26.
Over Current Relays: Plot Options ...................................................................... F-28
Table F-27.
Transformer Damage Curves: General ............................................................... F-29
Table F-28.
Transformer Damage Curve: Plot Options .......................................................... F-30
Table F-29.
Conductor/Cable Damage Curve: General.......................................................... F-31
Table F-30.
Conductor/Cable Damage Curve: Plot Options................................................... F-32
Table F-31.
Reclosers: General.............................................................................................. F-33
Table F-32.
Reclosers: Plot Options ....................................................................................... F-33
Table F-33.
Machines: General .............................................................................................. F-34
Table G-1.
Branch Results ......................................................................................................G-1
Table G-2.
Capacitor Placement Optimization Results ...........................................................G-4
Table G-3.
Capacitor Placement Optimization Summary........................................................G-4
Table G-4.
Capacitor Placement Optimization Switching Schedule ........................................G-5
Table G-5.
Capacitor Properties..............................................................................................G-5
Table G-6.
Device Groups.......................................................................................................G-6
Table G-7.
Device Limits .........................................................................................................G-6
Table G-8.
Fault All Current.....................................................................................................G-7
Table G-9.
Induction Machine Properties ................................................................................G-8
Table G-10. Line/Cable Properties ............................................................................................G-9

Table G-11. Load Flow Summary............................................................................................ G-10
Table G-12. Load Properties ................................................................................................... G-11
Table G-13. Load Snapshots................................................................................................... G-12
Table G-14. Network Economics............................................................................................. G-12
Table G-15. Node Properties................................................................................................... G-13
Table G-16. Node Results .......................................................................................................G-13
Table G-17. Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties ................................................................... G-15
Table G-18. Shunt Status ........................................................................................................G-16
Table G-19. Source Properties................................................................................................ G-18
Table G-20. Standard Fault Properties.................................................................................... G-19
Table G-21. Static Load Summary ..........................................................................................G-19
Table G-22. MWh Load Summary........................................................................................... G-20
Table G-23. Switch Properties................................................................................................. G-21
Table G-24. Synchronous Machine Properties........................................................................ G-22
Table G-25. System Totals...................................................................................................... G-23
Table G-26. Tie Open Point Optimization Results................................................................... G-24
Table G-27. Titles and Comments........................................................................................... G-25
Table G-28. Transformer Properties........................................................................................ G-25
Table G-29. Voltage Levels ..................................................................................................... G-28
Table G-30. Distribution Reliability Analysis Results............................................................... G-28
Confidential
xxv
xxvi
Confidential
Chapter 1
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
1.1 About the PSS/ADEPT Application
The Power System Simulator/Advanced Distribution Engineering Productivity Tool (PSS/ADEPT)
software was developed for engineers and technical personnel who design and/or analyze electrical distribution systems. PSS/ADEPT enables you to graphically create, edit, and analyze power
system models and diagrams.
PSS/ADEPT is available in stand-alone and network configurations for Microsoft Windows 2000
and Windows XP. Compatibility with PSS/U (Power System Simulator for Utilization) is provided
through raw data files and an associated Construction Dictionary. PSS/ADEPT is the next generation of the PSS/U product line.
1.1.1 Application Capabilities

PSS/ADEPT offers a full spectrum of design and analysis capabilities. Using PSS/ADEPT, you can:
Create and modify power network models graphically.
Perform engineering analyses using multiple sources and unlimited nodes.
Display the results of engineering analyses on the network diagram.
Obtain output reports that display the results of a previously solved engineering
analysis.
Define and update single and multiple system component data via property sheets.
1.1.2 Optional Features

Several optional features are not included in the base PSS/ADEPT application package, but may
be purchased at any point after installation. Optional features include:
Tie Open Point Optimization: Finds the minimum loss configuration for a three-phase
radial system. For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.8.
Optimal Capacitor Placement: Places fixed and switched three-phase capacitor

banks of specified size to minimize system losses. For more information, refer to
Chapter 4, Section 4.7.
Line Properties Calculator: Calculates transmission line constants. For more information, refer to Chapter 6.
Protection and Coordination: Performs a coordination study on a given network. For

more information, refer to Chapter 7.
Confidential
1-1
Getting Help
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonics: Performs harmonic analysis on a given network. For more information,

refer to Chapter 8.
Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA): Performs reliability analysis. For more information, refer to Chapter 9.
1.2 Getting Help

Help for the PSS/ADEPT application is available in several forms:
Printed manual or CD
Online context-sensitive help
PTI Customer Support
1.2.1 Using This Documentation

This users manual is structured to help you learn to build an electrical distribution network, beginning with the basics (how to add a node/shunt/branch), and progressing to the analysis features of
PSS/ADEPT. A network building exercise will give you hands-on practice using the PSS/ADEPT
software.
For PSS/ADEPT, this documentation is also available on CD in Adobe Acrobat Reader format
(*.pdf files). Use the online manuals for quick intermanual references using the hypertext link feature and for printing reference material.
To view the CD documentation, place the CD in the CD-ROM drive. The readme.txt file has information on installing the Adobe Acrobat reader and accessing the CD documentation.
Conventions used in this documentation (and in the CD version) include:
bold italic text denotes a menu option the user must select, or a button the user must click.
Examples:
Choose File>Open from the Main Menu.
Click the Open button on the File Toolbar.
Italic text is used to emphasize a word or phrase.
Indicates additional information of interest.
"Click" is a user instruction to click the left mouse button.
"Double-click" is a user instruction to click twice the left mouse button.
"Right-click" is a user instruction to click the right mouse button.
Abbreviations for engineering units used throughout this user manual include:
pu: per unit
pf: power factor, leading/lagging
S: apparent power (kVA)
P: real power (kW)
Q: reactive power (kvar)
1-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Getting Help
1.2.2 Using the Online Help

PSS/ADEPT provides context-sensitive online help while you are working in the application.
Related topics are "hot-linked" for quick access.
To access PSS/ADEPT Help:
1. Choose Help>Help Topics from the Main Menu. The Help Topics window displays.
2. To locate the help topic you want, click the Contents tab to display a hierarchical list of
topic headings from which you may select or click the Index tab to look up topics alphabetically or click the Find tab to perform a word search.
3. Follow the online instructions to navigate to and display the help topic you want.
4. To return to the PSS/ADEPT application and close the Help Topics window, press the
Esc key.
To access Help for a dialog or property sheet in which you are working, press the F1 key or click
the Help button (if available). The appropriate help topic will display.
To view PSS/ADEPT version information (including a list of required DLLs), choose
Help>About PSS/ADEPT from the Main Menu or click the Help
button on the standard
Windows Toolbar.
1.2.3 Contacting PTI for Support

The PSS/ADEPT documentation will assist you with the installation and use of the application. If
after consulting the documentation and online help you need more information, you may contact PTI
by any of the following methods:
Send e-mail for technical support to: adept.support@shawgrp.com.
Fax to: (518) 346-2777.
For telephone support between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. Eastern Time
Monday through Friday, call (518) 395-5075.
PTI Web Site: http://www.pti-us.com.
Confidential
1-3
Getting Help
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1.2.4 Submitting Bug Reports and Feature Requests

Included in PSS/ADEPT is a feedback tool that you may use to report bugs, request an enhancement, or request technical support assistance. This feedback tool is called SoloBug. You can
directly access SoloBug from the Main Menu under Help>Report a problem Once you have
selected this option the SoloBug report a bug or feature request window displays (Figure 1-1).
Figure 1-1. Report a Bug or Feature Request Window

At this point, you will be asked to enter personal information such as your name, your company
name, your e-mail address and your phone and fax numbers. Next, you will be asked for your computer configuration such as the operating system you have and other information regarding your
hardware setup. After you have specified all of the information above to the best of your knowledge,
you are now ready to enter a bug or feature request. In the case of a bug report, you may enter a
description of the problem and how to reproduce it. If you desire, you may also attach a file containing an example of the problem that our technical support services can use to help diagnose
whether the problem is in fact a bug. If you are submitting a feature request, use the description
area to describe what enhancement you would like us to consider implementing in future releases.
In addition, make sure that you specify a summary of the problem or feature, the product name that
you are using, the type of problem, the severity of the problem, and the version number of the application that you are currently using. The version number of the application may be found in the About
box by selecting Help>About PSS/ADEPT.
When you have finished entering the information, save the bug/feature report to a SoloBug file
(*.sbg). The next step is to e-mail this.sbg file to the following address:
adept.support@shawgrp.com. Once we receive the e-mail message, you will be automatically
logged into our technical support database. This is the fastest and most convenient way for you to
submit problems and feature requests into our technical support queue.
For further information regarding SoloBug, including more documentation on how you can use
SoloBug to report bugs and request features, look for the SoloBug help file under your PSS/ADEPT
installation under the short cut labeled SoloBug Help. You may also access the SoloBug executable
from outside the application by using the short cut labeled SoloBug.
1-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Installing and Using PSS/ADEPT
1.3 Installing and Using PSS/ADEPT

You can install PSS/ADEPT on your stand-alone PC for single-user access, or on a network drive
for multiuser access. For information on installing PSS/ADEPT on your PC or on the network, and
on hardware and software requirements, refer to the Installation Guide.
Yo u m u s t h a v e a n u n d e r s ta n d i n g o f b a s i c M S W i n d o w s c o n c e p ts ( f o r e x a m p l e ,
windows/dialogs/menus/toolbars/scroll bars/etc., navigating with the mouse, open/save/close files,
select files/text, cut/copy/paste, etc.) to use the PSS/ADEPT application successfully.
If you are not familiar with MS Windows, check locally (schools, libraries, computer stores, etc.) to
find an introductory class that covers: starting and exiting MS Windows; the screen, common icons,
and scroll bars; opening, saving, and closing files; switching between windows; using the keyboard;
using the mouse to select and drag objects; etc. Alternatively, check your local library or bookstore
for books on MS Windows.
New users should begin by reading Chapter 2, Creating a Network Model, and Chapter 3, Editing
a Network Model, and reviewing the sample files provided with your PSS/ADEPT installation. The
sample files are located in the ...\Example subdirectory. The default path for the sample files is:
\Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Example.
Converting/updating users should refer to AppendixA, Modeling and File Differences Between
PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT for information on importing existing PSS/U networks into PSS/ADEPT,
and exporting PSS/ADEPT networks to PSS/U.
Starting PSS/ADEPT
To start the PSS/ADEPT application, select Start>Programs>PSS-ADEPT 5.0>PSS-ADEPT. A
blank diagram displays.
If you want to display an existing network diagram, choose File>Open from the Main Menu
or, click the Open
button on the File Toolbar, and select the filename.
Exiting PSS/ADEPT
To exit the PSS/ADEPT application, choose File>Exit from the Main Menu. If you have not yet
saved your system data, the program will prompt you to save before exiting.
Confidential
1-5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1.4 The PSS/ADEPT Application Window

The PSS/ADEPT application window contains several main elements:
Views containing application processing information, graphical and tree representations of your network.
A Status Bar that displays program status information while PSS/ADEPT is running.
A Main Menu that provides access to all PSS/ADEPT functions.
Toolbars that provide quick access to PSS/ADEPT functions.
1.4.1 Views
The PSS/ADEPT application window contains four views (Figure 1-2):
Diagram View (always displays)
Equipment List View (you may hide the view)
Progress View (you may hide the view)
Report Preview (displays when you request a report of analysis results)

Equipment List View
Diagram View
Progress View
Figure 1-2. PSS/ADEPT Application Window Views

Each view displays certain information about the data contents and/or operation of the PSS/ADEPT
application. All views except the Report Preview have a pop-up menu that provides quick access
to additional features.
1-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The Diagram View is the main view in the PSS/ADEPT application window. It displays whenever
you are using PSS/ADEPT (for example, whenever you open an existing diagram or create a new
one). The Report Preview displays only when you have requested a report. You can toggle on and
off (show or hide) the display of the Equipment List and Progress Views.
To set the display of the Equipment List and/or Progress Views:
1. Choose View from the Main Menu. The drop-down View Menu displays (Figure 1-3).
Figure 1-3. View Drop-Down Menu

2. Click in the box that precedes Equipment List and/or Progress View. A check mark in
front of the option indicates that the view will display in the application window. An
empty box indicates that the view will not show in the application window.
In the Equipment List or Progress View, you may also right-click and then click the Hide option
to hide the view.
The Diagram View
The Diagram View displays a graphical representation of the network power system. You create and
modify a network model in the Diagram View by selecting the network symbols from the item toolbar
and placing them on the diagram. Additionally, you can view analysis results in the Diagram View.
The Diagram View pop-up menu (Figure 1-4) provides access to additional editing functions available only in the Diagram View. Right-click anywhere in the diagram to view this menu.
"Grayed" options are not available for use, usually because an item has not been selected
before the pop-up menu displays. Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.
Confidential
1-7
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 1-4. Diagram View Pop-Up Menu

Cut: Cut current selection (network and diagram items) to an internal clipboard used only
by PSS/ADEPT.
Copy: Copy current selection (network and diagram items) to an internal clipboard used
only by PSS/ADEPT.
Copy to Clipboard: Copies entire image of the current view to the Windows clipboard. The
copied image can then be pasted into other Windows applications, Word for example.
Paste: Paste the contents of the clipboard.
Delete: Delete a selected device. A device may be deleted only when all devices connected to it have been removed. For example, to delete a node, you must delete all
branches and shunt items connected to it first.
Undo: Undo the previous editing action (item creation, deletion, cut/paste, relink, relocation, zoom/pan). The number of levels of undo can be specified in the Program Settings dialog.
Select All: Select all items in the diagram.
1-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Toggle: Specify to toggle hidden items, show items, or hide items.
In-service: Indicate item is in-service or out-of-service.
Autoposition: Indicate autoposition option is on or off for the selected item.
Add Items to:
Group: Add selected item to a group.
Layer: Add selected item to a layer.
Load Category: Add selected item to a load category.
Motor Starting: Add selected item to motor starting analysis.
CAPO: Add selected item to capacitor optimization analysis.
Z order:
Send to Front: Renders selected diagram component on "top" of all other components within its layer.
Send to Back: Renders selected diagram component on the "bottom" of all other
components within its layer.
Center: Centers the selected items in the diagram.
Re-phase: Selects re-phasing analysis on the selected branch.

Properties...: Display the property sheet for the selected device.
Load Flow: Perform load flow analysis.
Fault: Perform fault analysis.
Motor Starting: Perform motor starting analysis.
Diagram Properties...: Display Diagram Properties sheet.
Lock Diagram: Disables editing operations such as item creation, relocation, or deletion.
Print...: Print a hard copy of the diagram.
The Equipment List View
Within the Equipment List View (Figure 1-5), the Network tab provides a hierarchical display of each
major type of network item nodes, branches, and shunts. Additionally, there are different types of
branches and shunt devices that may be specified in the network diagram:
Branches may contain lines/cables, switches, transformers, and series capacitors.

Branches may also contain protection equipment packs, which define protective
devices.
Shunt devices may contain capacitors, machines, static loads, MWh loads, harmonics
injections, harmonic filters, and standard faults.
Defaults contain the default properties for node, branch and shunt devices. Default
properties are used when a new device is placed on the diagram.
Confidential
1-9
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 1-5. Equipment List View

Each network item in the Equipment List View has its own icon that is the same as the symbol used
to represent the item in the Diagram View. Notice the + and symbols in front of each network item
type. Click the + symbol to expand the tree display; and click the symbol to collapse the tree display. For example:
Click the + symbol in front of Nodes to display a list of each individual

horizontal/vertical/point node in the diagram. Click the to collapse the view to its original state.
Click the + symbol in front of Sources to display a list of individual sources. Click the
symbol in front of Sources to collapse the tree.
If an individual network item symbol is "grayed" in the tree hierarchy, the item is not in service.
If there is no symbol in front of the item, it is not drawn on the diagram. This situation commonly arises when there are nodes in a PSS/U raw data file with x- and y-coordinates at (0,0).
The item will display in the Equipment List View as [ ], indicating an undrawn device. This item can
be drawn by right-clicking on the item and selecting Draw Item(s) from the pop-up menu.
1-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The Equipment List pop-up menu provides access to additional features, depending on your current
level and position in the Equipment List View. For example:
1. Right-click on Network to position at the network level and display the Equipment List
Views pop-up menu (Figure 1-6). Here you can dock or hide the Equipment List View,
and access the Network Property sheet. ("Grayed" menu options are not available at
the Network level.)
Figure 1-6. Item Type Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu
Confidential
1-11
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. Right-click on Static Loads to position at the type level and display the Equipment List
Views pop-up menu (Figure 1-7). Here you can dock or hide the Equipment List View,
sort the individual static load items, and toggle the display of the item node
connections: FROM/TO for branches and node location for shunts, or device names.
("Grayed" menu options are not available at this level.) For example:
Figure 1-7. Expanded Item Type Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu
1-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Expand the static load type level and right-click on first individual network item to display the Equipment List Views pop-up menu (Figure 1-8). Here you can dock or hide
the Equipment List View, sort the individual items, toggle the display of the item node
connections: FROM/TO for branches and node location for shunts, or device names,
delete the item, zoom to the item on the diagram, and adjust the properties for the item.
For example:
Figure 1-8. Individual Item Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu
Docking, hiding, sorting, adjusting the PSS/ADEPT display, etc., are all described further in Chapter
2, Section 2.1.
A check mark in front of an option in the Equipment List View pop-up menu indicates that the option
is active.
Although the Cut, Copy, and Paste operations affect both the Equipment List View and the
Diagram View, these operations may only be performed from the Diagram View. Hence, these
operations are not available in the Equipment List View pop-up menu.
The Results tab is used to set what results, if any, should be displayed on the diagram. For more
information, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3.3.
Confidential
1-13
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The Progress View

The Progress View (Figure 1-9) displays messages during program activities. These messages
may be error or warning messages about a selected activity, or informational messages about the
progress of certain analysis activities. The Progress View also displays detailed convergence monitors that show the progress of load flow, short circuit, and motor starting solutions.
Figure 1-9. Progress View

The Progress View pop-up menu (Figure 1-10) provides access to additional features such as
docking and hiding the Progress View; floating the Progress View in a miniwindow on the main Diagram View; and printing, copying, and clearing the contents of the Progress View. Right-click to
display the Progress View pop-up menu.
Figure 1-10. Progress View Pop-Up Menu

Allow Docking: Allows view to be anchored at the edge of any application window.
Hide: Hides the window.
Copy: Copies selection to the Windows clipboard.
Clear: Clears the view.
Print...: Prints the selection to the printer.
Float In Main Window: Floats the Progress window in the main application window.
1-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
These features are covered further in Chapter 2, Section 2.1.
The Report Preview

The Report Preview window (Figure 1-11) displays an output report in print preview format. From this
window, you may generate printed output by selecting File>Print, or by clicking the Printer
button.
First Page
Previous Page
Next Page
Last Page
Print
Zoom Level
Export
Figure 1-11. Report Preview Window

The Report Preview window has its own menu. Reports may be viewed on the screen, printed to a
printer, or exported to a variety of formats. For more information on all of these features, refer to
Chapter 5, Section 5.1.
Confidential
1-15
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1.4.2 The Status Bar

The Status Bar displays explanatory text while you are using PSS/ADEPT. For example, when you
are pointing to a toolbar button or menu option, the button or option name displays in the Status Bar.
The Status Bar also identifies the last engineering analysis that was performed. For example, if you
just performed a load flow analysis, the Status Bar will display "Load Flow". If you select another
analysis, the Status Bar will be updated accordingly.
The Status Bar displays the phase at which the results are displayed and the units on the diagram.
Refer to Figure 1-12 to view a sample Status Bar after a load flow analysis has been performed.
Notice that the display is set to report results on the diagram at Phase A. Voltage units are pu; power
units are kW, kvar.
Figure 1-12. Application View After a Load Flow Analysis
1-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1.4.3 The Main Menu

PSS/ADEPT uses menus to provide access to additional application functions. The Diagram,
Equipment List, and Progress Views all share the same Main Menu, but have individual drop-down
menus. The Report Preview window has its own menu bar.
To see an illustration of individual menu bars, click on a report window, then click on the diagram
window (notice that the Main Menu is different when the active window has changed). Pop-up
menus are further described in this manual under the views for which they apply.
The Main Menu also showing available toolbars is shown in Figure 1-13.
Main Menu
File Toolbar
Harmonics Toolbar
Analysis Toolbar
Diagram Toolbar
Results Toolbar
Zoom Toolbar
Reports Toolbar
Figure 1-13. Main Menu and Available Toolbars

To access a drop-down menu, click any Main Menu option.
File Menu
The File Menu provides options for creating new files, opening existing files, and saving and closing
files. Recently opened workspaces are also listed for quick access. Use the menu to print the diagram, preview the diagram before you print it, and adjust the printer settings. The File Menu also
contains the Workspace Manager and Program Settings options that enable you to set your workspace, specify pathnames for file locations, and other program preferences.
Edit Menu
The Edit Menu provides options for editing the network diagrams (e.g., cut/copy/paste/delete),
editing the network using a spreadsheet format, and selecting items in the diagram (e.g., All, Tree,
Nodes, Groups).
View Menu
The View Menu provides options that allow you to display or hide the Equipment List and Progress
Views, the Status Bar, and any of the available toolbars (Main Menu, File, Item, Analysis, and View).
The View Menu is also used for toolbar customization and zooming the diagram.
Diagram Menu
The Diagram Menu provides options for importing and exporting .bmp, .jpg, .gif, and .png type files.
This menu also provides mechanisms for showing and hiding items, defining layers, and adjusting
coordinates. Additionally, options for the diagram such as font size and color coding are provided
on this menu.
Network Menu
The Network Menu provides options that allow you to modify network properties such as system
base kVA, the default node base voltage, and reliability information. The Network Menu provides
Confidential
1-17
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
functions for defining device groups, load categories, and load snapshots. Load scaling, machine
scaling, economic parameters, and network tracing preferences are also defined here.
Analysis Menu
The Analysis Menu options allow you to perform analysis functions and set solution options.
Report Menu
The Report Menu options allow you to select from several available reports. Some reports cannot
be selected unless a solution was previously performed. For more information about the Report
Menu, refer to Chapter 5, Section 5.1.
Tools Menu
The Tools Menu allows you to access the Line Constants module.
Window Menu
The Window Menu options allow you to control the placement of windows in the application. New
instances of diagram windows may be created and multiple windows may be cascaded or tiled.
Windows that have been previously iconized (minimized) may be arranged by choosing Arrange
Icons.
Help Menu
The Help Menu options provide access to the online help and general information about the application, including the names and versions of static and dynamic link libraries (LIBS, and DLLs) used
by the application.
1.4.4 Toolbars
The PSS/ADEPT application has seven toolbars:
File
Diagram
Analysis
Zoom
Results
Reports
Harmonics (if licensed for this option)
Each toolbar contains buttons that provide quick access to PSS/ADEPT functions. As you move the
pointer over a button on the toolbar, a "tooltip" text box will appear that describes the function of the
button (Figure 1-14). The Status Bar also displays explanatory text about the toolbar button.
PSS/ADEPTs default setting displays all of the toolbars.
1-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Tooltip
Figure 1-14. Network Diagram with Tooltips

Additionally, you can move a toolbar to another location on the screen, create a new toolbar, hide
one or all of the toolbars, and copy a button from one toolbar to another, reset the buttons on a standard Shaw PTI toolbar, and delete a toolbar.
Confidential
1-19
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To select the toolbars you want to show on your screen:

1. Choose Tools>Customize from the Main Menu. The Customize dialog displays
(Figure 1-15).
Figure 1-15. Customize Dialog: Toolbars Tab

2. Click the Toolbars tab.
3. Click in the box that precedes the Main Menu, File, Diagram, Analysis, Zoom, Results,
and/or Reports toolbar options. A check mark in front of the toolbar indicates that it will
display in the application window; an empty box indicates that the toolbar will not
display.
4. Adjust the display of your toolbars by doing any one or all of the following:
To turn off the tooltips display: Click the Show Tooltips box (remove the check
mark).
To display borders around the toolbar buttons: Click the Cool Look box (remove
the check mark).
To increase the size of the buttons on the toolbar: Click the Large Buttons box (a
check mark will be placed).
5. Click the OK button to accept the changes.
To move a toolbar to another part of the screen:
1. Left-click on the || (at the left side of the toolbar), and hold down the mouse button.
2. Drag the toolbar to its new location and release the mouse button.
1-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To create a toolbar:
1. Choose Tools>Customize from the Main Menu. The Customize dialog displays.
3. Click the New button. The New Toolbar box displays.
4. Type the name of your toolbar in the Toolbar name field, and click the OK button. Your
toolbar displays in the Toolbar tab.
5. Click the Commands tab.
6. In the Categories column, click on a toolbar category. The buttons associated with the
toolbar display in the Buttons column.
7. Left-click on a button in the Button column and hold down the mouse button.
8. Drag the button out of the column to the new toolbar and release the mouse. The
system adds the button to your new toolbar.
9. Repeat Step 8 to add icons to your toolbar.
10. Click the OK button to save the new toolbar.
To hide a toolbar, do one of the following:
Choose Tools>Customize from the Main Menu. The Customize dialog displays. Click
the Toolbars tab. Click in the box that precedes the name of the toolbar you want to
hide until the box is empty. An unchecked box indicates that the toolbar will not show
in the application window.
Right-click anywhere in the toolbar area. A pop-up menu appears, select each toolbar
to show or hide. No checkmark before the name of the toolbar indicates that the toolbar
will not show in the application window.
To copy a button from one toolbar to another toolbar:

2. Click the Commands tab.
3. Click on a toolbar category. The buttons associated with the toolbar display at the right
of the box.
4. Click a button in the box and hold down the mouse button.
5. Drag the button out of the box to the toolbar in which you want to place it, and release
the mouse button. The system adds the button to the toolbar.
You cannot add to or rearrange the options on the Main Menu.
Confidential
1-21
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To reset any of the PTI toolbars (File, Diagram, Analysis, Zoom) to their original buttons:
3. Make sure theres a check mark in the box preceding the toolbar you want to reset.
4. Click the Reset button.
5. Click the OK button.
To delete a button from a toolbar:
1. On the toolbar, click the button you want to delete and hold down the mouse button.
2. Drag the button off the toolbar area.
To save your toolbar configuration:
1. Choose File>Workspace>Save. The Save Workspace dialog displays (Figure 1-16).
New (Insert)
Figure 1-16. Save Workspace Dialog

2. Click the New (Insert) button and enter a name for your workspace.
3. Click the Help button. The Workspace Manager window prompts you to save the new
workspace.
4. Click the Save button to save the workspace.
1-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
File Toolbar
The File Toolbar (Figure 1-17) provides basic file operations such as creating, opening, and saving
both PSS/U raw data (*.dat) and native PSS/ADEPT binary files (*.adp). Basic MS Windows editing
functionality such as cut, copy, paste, delete, and printing are also located on the File Toolbar. The
About button provides information on the PSS/ADEPT version you are using.
New
Open
Save
Print
Cut
Copy
Paste
Print Preview
Delete Undo
About
Toggle Network View
Toggle Progress View
Figure 1-17. File Toolbar

Diagram Toolbar
The Diagram Toolbar (Figure 1-18) consists of the Select button and the symbol buttons for all of
the network items you can model using the PSS/ADEPT application. Using the Diagram Toolbar,
you can easily and quickly select the item you want and drag it into position on your diagram. Refer
to Chapter 2 for more information on adding items to the network diagram.
Use the Select button to select (not place) an item in the Diagram View. When you click
the Select button on the Diagram Toolbar, any symbol previously selected on the
toolbar will no longer be active.
Use a Symbol button to add a specific device a node, branch, or shunt to your network diagram. When you click any symbol button, any previously selected symbol or
selected item will no longer be active.
The Text Annotation button allows you to place text anywhere in the diagram. Click the
Text Annotation button, move the pointer to the place on the diagram where you want
to add your own comments, and click. The word "Annotation" displays on the screen.
Double-click on the word "Annotation" to display the Annotation box and enter your own
text. Click the OK button to save your comments and display them in the diagram.
Show/Hide
Select
Show Grid
Grid Snap
Show
Results Line Switch
Horizontal
Node
Rotate
Rotate -90
Rotate +90
Transformer
Vertical
Node
Point
Node
Source
Load
Protection
Text
Equipment Annotations
Synchronous
Machine
Capacitor
MWh Load
Series Capacitor/ Induction

Reactor
Machine
Harmonic
Injection
Harmonic
Filter
Standard
Fault
Knee
Point
Figure 1-18. Diagram Toolbar
Confidential
1-23
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
If you are using US or ISO transformer symbols on your diagram, make sure the PSS/ADEPT
program settings are set to display the symbols correctly.
To check the program settings and, if necessary, adjust the symbol display:
1. Choose File>Program Settings from the Main Menu. The Program Settings dialog
displays (Figure 1-19).
Figure 1-19. Program Settings Dialog

2. In the Transformer symbol type field, select US if you are using US transformer
symbols
in your diagram or select ISO if you are using ISO transformer symbols
in your diagram.
3. Exit and restart the application to update the toolbar.
1-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Analysis Toolbar
The Analysis Toolbar (Figure 1-20) provides access to functions on the network. Each analysis type
has its own set of analysis and result display options.
Load Flow Calculation: Perform steady state power flow solution.
Flat Transformers: Command sets all transformer taps to 1.0 pu. If the transformer tap
range does not include 1.0, then the tap is set as close to 1.0 pu as possible.
Fault Calculation: Perform short circuit calculations on each node where a fault has
been specified.
Fault All: Perform short circuit calculations on all nodes using selected fault types.
Toggle Fault Status: Toggle (in or out) the standard fault device status.
Clear Faults: Delete standard fault devices from the network.
Motor Starting Calculation: Perform motor starting calculation using selected motors
to start.
CAPO Analysis: Perform capacitor placement optimization.
TOPO Analysis: Perform tie open point optimization.
DRA Analysis: Perform distribution reliability analysis.
Harmonics Calculation: Perform harmonics analysis.
Coordination: Perform protection device coordination analysis.
Load Snapshots: Define "pictures" of load data that may be optionally chosen to use
in an analysis activity. See Chapter 3, Section 3.11.
Analysis Options: Show analysis options dialog.
Network Validation: When selected, checks the network for unusual circumstances.
See Chapter 4, Section 4.2.2.
Motor
Start
Flat Transformers
CAPO
TOPO
Load
Snapshots
Analysis
Options
Flat Capacitors
Fault
Calculation
Load Flow
Fault
All
Toggle
Fault
Status
Clear
Faults
DRA
Coordination
Harmonics
Network
Validation
Figure 1-20. Analysis Toolbar
Confidential
1-25
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Zoom Toolbar
The Zoom Toolbar (Figure 1-21) consists of control buttons that allow you to set zoom areas of your
network diagram and set other diagram properties such as color selection and font selection.
Zoom
Previous
Pan
Zoom
100%
Zoom
Extent
Zoom
Area
Zoom
In
Zoom
Out
Diagram
Properties
Figure 1-21. Zoom Toolbar

Results Toolbar
The Results Toolbar (Figure 1-22) allows you to customize the result display on the diagram.
Show Phase A: Show results for Phase A.
Show Phase B: Show results for Phase B.
Show Phase C: Show results for Phase C.
Show Max (A, B, C): Show results as the maximum of A, B, C phases.
Show Min (A, B, C): Show results as the minimum of A, B, C phases.

Show Max
(A, B, C)
Show
Phase A
Show
Phase C
Show
Phase B
Show Min
(A, B, C)
Figure 1-22. Results Toolbar
1-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Setting PSS/ADEPT Program Properties
Reports Toolbar
The Reports Toolbar (Figure 1-23) allows you to view a report following an analysis.
Branch Current by Phase: Show text report of branch current by phase.
Node Voltage by Phase: Show text report of node voltage by phase.
Power Flow Details: Show text report of power flow details.
Power Flow Summary: Show text report of power flow summary.
Branch Power Losses: Show text report of branch power losses.
Input List: Show text report of input data list.
Voltage Profile: Show text report of voltage profile.
Branch Current
by Phase
Power Flow
Summary Input
List
Power Flow
Details
Voltage
Profile
Node Voltage
Branch
by Phase
Power Losses
Figure 1-23. Reports Toolbar
1.5 Setting PSS/ADEPT Program Properties

You can specify program properties so that each time you start PSS/ADEPT it operates according
to those program properties. Program properties are stored with your user profile and are unique
for each user who logs onto your machine.
You can specify the following settings for PSS/ADEPT:
Input file directory path. The path where input data files are located. Select Disable to
follow Standard Windows behavior. That is, use the path where the last file was
accessed.
Report file directory path. The path where the report files (*.rpt) are located. The default
is \Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Rpt.
Image file directory path. The path where the image files (*.bmp, *.jpg, etc.) are located.
PSS/ADEPT Construction Dictionary path and filename. The Construction Dictionary

(PTI.CON) is an ASCII file that provides data on system components such as impedance values, ratings, and reliability data for network branches such as lines,
transformers, switches, and series capacitors. For switch branches, impedance values
are zero, however, rating and reliability values may be specified.
When the Construction Dictionary path is changed from the Program Settings dialog, a
message box appears indicating that PSS/ADEPT is about to automatically update
Confidential
1-27
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
branch item (Line, Switch, Transformer and Series Capacitor) properties that are
dependent on the active Construction Dictionary. After pressing the OK button,
changes to the Program Settings dialog will be committed and all branch items in the
currently open document (if there is one) will be updated, along with the default Line,
Switch, Transformer and Series Capacitor, which are document-independent. If a particular branch item's Construction Type is not found in the newly-selected Construction
Dictionary, it will be considered user-defined; its Construction Dictionary-dependent
properties will remain unchanged and will be modifiable from the item Properties
dialog. If the construction dictionary path is blank, the Construction Type of every
branch item, including the default items, will be considered user-defined.
PSS/ADEPT uses the same Construction dictionary as PSS/U. The construction
dictionary is read when the PSS/U raw data file is opened in PSS/ADEPT. If a
directory path is not specified PSS/ADEPT defaults to the input file directory path.
Refer to Appendix C for construction dictionary file format.
1-28
Transformer symbol type (ISO or US) you want to use in your network diagrams.
Coordinate scale factor for reading/writing raw data files (the scale factor by which you
want to scale x,y coordinates when generating the diagram from a PSS/U raw data file).
Force node names to uppercase. Select this option to force all nodes from PSS/U to
uppercase.
Allow duplicate node names. Used when merging files together. Selecting this option
will allow duplicate nodes in both the original file and the file being merged with.
Display of hidden (invisible) items in the diagram.
Number of undo levels.
Result position and label settings.
Tooltip Preferences.
Load display preferences rectangular (P + jQ) or polar (S, pf, leading/lagging) you want
for your Static Load Property sheet.
Restoration of last saved workspace on program start-up.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The Program Settings dialog shown in Figure 1-24 illustrates the drive location of the Construction
Dictionary file.
Figure 1-24. Program Settings: Selecting a Dictionary

Additionally, there are program settings for results display options and for report units. Refer to
Chapter 4, Section 4.1, and Chapter 5, Section 5.1 for more information.
To set program properties for PSS/ADEPT:
1. Choose File>Program Settings from the Main Menu. The Program Settings dialog
displays.
2. Enter/select the options you want to run the PSS/ADEPT application:
Working Directories: Enter/select the path to your working Input File, Image File, and
Report File directories. Click the Browse
button to display the Select Directory box
where you can browse the local PC and/or network directory structure. The default settings are c:\Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Example (input files) and
c:\Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Rpt (report files).
PSS/U Raw Data: Specify the path and filenames of the PSS/ADEPT Construction
Dictionary. The default Construction Dictionary path/filename is
C:\Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Example\pti.con.
Confidential
1-29
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Coordinate scale factor for reading/writing raw data files: Enter the number by
which you want to scale x,y coordinates when generating a diagram from a PSS/U raw
data file.
Force node names to uppercase: Will cause all node names in the raw data file to be
converted to uppercase.
Allow duplicate node names: Used by a file merge, selecting this option will allow
duplicate nodes to be present in both the original input file and the file being merged
with.
Transformer Symbol Type: Select the Transformer Symbol Type: ISO or US.
Undo Levels: Select the maximum number of undo operations that will be stored by
the program.
Show hidden items: If you want to display hidden (invisible) items in the diagram, click
the Show Hidden Items check box. By default, hidden (invisible) items are not displayed in the diagram.
Position branch results labels close to ends: When checked, results will be displayed at the absolute ends of the branch independent of branch length. When unchecked, results will be placed based on a fraction of the branch length.
Separate node name and result labels: When checked, you can set unique font
attributes for the node names and results text. When unchecked, node names and
results will be displayed with the same font attributes. This option is more efficient in
terms of performance especially with large network diagrams.
Load Property sheet display: Click Rectangular to display load data as P(kW) and
Q(kvar); or click Polar to display load data as S(kVA), pf leading/lagging.
Restore last workspace at start-up: If you want to open automatically the last saved
workspace on program start-up, click the Restore Last Workspace at Start-up box.
Tool Tips: When checked a tooltip style popup window will be displayed when the
mouse cursor is positioned over an item on the diagram. You can set the information
displayed by selecting Settings... The Tooltip Settings dialog displays (Figure 1-25).
1-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 1-25. Tooltip Settings Dialog

Background Color: Select the background color for the tooltip window.
Text Color: Select the color of the text displayed in the tooltip window.
Frame Color: Select the color of the rectangular frame drawn around the tooltip window.
Item name: When checked, display the item name in the tooltip window.
Nominal Voltage (base kV): When checked, display nominal voltage in the tooltip window. Applicable to nodes only.
Phasing: When checked, display phasing in the tooltip window. Applicable to nodes,
branches, and shunts. Phasing for a shunt item is determined by the node phasing the
shunt item is connected to. Machines are assumed to be three phase (ABC) devices.
Construction Type: When checked, display the construction type in the tooltip window. Applicable to branch items only.
Line Length: When checked, display the line length in the tooltip window. Applicable
to line/cable branches only.
Sustained failure rate: When checked, display the sustained failure rate in the tooltip
window. Applicable to reliability analysis and branch items only. If you are not licensed
for reliability analysis, this option will be unavailable.
Mean time to repair: When checked, display the mean time to repair in the tooltip window. Applicable to reliability analysis and branch items only. If you are not licensed for
reliability analysis, this option will not be available.
Confidential
1-31
Setting Diagram View Properties
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Customer Interruptions: When checked, display customer interruptions in the tooltip

window. Applicable to reliability analysis and static load items only. If you are not
licensed for reliability analysis, this option will not be available. Customer interruptions
are available following a DRA analysis.
3. Click the OK button to save and use your program settings.
These settings are automatically activated upon save and they will be used the
next time you start PSS/ADEPT.
1.6 Setting Diagram View Properties

You can define the way you want the PSS/ADEPT Diagram View to look by setting Diagram View
properties (refer to Figure 1-26). The properties are saved in PSS/ADEPT binary files (*.adp) but
not in PSS/U raw data files (*.dat).
To set Diagram View properties:
1. Choose Diagram>Properties from the Main Menu or right-click on the Diagram View
and choose Diagram Properties from the pop-up menu. The Diagram View Property
sheet displays.
Figure 1-26. Diagram Property Sheet
1-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. Click the General tab and set the layout characteristics for the Diagram View:
These options may be modified at any time while the Diagram View is available
by selecting the Apply button without closing the dialog.
Grid (spacing and snap distance): Enter the spacing between grid lines (inches)
when the grid is displayed. Enter how far away from the grid line you want before an
item is snapped to it.
Colors (Symbol, Text, Background, Grid, Invalid, Flow arrow): Click each Browse
button and select the colors for the diagrams symbol, text (foreground), background, grid, invalid results and flow arrows.
Item Labels: Click the box that precedes any label name/marker (a check mark
appears) that you want to display on the diagram.
Fonts: Click the Font... button and select the font you want for the item labels. Click
the Apply to labels... button to select what labels to apply the selected font. You can
apply a selected font to item name labels, item property labels, result labels, and annotation labels.
3. Click the Color Coding tab and select one of the color settings:
You can assign colors to flag nodes that fall outside specified voltage thresholds, flag
overloaded branches, unbalanced nodes and branches, branches under a power factor limit, and/or flag devices that belong to a certain group.
Voltage thresholds, rating limits, power factor limits, and unbalance options are
set in the Analysis Options under the General tab; refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.1
for more information.
To color code items by group: Select Items by Group. A different color value is
assigned to each group. Colors for a specific group are specified in the
Networks>Group dialog. If an item belongs to one or more groups, there is no way to
ascertain which groups color is displayed.
To color code items by category: Select Loads and machines by category. A different color value is assigned to each category. Colors for a specific category are specified in the Network>Load Categories dialog. If an item belongs to one or more
category, there is no way to tell which groups color is displayed.
To color code items by nominal voltage level: Select Items by Nominal Voltage
Level. Items are color coded using defined voltage levels. To define voltage level colors, expand the Network>Voltage Levels from the Tree View and double-click on the
voltage level to change its color.
Voltage levels are stored in the system registry not in a .adp file. You can automatically
add missing voltage levels by right-clicking on the Voltage Levels folder and selecting
Populate Voltage Levels. Voltage levels can be added by right-clicking on the
Voltage Levels folder and selecting Add Voltage Level. Voltage levels can be deleted
by selecting the voltage level and pressing the delete [Del] key.
The nominal voltage of a branch or shunt item is determined by the nominal voltage (base kV) of the node(s) to which it is connected.
To color code items by result voltage level: Select Items by result voltage level.
Items are color coded based on resultant voltage levels. This option requires a previous
load flow solution. You can specify the color to use to highlight all network items that
Confidential
1-33
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
are above the maximum voltage threshold (High), below the minimum voltage threshold (Low), and nodes that are in-between the maximum and minimum threshold values
(Mid). Voltage thresholds are defined by selecting Analysis>Options... from the main
menu.
To color code unbalanced nodes and branches: Select Unbalance nodes and
branches and select a color. Unbalance options are defined in Analysis>Options.
Voltage unbalance can be calculated as the percent difference between maximum and
minimum phase voltage, maximum and average phase voltage, or the ratio of negativesequence to positive-sequence voltage. Current unbalance can be calculated as the
percent difference between maximum and average phase current, percent difference
between phase and average phase current, the ratio of zero-sequence to positivesequence current, or the ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence current.
To color code overloaded branches: Select Overloaded Branches and select a
color. Branch rating limits are specified in Analysis>Options.
To color code branches under a power factor limit: Select Branches under power
factor limit and select a color. Power factor limit is defined in Analysis>Options.
4. Click the Apply button to save the options you selected.
1.6.1 Setting Default Diagram Properties

Default diagram properties are saved and restored each time you exit and re-start PSS/ADEPT.
These diagram properties are applied to all new diagrams and when importing a PSS/U raw data
file. The PSS/ADEPT file (.adp) format contains individual diagram properties and default diagram
properties will have no effect unless you explicitly apply them. To set or modify the default diagram
properties, select Diagram>Default Diagram Properties...
1.6.2 Resetting Diagram Properties

Default diagram properties may be applied to an existing diagram by selecting
Diagram>Properties... and clicking the Reset button. This will update all of the diagram properties
to their respective default values defined in Default Diagram Properties. To update the diagram
with the new values, select the Apply button.
1-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Setting Default Item Properties
1.7 Setting Default Item Properties

PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify default characteristics for each type of network item. Default
characteristics are used when a new device is added to the diagram. The PSS/ADEPT application
defaults are listed in Appendix F.
To specify properties for each type of network item:
1. In the Tree View, double-click on Default Items to expand the item. Double-click on the
item that you wish to modify (Figure 1-27).
Figure 1-27. Default Items Options
Confidential
1-35
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. The Default Properties sheet of the selected device displays (as shown in Figure 1-28).
Figure 1-28. Default Node Property Sheet

Most of the Default Property sheets consist of one page. However, the Default
Transformer, Induction Machine, and Synchronous Machine Property sheets
have multiple pages indicated by tabs. For example, the Default Transformer Property
sheet (Figure 1-29) shows the General tab active.
1-36
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 1-29. Default Transformer Property Sheet

3. Enter/select the properties you want and click the OK button to accept them. Whenever
you add an item to a new or existing network diagram, the item will reflect the default
characteristics that you defined in the Default Property sheet for the new device.
You may override the default properties of an individual item by directly editing
the item properties. Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.1 for more information.
Confidential
1-37
Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1.8 Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT

In PSS/ADEPT, you can open any of the following file types:
PSS/ADEPT (*.adp) PSS/ADEPTs native binary file format that includes all the diagram options such as grid on/off, colors, results format, etc. This format does not
contain analysis results.
PSS/U (*.dat) PSS/U raw data file format.
PSSU/Slider (*. slu) files previously created with the Slider/U application.
PSS/Engines Hub File (*.dmp) files previously created with PSS/Engines.
You can save your diagrams in PSS/ADEPT (*.adp) and PSS/U (*.dat) file formats only. (Refer to
Appendix A for limitations: partial diagram, no poly lines, etc.)
1.8.1 Opening Native PSS/ADEPT Files

To open an existing PSS/ADEPT file:
1. Choose File>Open from the Main Menu or click the Open button on the File Toolbar.
The Open window displays, as shown in Figure 1-30.
Figure 1-30. Selecting a PSS/ADEPT File

2. Click the filename you want to open. (Look in another directory or select another file
type, if necessary.)
3. Click the Open button to open the diagram.
Transformer data in PSS/ADEPT native files prior to Version 5.0 of PSS/ADEPT will be converted to leakage and grounding impedance. Please see Section A.1.3.2 for more details.
1-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1.8.2 Opening PSS/U Raw Data Files

You can import a network model in a PSS/U raw data file (i.e., x,y coordinates are not equal to zero)
into PSS/ADEPT. PSS/ADEPT will create a network diagram using the node position, size information, and connection data from the raw data file. (A one-line diagram is generated using the same
initial placement technique as activity DRAW in PSS/U.) Diagram data may be manipulated in
exactly the same way as a native PSS/ADEPT network.
Because PSS/ADEPT has graphical capabilities and solution techniques that differ from PSS/U,
there are some disparities between the functionality of the two applications. These differences are
explained in Appendix A.
To open an existing PSS/U raw data file:
1. Choose File>Open from the Main Menu or click the Open button on the File Toolbar.
The Open window displays.
2. Click once in the Files of type prompt, and click PSS/U Raw Data Files (*.dat) to display a list of PSS/U raw data files.
3. Click the filename you want to open (look in another directory, if necessary).
4. Click the Open button to open the diagram. For an example of a PSS/U raw data file,
see the file Example.dat located in the \Example directory under the PSS/ADEPT
installation. (The default path is \Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Example.)
Transformer data in PSS/U raw data files prior to Version 5.0 of PSS/ADEPT will be converted
to leakage and grounding impedance. Please see Section A.1.3.2 for more details.
1.8.3 Opening PSS/Engines Hub Files

You can import a network into PSS/ADEPT that was previously generated as a Hub (dump) file with
PSS/Engines. The PSS/Engines dump file may be created any one of two ways: By using
PSS/Engines built-in application program interface (API) function PSSDumpWrite, or by selecting
to create a network dump file in PSS/ADEPT. A dump file can be selected by choosing Analysis
Options and placing a check mark in the Create PSS/Engines hub file box.
There are some disparities between the PSS/Engines dump file and its use in PSS/ADEPT, which
are described in Appendix A.
To open a PSS/Engines Hub File:
1. Choose File>Open from the Main Menu or click the Open button on the File toolbar.
The Open window displays.
2. Click once in the Files of type prompt, and click PSS/Engine Hub File (*.dmp).
3. Click the filename you want to open (look in another directory if necessary).
4. Click the Open button to open the diagram.
Transformer data in PSS/Engines Hub files prior to Version 5.0 of PSS/ADEPT will be converted to leakage and grounding impedance. Please see Section A.1.3.2 for more details.
Confidential
1-39
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1.8.4 Saving Files

PSS/ADEPT saves files in a native binary format (*.adp) by default. You have the option to save
files back to the PSS/U raw data format (*.dat); refer to Appendix A for limitations.
To save a PSS/ADEPT file, choose File>Save from the Main Menu or click the Save button on the
File Toolbar to save the file in *.adp format.
If the original file is a PSS/U raw data file (*.dat), the system automatically saves the file in the
same *.dat format.
To save a PSS/U raw data file (*.dat) in PSS/ADEPT format (*.adp):
1. Choose File>Save As from the Main Menu.
2. At the File name prompt, type a new filename. The default file extension is .adp.
3. At the File type prompt, select PSS/ADEPT files (*.adp).
4. Click the OK button to save the file.
1.8.5 Merging Files

A file merge will join two raw data files into one combined file. Before you select to merge a file, you
must have a file currently open, this is referred to as the original file. The file being merged in is the
file that you wish to combine with the original file to create one combined network.
When merging two files together, you have the option of specifying whether to allow duplicate
nodes. If you choose to allow duplicate nodes, the program will consider any duplicate node found
in the file being merged in that is the end of a tie switch branch. If you choose to not allow duplicate
nodes (default), the merge will not connect the two feeders if a duplicate node is found in the file
being merged in. To set this option, choose File>Program Settings and place a check mark next
to the Allow duplicate node names box.
An example of two feeders being merged is shown below (Figure 1-31). The feeders have tie
switches connected between common nodes (duplicates). The configuration after a merge is completed is also shown. The status of the tie switch (open or closed) depends on several conditions
that are described below.
1-40
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 1-31. Merging Feeders

To perform the file merge on the above feeders:
1. Open the Feeder 1 file. This is the original file.
2. Choose File>Program Settings and select whether or not to allow duplicate nodes.
3. Choose File>Merge and select the file to merge into the original case. This is the file
being merged in.
Confidential
1-41
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1.8.5.1 Duplicate Node Names Not Allowed

If you have chosen the option to not allow duplicate node names, and there were one or more tie
switches between duplicate nodes, a list containing common tie switches will be displayed to allow
you to choose the tie switch that joins the two systems (Figure 1-32).
Figure 1-32. Common Tie Switch List

The status of the tie switch you select will be closed. The status of the remaining common tie switch
branches will be left in their original state, either open or closed, therefore, it is possible that the
feeders may be connected at more than one point.
If no duplicate nodes with tie switches were found between the two files, you will be notified to establish the connection manually. This message will appear in the Progress View and indicates that you
need to add a new branch into the file to establish the connection between the two feeders. This
new branch may be a line, switch, transformer, series capacitor/reactor, or a tie switch.
1-42
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1.8.5.2 Duplicate Node Names Allowed

The usual method when merging files is to not allow duplicate node names between the original file
and the file being merged in. If duplicate node names are allowed to exist, tie switches connected
to the duplicate nodes are handled in the same way as when duplicate node names are not allowed.
If there are no connecting tie switches, you will have an opportunity to add a connecting branch
when the merge is complete. In this case, you can tie the two feeders together by having a common
node between the original file and the file being merged in. Figure 1-33 shows an example of this.
If a common node exists, the shunt items connected to the node will be taken from the file being
merged into the original file.
Figure 1-33. Duplicate Node Names Allowed
Confidential
1-43
1-44
Confidential
Chapter 2
Creating a Network Model
2.1 Overview: Creating a Network Model
After you have defined your working environment and the properties of the electrical network you
want to create (Chapter 1), you will be ready to create a graphical network model using
PSS/ADEPT. In this chapter, you will learn how to:
Create a new diagram.
Set properties for your network model such as voltage levels, item ordering, and
economic data.
Add nodes, shunts, and branches.
Define a group and assign items to it.
Define a load category and assign loads to it.
Save the network model.
Print the network diagram.
Adjust the display of the views in the PSS/ADEPT application window and your
diagram.
PSS/ADEPT enables you to place symbols that represent the network items in a diagram. The symbols are organized into three categories:
Network Item Types
Individual Items
Nodes
Vertical, horizontal, and point
Shunt devices (items connected to a node

at only one end)
Loads, sources, induction machines, synchronous machines, capacitors, and faults
Branches (items connected between two

nodes)
Lines/cables, transformers, switches, series

capacitors, and series reactors
2.2 Creating a New Diagram

By default, a blank or new diagram is displayed when you start the PSS/ADEPT application. If you
have an existing diagram open on the screen and wish to create a new one, click the New button
on the Menu Toolbar or choose File>New from the Main Menu. A blank diagram displays. This
is where you will create your network model.
Confidential
2-1

Setting Network Model Properties
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2.3 Setting Network Model Properties

You can define properties for your network model, including system base kVA, input voltage flag
(line-line or line-neutral), node base voltage (kV), descriptive data, and default reliability data.
To set network property data:
1. Choose Network>Properties from the Main Menu or at the top of the Tree View, rightclick on the Network folder to display the pop-up menu, and choose Properties. The
Network Property sheet displays (Figure 2-1). Notice that the sheet has two tabs:
System and Reliability.
You must have open a new or an existing data file to do this.
Figure 2-1. Network Property Sheet: System Tab

2. Under the System tab, enter/select the properties for your network model:
Circuit ID: Enter a one- to eight-character name to identify the circuit. Circuit ID is currently used only by activity MERG in PSS/U. This field is provided for PSS/U raw data
compatibility. See Appendix C for a description of PSS/U data formats.
Peak current (A): Specify a substation peak current in amps. If you choose a peak current solution in PSS/U, the actual loads defined in the data file will be scaled to reach
the substation peak current specified in this data field. The substation peak current may
be set equal to zero. This field is provided for PSS/U raw data compatibility. See
Appendix C for a description of PSS/U data formats.
Input voltage type: Specify the voltage type for all input voltage quantities in the network as line-line (LL) or line-neutral (LN).
2-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Setting Network Model Properties
Root node: Designate any node in the network as the root node. It is used to determine
the ordering of report records and during the Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) analysis. the root node is used in conjunction with the specified item ordering method
(Chapter 2, Section 2.10).
System three-phase base kVA: Specify the system base kVA; it will be used by
PSS/ADEPT as a base to calculate the source impedance and for per unit and physical
value conversions.
System standard base voltage (kV): Specify the base voltage in kV; it will be used to
set the default node base voltage. When importing a raw data file, if no base voltage is
entered in the node data field for node kV, the value specified here will be used as the
node base voltage.
System Frequency (Hz): Specify the system base frequency in Hz; it is not currently
used in any calculations, however it can be used as a reference for specifying impedances.
Comments: Enter any text you need to identify the case. The first line will be used as
the report description.
3. Click the Reliability tab (Figure 2-2) to display additional prompts.
Figure 2-2. Network Property Sheet: Reliability Tab

Used for PSS/U raw data file compatibility only.
Although Figure 2-2 requests information in hours and years, any unit of time and
length can be used as long as it is consistent. Units of time or length cannot be
Confidential
2-3

Adding a Node
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
mixed; the base on which these properties are entered must be fixed. If the base is
miles, then the base is miles for all reliability properties for which length is a factor.
4. Enter/select the reliability properties for your network model:
Substation name: Enter a name for the substation to which the data apply. It appears
only in the raw data file. This field may be blank.
Overhead failure rate (failures/unit length/yr): Enter a value to define how often the
overhead line fails in a given time period (usually one year). The overhead failure rate
is valid for all construction types that do not begin with the characters, UG, and is given
in failures/unit length/unit time.
Overhead repair time (hr): Enter the amount of time it takes to repair an overhead line
once it has failed. The time specified here is usually in hours but may be specified as
any unit of time as long as it is applied consistently to all data. This repair time is valid
for all construction types that do not begin with the characters, UG.
Underground failure rate (failures/unit length/yr): Specify how often the underground cable fails in a given time period usually one year. This parameter is only used
when the first two characters of the construction type defined in the dictionary are UG.
Underground repair time (hr): Enter the amount of time it takes to repair an underground cable once it has failed. As with the underground failure rate, this value will only
apply to construction types defined where the first two characters are UG.
Switch time (hr): Enter the amount of time it takes to open a switch. This parameter
applies only to those construction types that represent a switch branch in the raw data
file.
5. Click the OK button to save your specifications.
2.4 Adding a Node

A node is a basic component of any network you will create using PSS/ADEPT. The node is a terminal of any branch, or a terminal that is common to two or more network items (such as branches,
shunts, machines, etc.). A node is usually placed at a point where the construction type changes,
a transformer is added, a load or shunt capacitor is present, or where phasing changes.
PSS/ADEPT provides three kinds of nodes: vertical, horizontal, and point. The Diagram Toolbar will
allow you to easily create a node on the network diagram (see Figure 2-3).
Select
Horizontal
Node
Vertical
Node
Point
Node
Figure 2-3. Diagram Toolbar: Node Symbols
2-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Adding a Shunt Device
To add a node:
1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click one of the three node symbols.
2. Move the pointer to the desired location in the diagram and click. The node symbol displays on the diagram, centered on the pointer position (Figure 2-4).
The system automatically names consecutively the nodes you place on a diagram: Node1, Node2, Node3, etc.
NODE1
Figure 2-4. Creating a Vertical Node on the Diagram

3. Do one of the following:
To add another node of the same type: Repeat Step 2. The node symbol displays
on the diagram.
To add a different type of node: Repeat Steps 1 and 2. The node symbol displays on
the diagram.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 as many times as necessary to place all of the desired nodes
on the diagram.
2.5 Adding a Shunt Device

A shunt device is always connected to a single node; the node must exist prior to adding the shunt
device. PSS/ADEPT provides six types of shunt devices: load, source, induction machine, synchronous machine, capacitor, and fault. The Diagram Toolbar allows you to easily add the devices (see
Figure 2-5).
Select
Load
MWH
Load
Induction
Machine
Source
Harmonic Harmonic
Injection
Filter
Capacitor
Synchronous
Machine
Standard
Fault
Figure 2-5. Diagram Toolbar: Shunt Device Symbols
Confidential
2-5

Adding a Branch
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To connect a shunt device:

1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click one of the shunt device symbols.
2. Position the pointer over the node to which the shunt device will be connected
(Figure 2-6a).
3. Click and hold down the mouse button while dragging the shunt device symbol to the
desired position (Figures 2-6b and 2-6c).
PSS/ADEPT automatically names shunt devices as Load1, Load2, Source1,
Capac1, etc.
Node1
Node1
b.
a.
Node1
c.
Figure 2-6. Creating Shunt Devices
2.6 Adding a Branch

A branch connects two nodes, both of which must exist before you can add the branch item. A
branch cannot have the same start and end node. PSS/ADEPT provides four types of branches:
line/cable, switch, transformer, and series capacitor/reactor. The Diagram Toolbar allows you to
easily add branches (Figure 2-7).
Line
Select
Switch
Transformer
Series Capacitor
Reactor
Figure 2-7. Diagram Toolbar: Branch Symbols

To add a branch:
1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click one of the branch symbols.
2. Position the pointer over the desired start node to which the branch item will be connected (Figure 2-8a).
2-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Adding a Branch
3. Click and hold down the mouse button (the branch symbol, highlighted, displays) while
dragging the branch symbol to the desired location (Figure 2-8b), and do one of the
following:
To connect to the end node: Position the pointer over the end node and release the
left mouse button.
To create a multipoint line (a jog in the branch): Move the pointer to the turning point
and release the mouse button. Move the pointer to the next turning point and click;
repeat as many times as necessary, and drag the pointer to the end node to complete
the branch (see Figure 2-8c).
Node2
Node2
Node2
a.
Node1
Node1
Node1
b.
c.
Figure 2-8. Creating a Multipoint Branch

During this process, "rubber-banding" will take place, showing the potential course of the connection segments. If the branch will not snap to the node, make sure the Grid Snap button is
inactive (grayed out). This will make it easier to connect the item to the node. If the distance
between the two nodes is too short, the branch symbol will not appear. To see the symbol, move
the nodes farther apart.
Confidential
2-7

Defining a Group
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2.7 Defining a Group

You can define a group to hold a collection of items within the network for which you have identified
some commonality. Any network item can belong to any group, without restriction. An item can
belong in 0 to n groups. Network item groups are unique to each network and are stored along with
the rest of your network data in the *.adp file. For example, you might have branches in two different
states, New York and Vermont.
To set up a group and assign network items to it:
1. Choose Network>Groups from the Main Menu. The Groups dialog displays (Figure 29).
New (Insert)
Figure 2-9. Groups Dialog

2. Click the New (Insert) button and, in the entry space that appears, type a group name.
For example, you could type New York.
To mark individual network items that you want to assign to your group: In the
Members column, click the box that precedes the item. A check mark displays in the
box. Repeat this step for each item you want to add to your network group.
To mark multiple nonconsecutive items that you want to add to your group: In the
Members column, press the Ctrl key and click the box that precedes each network
item.
To mark multiple consecutive items that you want to add to your group: In the
Members column, click the first item in a range, press the Shift key, click the last item
in the range, and press the Spacebar.
You can "unmark" items in the Members column by clicking once on the box that
precedes the item.
2-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Defining a Group
4. Enter a Description for the group you are creating. By default, this field is blank.
5. Select a color to use for this group. Color is used for color-coding the diagram by network group.
6. Click the Close button to save your group.
To view the group(s) to which an item belongs and/or to change an items membership in a group:
1. Double-click on the item to display its property sheet.
2. Click the Groups button. The Group Membership dialog displays the list of the network groups you have defined (Figure 2-10). (If you havent defined any groups, it will
be empty.) Notice that each group to which the item belongs will have a check mark
next to its name.
Figure 2-10. Group Membership Dialog

3. Check or uncheck the boxes that precede the group names to change the items membership. A check mark in the box indicates the item is a member of the group; no check
mark indicates the item is not a member of the group.
4. Click the OK button to accept the changes and return to the item property sheet.
5. Click the OK button to return to the diagram.
To add multiple items to a single existing group:
1. Select one or more items on the network diagram. Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.
Confidential
2-9

Defining a Group
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Click the Add Item(s) to>Group option. The Add Item(s) to Group dialog displays
(Figure 2-11).
Figure 2-11. Add Item(s) to Group Dialog

4. From the drop-down list, choose the group to which you want to add the selected items.
If you choose items that already belong to the specified group, the items will be
unaffected.
To delete a group:
1. Choose Network>Groups from the Main Menu. The Groups dialog displays.
2. In the Groups list, click the group you want to delete. Only the group will be deleted.
Items that belonged to that group will remain in the network.
3. Click the Delete
2-10
button to delete the group from the list.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Defining a Load Category
2.8 Defining a Load Category

You can define a load category to hold a collection of load items (Static Loads, Induction Machines
and Synchronous Machines for which you have identified some commonality) within the network.
Any load item can belong to any category, without restriction. A load item can belong to 0 to n load
categories. Load categories are unique to each network and are stored along with the rest of your
network data in the *.adp file.
A load item may also belong to one or more groups.
To set up a load category and assign load items to it:
1. Choose Network>Load Categories from the Main Menu. The Load Categories dialog
New (Insert)
Figure 2-12. Load Categories Dialog

2. Click the New (Insert) button and, in the entry space that appears, enter a name for
the load category you want to define.
To mark individual items that you want to add to your load category: In the
Members column, click the box that precedes the item. A check mark displays in the
box. Repeat this step for each item you want to add to your load category.
To mark multiple nonconsecutive items that you want to add to your load category: In the Members column, press the Ctrl key and click the box that precedes each
network item.
To mark multiple consecutive items that you want to add to your load category:
In the Members column, click the first item in a range, press the Shift key, click the last
item in the range, and press the Spacebar.
Confidential
2-11

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
You can "unmark" items in the Members column by clicking once on the box that
precedes the item.
4. Enter a Description for the load category you are creating. By default, this field is blank.
5. Click the Close button to save your work.
To view the load category(ies) to which an item belongs and/or to change an items membership in
a load category:
1. Double-click on the load item to display its property sheet.
2. Click the Categories button. The Load Category Membership dialog displays the list
of the categories you have defined (Figure 2-13). (If you havent defined any categories, it will be empty.) Notice that each category to which the load item belongs will have
a check mark next to its name.
Figure 2-13. Load Category Membership Dialog

3. Check or uncheck the boxes that precede the category names to change the items
membership. A check mark in the box indicates the item is a member of the load category; no check mark indicates the item is not a member of the category.
4. Click the OK button to accept the changes and return to the item property sheet.
To add multiple items to a single existing category:
1. Select one or more items on the network diagram. Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.
2-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

3. Click the Add Item(s) to>Load Category option. The Add Load(s) to Category
dialog displays (Figure 2-14).
Figure 2-14. Add Load(s) to Category Dialog

4. From the drop-down list, choose the load category to which you want to add the
selected items.
If you choose items that already belong to the specified load category, the items
will be unaffected by this action.
To delete a load category:
1. Choose Network>Load Categories from the Main Menu. The Load Categories dialog
displays.
2. In the Categories list, click the load category you want to delete. Only the category will
be deleted, load categories, which were part of the deleted category will remain in the
network.
3. Click the Delete
Confidential
button to delete the load category from the list.
2-13

Defining Network Economics
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2.9 Defining Network Economics

You may specify economics criteria that will be used during the Optimal Capacitor Placement
(CAPO) and Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) analysis activities. Unique to each network, they
are stored along with the rest of your network data in the *.adp file.
To add economics criteria to your network model:
1. Choose Network>Economics from the Main Menu. The Economics dialog displays
(Figure 2-15).
Figure 2-15. Economics Dialog

2. Enter the economics data for your model:
Price of electrical energy (per kWh): The price your utility charges per kWh for the
use of electricity.
Price of electrical reactive energy (per kvar-h): The price your utility charges per
kvar-h for the use of electrical reactive energy.
Price of electrical demand (per kW): The price your utility charges per kW for electrical demand.
Price of electrical reactive demand (per kvar): The price your utility charges per kvar
for electrical reactive demand.
2-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Defining Item Ordering Method
Discount rate (pu/yr): The annual rate used to take into account the potential earning
power of money and inflation while moving dollar amounts either forward or backward
through time, to a single point in time for comparison.
Inflation rate (pu/yr): The expected yearly change in the value of the dollar.
Evaluation period (yr): The number of years, which will be studied in the economic
analysis.
Installation cost for fixed capacitor banks (per kvar): The amount per kvar it costs
your utility to install a fixed capacitor bank.
Installation cost for switched capacitor banks (per kvar): The amount per kvar it
costs your utility to install a switched capacitor bank.
Maintenance rate for fixed capacitor banks (per kvar-yr): The rate per kvar-yr it
costs your utility to maintain a fixed capacitor bank.
Maintenance rate for switched capacitor banks (per kvar-yr): The rate per kvar-yr
it costs your utility to maintain a switched capacitor bank.
3. Click the OK button to save your specifications for the model.
2.10 Defining Item Ordering Method

In PSS/ADEPT, tree iteration is a way to go from one node in a network to another node, walking
along the branches that connect them. If there are loops in the network, there may be more than
one way to get from one node to another. In reports, you may want to control the order in which the
node/branch results are listed. The ordering method allows you to handle these situations by specifying the method to start at a designated "root" node and iterate in order through all the equipment
in the network.
The "root" node is specified on the Network Property sheet. If you do not specify a "root" node
directly, PSS/ADEPT will set the "root" node for you according to the following rules:
1. If you open a PSS/U raw data file (*.dat), the root node will automatically be set to the
first in-service source node found in the file. If there are no sources or no in-service
sources, the root node will be set to the first node found in the file.
2.
If you are creating a new diagram, the root node will be set to the first in-service source
you place on the diagram.
If you are generating a new network and you do not place any source nodes on the diagram you
must specify the "root" node directly in the Network Property sheet.
During the iteration, if a node has been traversed already (a loop formed), the branch that has the
already encountered node at its downstream end is called a "loop branch". For example, in the network drawing in Figure 2-16, if the "root" node is "Source" and the item ordering method is set to
alphabetical, the iteration order of the nodes, starting at the source, would be as shown in Table 2-1.
Confidential
2-15

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1 23 W
0 .99
3 58 .28
BBBB
1.00
358.42
3 0.87
3 31 .79
Line 2
Line1
Switch1
306.74
355.82
27.9 2
174.87
L ine3
L ine5
2 8.95
3 43 .61
28.0 2
6.56
T ran1
XXXX
1.00
359.86
Y YY Y
1 .00
3 58 .93
5.74
89.67
Line4
0.00
76.1 0
AAA A
1.00
359.86
T ran2
Source
1.00
360.00
CCCC
0.00
86.56
Figure 2-16. Sample Network to Illustrate Item Ordering Methods
Table 2-1. Iteration Order of Nodes
2-16
Position in Tree
Node
Upstream Node
Source
AAAA
Source
XXXX
AAAA
YYYY
XXXX
BBBB
Source
123W
BBBB
CCCC
Source
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Table 2-2 gives iteration order of the branches.

Table 2-2. Iteration Order of Branches
Position in Tree
Branch
Upstream
Downstream
Line4
Source
AAAA
Line5
AAAA
XXXX
Line3*
XXXX
Source
Tran1
XXXX
YYYY
Line1
Source
BBBB
Line2
BBBB
123W
Tran2
Source
CCCC
The * is used to indicate a loop has been formed when the node "Source" is visited for the
second time. Line3 is then considered a "loop branch". The "*" is used here for explanatory
purposes only and will not be indicated on any output reports.
During the iteration process, any out-of-services branches are treated as if they have been removed
from the network.
To define the network item ordering method:
1. Choose Network>Ordering Method from the Main Menu. The Ordering Method dialog
Figure 2-17. Ordering Method Dialog

2. Click Alphabetical by name to order network items in alphabetical order. Refer to the
above example for the expected results, or click Numerical by node coordinate to
order network items numerically by node coordinates. The Priority, Horizontal Priority,
and the Vertical Priority will become enabled.
Confidential
2-17

Completing the Network Diagram
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
When ordering numerically by node coordinate you must specify the following:
1. Choose the x coordinate (Horizontal) preference. This priority is used to determine left
to right or right to left ordering. If there is a tie, then Vertical priority will determine if the
top-most or bottom-most is selected next.
2. Choose the y coordinate (Vertical) preference. This priority is used to determine top
to bottom or bottom to top ordering. If there is a tie, then Horizontal Priority will determine if the left-most or right-most is selected next.
2.11 Completing the Network Diagram

Construct the rest of your network diagram using the building blocks you have learned. The system
shown in Figure 2-18 illustrates a sample network. Double-click any newly created item at any time
in any order to display the items property sheet where you can specify item data directly.
Figure 2-18. Completed Sample Network Diagram
2-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Saving the Network Model
2.12 Saving the Network Model

You may save the diagram at any point.
To save a network diagram:
1. Click the Save
button on the File Toolbar, or choose File>Save or File>Save As
from the Main Menu. The Save As dialog displays (see Figure 2-19).
Figure 2-19. Save As Dialog

2. Enter the directory path and filename you want for the diagram.
3. Choose the file type: PSS/U Raw Data File (*.dat), or PSS/ADEPT File (*.adp). The
default is PSS/ADEPT.
4. Click the OK button to save the diagram.
Confidential
2-19

Printing the Diagram
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2.13 Printing the Diagram

PSS/ADEPT provides a standard MS Windows printing environment that allows you to print network
diagrams and reports.
2.13.1 Specifying Print Options

You can specify how you want PSS/ADEPT to print your diagram including headers, footers, and
page numbers. To specify these print options select File>Print Options. The Print Options dialog
Figure 2-20. Print Options Dialog

Select the options you want to modify.
Active View: Print the currently selected (active) view just like it appears in the window
(WYSIWYG).
Entire diagram (multi-page): Print the entire diagram spanning over several pages.
Entire diagram (single page): Print the entire diagram on a single sheet of paper.
Current Display (single page): Print the current display as is on a single printed page.
Network title: Check the box to print the title of the network as part of the page header.
The title is specified in the Network Properties dialog.
File path: Check the box to print the full path of the currently open file in the page header.
This is the path where your file is currently located.
Results type (analysis): Check the box to print the analysis that was last executed. The
results on the diagram correspond to an analysis such as load flow, short circuit and motor
starting.
2-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Voltage units: Check the box to print the voltage units on the diagram (per-unit, kV, etc.).
Current/power units: Check the box to display current or power units on the printed page
(kW, kvar, Amps).
Active phase: Check the box to print the phase pertaining to the printed output results. For
example, if you have chosen to display results at Phase B, the page footer will indicate
phase B results.
Product Version: Check the box to print the produce version number on the printed page.
Date and Time: Check the box to print the date and time at the bottom of the printed page.
Page numbers: Check the box to print page numbers on each page.
White background: Check the box to print on a white background.
High-quality printing: Check the box for optimal print resolution (could significantly
increase printing time).
2.13.2 Specifying Print Settings

You can specify the print settings such as paper size, paper tray, and orientation for your network
diagrams.
To specify and/or modify your print settings, choose File>Print Setup from the Main Menu. The
Print Setup dialog displays (Figure 2-21).
Figure 2-21. Print Setup Dialog

Using the Print Setup dialog, you may also select another printer on the network.
Confidential
2-21

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2.13.3 Previewing the Diagram Before Printing

You can view the printed image of your network diagram before sending it to the printer. The diagram appears on the screen exactly as it will on the printed page.
To preview your network diagram before printing it:
1. Choose File>Print Preview from the Main Menu. The Print Preview window displays
(Figure 2-22).
Figure 2-22. Print Preview Window

To send an image directly to the printer from the Print Preview window: Click the
Print button that appears in the upper left corner of the Print Preview window.
To move back and forth among the pages in your network diagram: Click the Next
Page and/or Prev Page buttons. (If there are no pages available, the button will be
grayed out.)
To display a two-page preview of your network diagram: Click the Two-Page button.
To zoom in (magnify) or zoom out (broaden the perspective) of your network diagram: Click the Zoom In and/or Zoom Out buttons.
To return to the Diagram View without printing: Click the Close button.
2-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Adjusting the PSS/ADEPT Display
2.13.4 Printing a Network Diagram

A network diagrams printed appearance depends on a number of factors such as:
View of the diagram (actual area displayed in the Diagram View).
Zoom level of the diagram.
Results (if any) currently displayed on the diagram.
PSS/ADEPT features What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get (WYSIWYG) printing of your network diagram, taking into account both the scrolled position and the scale of your diagram. Slight differences
may occur because the relative size of the paper is not the same as the size of the Diagram View
window, and because the resolution of the printing device is usually three or four times that of the
screen.
If the Multipage option is set in the Diagram Properties dialog, then the application will print the
entire diagram, using as many pages as necessary. To eliminate "blank" pages, you may need to
resize the diagram so that there is a minimal amount of white space around your network. If the
Multipage option is turned off, the current view will be printed on a single page (WYSIWYG) irregardless of the diagram size.
Each diagram printout will show the title of the network model, and the date and time in the upper
left and lower right of the paper, respectively. Also, the units of the displayed results will be shown
on the lower left of the printed page.
2.14 Adjusting the PSS/ADEPT Display

PSS/ADEPT provides many options for customizing the diagram display to accommodate your
work preferences. You can hide and dock views, float a view in the application window, zoom in and
out, and scale/offset all coordinates in a diagram. By default, the Tree and Progress Views are
docked to the main application window. The Diagram View always displays in the main application
window and may not be hidden or docked elsewhere; it may, however, be minimized or maximized.
2.14.1 Hiding Views

To hide the Equipment List View, Progress View, the Status Bar, and/or a toolbar in the diagram:
1. Choose View from the Main Menu. The drop-down View Menu displays.
2. Click any or all of the view options: Network Tree, Progress Window, and/or Status Bar,
in the drop-down menu. If a view option, (for example, Network Tree) is checked, the
view displays; if a view option is not checked, the view does not display.
Confidential
2-23

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2.14.2 Docking Views

The Tree and/or Progress Views can be attached or "docked" to any side of the application window.
By default, the Tree View is docked to the left side of the application window, and the Progress View
is docked to the bottom of the application window.
To dock a view to any side of the application window:
1. Right-click anywhere in the view you want to dock. A pop-up menu displays.
2. Click Allow docking to remove the check mark and display the view contents in a small
window. Notice the border at the top of the small window (the color of the window
border depends on your current desktop settings).
3. Right-click in the small window to display the pop-up window.
4. Click Allow docking.
5. Click on the border of the small window and drag it to the side of the application window
until you see its frame change.
6. Release the mouse button to dock the view. For example, Figure 2-23 shows the
Progress View docked at the bottom of the application window, which is the default
setting.
Progress View
Figure 2-23. Progress View "Docked" in PSS/ADEPT Application Window
2-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

2.14.3 Floating the Progress View

The Progress View can be "undocked" from the bottom edge of the application.
To "float" the Progress View in the PSS/ADEPT application window:
1. Right-click in the Progress View to display the pop-up menu.
2. Click Float in Main Window. The Progress View maximizes to overlay the Diagram
View (Figure 2-24).
Progress View
Figure 2-24. Progress View "Floated" in PSS/ADEPT Application Window

To reinstate the "docked" Progress View:
1. Right-click in the maximized Progress View to display the pop-up menu.
2. Click Float in Main Window to remove the check mark. The Progress View returns to
its previous "docked" position.
Confidential
2-25

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2.14.4 Zooming the Diagram

To zoom the diagram or any portion of the diagram, choose one of the following:
1. Choose View>Zoom from the Main Menu. The drop-down View Menu displays
(Figure 2-25).
Figure 2-25. Zooming the Diagram

2. Use the Zoom Toolbar (Figure 2-26).
Pan
Zoom
Area
Zoom
Previous
Zoom
100%
Zoom
Extent
Zoom
Area
Zoom
Out
Diagram
Properties
Figure 2-26. Zoom Toolbar

2-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

3. Click on any drop-down menu option or toolbar button to adjust your Diagram View:
50%, 100%, 150%, 200%: Choose any one of these preset zoom levels at which to display your network diagram (these options are only available from the drop-down menu).
Zoom In: Choose this option to magnify your diagram.
Zoom Out: Choose this option to get a broader view of your diagram.
Zoom Area: Choose this option to zoom into a particular area of your diagram. Click
the Zoom Area
button. On the diagram, click and drag from upper left to lower right
to draw a rectangular frame around the area you want to magnify. Release the mouse
button to zoom into the area within the rectangle.
Zoom Extent: Choose this option to change the view of your diagram to one which
contains all of your network without white space.
Zoom Previous: Choose this option to restore the zoom level to what it was previously.
2.14.5 Scaling/Offsetting Diagram Coordinates

You can scale all node coordinates by some factor. This will result in nodes being spaced farther
apart (for values > 1.0) or closer together (for values < 1.0). Additionally, you can offset all x- and/or
y-coordinates by some number of inches on the diagram. This number can be positive or negative.
Since the origin (0, 0) is located at the bottom left corner, a positive value for x will shift all nodes to
the right and a positive value for y will shift all nodes upward.
To scale or offset the x- and y-coordinates for all items on the diagram:
1. Choose Diagram>Adjust Coordinates... from the Main Menu. The Adjust Coordinates dialog displays (Figure 2-27).
Figure 2-27. Adjust Coordinates Dialog

2. Enter any scaling factor and/or x- and y-coordinate offsets you want:
Scale by: Specify the number by which both x- and y-coordinates will be multiplied.
Offset x-coordinates by: Specify the number (positive or negative) that will be added
to all x-coordinates.
Offset y-coordinates by: Specify the number (positive or negative) that will be added
to all y-coordinates.
3. Click the OK button to make the specified adjustments.
Confidential
2-27

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2.14.6 Panning the Diagram

Scroll bars on the diagram display have been replaced by a panning tool.
To navigate the diagram either horizontally or vertically:
1. Click the Pan
button on the Zoom Toolbar.
2. When the mouse is placed over the Diagram View, it will change to a Pan button. Left
click anywhere on the diagram and drag the entire display to a different position in the
window.
2.14.7 Navigating Using the Mouse Wheel

If you mouse has a navigation wheel, you can use it to navigate through the diagram. Scroll the
mouse wheel to pan the diagram view up or down. Hold the Shift key down while scrolling to pan
the view left or right. Hold the Ctrl key down while scrolling to zoom in or out.
The diagram window must have the focus to receive mouse wheel events. If nothing happens
when you scroll the mouse wheel, left-click once in the diagram window to give it the focus.
2.14.8 Centering Items in the Diagram View

To center an individual item or a group of items in the diagram:
1. Select the item(s) you want to center.
2. Right-click on the diagram and choose Center from the pop-up menu.
2.14.9 Saving Diagram Views

You can save diagram views and restore them at any time. Views that you have previously saved
will be stored within a PSS/Adept native file (*.adp). To save a diagram view, select Saved Views
from the View menu. The Saved Views dialog displays (Figure 2-28).
Figure 2-28. Saved Views Dialog
2-28
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To create a new saved view:

1. Click the New (Insert)
button to create a new saved view.
2. Enter the name you want to call the saved view in the text box.
3. Click the Save button.
To restore a view:
1. Select the view you want to restore from the list provided.
2. Click the Restore button.
Click the Close button to return to the diagram.
2.14.10 Working with Layers

The diagram view is capable of showing many layered images. The simplest way to visualize a layer
is to imagine that the diagram is comprised of an infinite number of clear mylar sheets stacked on
top of one another. Each single sheet of mylar constitutes one diagram layer. Diagram layers can
be visible, hidden, or visible or hidden dependent on the current zoom level setting.
Each diagram contains a minimum of two layers: Layer 0 (the background layer where imported
images are assigned) and Layer 1 (the default layer where all non-image diagram components (network items) are assigned). You can create any number of additional layers to the diagram.
When images are imported into PSS/Adept, they can be assigned to a diagram layer giving you flexibility for showing and hiding specific images on the diagram. If you want to use this feature, first
add the layers for each image file you want to import. Refer to the "Importing and Exporting Image
Files" section to import the image and assign a specific layer to it. Once the image is imported and
assigned to a layer, you have full control of the properties for each image such as when you want
the image to be shown on the diagram. You can set the image to be visible, hidden, or only shown
at a certain specified zoom level.
In this version, layer assignment is restricted to imported images only.
Confidential
2-29

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To modify one or more diagram layers:

1. Select Layers from the Diagram menu. The Layers dialog displays (Figure 2-29).
Figure 2-29. Layers Dialog

2. Select the layer that you want to modify from the list on the left side of the dialog. The
properties of the layer will be disabled until a layer is selected.
3. Modify the layer properties.
Description: Enter a description for the diagram layer to help identify its
characteristics.
Visible: Select this button to make the selected layer visible.
Hidden: Select this button to make the selected layer hidden.
Zoom Dependent: Select this button to make the selected layer visible or hidden
based on a specified zoom level. If you select a layer that is zoom dependent, specify
the maximum and minimum zoom levels to use to toggle the visibility in the boxes provided.
Default layer: Check this box to make the selected layer the default layer. The default
layer will automatically be set to Layer 1.
4. Click the Apply button to update the diagram.
2-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To add a new diagram layer:

1. Click the Add button. A new layer will be added to the list.
You cannot modify the name of a layer.
2. Modify/select the properties for the new layer.
3. Click the Apply button to update the diagram.
To remove a diagram layer:
1. Select the layer you want to remove in the list provided.
2. Click the Remove button. The layer will be removed from the list.
3. Click the Apply button to update the diagram layers.
2.14.11 Importing and Exporting Image Files

You can import files of the following types into the diagram: .bmp, .jpg, .gif, and .png. Once an image
is imported, it becomes a diagram item that can be selected, moved, double-clicked to show its
properties. Image files may also be assigned to a specific diagram layer.
To import an image file:
1. Select Import Image from the Diagram menu. The file selector will display allowing
you to select the file type and name of the file you want to import.
2. Select OK. The image file will be imported and placed on the diagram.
To modify the properties of an image:
1. Double-click on the image or right-click on the image and select Properties to display its property sheet (Figure 2-30).
Figure 2-30. Image Property Sheet
Confidential
2-31

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. Select/modify the image properties:

File: The image filename cannot be modified but shows you the path to the file that you
have imported. This file is saved along with a .adp file so that the image can be restored
when the file is re-opened.
You can specify an image file directory under Program Settings. Copy the image
files that you want to use into this directory to avoid being prompted for the image
file name(s) whenever you open a .adp file containing imported image(s).
Layer: Select a previously defined layer that you want this image to belong to. Imported
images are assigned to the Background layer by default.
Scale Factor: Enter a scale factor if you want the image to be scaled. By default, the
image scale factor is set to 1.0, which means the image is rendered at its actual size at
100% diagram zoom level. Images are scaled up and down when the view is zoomed
in or out. To make the image larger (the image file will not be modified), choose a higher
scale factor (> 1.0) and to make the image smaller, choose a lower scale factor (< 1.0).
Selectable: Check this box to allow the image to be selectable as an item on the diagram. If this box is not checked, you will not be able to select and modify any of the
image properties.
Moveable: Check this box to allow the ability to move the image around on the diagram.
If the moveable check box is not checked, the image will be stationary on the diagram.
3. Click OK to return to the diagram.
2.14.12 Using Knee Points

Knee points are dividers that can divide branch and shunt items into multiple line segments. The
number of line segments in a diagram item (e.g., branch) equals the number of knee points + 1.
Figure 2-31 below illustrates how to add a knee point to an existing branch and load.
NODE2
NODE1
Figure 2-31. Knee Points

2-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

There are 2 knee points and 3 line segments in the branch from NODE1 to NODE2. There is 1 knee
point and 2 line segments in the load. Originally, the line segments were drawn as one line segment
between NODE1 and NODE2 and one line segment indicating the load. To create the figure shown,
knee points were added to the original branch and load to allow the branch and load line segments
to be arranged as shown. Once a knee point is added, you can select it and drag the network item
to a desired location. Knee points are also created automatically when you draw a multipoint branch
(see Section 2.6, Adding a Branch).
To add a knee point to an existing branch or shunt item:
1. Select the knee point drawing tool
from the Diagram Toolbar and click on the
branch or shunt item where you want the knee point to be placed. A small maroon
square will become visible (see Figure 2-32) indicating that the knee point is selected.
NODE2
NODE1
Figure 2-32. Knee Point Selected

2. Click and drag the knee point to a different location to reposition the item. Once the item
has been repositioned you can click anywhere in the diagram and the knee point will
disappear from the view until you reselect it.
Confidential
2-33

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To delete a knee point from an existing branch or shunt item:

1. Select the knee point and press the Delete key, or select Edit>Delete. Be careful to
select only the knee point and not its associated link (see Figure 2-33).
NODE2
NODE1
a. Correct
NODE2
NODE1
b. Incorrect
Figure 2-33. Knee Point Selection for Delete
2.14.13 Locking the Diagram

Locking the diagram prevents all network and diagram editing operations including item creation,
relocation, and deletion. You can still select items, navigate the network, and perform analysis
operations.
To lock the diagram for editing:
1. Select Diagram>Lock Diagram, or right-click in the Diagram View and select Lock
Diagram.
To un-lock the diagram and enable all edit operations:
1. Select Diagram>Unlock Diagram, or right-click in the Diagram View and select
Unlock Diagram.
2.14.14 Working with Item Labels

PSS/ADEPT uses several types of labels to annotate the diagram. Item labels are used to provide
text information on the diagram for a specific network item (transformer, machine, etc.). Result
labels are used to display analysis results on the diagram (e.g., power, voltage, etc.). Each label
has its own set of properties including text, color, font, and other behavior settings.
2-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To view/edit the properties of a label or group of labels:

1. Double-click on the label or select the label, right-click and select Properties to display the Label Property sheet (Figure 2-34).
Figure 2-34. Label Property Sheet

2. Modify the properties of the label:
Owner: If the label is associated with a specific network item, the name of the item will
be displayed. Items associated with a specific network item will have properties that
appear disabled such as text color and background color.
Font: To change the font of a label or group of labels, click the Font button and select
the desired font, size, and style.
Text color: Select the Browse
label text.
button and choose the color that you want for the
Background color: Select the Browse

button and choose the color you want to
use for the background of the label text. Choose whether you want the color to be
opaque or transparent. Check the box if you want the color to be opaque.
AutoPosition: If you want to change the position, alignment, or rotation of the label uncheck the AutoPosition box. The position properties will then be editable.
X, Y: Enter the position of the label in diagram coordinates.
Alignment: Choose to position the label in the center, left justified, or right justified in
the label box.
Rotation: Select the label rotation. For example, 90 indicates the label to be drawn in
a vertical position, 0 indicates horizontal position.
Confidential
2-35

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2.14.14.1 Setting Multiple Label Fonts

The font characteristics of multiple labels can also be changed from the Diagram Properties dialog.
To change multiple label characteristics at the same time:
1. Select Diagram>Properties from the Diagram menu. The Diagram Properties dialog
displays.
2. On the General tab click on the Font button to display the Font dialog. Select the
desired font name, size, and style followed by the OK button.
3. Select Apply to Labels, the Apply Font dialog displays (Figure 2-35).
Figure 2-35. Apply Font Dialog

4. Select the label categories that you want to be updated with the newly selected font.
Item name labels: When checked applies the new font to diagram item names (e.g.,
node names, branch names)
Item property labels: When checked applies the new font to diagram property labels
(e.g., construction type and length, phasing).
Result labels: When checked applies the new font to diagram results (e.g., node voltage, power, current).
Annotation labels: When checked applies the new font to diagram text annotation.
The Apply to Labels button updates labels only and does not assign the
selected font to the entire diagram. The Apply button assigns the font to the diagram only and does not reset the fonts of existing labels. The diagram font acts only as
a default for newly created labels.
2-36
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

2.14.14.2 Controlling Result Label Visibility

Each diagram item (e.g., node, branch) has an associated results visibility flag that allows you to
specify whether or not to show the results for a particular diagram item.
To hide results:
1. Select a specific item or group of items.
2. Double-click on the item or select the item, right-click and select Properties
3. Un-check the box labeled Results. This will cause results for the selected items to be
hidden on the diagram.
To show results:
1. Select a specific item or group of items.
2. Double-click on the item or select the item, right-click and select Properties
3. Check the box labeled Results. This will cause results for the selected items to be
shown on the diagram.
To toggle the results label visibility as previously specified in the property sheet:
1. Select an item or group of items on the diagram.
2. Right-click and select Toggle>Results visibility. Results previously hidden will
become visible and results previously shown will become invisible.
The results visibility flag on each item is specifically designed to override the diagram wide result visibility toggle when all the results are visible on the diagram. If
you cannot see the results for a particular item when the Show Results button on the
Zoom Toolbar is toggled "on", make sure the Results check box in the items properties
is checked.
2.14.14.3 Configuring Point Node Labels

If you have defined point nodes in your network, the position of the label can be set to one of eight
different options that specify the quadrant to position the label combined with either vertical or horizontal text rotation.
To set the point node label configuration:
1. Double-click on a point node to display its property sheet.
2. Select the desired configuration from the Label Configuration list (see Figure 2-36).
Confidential
2-37

-2
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
-1
- possible positions
- default position
-3
-4
Figure 2-36. Label Configurations
2.14.14.4 Applying Separate Labels to Node Names and Results

At each node, PSS/ADEPT can display the node name and results within the same label, or in two
different (separate) labels. The first option is more efficient in terms of performance especially with
large networks while the second option is more flexible by allowing you to set unique font attributes
for node name text and result text. Separation of node names and results will create distinct diagram
item labels for each.
To separate node name and result labels:
1. Select File>Program Settings to display the Program Settings dialog.
2. Check the Separate node name and results labels box.
2.14.14.5 Positioning Branch Result Labels

Results on a branch can be positioned in two locations: at the absolute end of the branch independent of the branch length, or positioned at a location that is a fraction of the branch length.
To specify how to position branch result labels:
1. Select File>Program Settings to display the Program Settings dialog.
2. Check the Position branch results labels close to ends box to position branch
results at the ends without considering the actual branch length. Un-check the box to
position results based on a fraction of the actual specified length of the branch.
For diagrams with closely-spaced nodes (e.g., short branches), the first option is
recommended.
2-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Autopositioning Diagram Symbols
2.15 Autopositioning Diagram Symbols

Each branch symbol, shunt symbol and network item label has an Autoposition flag that can be
turned on or off. With Autoposition "on", the symbol or label automatically updates its position and/or
rotation based on the current position and/or rotation of the diagram item(s) upon which it is dependent. For example, if a node symbol is selected and dragged to a different location on the diagram,
its connected branch and shunt symbols will re-position themselves accordingly. A diagram item
with Autoposition "on" can be dragged to a different location but will immediately "snap" back to its
original position when the mouse button is released. With Autoposition "off", a diagram item can be
positioned and rotated independently. By default the Autoposition flag of all diagram items is set to
"on".
To set the Autoposition flag:
1. Select a diagram item or group of items.
2. Right-click on the diagram and select Toggle>Autoposition.
Node symbols are independent by definition and are unaffected by the autoposition flag setting. A point node that has Autoposition set to "on" will affect the orientation of the shunt items connected to it. To rotate shunt items manually, set the
Autoposition to "off".
2.16 Rotating Diagram Items

Most diagram items including labels can be rotated interactively. There are 3 different ways to
change the rotation of a diagram item:
1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Rotate
to change its rotation.
button, select an item and drag the mouse
2. Select an item, click the Rotate +90

or Rotate 90
90 from the current rotation value of the selected item.
button to add or subtract
3. Change the rotation value on the node or label property sheet.

The Autoposition flag for the selected items should be turned "off" prior to changing the rotation. Leaving Autoposition "on" will cause the item to immediately snap
back to its original rotation position. Shunt symbol orientation is dependent on the rotation of the node symbol to which it is connected.
2.17 Using Ports and Links

A diagram symbol, when selected has a small, circular, isolated area called a port which allows links
to other symbols. A link is a line segment or group of line segments drawn from one port to another.
Busbar style node symbols have a number of evenly spaced ports along either edge, lengthwise.
See Figure 2-37.
Confidential
2-39

Using Ports and Links
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
NODE2
Port
NODE1
NODE2
Link
NODE1
Figure 2-37. Ports and Links

Symbol ports are intentionally hidden by the program most of the time. A port will become visible
when a link (line segment) is selected. A port can have no more than one link which means you
cannot link more than one branch or shunt symbol to the exact same location on a given busbar
symbol. This does not apply to the point node symbol, which contains multiple ports in the center of
the symbol. The number of ports depends on the length of the busbar symbol, which can be re-sized
interactively, hence, creating more ports. When creating a new branch or shunt item, the cursor will
automatically snap to an available port when the mouse pointer is placed over one. When dragging
a new branch from one node to another, the mouse pointer must be positioned over an available
port on the second node symbol for the branch creation to take effect.
To move one end of a branch or shunt item to a different port:
1. Enter Select mode by choosing the Select
button on the Diagram Toolbar.
2. Single-click on the line segment you want to move. The port will now be visible
(Figure 2-38).
NODE2
NODE1
Figure 2-38. Port After Selection of Line Segment
2-40
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Using Ports and Links
3. While holding the left mouse button down, position the cursor over the port and drag
the end of the link away from the port while also holding down the Ctrl key. A dashed
line will appear from the branch or shunt symbol to the mouse pointer indicating that
the link is being moved.
4. Position the link onto a different port on the busbar and release the mouse button and
Ctrl key.
To connect a branch or shunt item to a different node:
Follow Steps 1 to 3 as described above and position the link onto a different node symbol.
When moving symbols, a zoom level of no less than 100% is recommended.
Confidential
2-41
2-42
Confidential
Chapter 3
Editing a Network Model
3.1 Overview: Editing a Network Model
PSS/ADEPT provides a flexible editing environment to help you build and test network models.
Basic editing of all network items on the diagram or in the Equipment List View can be done using
standard Microsoft Windows selection, copy, cut, and paste functions. Detailed editing of the engineering settings associated with a network item can be done in PSS/ADEPTs item property sheets.
In this chapter, you will learn to:
Open an existing network diagram.
Select single or multiple items on the diagram or from the Equipment List View.
Perform basic (Microsoft Windows) editing functions, such as copy, move, cut and
paste, undo last action, etc., for each type of network item.
Perform advanced editing functions via detailed network item property sheets,
including editing the property sheets for multiple like items.
Use enhanced features to better manage the workspace, scale loads and machines,
rephase the network, and create load snapshots.
3.1.1 Basic Editing Features

Basic editing functionality is provided by the Microsoft Windows environment in which PSS/ADEPT
operates. Once you have selected the network item(s), the Microsoft Windows copy, cut, paste, and
undo last edit function (via the Microsoft Windows clipboard) are available to you. The following
table summarizes access methods to this functionality.
Action on selected item(s)
In the Main Menu, choose:
Press:
Copy
Edit>Copy
Ctrl+C
Cut
Edit>Cut
Ctrl+X
Paste
Edit>Paste
Ctrl+V
Delete
Edit>Delete
Delete key
Undo last edit/deletion
Edit>Undo
Ctrl+Z
Confidential
Click button:
3-1

Overview: Editing a Network Model
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.1.2 Editing Item Properties

The property sheet is a PSS/ADEPT dialog in which you can specify engineering characteristics for
a network item. PSS/ADEPT provides unique property sheets for nodes, all types of branches and
shunt devices, the network, and the diagram. Each sheet allows you to apply item-specific features
to the selected item(s).
You can retrieve a property sheet for the selected item(s) from either the Diagram View or the Equipment List View.
To display a property sheet from the Diagram View, double-click on the desired item to select it and
display its property sheet or left-click once to select the item/device, and right-click to display the
pop-up menu. Choose Properties to display the property sheet.
To display a property sheet in the Equipment List View, expand any tree section by clicking on the
"+", and double-click on the item/device name to select it and display its property sheet or left-click
once to select the item/device, right-click to display the pop-up menu, and choose Properties to
display the property sheet.
As network items are added, removed, or modified, the changes are immediately reflected in
both the Diagram and the Tree Views.
In addition to editing the property sheet for a single selected network item, PSS/ADEPT allows you
to select several items of the same type and edit them in a group.
To modify the properties of more than one item at a time:
1. Select a group of items of the same type (e.g., a group of loads or a group of
transformers).
2. Right-click and click Properties. The appropriate property sheet displays.
When editing multiple items, PSS/ADEPT determines whether or not the values of the
quantities displayed in the property sheet are the same for each selected item. Quantities that have the same value for all selected items will be displayed in the property
sheet while those that have different values will not.
For example, suppose you select a group of loads that are all balanced and delta connected and have the same value for real power but different values for reactive power.
The property sheet will display that they are balanced, delta connected loads with the
appropriate real power level but the reactive power field will be blank.
3. When you click the OK button to accept your modifications, only those items in the
property sheet that have been changed will be saved back to the items. If you enter a
value in a blank field or modify a value, all selected items will be assigned that value.
3.1.3 Using the Grid Editor

The grid editor in PSS/ADEPT provides the ability to modify network items using a spreadsheet
style interface including cut, copy, and paste capabilities with tight synchronization to the diagram.
Network data items modified using the grid editor will be updated on the diagram. Network data
items (i.e., nodes, lines, transformers) are each represented by "worksheet" style tabs on the
spreadsheet. Removing and adding network data items is not currently supported on the grid editor.
If you want to add or remove network items, use the functions available in either the Diagram View
or the Tree View.
3-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

In this chapter you will learn to:
Open the grid editor from within PSS/ADEPT.
Modify network data using the grid editor.
Sort rows in the grid editor.
View network item properties from within the grid editor.
Export the Grid View to Excel or Text file formats.
Change the format and display settings of cells in the Grid View.
Define printing and zooming options.
3.1.3.1 Opening the Grid Editor

Choose Edit>Grid from the Main Menu. The Grid Editor View will display (Figure 3-1).
Figure 3-1. Grid Editor View
Confidential
3-3

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.1.3.2 Modifying Network Items

Each set of network items is displayed as a separated tab on the worksheet. You can navigate
through the network items by clicking the tab of interest to view the grid for specific network data
items.
To view the grid for transformers, click the Transformers tab. The Transformer Grid Editor View is
displayed (Figure 3-2)
Figure 3-2. Transformer Grid Editor View
3-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To modify data in the Grid View, click the cell that you want to modify and enter the new value. Cells
can be of the following forms: text box, number, check box, or drop down lists. A drop down list will
appear when you have clicked the cell as shown in Figure 3-3. To view the list, click the down arrow
displayed within the cell itself and select the new value.
Figure 3-3. Drop Down List

Cells that have a gray background cannot be modified and are disabled for editing.
When editing branch items, if the construction type has been selected from the construction
dictionary, impedance values will be disabled for editing. If the construction type is "user
defined", impedance values will be available for modification. To enter a "user defined" construction
type, type a character string that you want to use directly in the construction type cell.
Confidential
3-5

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To sort a column of data in the Grid View, double-click in the column heading area of the column
you want to sort. Columns will be sorted in ascending order (Figure 3-4).
Figure 3-4. Sorting Data in a Column
3-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To view the property sheet of a network item, double-click the row header, the first unlabeled column
of the Grid View (Figure 3-5). The Network Item Property sheet will display. Data modified on a Network Item Property sheet will be automatically updated in the Grid View when the OK button is
selected.
Figure 3-5. Accessing a Network Item Property Sheet
3.1.3.3 Using Copy and Paste in the Grid View

The grid editor can support copy and paste operations from one or several cells to another. The grid
editor will not support adding items using a paste operation. Paste operations on the grid will overwrite existing information only.
Additionally, it is possible to copy and paste data from the grid into another application such as
Microsoft Excel or Word.
To copy one or several cells from the grid to the clipboard:
1. Select the cell or cells that you want to copy.
2. Choose Edit>Copy from the Grid menu.
Confidential
3-7

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To paste one or several cells into the grid from the clipboard:
1. Select the cell or cells that you want to copy data into.
2. Choose Edit>Paste from the Grid menu.
3. Data will be pasted into the selected area.
3.1.3.4 Finding Data in a Cell

The Find utility can be used to locate specified text within a cell in the grid.
To locate a string:
1. Select Edit>Find to display the Find dialog (Figure 3-6).
Figure 3-6. Find Dialog

2. In the Find what: box, type in the text that you want to locate.
3. Select the direction that you want to search. "Up" will search the contents of the grid
from the selected cell up to the first row. "Down" will search the contents of the grid from
the selected cell down to the last row.
4. If you want to find the text by matching upper and lower case, check the Match case
box.
3.1.3.5 Exporting the Grid View

PSS/ADEPT can export the Grid View to a Microsoft Excel file (.xls) or Text file (.txt). This exported
file can later be used in another application for further manipulation if desired.
To export the grid view:
1. Select File>Export from the Grid menu. The File Selector displays.
2. Select the format you want to write the grid into and specify a file pathname and select
OK.
3. Import the exported file into the application of your choice.
3-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

3.1.3.6 Changing Format and Display Settings of Grid Cells

You can change the format (font, alignment, color, etc.) of one or more cells or change the look of
the grid view on your display screen.
To change the format of a cell or cells:
1. Select Edit>Format from the Grid menu. The Cell Format dialog displays (Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-7. Cell Format Dialog

This dialog will not appear if there are no cells selected in the grid.
2. Choose the settings that you want to modify from the appropriate tab.
Font tab: Use this tab to change the font size, style and color of an individual column.
Color tab: Use this tab to select the foreground, background colors of an individual cell
or column and visual display of cells.
Border tab: Use this tab to modify cell borders.
Align tab: Use this tab to set the cell alignment properties.
Confidential
3-9

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change display settings:

1. Choose Edit>Properties from the Edit menu. The Display Settings dialog will display
(Figure 3-8).
Figure 3-8. Display Settings Dialog

2. Select and modify the display settings. The Display Settings dialog has a preview
window that allows you to see the changes visually before committing them to the Grid
View.
3D-Buttons: Specifies whether to display column and row headers as buttons with
three-dimensional raised and lowered effects.
Vertical Lines: Specifies whether the vertical grid lines are displayed in the Grid View.
Horizontal Lines: Specifies whether the horizontal grid lines are displayed in the Grid
View.
Mark Current Row: Specifies whether the current cells row is marked visually in the
row header. This option has no effect if the 3D-Buttons option is not checked.
Mark Current Column: Specifies whether the current cells column is marked visually
in the column header. This option has no effect if the 3D-Buttons option is not checked.
Grid Lines Color: Select the color for the grid lines.
Fixed Lines Color: Select the color for the line that separates frozen columns or rows
and non-frozen columns or rows.
Tracking Line Color: Specifies the color of the outline when a column or row is being
re-sized.
3-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Dragging Line Color: Specifies the color of the line where a dragged column or row
will be dropped. You cannot drag rows or columns in PSS/ADEPT.
Background Color: Specifies the color of the background. The background is the
"gray area" outside of the grid itself.
Current Cell User Properties: Specify the type of border to apply to the selected cell.
3. Select OK to return to the Grid view.
3.1.3.7 Printing the Grid View

A printed copy of the Grid view can be obtained from any standard Windows printer. You can modify
the page setup and header and footer information before you print the Grid view.
To modify printer settings:
1. Select File>Print Setup to display the Printer Setup dialog.
2. Modify the desired printer settings and select OK to return to the Grid view.
To modify page setup options:
1. Select File>Page Setup from the Grid menu. The Page Setup dialog displays
(Figure 3-9). The Page Setup dialog includes a preview window that will immediately
show the effects of changing various options.
Figure 3-9. Page Setup Dialog

2. Select and modify the page setup options.
Left margin: Enter the number of inches from the edge of the printed page that you
want for the left side margin.
Right margin: Enter the number of inches from the edge of the printed page that you
want for the right side margin.
Confidential
3-11

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Top margin: Enter the number of inches from the edge of the printed page that you
want for the top side margin.
Bottom margin: Enter the number of inches from the edge of the printed page that you
want for the bottom side margin.
Row headers: Check the box to print the row headers on the printed page.
Column headers: Check the box to print the column headers on the printed page.
Print frame: Check the box to print a border frame around the outer edges of the grid
on the printed page.
Vertical lines: Check the box to print vertical lines between each row of the grid.
Horizontal lines: Check the box to print horizontal lines between each row of the grid.
Only black and white: Check the box to print the grid using only the colors of black
and white.
First rows, then Columns: Select this option to assign row, column printing order.
First columns, then Rows: Select this option to assign column, row printing order.
Center on Page, Vertical: Select this option to center the grid on the printed page vertically.
Center on Page, Horizontal: Select this option to center the grid on the printed page
horizontally.
Save settings to Profile: Check the box to save your settings to the Windows system
registry. Selecting this option allows the program to remember your previous settings
each time you open PSS/ADEPT.
3. Select OK to return to the Grid View.
3-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To modify Header/Footer options:

1. Select File>Header/Footer from the Grid menu. The Header/Footer dialog displays
(Figure 3-10).
Figure 3-10. Header/Footer Options Dialog

2. Select and modify the header/footer options:
Header and Footer: Click the Header or Footer tab to display the header/footer
options. Enter the appropriate code in the left, centered, or right justified column. The
following codes are available:
$F = the name of the document file (i.e., example.adp).
$A = the application name.
$R = the name of the worksheet tab (i.e., Nodes, Transformers, Capacitors).
$D = the current date.
$P = the current page number.
$N = the total number of pages.
Font: Click the Font button to change the font style and size for the header and/or
footer.
Distance to Frame (Header/Footer): Enter the number of inches away from the outer
edge of the grid to place the header/footer on the printed page.
First Page Number: Enter the number to define the first page of the printed output.
Enter "auto" to assign page numbers automatically starting at the number 1.
Save settings to Profile: Check the box to save your settings to the Windows system
registry. Selecting this option allows the program to remember your previous settings
each time you open PSS/ADEPT.
3. Select OK to return to the Grid View.
Confidential
3-13

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To preview the printed output, select File>Print Preview to view the printed output in a Print
Preview window (Figure 3-11).
Figure 3-11. Print Preview Window

To print the grid to the printer, select File>Print to send the Grid View to the printer.
3.1.3.8 Zooming Capabilities

The grid can support several zoom levels: zoom plus, zoom minus and zoom to 100 percent. To
zoom into the grid, click the Zoom In
button until the desired zoom level is reached. To zoom
out, click the Zoom Out
button until the desired zoom level is reached. To zoom to 100 percent,
click the Zoom 100%
button.
3-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Opening an Existing Network Diagram
3.2 Opening an Existing Network Diagram

To open an existing network diagram for editing:
1. Choose File>Open from the Main Menu. The Open dialog displays (Figure 3-12).
Figure 3-12. Open Dialog

2. Enter/select the directory and filename of the network diagram you want.
3. Click the Open button to display the diagram.
3.3 Selecting Items

PSS/ADEPT allows you to select network items directly on the diagram or in the Equipment List
View for further action such as moving, deleting, or changing properties. When you select a network
item, all associated results items (if any) are selected too. You may select any number of network
items (and their results items).
You can select:
A single item (any node, branch, or shunt device).
Multiple adjacent items.
Multiple nonadjacent items.
All items on the diagram.
All items in a defined group.
All items in an island.
All items in a defined load category.
All nodes in a given node base voltage range.
All items within a specified tree.
Confidential
3-15

Selecting Items
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.3.1 Selecting a Single Item

To select a single item for further action:
1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Select
button.

On the network diagram: Click once over the item you want to select; or position the
mouse near the item you want, click, hold, and drag mouse to draw a rectangular
bounding box around the item.
In the Equipment List View: Click once on the item you want to select.
The item that you select on the diagram or in the Equipment List View appears both in the diagram
framed by solid block "handles", and in the Equipment List View as highlighted (Figure 3-13).
Figure 3-13. Single Item Selected

If you select another item in this manner, the system deselects the currently selected item.
This is the default action.
3-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Selecting Items
3.3.2 Selecting Multiple Adjacent Items

To select multiple adjacent items for further action:
button.

On the network diagram: Position the mouse near (not over) the items you want. Click
and hold down the mouse button while dragging the mouse to draw a rectangular
bounding box around the items. All items within the boundaries of the box will be
selected.
In the Equipment List View: Click once on the first item in a range that you want to
select, hold down the Shift key, and click once on the last item in the range.
The items that you selected on the diagram or in the Equipment List View appear both in the diagram framed by solid block "handles", and in the Equipment List View as highlighted (Figure 3-14).
Figure 3-14. Multiple Adjacent Item Selection
Confidential
3-17

Selecting Items
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.3.3 Selecting Multiple Nonadjacent Items

To select multiple nonadjacent items for further action:
button.
2. On the network diagram, click once over the first item you want to select.
3. Hold down the Ctrl key and click once on each nonadjacent item you want to select.
Do not click on the item label; if you do, all selected items will be deselected.
The items that you selected on the diagram or in the Equipment List View appear both in the diagram framed by solid block "handles", and in the Equipment List View as highlighted (Figure 3-15).
Figure 3-15. Multiple Nonadjacent Item Selection
3-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Selecting Items
3.3.4 Selecting All Items

To select all items on the network diagram for further action, choose one of the following:
Choose Edit>Select>All from the Main Menu.
Use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+A.
In the Equipment List View, click on the first item, hold down the Shift key and press
the End key. All items at all levels of the network will be selected.
3.3.5 Deselecting All Items

To deselect all items that have been selected, choose one of the following:
Click once on any blank area on the diagram. If you click on a selected item, nothing
will happen.
Choose Edit>Deselect All from the Main Menu.
In the Equipment List View, click the word Network at the top of the tree.
3.3.6 Selecting a Group

To select items associated with a named group or groups:
1. Choose Edit>Select>Groups from the Main Menu. The Select Groups dialog displays
(Figure 3-16).
Figure 3-16. Select Groups Dialog

2. Click the box that precedes the group name to select it. A check mark appears in the
box.
Confidential
3-19

Selecting Items
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Select one of the following operators:

AND: Click the AND button to select only those items common to all of the groups you
selected in Step 2.
OR: Click the OR button to select all items in all of the groups you selected in Step 2.
4. Click the OK button. Your group selections will display on the diagram and in the Equipment List View.
To deselect items within a specified group(s), click once in the Deselect check box to place a check
mark there.
3.3.7 Selecting an Island

An island is a set of network items in which there is no branch connection between a node in one
set of network items with the other. Examples of islands include: An isolated set of network items
which are not connected to the main portion of the network, or two separate networks with no connection between them (two islands). An island includes all nodes, branches, and shunt devices.
In PSS/ADEPT you may have a network containing one or many islands. Selecting an island is
useful to filter the contents of an output report or to do scaling activities.
To select an island:
1. Select a node, branch, or shunt on either the Diagram or Equipment List View.
2. Choose Edit>Select>Island.
3. All network items within the island containing the selected network item will be selected
on the Diagram and Equipment List Views.
If no item is selected, the message "Island not selected" will appear. If you select more than
one item which spans two islands, the first item you chose will determine which of the islands
is selected. For example: If you choose a node in one island (Island #1) and then choose a branch
in another (Island #2), the items in Island #1 will be selected.
3-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Selecting Items
3.3.8 Selecting by Load Category

To select items associated with a load category:
1. Choose Edit>Select>Load Categories from the Main Menu. The Select Load
Categories dialog displays (Figure 3-17).
Figure 3-17. Select Load Categories Dialog

2. Click the box that precedes the load category name to select it. A check mark appears
in the box.
3. Select one of the following operators:
AND: Click the AND button to select only those items common to all of the load categories you selected in Step 2.
OR: Click the OR button to select all items in all of the load categories you selected in
Step 2.
4. Click the OK button. Your load category selections will display on the diagram and in
the Equipment List View.
To deselect items within the selected load categories, click once in the Deselect check box to place
a check mark there.
Confidential
3-21

Selecting Items
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.3.9 Selecting Nodes in a Given Base Voltage Range

To select nodes within a minimum and maximum node base voltage:
1. Choose Edit>Select>Nodes by Voltage from the Main Menu. The Select Nodes
Figure 3-18. Select Nodes Dialog

2. Assign the minimum and maximum base voltage range by selecting from the available
list of voltage levels, or by typing in a voltage level in the fields provided.
There is an indication of line-line or line-neutral representation of base voltages
directly on the right edge of the voltage range fields. This representation is the
input voltage flag defined on the Network Property sheet.
To deselect nodes within the specified range, click once in the Deselect check box to place a check
mark there.
3-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Selecting Items
3.3.10 Selecting a Tree

PSS/ADEPT allows you to select a portion of your network (tree) by specifying a starting branch
and an ending node. This option may more commonly be used to filter the contents of an output
report or to do scaling and rephasing activities.
The order in which the devices are selected is dependent on the network ordering method you specified in the Ordering Method dialog (see Chapter 2, Section 2.10).
To select a tree portion:
1. Choose Edit>Select>Tree. The Select Tree dialog displays (Figure 3-19).
Figure 3-19. Select Tree Dialog

2. Select a starting branch by choosing a branch from the available list or type in the
branch name directly in the field provided.
The FROM Node and TO Node fields will automatically update based on the starting
branch selection. The FROM Node and TO Node fields are not editable.
If you have previously selected a branch on the diagram, the starting branch field
on the dialog will be initialized to the selected branch. If you have previously
selected both a branch and a node on the diagram, the starting branch and the ending
node fields on the dialog will be initialized to the selected items.
3. Select an ending node by choosing a node from the available list or type in the node
name directly in the field provided.
4. To include all lateral branches in the selection, click once in the Include Laterals check
box to place a check mark there.
6. To deselect the network tree, click once in the Deselect check box to place a check
mark there.
Confidential
3-23

Selecting Items
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.3.11 Selection Filters

You can use selection filter to select only the items that you specify. The selection filters are applied
when you choose any selection tool to select items in the Diagram and Tree Views.
To set a selection filter:
1. Choose Edit>Selection Filters... the Selection Filters dialog displays (Figure 3-20).
Figure 3-20. Selection Filters Dialog

2. Initially all of the items will be unchecked. Unchecked items will be included in the
selection when a selection tool is used. To toggle all items from unchecked to checked
or vice versa, click the Toggle All button.
As an example, suppose you wanted to perform a select by Tree and you want to select
only Static Load items. Specify the following:
a. Toggle on all the item types by selecting Toggle All. All items will be checked.
b. Uncheck the Static Loads box.
c.
3-24
Choose OK. Select Edit>Select>Tree. Only Static Load items will be selected.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Annotating the Diagram
3.4 Annotating the Diagram

As shown in Figure 3-21, you can add descriptive text or labels to your diagram.
Figure 3-21. Diagram Showing Annotations

To add text on the diagram:
1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Annotation
button.
2. Move the pointer to the desired location in the diagram and click the left mouse button.
The text "Annotation" displays on the diagram. (You may repeat this step as many times
as needed).
3. Click the Select
button to turn off the Annotation feature.
4. Double-click the text Annotation to select it and display the Annotation Property sheet
(Figure 3-22).
Confidential
3-25

Annotating the Diagram
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 3-22. Text Annotation Property Sheet

5. Click in the Text box and type the text you want to add to the diagram. You may delete
the word "Annotation".
6. If you want to apply a special font to your text (or change the size or style of the font),
click the Font button and select a font from the list. Click the OK button to return to the
Annotation box.
7. Select the text color and/or background color.
8. Specify/modify the X,Y location where the annotation is to be displayed on the diagram.
9. Specify the text alignment and rotation.
3-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Nodes
3.5 Editing Nodes

Once youve selected a node horizontal, vertical, or point there are various editing features
available to you. For example, you may want to move, copy, resize, or delete the node(s), or change
the individual properties of the node.
3.5.1 Moving Nodes

You may want to move a node to a different position on the diagram. The easiest way to do this is
to drag the node across the diagram to a new position. You can also adjust the nodes x- and
y-coordinates on the property sheet.
To move a node:
1. Select the node you want to move. Notice the solid block "handles" that frame the
selected node.
2. Position the pointer over the selected node.
3. Click and hold down the mouse button while moving the pointer to the desired position
on the diagram. The node, its results box, and any relative node connections move with
the node.
You may move multiple nodes in the same manner. When multiple nodes are selected, they may
be moved as a group; their relative positions with respect to one another is maintained.
3.5.2 Copying Nodes

You can copy a node (along with all of its properties, except node name) to the Microsoft Windows
clipboard and paste it on the diagram or into the Equipment List View.
To copy a node:
1. Select the node you want to copy. Notice the solid block "handles" that frame the
selected node.
2. To copy the selected node to the MS Windows clipboard: choose either Edit>Copy
from the Main Menu; click the Copy
button on the File Toolbar; use the shortcut
keystroke Ctrl+C; or right-click, then select Copy.
To paste the copy onto the diagram: Choose either Edit>Paste from the Main Menu;
click the Paste
button on the File Toolbar; use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+V; or
right-click, then select Paste.
To paste the copy into the Equipment List View: Click anywhere in the Equipment
List View, and choose either Edit>Paste from the Main Menu; click the Paste button
on the File Toolbar; use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+V; or right-click, then select Paste.
The node along with most of its properties (base voltage, position and orientation, etc.) will appear
on the diagram just above and to the right of the selected node, and in the Equipment List View at
the end of the Nodes list. To see the node properties, double-click on the newly added node to view
its property sheet. Since all node label names must be unique, PSS/ADEPT appends a tilde (~) to
Confidential
3-27

Editing Nodes
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
the node name. If you make yet another copy of the same node, PSS/ADEPT appends two tildes
(~~) to the node name, and so on.
Figure 3-23 shows a node named BUS1 that was copied and pasted onto the diagram. The Node
Property sheet shows the same information as for BUS1, with the new node name, BUS1~.
Figure 3-23. Copying and Pasting a Node
3-28
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Nodes
3.5.3 Resizing Nodes

In a diagram, only node items can be resized.
To resize a node:
1. Select the node. Notice the solid block "handles" that frame the selected node.
2. Click and hold down the mouse button on one of the solid block handles. Notice that
the pointer changes to a <--> to indicate the directions in which the handle may be
dragged.
3. Drag the node to its new size (the node will change size as you drag) and release the
mouse button when the node has reached the size you want.
3.5.4 Deleting Nodes

You can delete a node from the Diagram View only after all branches and shunt device items
attached to it have been removed.
To delete a node:
1. Select the node. Notice the solid block "handles" that frame the selected node.
2. Choose Edit>Delete from the Main Menu, or press the Delete key.
3.5.5 Toggling Node Symbols

Node symbols may be drawn as a point, horizontal busbar, or vertical busbar. You can toggle the
node symbol without having to view the Node Property sheet.
To toggle node symbols:
1. Select the node(s) that you want to change on the diagram.
2. Right-click and select Toggle>Node Symbol(s).
Confidential
3-29

Editing Nodes
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.5.6 Changing Node Properties

PSS/ADEPT provides you with the flexibility to adjust the properties of an individual node. For
instance, you may want to add a more descriptive node name, apply a different base voltage to the
node, enter comments about the node, assign the node to a group, adjust the nodes position or
orientation, or hide the node on the diagram.
You can also adjust the properties of a group of like nodes, or override the group properties for
selected nodes.
To change the properties for a node or group of nodes:
1. Double-click on the node to select it and display the Node Property sheet, or, to select
a group of nodes, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Node Property
sheet (Figure 3-24).
Figure 3-24. Node Property Sheet

2. Press the Tab key to move to the next field or click in the field of interest, and add or
change information in the fields on the Node Property sheet as needed:
If you have selected a group of nodes, the fields in the Node Property sheet will
be blank if the nodes in the selected group have different values (e.g., Name,
Base voltage, Description). To assign the same values to each node in the designated
group, select or enter a value in the field. You cannot assign the same Name to all
nodes in the group, and you cannot alter Position and Orientation information.
Name: Each network item in the PSS/ADEPT network must have a unique name identifier. You may enter an alphanumeric character name of up to 12 characters. The node
name may not contain embedded blanks.
3-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Nodes
Base Voltage (kV): Base voltage is the node base voltage in either line-to-line or lineto-neutral. If the node base voltage is not specified (for example, if you import a raw
data file that does not contain voltage information), the base voltage of the node
defaults to the system standard base voltage that was specified on the Network Property sheet (System tab).
Description: You may enter up to 40 characters to describe the node. A typical entry
in this field would signal where a node has a generator or a machine, and/or the type
of generator or machine located at a given node.
Position: Use the x and y boxes to set the x- and y-coordinates of the node in the diagram. These coordinates are arbitrary and define the location of the network nodes relative to the diagram origin (0,0), which is located at the bottom left corner of the
diagram.
Type: Click one of the options to set the type of the selected node on the diagram. A
network node can be presented as a point or as a busbar.
Rotation: If the node type is a busbar, enter the desired rotation. Horizontal busbars
have a rotation equal to zero degrees. Vertical busbars have a rotation of 90. Any rotation may be entered including fractions (e.g., 75.5).
Label configuration: If a point type node is specified, you can select where the node
label (e.g., name) is placed. Select from the list box provided to place the node label in
the desired position.
3. To display the node on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a
check mark there.
4. To display node results on the diagram, click in the Results check box to place a check
mark.
5. To add the node to an existing group(s), click the Groups button and click the box that
precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment.
6. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the node properties.
Confidential
3-31

Editing Branches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.6 Editing Branches

Once youve selected a branch type a line, switch, transformer, or series capacitor you may
want to move or copy the branch, or change some of its properties. PSS/ADEPT provides several
editing features to help you modify branch properties.
3.6.1 Moving Branches

You can move the whole branch, one branch connection point or "handle", or both branch connection points to a new node. Figure 3-25 shows several examples of moving a branch.
NODE1
NODE1
Original
Position
Original
Position
Original
Position
Final
Position
NODE2
Moving a complete line
NODE1
Final
Position
Final
Position
NODE2
Moving a single handle
NODE2
Moving to a different node
Figure 3-25. Moving a Branch

To move the whole branch:
1. Select the branch. Notice the "hollow" block handles on either end of the branch.
2. Position the pointer over the branch, not on a branch handle.
3. Click and drag the branch to its new position. The branch segment ends connected to
the nodes will not move.
To move a branch connection point to a new node:
1. Select the branch. Notice the "hollow" block handles on either end of the branch.
2. Position the pointer over the handle you want to move. Notice that the pointer changes
to <--> to indicate the directions in which the handle may be dragged.
3. Click and drag the handle (the mouse pointer will change to a cross hair, +) all the way
to the new node. The branch will not appear to move until the pointer passes over
another node to which it is not already connected. When this happens, the branch will
snap to its new connection point.
To move the second branch handle to a new connection point, repeat Steps 2 and
3. You will not be able to connect both ends of the branch to the same node.
3-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Branches
To reposition the branch connection point on the same node:

1. Select the branch. Notice the white block handles on either end of the branch.
2. Position the pointer over the handle you want to move. Notice that the pointer changes
to a <--> to indicate the directions in which the handle may be dragged.
3. Click and drag the handle (the mouse pointer will appear as a cross hair, +) along the
node to the desired connection point.
3.6.2 Copying Branches

You can copy a branch (along with all of its properties, except the branch name) to the Microsoft
Windows clipboard and paste it on the diagram or into the Equipment List View.
To copy a branch:
1. Select the branch you want to copy. Notice the white block handles on either end of the
branch.
2. To copy the selected branch to the MS Windows clipboard: Choose either
Edit>Copy from the Main Menu; click the Copy
button on the File Toolbar; use the
shortcut keystroke Ctrl+C; or right-click, then select Copy.
click the Paste
The branch along with most of its properties will appear on the diagram just above and to the right
of the selected branch, and in the Equipment List View at the end of the Branches list. To see the
branch properties, double-click on the newly added branch to view its property sheet. Since all
branch label names must be unique, PSS/ADEPT appends a tilde (~) to the branch name. If you
make yet another copy of the same node, PSS/ADEPT appends two tildes (~~) to the branch name,
and so on.
3.6.3 Deleting Branches

You can delete a branch from the Diagram View.
To delete a branch:
1. Select the branch. Notice the white block handles on either end of the branch.
Confidential
3-33

Editing Branches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.6.4 Changing Line Properties

One type of branch in PSS/ADEPT is a line or cable that connects between two existing nodes.
To change the properties for a line:
1. Double-click on the line to select it and display the Line Property sheet, or, to select a
line or group of lines, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Line Property
Figure 3-26. Line Property Sheet: Main Tab

2. Click the Main tab and select/enter the properties for a line or cable:
Name: Each item in the PSS/ADEPT network must have a unique name identifier. The
line name has no relation to the FROM and TO nodes identified in the upper right of the
Line Property sheet. The actual FROM and TO nodes provide network connectivity
information and may not be modified.
Phasing: The phasing value indicates which phase conductors are present in the network model. In PSS/ADEPT, the available phasing values are specified using any combination of the three characters A, B, and C (e.g., ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B, and C). You
must select one of the phasing values from the list; you cannot enter your own values.
If XYZ phasing was specified in a PSS/U raw data file, PSS/ADEPT will convert
X to A, Y to B, and Z to C. When the diagram property to display phase markers
is selected, phasing is indicated on the one-line diagram where phase A is red, phase
B is yellow, and phase C is blue.
3-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Branches
Line Length: The line length is the actual length of the branch. It is important that the
line length is consistent with the impedance units. For example, if the line length is
given in miles, then the impedance per unit length for the line must be specified in ohms
per mile. This is important because line length is used to calculate the total line
impedance.
Construction Type: Construction type is a 1- to 10-character alphanumeric identifier
that refers to a construction type defined in the Construction Dictionary. You may select
one of the construction types available in the Construction Dictionary, or you may enter
your own (user-defined) unique construction type.
If you select a construction type from the list box, the impedance values defined with
that type in the Construction Dictionary will be displayed in the Impedance area of the
Line Property sheet; the values will not be editable. If you enter your own construction
type, you must enter the impedance values associated with the line in the Impedance
section of the Line Property sheet. PSS/ADEPT will save user-defined construction
types and their associated impedances to the PSS/U raw data file (*.dat) and/or the
native PSS/ADEPT native binary file (*.adp). User-defined line types are not saved to
the construction dictionary.
Impedance: Both positive- and zero-sequence resistance and reactance must be
specified in ohm per unit length. The positive-sequence and zero-sequence charging
admittance must be entered in micro-Siemens per unit length. Unit length is user
defined, and must coincide with the unit length used to specify the line/cable length.
You will not be able to edit these fields if you selected a construction type from the Construction Dictionary. If you created your own construction type, you must enter the
impedance and admittance values; if you dont enter any values, PSS/ADEPT will
default to the displayed values.
Ratings: The line rating limits (amps) are used to determine whether a line is overloaded. You may specify up to four rating limits either obtained directly from the Construction Dictionary or when a user-defined construction type is indicated, your own
rating limits.
3. To display the line on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check
mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected line is in service, click the In service check box, which is
the default setting. If In service is not checked, the line/cable is out of service and is
disconnected at both ends.
5. To display results for this line on the diagram, click once in the Results check box to
place a check mark there.
6. To add the selected line to an existing group(s), click the Groups button and click the
box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the
assignment.
7. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the line properties.
Confidential
3-35

Editing Branches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the harmonic properties for a line (visible if you are licensed for the harmonics module):
1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a line (Figure 3-27).
Figure 3-27. Line Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab

Name: The name of the line. This property is for information only and is not editable.
Click the Main tab to modify this item.
FROM node: The name of the FROM node to which this line is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable.
TO node: The name of the TO node to which this line is connected. This property is for
information only and is not editable.
Type: Select the type of line representation from the drop-down list.
3-36
IEEE Line Represents an IEEE line. The modeling of an IEEE Line is described
in Chapter 8, Section 8.9.5.
IEEE Cable Represents an IEEE cable. The modeling of an IEEE Line is

described in Chapter 8, Section 8.9.5.
Custom Represents a user-defined line model for harmonics. Selection of this

item will allow you to define the impedance exponents.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Branches
For custom types, enter the requested values for the following:
Positive sequence resistance
Positive sequence reactance
Positive sequence susceptance
Zero sequence resistance
Zero sequence reactance
Zero sequence susceptance
To change the reliability properties for a line (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA module):
1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a line (Figure 3-28).
2. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.2 for further instructions.
Figure 3-28. Line Property Sheet: DRA Tab
Confidential
3-37

Editing Branches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.6.5 Changing Switch Properties

In PSS/ADEPT, a switch is a zero-impedance branch that connects between two existing nodes.
The load flow assumes there is no difference between a switch and a tie switch. Tie switches are
provided for compatibility with PSS/Us activity MERG.
To change the properties for a switch:
1. Double-click on the switch to select it and display the Switch Property sheet, or, to
select a switch or a group of switches, right-click, and choose Properties to display the
Switch Property sheet (Figure 3-29).
Figure 3-29. Switch Property Sheet: Main Tab

2. Add or change information in the prompts on the Switch Property sheet as needed:
switch name has no relation to the FROM and TO nodes identified in the upper right of
the Switch Property sheet. The specified FROM and TO nodes provide network connectivity information and may not be modified. If you modify a switch name, the names
of the nodes between which it is connected will not change.
must select one of the phasing values from the list; you cannot create your own values.
3-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Branches
Switch ID: Switch ID provides further identification for the specified switch. This identifier may be from one to three characters in length. This field is provided for PSS/U
compatibility only.
Construction type: Construction type is a 1- to 10-character alphanumeric identifier
your own (user-defined) unique construction type. Though switches have zero impedance, rating values are retrieved from the Construction Dictionary and used to calculate
whether a switch is overloaded.
Ratings: The switch rating limit (amps) is used to determine overloads. You may specify up to four switch rating limits from the Construction Dictionary or your own userdefined limits in the case where a user-defined construction type was specified.
Tie switch: Click the Tie switch box (a check mark displays) to specify a tie switch.
For PSS/ADEPT calculations, there is no difference between a switch and a tie switch.
Tie switches are provided for PSS/U compatibility only.
Connection circuit: If the Tie switch box is checked, you may enter a one- to eightcharacter connection circuit identifier. The connection circuit identifier is used to specify
the circuit to which the tie switch is connected and is provided for compatibility with
PSS/U.
Status: The switch status may be either open or closed. If the switch is open, it is
assumed that the switch branch is disconnected at both ends.
TOPO status: TOPO (Tie Open Point Optimization) status is only used with the
optional TOPO module to specify whether the switches are allowed to operate during
a TOPO analysis. In TOPO, if the switches are unlocked they are free to open and
close while the TOPO algorithm is executing. If the status is set to locked, the switches
will remain in their current position, either open or closed.
3. To display the switch on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a
check mark there.
4. Place a check mark in the box labeled Results to display results for this switch on the
diagram.
5. To add the selected switch to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click
the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the
assignment.
6. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the switch properties.
Confidential
3-39

Editing Branches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the reliability properties for a switch (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA module):
1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a switch (Figure 3-30).
Figure 3-30. Switch Property Sheet: DRA Tab
3-40
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Branches
3.6.6 Changing Transformer Properties

The transformer is another type of branch that connects between two existing nodes. PSS/ADEPT
allows you to adjust the transformers physical and electrical characteristics.
To change the properties for a transformer:
1. Double-click the transformer to select it and display the Transformer Property sheet, or,
to select a transformer or a group of transformers, right-click, and choose Properties
to display the Transformer Property sheet (Figure 3-31).
Notice that there are five tabs for this property sheet: Main, Tap Control, Regulation, Harmonics and DRA.
Figure 3-31. Transformer Property Sheet: Main Tab

2. In the Main tab, enter/select the properties for your transformer:
transformer name has no relation to the FROM and TO nodes identified in the upper
right of the Transformer Property sheet. The FROM and TO nodes may not be modified
on the property sheet.
Phasing: Phasing is specified on the FROM side of the transformer (e.g., for a wyedelta transformer, the wye side is the FROM side). When specifying phasing, the
Confidential
3-41

Editing Branches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
designation A, B, and C mean the first winding, second winding, and third winding.
Thus, if a wye-delta (+30) transformer with A phasing is specified, the winding on the
wye side of the transformer from phase A to ground exists, and the winding on the delta
side from C to A is installed. Conversely, if a wye-delta (-30) transformer with A phasing is specified, the winding on the wye side of the transformer is still phase A to
ground, but the winding on the delta side from A to B is installed. Refer to Appendix A,
Section A.1.2 for more information about phasing.
Type: Select the transformer connection type:
Wye-Wye
Wye-Delta (30)
Delta-Wye (30)
Delta Auto Regulator
Delta-Delta
Wye Auto Regulator
Center Tapped Delta-Delta
Center Tapped Delta-Wye (30)
Wye-Wye with Phase Shift
Wye Auto
Z Wye (30)
Z Wye (150)
Wye-Wye +180
In addition, three-winding transformers, three-legged core transformers, and grounding

transformers may be modeled by referring to Appendix A, Sections A.2.3 through
A.2.7.
Tapped node: Specify which of the two connecting nodes has the load tap-changing
capability. In PSS/ADEPT most transformers have the taps on the TO side, so changing the tapped node may also cause the transformer type to flip, e.g., a wye-delta transformer will become a delta-wye.
Nameplate rating (kVA/phase): The transformer size is specified in kVA per phase.
For single-phase transformers, the value is usually the nameplate rating; for threephase transformers, the entered value will usually be one-third of the transformers
nameplate rating. See Appendix A, Section A.2.1 for rules and hints when specifying
transformer size.
Phase shift (deg): Specify in degrees the angle of phase shift. This field will be
enabled only when a wye-wye with phase shift transformer type is selected.
Voltage: By default, the transformer voltages will be set to the FROM and TO node
base voltages. In some cases, the transformer voltages will not match the node
3-42
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Branches
voltages, e.g., a 13.8 kV transformer being used on a 13.2 kV system. To set the transformer voltage independently:
a. Place a check mark in the box labeled User defined. The FROM and TO
voltage fields will become enabled.
b. Change the FROM side and/or TO side voltage of the transformer.
Impedance: All transformers require a leakage impedance; some units also require a
second impedance to be specified. A few of the transformers also require a second
impedance; the field for entering this second impedance will be enabled when it is
needed. Some transformers can have grounding impedances on the FROM, TO or on
both sides. Again, the required fields will be enabled when needed. The impedance values needed for each type of transformer, is shown below.
Type
Required Values
Wye-Wye, Wye-Wye with phase shift, Leakage Impedance

Wye-Wye +180
FROM Side Grounding Impedance
TO Side Grounding Impedance
Wye-Delta (30)
Leakage Impedance
Delta-Wye (30)
Leakage Impedance
Delta-Delta, Delta Auto Regulator
Leakage Impedance
Wye Auto, Wye Auto Regulator
Leakage Impedance
Grounding Impedance
Center Tapped Delta-Delta
Full-winding Leakage Impedance

Half-winding Leakage Impedance
Center Tapped Delta-Wye (30)
Full-winding Leakage Impedance

Half-winding Leakage Impedance
Z-Wye (30, 180)
Leakage Impedance
Zero Sequence Impedance
Leakage impedance, Full-winding leakage impedance, Half-winding leakage

impedance, Zero-sequence impedance: Enter the value in per-unit (pu) based on the
Nameplate rating that was specified.
Grounding impedance: Enter resistance (R) and reactance (X) in Ohms. Setting R =
X = 0 results in the winding solidly grounded.
Ratings: The four values are pu of the specified transformer nameplate rating. They
are used to check transformer overload after a loadflow. The four values can be manually entered or come from a construction dictionary.
3. To display the transformer on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box (on the
Main tab) to place a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected transformer is in service, click the In service check box,
which is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the transformer is out of
service and is disconnected at both ends.
Confidential
3-43

Editing Branches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
5. Place a check mark in the box labeled Results to display results for this transformer on
the diagram.
6. Click the Tap Control tab (Figure 3-32) and enter/select the Tap Control properties for
your transformer.
Figure 3-32. Transformer Property Sheet: Tap Control Tab

Tap Adjustment: Select the load tap changing operation. Your choices include:
Taps in the phases are adjusted independently of each other. For Z-Wye transformers independent tap adjustment cannot be selected
Taps in all phases are ganged together and have the same setting. The first
set of taps control the operation; the others follow. For example, with a phase
ABC Wye-Wye transformer, the phase A taps adjust to control the phase A
voltage of the regulated node.
Taps locked in present position in which the transformer taps will remain
"locked" in their current tap position for all subsequent loadflows.
Tap Settings: Specify the present position of the three taps, the Max and Min possible
tap settings, and the tap change increment (step). Manually, you can set the taps to
any value within the possible range; they do not have to be set at one of the increments.
However, if the taps are adjusted during any subsequent loadflow they will moved so
3-44
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Branches
they correspond to one of the increments. After setting the taps manually, if you do not
want them moved during a subsequent loadflow, the "Taps locked in present position"
option should be selected.
For auto wye transformers, the load changing tap side can be designated as either the
TO or FROM side. The taps on the other side can then be used as no load taps.
Time delay: There are situations where, two or more transformers, two or more capacitor banks, or a combination of transformers and capacitor banks may be regulated by
voltage at some location in a network. In such situations, the transformer tap (capacitor
bank) controllers may fight one another trying to control voltage. The time delay is used
to prevent these controllers from interacting by defining the order in which they attempt
control. Controllers with a short time delay will operate before controllers with a long
time delay. A short time delay (i.e., zero) is generally assigned to transformer tap controller closest to the source; increasingly longer time delays are assigned to downstream controllers. In this way, upstream transformers are first used to correct voltage
problems. Only if unsuccessful will controllers downstream of the first be used. Time
delay is a floating-point number (e.g., 1.5). No specific units are assumed.
7. Click the Regulation tab (Figure 3-33) and enter/select additional Tap Control properties for your transformer:
Figure 3-33. Transformer Property Sheet: Regulation Tab
Confidential
3-45

Editing Branches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Regulated node: Specify the node at which the voltage is to be monitored/regulated

to determine if tap changing is necessary. If the specified regulated node is not the
transformer TO or FROM node, specify whether the regulated node is on the tapped or
untapped side of the transformer so that the tap controller will know which way to move
the taps during voltage regulation. If the specified regulated node is not the transformer
FROM or TO node, then the compensating impedance, discussed further below, is
ignored. When the specified regulated node is not the FROM or TO node, the voltage
at the specified node is regulated directly. It is easy for a computer program to look at
the voltage of a distance node and do the direct regulation. However, this can be done
in the field only if there is some form of communication to send the information back to
the tap controllers.
Controlled Voltage: Specify the range in which the transformer will attempt to control
the voltage at the regulated node. If the regulated node is on the side of the transformer
that has a wye winding, the phase-to-ground voltage will be monitored to determine if
tap changing is necessary. If a regulated node is on the side with a delta winding, the
phase-to-phase voltage will be monitored. Normally, you set the range of the controlled
voltage to a value greater than the minimum tap step.
Compensating Impedance: The compensating impedance is designed to be used
with the auto regulator transformers, either wye or delta; it is enable only for these two
transformer types. The value of resistance and reactance entered should be the dial
setting of the actual regulator; for this reason the units are volts (V). The PT ratio and
CT rating entered should also be that of the actual regulator.
Compensating Impedance Calculation: This is a separate activity that calculates
auto regulator dial settings for you; it is enabled only for the wye auto or delta auto regulator transformers. The regulator CT and PT values should be filled in before doing
the calculation. The downstream node (load center node) is selected and the position
of the load center node in relation to the transformer (on the TO side or FROM side) is
designated. Clicking the Calculate Impedance button results in the R and X values
being filled in. Rotating impedances by 30 for the delta auto regulators is done automatically; the values returned by this activity are meant to be the actual dial settings.
At the present time, the single-phase and three-phase delta auto regulators in
PSS/ADEPT are connected lagging; leading regulators will be added in a later version.
Thus the compensating impedance and its calculation can be used only for lagging
connected regulators at the present time. If an open delta auto regulator is specified
(delta auto regulator with AB, BC, or CA phasing), then in PSS/ADEPT the first phase
is connected lagging and the second phase is leading. For example, with a delta auto
regulator with AB phasing specified, the first (A) phase is connected lagging (from A to
B) and the second (B) phase is leading (from C to B). In Figure 3-34, you can see pictures of the configuration. If you have an open delta regulator and perform the impedance calculation, you will see that the calculated compensating impedances are
different for the two phases; the difference is because the 30 impedance rotation is
opposite for leading and lagging regulators.
3-46
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Branches
Figure 3-34. Delta Autoregulator with AB Phasing

At the present time, PSS/ADEPT calculates the compensating impedance only
for the wye and delta autoregulators. This compensating impedance is then used,
in a loadflow, to calculate a synthetic transformer output voltage. This synthetic voltage,
an estimate of the voltage at the remote load center, is used in the transformer tap
changing.
Although the automatic calculation is available only for the two transformers mentioned
above, it can also be used for any transformer with a wye or Z winding on the load center side. If you are using a wye or Z transformer (not a regulator) and want PSS/ADEPT
to perform the compensating impedance calculation for you, momentarily insert a wye
autoregulator transformer on the downstream side of the transformer and have
PSS/ADEPT make the calculation. Copy this value into the Transformer Property
sheet, delete the autoregulator and restore the original connection.
8. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the transformer properties.
Confidential
3-47

Editing Branches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the harmonic properties for a transformer (visible if you are licensed for the harmonics
module):
1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a transformer
(Figure 3-35).
Figure 3-35. Transformer Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab

Name: The name of the line. This property is for information only and is not editable.
Click the Main tab to modify this item.
FROM node: The name of the FROM node to which this transformer is connected. This
property is for information only and is not editable.
To node: The name of the TO node to which this transformer is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable.
Type: Select the type of line representation from the drop-down list.
3-48
IEEE Model Represents an IEEE line. The modeling of an IEEE Line is described
in Chapter 8, Section 8.9.6.
Custom Represents a user-defined line model for harmonics. Selection of this

item will allow you to define the impedance exponents.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Branches
For custom types, enter the requested values for the following:
Grounding sequence resistance
Grounding sequence reactance
To change the reliability properties for a transformer (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA
module):
1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a transformer (Figure 3-36).
Figure 3-36. Transformer Property Sheet: DRA Tab
Confidential
3-49

Editing Branches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.6.7 Changing Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties

In PSS/ADEPT, a series capacitor/reactor is specified as a connection between two existing nodes.
For series capacitor branches, both the positive- and zero-sequence reactance should be negative
and equal to each other. The resistance will normally equal zero.
For series reactor branches, both the positive- and zero-sequence reactance should be positive. If
the reactor is three-phase with a coupling between the phases, the zero-sequence reactance value
may be different than the positive-sequence value. For the reactor, winding resistance can be
modeled using equal values of positive- and zero-sequence resistance.
To change the properties for a series capacitor/reactor:
1. Double-click the series capacitor to select it and display the Series Capacitor Property
sheet, or, to select a series capacitor/reactor, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Series Capacitor Property sheet (Figure 3-37).
Figure 3-37. Series Capacitor/Reactor Property Sheet: Main Tab

2. Enter/select the properties for your series capacitor/reactor:
series capacitor/reactor name has no relation to the FROM and TO nodes identified in
the upper right of the Series Capacitor Property sheet. The specified FROM and TO
nodes provide network connectivity information and may not be modified. If you modify
3-50
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Branches
a series capacitor/reactor name, the names of the nodes between which it is connected
will not change.
must select one of the phasing values from the list; you cannot create your own values.
Nameplate rating (kVA/phase): The nameplate rating is the per-phase kVA rating of
the series capacitor or reactor. It is used only (along with the FROM node base voltage)
to convert the pu impedances into ohm.
Impedance: Positive-sequence and zero-sequence resistance and reactance for
series capacitors and reactors is specified in pu on the kVA base of the series capacitor/ reactor. You will not be able to edit these fields if you selected a construction type
from the Construction Dictionary. If you created your own construction type, you will be
able to enter impedance values.
Ratings: The series capacitor/reactor rating limits (pu on series capacitor/reactor kVA
base) are used to determine whether the series device is overloaded. You may specify
up to four series capacitor/reactor rating limits from the Construction Dictionary or your
own user-defined limits in the case where a user-defined construction type has been
specified.
3. To display the series capacitor/reactor on the diagram, click once in the Visible check
box to place a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected series capacitor/reactor is in service, click the In service
check box, which is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the series capacitor/reactor is out of service and is disconnected at both ends.
5. Check the box labeled Results to display results for this series capacitor/reactor on the
diagram.
6. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the series capacitor/reactor properties.
Confidential
3-51

Editing Branches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the harmonic properties for a series capacitor/reactor:

1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a series capacitor/reactor
(Figure 3-38).
Figure 3-38. Series Capacitor/Reactor Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab

Name: The name of the series capacitor/reactor. This property is for information only
and is not editable. Click the Main tab to modify this item.
FROM node: The name of the FROM node to which this series capacitor/reactor is
connected. This property is for information only and is not editable.
TO node: The name of the TO node to which this series capacitor/reactor is connected.
This property is for information only and is not editable.
Impedance Exponents: Enter the impedance exponents for the following:
3-52
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Branches
To change the reliability properties for a series capacitor/reactor (visible only if you are licensed for
the DRA module):
1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a series capacitor/reactor
(Figure 3-39).
Figure 3-39. Series Capacitor/Reactor Property Sheet: DRA Tab
Confidential
3-53

Editing Shunt Devices
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.7 Editing Shunt Devices

Once youve selected a shunt device type a static load, source, induction machine, synchronous
machine, capacitor, or fault you may want to move or copy the device, or change some of its
properties. PSS/ADEPT provides editing features to help you modify shunt device properties.
3.7.1 Moving Shunt Devices

You can move the head of the shunt device, and the shunt devices node handle to another position
on the same node or to a new node. Figure 3-40 shows several ways to move a shunt device.
NODE2
NODE1
NODE1
NODE1
Figure 3-40. Moving a Shunt Device

To move the head of the shunt device:
1. Right-click in the Diagram View, select Toggle>AutoPosition to set AutoPosition flag
to "Off".
2. Click over the shunt device you want to move. Notice the solid block "handles" that
frame the selected shunt device.
3. Drag the selected shunt device to the desired position on the diagram. The shunt
device, and its results box move.
To move a node handle of the shunt device:
to "Off".
2. Click over the handle you want to move.
3. Click on the line segment between the symbol and the node to display the port symbol.
4. Select the port symbol, hold the Ctrl key down and drag the selected node handle to
the desired position on the same node.
3-54
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To move a node handle of the shunt device to a new node:

to "Off".
2. Click on the shunt item you want to move, the port symbol will be displayed on the
node.
3. Hold the Ctrl key down and drag the port to a new node.
3.7.2 Copying Shunt Devices

You can copy a shunt device (along with all of its properties) to the Microsoft Windows clipboard
and paste it into another application (e.g., Microsoft Word).
To copy a shunt device:
1. Select the shunt device you want to copy. Notice the block handles around the shunt
device.
2. To copy the selected shunt device to the MS Windows clipboard: Choose either
Edit>Copy from the Main Menu; click the Copy
button on the File Toolbar; use the
shortcut keystroke Ctrl+C; or right-click, then select Copy.
3. Click on the node to which you want to copy the shunt device.
click the Paste
The shunt device and most of its properties will appear on the diagram just above and to the right
of the selected shunt device, and in the Equipment List View at the end of the Shunts list. To see
the shunt device properties, double-click on the newly added shunt to view its property sheet. Since
all shunt label names must be unique, PSS/ADEPT appends a tilde (~) to the shunt name. If you
make yet another copy of the same shunt, PSS/ADEPT appends two tildes (~~) to the shunt name,
and so on.
3.7.3 Deleting Shunt Devices

You can delete a shunt from the Diagram View.
To delete a shunt:
1. Select the shunt. Notice the solid block handles around the shunt.
Confidential
3-55

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.7.4 Changing Static Load Properties

In PSS/ADEPT, load data are entered in nominal load values of kW and kvar for each phase if rectangular display or S(kVA) and pf leading/lagging if polar display. If the load is balanced, only the
total load over all phases is required.
There is no limitation on the number of loads at a node or the number of loads in each category.
Grounded loads are connected A-neutral, B-neutral, C-neutral. Ungrounded loads are connected
A-B, B-C, C-A and are entered in fields provided for Phase A, B, and C, respectively. PSS/ADEPT
does not support MWh, kWh, or demand loads; see Appendix A for limitations.
To change the properties for a static load:
1. Double-click on the static load to select it and display the Static Load Property sheet or,
to select a static load, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Static Load
Property sheet (Figure 3-41).
Figure 3-41. Static Load Property Sheet: Main Tab

2. Enter/select the properties for the static load:
Name: Specify a unique name for the load in the PSS/ADEPT diagram. The load name
has no relation to the node to which the load is connected. The node to which the load
is connected displays on the property sheet; you may not modify the node.
Type: Specify one of the three available load types: constant power, constant impedance, or constant current. The actual load consumed depends upon bus voltage and
3-56
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

available generation and the type of load specified at a node. Refer to Chapter 4,
Section 4.4.3 for information on static load modeling in a load flow solution.
Load balance: Specify the load as either balanced or unbalanced. Balanced loads
require you to enter total values over all phases.
Load connection: Specify the load connection as either grounded or ungrounded. Do
not apply grounded-wye loads to a node where no neutral wire exists (i.e., ungrounded
delta system). In this situation, specify a delta-connected load.
Load Values: If the load is balanced, enter total kW, kvar (rectangular), or total apparent power S and a leading/lagging pf (polar). PSS/ADEPT will automatically divide the
total load specified by the number of phases present. If the load is unbalanced, enter
the kW, kvar (rectangular), or S and pf leading/lagging (polar) for phases A, B, and C.
Grounding impedance: Enter the grounding resistance and reactance of the load
(ohms).
3. To display the static load on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place
a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected static load is in service, click the In service check box,
which is the default setting.
5. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this static load on the
diagram.
6. To add the selected load to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click the
assignment.
7. To add the selected load to an existing load category(ies), click the Categories button,
and click the box that precedes the load category you want. Click the OK button to
accept the assignment.
8. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the static load properties.
Confidential
3-57

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the harmonic properties for a static load:

1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a static load
(Figure 3-42).
Figure 3-42. Static Load Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab

Name: The name of the static load. This property is for information only and is not editable. Click the Main tab to modify this item.
Node: The name of the node to which this load is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable.
Impedance Exponents: Enter the requested values for the following groups:
Static Series Fraction, Resistance and Reactance.
Static Parallel Fraction, Resistance and Reactance.
Rotating Fraction, Capacity, Resistance, Reactance, Locked R and Locked X.
Grounding Resistance and Reactance.
For additional details on the modeling of a static load in harmonics analysis, please refer to Chapter
8, Section 8.9.1.
3-58
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To change the reliability properties for a static load (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA
module):
1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a static load (Figure 3-43).
Figure 3-43. Static Load Property Sheet: DRA Tab
Confidential
3-59

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.7.5 Changing MWh Load Properties

Consumer load data may be specified in PSS/ADEPT by entering MWh loads. General consumer
loads are converted to kW when an analysis solution is performed and when you choose to scale
MWh loads in the network. The REA demand equation from the REA Bulletin 45-2 is used to determine the kW value. This kW value is referred to as the resultant kW. The REA Bulletin 45-2 Demand
Tables contain an empirical formula for determining demand from the number of consumers and the
kWh/consumer/month. It is used in the program as follows:
kW = A * B * SCAL
where:
A
2
C* 1.0 0.4*C + 0.4* C + 40
The number of consumers.
0.005925 * E0.885
kWh/consumer/month
SCAL
A factor to scale down the load in each line section so that the sum of the line
section loads is equal to the REA Bulletin 45-2 formula applied to the total number of consumers in the feeder and the total kWh/consumer/month for the
feeder.
The B Factor is the factor used to determine the diversity of load/consumer. The default factor of
0.885 is in the REA demand equation shown in the REA Bulletin 45-2 and may be changed in
Analysis Options>General.
Consumer loads are entered into the program by specifying the number of consumers and megawatt-hours. The load data is the total amount for the line section or node. The megawatt-hours are
the total kilowatt-hours/1000 used by the consumers for a period of one month.
Consumer loads are converted to kW on a per phase basis regardless of whether the loads are
assigned to a node as balanced or unbalanced. If the loads are entered as balanced loads, then
the program divides the loads evenly among the available phases and converts them to kW with
the REA demand equation. Resultant kW values must be set to zero in order for a re-calculation to
occur. To do this, use the multiple edit functionality to set selected MWh load data at one time.
Because the conversion of general consumer loads to kW is based on the total number of consumers and energy consumed as well as the loads of the individual line sections, the boundaries
are defined by groups. If a group served by a substation is modeled in the network, then each
should be assigned its own group name. Each substation loading that is modeled may be scaled to
the actual metered value based on the total consumer loads of its own service area (group).
When MWh load is present in the system, the consumer load is converted to kW via a non-linear
formula. The formula is linearized, by multiplying the kW by a scale factor. This scale factor is calculated using the following formula:
Scale factor = kW factor kW individual
kW factor = a b
The node group where the MWh load is connected will be used to define these sections.All nodes
in the same group are linearized as one section with each group being linearized separately. In
some cases you may want to ignore the group boundaries and linearize the system as a whole. To
linearize the whole system, select Analysis>Options and choose to linearize by Tree.
3-60
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To change the properties for a MWh load:

1. Double-click on the MWh load to select it and display the MWh Load Property sheet,
or, select a MWh load, right-click, and choose Properties to display the MWh Load
Figure 3-44. Mwh Load Property Sheet

2. Enter/select the properties for the MWh load.
Name: Specify a unique name for the load in the PSS/ADEPT diagram. The load name
has no relation to the node to which the load is connected. The node where this load is
connected is displayed on the property sheet; you may not modify its value.
Load balance: Specify the load as either balanced or unbalanced. Balanced loads
require you to specify total values over all phases.
Load connection: Specify the load connection as either grounded (Wye) or
ungrounded (Delta).
Result display: MWh loads may be converted to have a portion of constant power and
constant impedance load. In this case, you may specify whether to view the constant
power or constant impedance portion when viewing results on the diagram.
Seasonal: There are two types of MWh loads, seasonal (default) and non-seasonal.
To specify a seasonal load, place a check mark in the box next to Seasonal.
Confidential
3-61

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Concentrated at the node: This option allows you to choose between dividing the
loads equally between the FROM and the TO nodes of a line or placing all of the load
at the TO node of the line branch. The default is concentrated at the node or lump all
of the consumer load at the TO end. To specify a non-concentrated load, remove the
check mark from the box next to Concentrated at the node.
Percent constant impedance: You can select the percentage of the load to be treated
as constant impedance load rather than constant kVA load. When MWh loads are converted, this percentage will be used to determine the amount of constant impedance
load. The remaining portion will be converted and stored as constant power load. The
default value is 0% constant impedance.
Load values: If the load is balanced, enter the total MWH/month, the number of consumers, the average power factor for the load, and the resultant kW over all phases. If
the load is unbalanced, enter each of these values for each of the three phases. If you
specify a resultant kW value of zero, the program will calculate the equivalent peak load
demand.
3. To display the MWh load on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place
a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected MWh load is in service, click the In service check box,
which is the default setting.
5. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this MWh load on the
diagram.
6. To add the selected MWh load to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and
click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the
assignment.
7. To add the selected load to an existing load category(ies), click the Categories button
and click the box that precedes the category name you want. Click the OK button to
accept the assignment.
8. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the static load properties.
3-62
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

3.7.6 Changing Source Properties

Each network, or disjoint portion of a network (island), must have a source. A source is a device
that is placed at a node to provide a voltage reference for the network. The impedance for the
source is specified in pu on the system kVA base (defined on the Network Property sheet, System
tab).
In PSS/ADEPT, a three-phase source is treated as a voltage behind an impedance. Positive- and
zero-sequence impedance must be defined for each source. Sources are always wye connected
and always contain all three phases. In a power flow solution, the source holds positive-sequence
node voltage constant. For short circuit and motor starting calculations, the source is treated as a
constant voltage behind an impedance.
In some cases, only the fault MVA of the source is known. In this case, the fault MVA must be converted into the Thevenin equivalent source impedance.
To convert the fault MVA data to per unit sequence impedances, use the following method:
1. Determine positive-sequence impedance from the three-phase fault MVA (MVA-3):
kVA BASE
X 1 = ----------------------------------------MVA-3 1000
if an angle (1) is available for the fault MVA we have:
kVA BASE 1
Z 1 = ----------------------------------------MVA-3 1000
therefore,
R 1 = Z 1 cos ( 1 )
X 1 = Z 1 sin ( 1 )
2. Determine the zero-sequence impedance from the single-phase fault MVA (MVA-1):
3 kVA BASE
- 2X 1
X = ----------------------------------------MVA-1 1000
where X 1 was calculated above. Again, if the angle () of the fault MVA is known, we
can determine the complex impedance as follows:
3 kVA BASE
- 2Z 1 1
Z = ----------------------------------------------MVA-1 1000
where 1 and Z 1 are known from (1) above.
Confidential
3-63

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the properties for a source:

1. Double-click the source to select it and display the Source Property sheet, or, to select
a source or group, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Source Property
Figure 3-45. Source Property Sheet: Main Tab

2. Enter/select the properties for the source:
Name: Specify a unique name for the source node on the PSS/ADEPT diagram. The
source name is not the node name; the node name is referenced on the property sheet;
you may not modify the node.
Type: Specify the source type: swing. A swing source attempts to maintain terminal
voltage magnitude and angle by adjusting the source's internal voltage.
Nominal Voltage (kV): Nominal voltage of the source. Default is the voltage of the connected node.
kVA rating: Enter the kVA rating of the source. The default kVA rating will be set to the
rating defined in the Default Source Property sheet. Normally, this will be equal to the
system base kVA specified in Network Properties.
Angle (degrees): Sets the angle of the source with reference to zero degrees. If there
is only a single source on the network, set this value to 0.0. If there is more than one
3-64
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

source, the angle will be used if part of the system had an angle shift due to wye-delta
or delta-wye transformer connections.
Scheduled voltage (pu of nominal): The scheduled voltage of the source node in per
unit of nominal voltage. This is the scheduled voltage of the source that can be either
greater than or less than the per unit nominal voltage of the source.
Positive sequence resistance and reactance (pu on system kVA base): Specify
the positive-sequence source Thevenin resistance and reactance in pu on the system
kVA base.
Zero sequence resistance and reactance (pu on system kVA base): Specify the
zero-sequence source Thevenin resistance and reactance in pu on the system kVA
base.
Grounding resistance and reactance (ohms): Enter the resistance and reactance of
the grounding impedance of the source in absolute physical units.
3. To display the source on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a
check mark there.
4. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this source on the
diagram.
5. To add the selected source to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click
assignment.
6. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the source properties.
Confidential
3-65

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the harmonic properties for a source:

1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a source (Figure 3-46).
Figure 3-46. Source Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab

Name: The name of the source. This property is for information only and is not editable.
Click on the Main tab to modify this item.
Node: The name of the node to which this source is connected. This property is for
Impedance Exponents: Enter the requested values for the following:
For additional information on harmonics modeling for sources, please refer to Chapter 8.
3-66
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

3.7.7 Changing Induction Machine Properties

Induction machines are modeled by NEMA standard class designs and associated locked rotor
codes. The NEMA class designs currently supported are: A, B, C, D, E and locked rotor codes A,
B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, M, N, P, R, S, T, U, and V. Refer to Appendix E for more information and
impedance values for NEMA class designs. If you want to model a machine that does not fit the
properties of a NEMA design, you can enter the impedances of the machine directly on the Impedance tab.
In PSS/ADEPT, the induction machine defaults to NEMA design type B; the information specified in
the PSS/U Machine Dictionary is not used. Induction machine impedances such as armature resistance, transient impedance, subtransient impedance, and locked rotor impedance are automatically
determined based on the NEMA design type; they are displayed on the Induction Machine Property
sheet.
You can specify induction machine units in either hp (NEMA) or kW (IEC). Loading data can be
specified as real electrical power (kW) at the machine input terminal or mechanical power (hp) at
the machine shaft. Selecting real electrical power will display "Terminal real power (+) consumed,
(-) delivered", selecting mechanical power will display "Shaft power (+) motor, (-) generator". Units
of electrical power are always kW, however, if mechanical power is selected, the shaft power can
be specified in either hp or kW. The mechanical rating is specified as either kW or hp depending
upon which mechanical power units are selected.
New machines will be defaulted to hp (NEMA) units and loading as shaft power (hp). You can
change the defaults by modifying the default induction machine properties.
The Impedance tab allows you to view machine impedances, power factor (pf), efficiency, and slip
at full load. For NEMA type machines, power factor, efficiency, and slip at full load, are constants
determined from the impedances specified for the NEMA designs. For non-NEMA type machines,
the power factor, efficiency, and slip are calculated based on the user-entered values for impedance. To see the updated power factor, efficiency, and slip, move to another field on the screen.
Power factor, efficiency, and slip are read-only (not editable). Power factor and efficiency are used
to calculate the kVA base of the machine needed for the induction machine power flow calculations.
Altering the machine type and/or its associated impedance values will cause the machine curves to
change.
Machine transient and sub-transient impedances may be modified for use in short circuit
calculations.
Induction machine data modified in PSS/ADEPT are not automatically saved to the PSS/U
Machine Dictionary file. Save the network model as a PSS/ADEPT (*.adp) file to preserve the
induction machine characteristics.
Confidential
3-67

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the properties for an induction machine:

1. Double-click the induction machine to select it and display the Induction Machine Property sheet, or, to select an induction machine, right-click, and choose Properties to
display the Induction Machine Property sheet. Notice that there are four tabs for the
property sheet: Main, Impedances, Start-Up and Harmonics.
Figure 3-47. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Main Tab

The Main tab is used to enter induction machine characteristics and to establish the
location of the induction machine within the network.
2. Under the Main tab, enter/select the properties for the induction machine:
Name: Specify a unique name for the induction machine on the PSS/ADEPT diagram.
This is not the name of the node to which the machine is attached. The node name
appears on the property sheet to indicate the location of the machine in the network. If you
modify the machine name, the name of the node to which it is attached will not be affected.
Mechanical Power Units: Specify the mechanical power units of the machine.
hp (NEMA)
kW (IEC)
Real electrical power at machine input terminal (must be kW): Select this option if
you want to specify real electrical power at the machine input terminal.
3-68
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Mechanical power at machine shaft (hp or kW): Select this option if you want to
specify mechanical power at the machine shaft.
Terminal real power (+) consumed, (-) delivered: If you have selected the real electrical power option, enter the terminal real power. Positive values indicate power will be
consumed, negative values indicate power will be delivered.
Shaft power (+) motor, (-) generator: If you have selected the shaft power option,
enter the shaft power. Positive values will indicate a motor; negative values will indicate
a generator.
Mechanical rating: Enter the electrical rating of the machine in kW or hp. This value
is used to convert per-unit impedances into ohms; kW or hp is indicated by the mechanical power units you have previously specified.
Rated (nominal) terminal voltage (kV): Nominal voltage of the machine is either lineto-line or line-to-neutral machine voltage in kV, depending on the input voltage flag you
selected in the Network Property sheets System tab. If no voltage is specified, the voltage of the node where this machine is connected will be used as the nominal machine
voltage. This value is used along with the nominal machine size to convert pu impedances into ohm.
Grounding impedance: Enter the grounding resistance and reactance of the induction machine (ohms).
3. To display the induction machine on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box
(under the Main tab) to place a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected induction machine is in service, click the In service check
box (under the Main tab), which is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the
induction machine is out of service.
5. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this induction machine on
the diagram.
6. To add the selected induction machine to an existing group(s), click the Groups button,
and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept
the assignment.
7. To add the selected induction machine to an existing load category(ies), click the
Categories button (under the Main tab), and click the box that precedes the load
category you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment.
Confidential
3-69

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8. Click the Impedances tab (Figure 3-48) and enter/select the impedances for the induction machine.
Figure 3-48. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Impedances Tab

Power factor: The power factor of the machine. This read-only field displays the calculated power factor of the machine based on NEMA design, or user-entered impedances.
Efficiency: The efficiency of the machine. This read-only field displays the calculated
efficiency of the machine based on NEMA design, or user-entered impedances.
Slip at full load: The slip of the machine at full load. This read-only field displays calculated slip based on NEMA design, or user-entered impedances.
Locked rotor code: Check the locked rotor code box to specify a locked rotor code
letter. This option is only available if a NEMA design has been previously selected.
Armature R (pu): The armature leakage resistance of the machine in pu on the
machine base.
Armature X (pu): The armature leakage reactance of the machine in pu on the
machine base.
Inner cage R (pu): The resistance of the inner cage winding in pu on the machine
base.
Inner cage X (pu): The reactance of the inner cage winding in pu on the machine base.
3-70
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Outer cage R (pu): The resistance of the outer cage winding in pu on the machine
base.
Outer cage X (pu): The reactance of the outer cage winding in pu on the machine
base.
Locked rotor R and X (pu): The locked rotor resistance and reactance is used to
determine the starting current of the machine in the motor starting calculation. This
value is automatically calculated for each standard NEMA design type A, B, C, D, or E.
NEMA design type B is the default for all induction machines imported from a PSS/U
raw data file.
Magnetizing X (pu): The magnetizing (air gap) reactance of the machine. Reactance
is given in pu on the machine base.
NEMA design type: PSS/ADEPT supports five standard NEMA class design induction
machines: type A, B, C, D, and E. The standard characteristics of these machines are
used to calculate the induction machine equivalent circuit parameters (see
Appendix E). Selection of a specific design type will cause the impedance values to be
recalculated.
Subtransient X (pu): The subtransient reactance of the machine in pu on the machine
base.
Transient X (pu): The transient reactance of the machine in pu on the machine base.
The induction machine torque, current and power factor versus speed plot is displayed.
You can select to display torque, current, or speed by placing a check mark next to the
text provided.
Confidential
3-71

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9. Click the Start-Up tab (Figure 3-49) and enter/select the starting transformer information that will be used in a motor starting analysis.
Figure 3-49. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Start-Up Tab

The use of a starting transformer is optional.
Use autotransformer: In PSS/ADEPT, you can connect the starting motor with a
series-connected autotransformer starter (starting compensator) to reduce the motor
in-rush current. Click the Use autotransformer check box to place a check mark there.
If you do not select the series start-up autotransformer, the motor representation starts
with full voltage applied to the terminals.
Starting transformer resistance and reactance (pu): The autotransformer impedance is specified on the base of the machine and defaults to a resistance 0.01 and a
reactance of 0.05.
Starting transformer tap (pu): Specify the tap position of the autotransformer. The tap
is assumed to be on the machine side and defaults to a nominal ratio (1.0).
10. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the induction machine properties.
3-72
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To change the harmonic properties for an induction machine:

1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of an induction machine
(Figure 3-50).
Figure 3-50. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab

Name: The name of the induction machine. This property is for information only and is
not editable. Click on the Main tab to modify this item.
Node: The name of the node to which this machine is connected. This property is for
For additional information on harmonics modeling for induction machines, please refer to Chapter
8, Section 8.9.2.
Confidential
3-73

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.7.8 Changing Synchronous Machine Properties

Synchronous machines are modeled by specifying the machine characteristics in the PSS/U
Machine Dictionary. When you import a PSS/U raw data file into PSS/ADEPT, the synchronous
machine parameters specified in the Machine Dictionary file armature resistance, transient reactance, subtransient reactance, zero-sequence impedance, locked rotor impedance, and starting
transformer impedance are used. If there are no machines in the dictionary representing the
given machine type, PSS/ADEPT will assign default values to the machine impedances. Refer to
Appendix F to obtain the actual default values.
To change the properties for a synchronous machine:
1. Double-click the synchronous machine to select it and display the Synchronous
Machine Property sheet, or, to select a synchronous machine, right-click, and choose
Properties to display the Synchronous Machine Property sheet (Figure 3-51).
Notice that there are four tabs for the property sheet: Main, Impedances, StartUp and Harmonics. The Main tab is used to enter synchronous machine characteristics and to establish the machine location within the network.
Figure 3-51. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Main Tab

3-74
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

2. Under the Main tab, enter/select the properties for the synchronous machine:
Name: Specify a unique name for the synchronous machine on the PSS/ADEPT diagram. This is not the name of the node to which the machine is connected. The node
name appears on the property sheet to indicate the location of the machine in the network. If you modify the machine name, the name of the node to which it is attached will
not be affected.
Machine type: Select the type of machine from the following: Constant power, PV
Machine, or Swing Source.
A constant power machine
A PV Machine
A swing source
Regulated node: Node where voltage of the machine is regulated.

Connection: Specify whether the machine is wye or delta connected.
Nominal machine size (kVA): The nominal machine size is the electrical rating of the
machine. This value is only used to convert pu impedances into ohms.
Nominal machine voltage (kV): Nominal voltage of the machine is either line-to-line
or line-to-neutral voltage in kV, depending on the input voltage flag you selected on the
Network Property sheet System tab. If no voltage is specified, the base voltage of the
node where this machine is connected will be used as the nominal machine voltage.
This value is used along with the nominal machine size to convert pu impedances into
ohms.
Scheduled real power consumed (kW): Enter the scheduled real power consumed
in kW. This value is enabled only when a constant power or PV machine has been
selected.
Scheduled reactive power consumed (kvar): Enter the scheduled reactive power
consumed in kvar.
Scheduled voltage (pu of node base voltage): The scheduled voltage is the terminal
voltage to be held by the machine voltage regulator. This value is entered in pu of the
base voltage of the node where the machine is located.
Scheduled voltage angle: Scheduled voltage angle in degrees.
Max. reactive power output and Min. reactive power output (pu of machine
rating): These fields specify the minimum and maximum reactive power output of the
machine in pu of the nominal machine rating.
3. To display the synchronous machine on the diagram, click once in the Visible check
box (under the Main tab) to place a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected synchronous machine is in service, click the In service
check box (under the Main tab), which is the default setting. If In service is not
checked, the synchronous machine is out of service.
5. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this synchronous
machine on the diagram.
Confidential
3-75

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6. To add the selected synchronous machine to an existing group(s), click the Groups
button (under the Main tab), and click the box that precedes the group name you want.
Click the OK button to accept the assignment.
7. To add the selected synchronous machine to an existing category(ies), click the
Categories button (under the Main tab), and click the box that precedes the load
category you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment.
8. Click the Impedances tab (Figure 3-52) to view the impedance properties for the synchronous machine.
Figure 3-52. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Impedances Tab

Impedance model: Select the impedance model from the available list of the following
model types:
3-76
Custom: A custom machine is a user-defined custom machine type. Enter the

impedances of the machine in the fields provided on the property sheet.
Defaults are provided which represent a small steam turbine.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Steam turbine large: The associated impedances for a large (several hundred MW round rotor machine) steam turbine will be automatically placed in
the fields on the property sheet.
Steam turbine small: The associated impedances for a small (less than 100
MW round rotor machine) steam turbine will be automatically placed in the
fields on the property sheet.
Hydro w/ damper: The associated impedances for a hydro with damper windings (salient pole machine with damper windings) will be automatically placed
in the fields on the property sheet.
Hydro w/o damper: The associated impedances for a hydro machine (salient
pole) without damper windings will be automatically placed in the fields on the
property sheet.
Combustion turbine: The associated impedances for a combustion turbine

will be automatically placed in the fields on the property sheet. A combustion
turbine is represented as a small round rotor machine.
Based on your selection, values will be appropriately disabled on the property

sheet. Synchronous machine default values were obtained from various
examples found in textbooks and other technical literature for typical machines.
Rotor type: Select the rotor type from the available list:
Round rotor solid steel rotor
Salient pole gaps between poles

Based on your selection, values will be appropriately disabled on the property
sheet.
Has damper windings: Indicate whether the machine has damper windings by clicking within the box. A check mark indicates the machine has damper windings. This
option is only available for custom, and hydro impedance models with a salient pole
rotor type.
Reactances
Subtransient reactance (pu): The subtransient reactance of the machine is

used to determine the fault current contribution of the machine during a fault
analysis. This value is specified for both the direct and quadrature axes.
Synchronous reactance (pu): The direct and quadrature synchronous reactance of the machine
Transient reactance (pu): The transient reactance of the machine is used to

determine the fault current contribution of the machine during a fault analysis.
This value is specified for both the direct and quadrature axes.
Time constants
Confidential
Open circuit subtransient (sec): The time constant for the direct-axis (Daxis) and quadrature-axis (Q-axis). The default is 0.35 seconds.
Open circuit transient (sec): The time constant for the direct-axis and
quadrature-axis. The default value is 7.0 seconds.
3-77

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Impedances
Armature resistance (pu): Armature resistance is the machine's resistance at

synchronous speed.
Negative sequence resistance (pu): The negative sequence resistance of

the machine. Resistance is given in per unit on the machine kVA base.
Locked rotor resistance and reactance (pu): The locked rotor resistance
and reactance of the machine is used to determine the starting current of the
machine in motor starting analysis.
Zero sequence resistance and reactance (pu): The zero-sequence impedance of the machine specified in pu.
Grounding impedance: The grounding impedance of the machine in absolute

physical units (ohms).
Saturation Coefficients
Saturation coefficients: The saturation coefficients of the machine at 1.0 pu

and 1.2 pu no-load terminal voltage.
Mechanical
Inertia constant (sec): The inertia constant of the machine in seconds.
9. Click the Start-Up tab (Figure 3-53) and enter/select the start-up properties for the synchronous machine.
3-78
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Figure 3-53. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Start-Up Tab

Use the Start-Up Property sheet to specify the autotransformer data that are used during the motor start analysis.
Use autotransformer: You can connect the starting motor with a series-connected
autotransformer starter (starting compensator) to reduce the motor in-rush current.
Click the Use autotransformer check box to place a check mark there. If you do not
select the series start-up autotransformer, the motor representation starts with full voltage applied to the terminals.
Starting transformer resistance and Starting transformer reactance (pu): The
autotransformer impedance is specified on the base of the machine and defaults to 0.0.
Starting transformer tap (pu): Specify the tap position of the auto transformer. The
tap is assumed to be on the machine side and defaults to a nominal ratio (1.0).
10. Click the OK button to accept your changes to all of the synchronous machine
properties.
Confidential
3-79

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the harmonic properties for a synchronous machine:

1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a synchronous machine
(Figure 3-54).
Figure 3-54. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab

Name: The name of the induction machine. This property is for information only and is
not editable. Click on the Main tab to modify this item.
Node: The name of the node to which this machine is connected. This property is for
3-80
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

For additional information on harmonics modeling for synchronous machines, please refer to
Chapter 8, Section 8.9.3.
3.7.9 Changing Capacitor Properties

In PSS/ADEPT, there is no limitation on the number of capacitors that may be placed at a node. The
total capacitance at each node is the sum of the fixed and switched kvar used. Fixed capacitor
banks require a minimum amount of data. Switched capacitor banks require additional information.
If the capacitor type is fixed, the switched capacitor fields will not be editable fields.
To change the properties of your capacitor:
1. Double-click the capacitor to select it and display the Capacitor Property sheet, or, to
select a capacitor, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Capacitor Property
Figure 3-55. Capacitor Property Sheet: Main Tab
Confidential
3-81

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. To change the properties of the capacitor:

Name: Specify a unique name for the capacitor on the PSS/ADEPT diagram. The node
name appears on the property sheet to indicate the location of the capacitor in the network. If you modify the capacitor name, the name of the node to which it is attached will
not be affected.
Nominal voltage of capacitor bank (kV): Specify the nominal voltage of the capacitor
bank. This voltage may be either line-to-line or line-to-neutral; depending upon which
input voltage flag has been specified. If the nominal voltage is not specified, it defaults
to the base voltage of the node where the capacitor is placed.
Reactive power capacity: Capacitor kvar at node base voltage and fraction switched
in are entered based on whether the capacitor is balanced or unbalanced. For a fixed
capacitor, the kvar is assumed to be 100% switched in. The field for fraction switched
in is enabled for switched capacitors only. If the capacitor is balanced, only the total
kvar over all phases is entered. If the capacitor is unbalanced, kvar at each phase may
be entered along with the fraction of kvar that is currently in use. A value of 1.0 indicates
100 percent of the kvar is currently in use.
Type: Specify the capacitor as fixed or switched.
Connection: Specify the capacitor connection as delta (ungrounded) or wye
(grounded).
Balance: Specify whether the capacitor is balanced (equal kvar between all phases)
or unbalanced.
Switched Capacitor Properties: If the capacitor type is switched, specify the following
additional capacitor properties (if the capacitor is fixed, this section will be grayed out):
3-82
Regulated Node: If this node is specified and it is not the same node on which
the capacitor is located, then PSS/ADEPT will monitor the voltage at this regulated node.
Minimum and Maximum Regulated Voltage (pu): Specify the minimum and
maximum voltage allowed at the regulated node.
Switching Increment: This value is equivalent to the portion of the capacitor

kvar that will be placed at the node when the largest pu voltage change at any
node is less than 0.01 during the load flow solution. The switching increment
is used only when the solution option to switch capacitors (see Chapter 4,
Section 4.4.1) has been selected. The switching increment is specified as a
decimal value between 0.0 and 1.0, where 1.0 is equal to 100%.
Switching Priority: If there is more than one switched capacitor regulating the
same node, you can specify a priority to indicate the order in which the capacitor is switched on. This option is provided for raw data compatibility and is not
currently used in PSS/ADEPT.
Fraction Switched In: Indicates the fraction of the kvar used, where 1.0
(100%) uses all kvar and 0.0 (0%) uses no kvar. This fraction does not indicate
in-service status. PSS/ADEPT can adjust this fraction in the load flow solution
when the capacitor switching option is turned on (see Chapter 4,
Section 4.4.1).
Ungrounded: Check this box if the capacitor bank is not fully grounded.
Grounding impedance: Enter the grounding resistance and reactance in

ohms.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Time delay: There are situations where voltage at some location in a network may be
influenced by two or more transformers (capacitor banks). In such situations, the transformer tap (capacitor bank) controllers may fight one another trying to control voltage.
The time delay is used to prevent these controllers from interacting by defining the
order in which they attempt control. Controllers with a short time delay will operate
before controllers with a long time delay. A short time delay (i.e., zero) is generally
assigned to transformer tap controller closest to the source; increasingly longer time
delays are assigned to downstream controllers. In this way, upstream transformers are
first used to correct voltage problems. Only if unsuccessful will controllers downstream
of the first be used. Time delay is a floating-point number (e.g., 1.5). No specific units
are assumed.
3. To display the capacitor on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a
check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected capacitor is in service, click the In service check box,
which is the default setting. Note that a capacitor bank may be in service even though
the fraction switched in is equal to zero.
5. To display analysis results on the diagram for this capacitor, place a check mark in the
box labeled Results.
6. To add the selected capacitor to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click
assignment.
7. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the capacitor properties.
3.7.10 Changing Standard Fault Properties

A fault is a shunt device that is placed on an existing node in the network. When you perform a fault
calculation, nodes that have connected fault devices will be faulted during the solution. A fault is
specified by the node to which it is attached, and by the type of fault that will be placed at the node.
Any number of standard faults may be placed at a node. Valid fault types are:
three-phase-to-ground
phase-to-ground
phase-to-ground through an impedance
phase-to-phase
phase-to-phase-to-ground
ungrounded three-phase
For all fault types that are not three-phase-to-ground or ungrounded three-phase, you must specify
the phase at which the fault occurs. If you select the phase-to-ground through impedance fault type,
the impedance values display.
The fault impedance may be entered and adjusted from the Analysis Options Property sheet
under the Short Circuit tab (Chapter 4, Figure 4-15).
Confidential
3-83

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the fault properties:

1. Double-click the fault to select it and display the Fault Property sheet, or, to select a
fault or a group of faults, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Fault
Figure 3-56. Fault Property Sheet

2. Enter/select the properties for the fault:
fault name has no relation to the node to which it is attached. The node name may not
be modified.
Type: Specify the type of fault you want to apply at the node. Valid fault types are:
three-phase-to-ground, phase-to-ground, phase-to-ground through impedance,
phase-to-phase, phase-to-phase-to-ground, and ungrounded three-phase.
Phasing: If the fault type is not three-phase, select the phase at which the fault occurs.
If you select the three-phase fault type, the phasing will be set to ABC and you will not
be able to edit the phasing field.
3. To display the fault on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check
mark there.
4. To display analysis results on the diagram for this fault, place a check mark in the box
labeled Results.
5. To indicate that the selected fault is in service, click the In service check box, which is
the default setting. If a fault calculation is performed, an in-service fault will be considered and the results will be available on the diagram and in the shunt current report. If
the fault is out of service, it will be invisible to the short circuit analysis. This option
allows you to remove fault devices from the system without permanently deleting them
from the network.
6. To add the selected fault to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click the
assignment
7. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the fault properties.
3-84
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Workspace Management
3.8 Workspace Management

PSS/ADEPTs Workspace Management feature allows you to capture a customized environment
for future use. You can save the current toolbar and window positions, and restore this workspace
either automatically the next time you start the PSS/ADEPT application, or at any point while
working in PSS/ADEPT. Additionally, network diagram data and options may be saved with the
workspace. There is no limit to the number of workspaces you can create.
You may modify the application views and toolbars. For example, you may choose to hide the
Equipment List View and display only the Diagram Toolbar. For more information on modifying the
application views, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.1.
To open the most recently saved workspace automatically when you start PSS/ADEPT:
1. Choose File>Program Settings from the Main Menu.
2. Click the Restore last workspace at start-up box. A check mark displays in the box.
3. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. The next time you start PSS/ADEPT, the
most recently saved workspace will display.
To retrieve an existing workspace:
1. Choose File>Workspace>Open from the Main Menu. The Open Workspace dialog
(Figure 3-57) displays a list of previously saved workspaces.
Delete
Move Up
Move Down
Figure 3-57. Open Workspace Dialog

2. Click to highlight the name of the workspace you want to display.
3. Click the Open button to display the workspace.
Additionally, the Open Workspace dialog allows you to add new workspaces, remove existing workspaces, save current workspaces, and order existing workspaces (up or down) on the list.
Confidential
3-85

Workspace Management
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To create a new workspace:

1. Open a blank PSS/ADEPT diagram or open a PSS/ADEPT diagram from which you
want to create a new workspace.
2. Make changes to your toolbar display and/or location if necessary.
3. Make changes to the diagram properties if necessary.
4. To save the new workspace, choose File>Workspace>Save from the Main Menu. The
Save Workspace dialog displays.
the new workspace.
button and, in the entry space that appears, type a name for
6. Press the Enter key. The system prompts "Save new workspace?"
7. Click the Yes button to save the workspace.
To delete an existing workspace:
displays.
2. Click (and highlight) the name of the workspace you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete
button to delete the workspace. The workspace is deleted.
To save the current workspace:

1. Choose File>Workspace>Save from the Main Menu. The Save Workspace dialog
displays.
the workspace.
button, and in the entry space that appears, type a name for
3. Click the OK button to save the workspace.

To change the order of workspaces on the list:
displays.
2. Click (and highlight) the name of the workspace you want to reposition.
3. Click the Up Arrow
the Down Arrow
3-86
button to move the workspace up one position in the list or click

button to move the workspace down one position in the list.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Load and Machine Scaling
3.9 Load and Machine Scaling

PSS/ADEPT has three scaling features for loads and machines.
Load scaling allows you to change the real and imaginary power consumed by loads
on the network.
Machine scaling allows you to modify the power drawn or supplied by synchronous
and induction machines connected to the network. Optionally, you may modify machine
capacity.
MWh load scaling allows you to change the number of consumers, MWh/month,
average power factor and resultant kW.
In each case, the scaling is applied to items currently selected. You may select a single load or
machine, or you may select a group of items that includes loads or machines. Scaling will then be
applied only to items of the appropriate type.
In both cases, scaling can result in a value of zero. This means that further scaling will have
no effect since all scaling is done with multiplication. If you want to change a quantity that has
a value of zero you will have to assign it a nonzero value in the appropriate item property sheet.
3.9.1 Load Scaling

To scale loads:
1. Select a single load or group of items containing loads on the diagram.
2. Choose Network>Scale Loads from the Main Menu. The Scale Loads dialog
displays.
Figure 3-58. Scale Loads Dialog: Magnitude Scaling
Confidential
3-87

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Enter/select the scaling you want to be done:

Scaling Mode: Select either Magnitude Scaling (Figure 3-58) or Reactive Power
Scaling (Figure 3-59).
Magnitude Scaling: If you select the Magnitude Scaling mode, select one of the four
available options:
Multiply P&Q by: Allows you to apply a fixed scale factor to both P and Q.
Scale P&Q so total P is: Allows you to specify a desired total value for P from
which a scale factor will be calculated and applied to both P and Q.
Scale P&Q so total Q is: Allows you to specify a desired value for Q from
Scale P&Q so total S is: Allows you to specify a desired value for S from
Figure 3-59. Scale Loads Dialog: Reactive Power Scaling

Reactive/Power Factor Scaling: If you select the Reactive Power scaling mode,
select one of the three available options:
Multiply Q by: Applies the specified scale factor to Q only for all selected
loads.
Adjust Q, leave P constant so pf is: Allows you to specify a desired value for
power factor. A scale factor for Q will be calculated, holding P constant, to
achieve the desired pf.
Adjust P&Q, leave S constant so pf is: Allows you to specify a desired value
for power factor, and will scale P and Q independently to keep S constant.
4. Click the Apply button to scale the loads.
3-88
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

The Totals section displays the totals for the loads in the current selection. It contains the total
number of loads and the total power for the selected loads expressed as real and imaginary
power (P and Q) as well as apparent power and power factor (S and pf).
3.9.2 Machine Scaling

To scale machines:
1. Select a synchronous or induction machine, or select a group of items containing
machines.
2. Choose Network>Scale Machines from the Main Menu. The Scale Machines dialog
Figure 3-60. Scale Machines Dialog

The Totals section displays the totals for the machines in the current selection.
The number of induction machines, the number of synchronous machines, and
the total number of machines is displayed. For each of these, the number drawing
power, the number supplying power, and the total number is shown. Also displayed are
the total real power and the total machine rating for the selected machines.
Confidential
3-89

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Scaling Options: Specify various scaling options for the current selection:
Scale all machines (Induction and Synchronous); or Induction machines only;

or Synchronous machines only.
Scale machines supplying real power; or machines drawing real power; or both
(drawing and supplying real power).
Scale machine power only; or machine power and machine size.
Scale type: Specify the scale factor. You may choose to specify the scale factor
directly or to have the program calculate a scale factor to achieve a desired power level.
4. Click the Apply button to scale the loads.
3.9.3 MWh Load Scaling

MWh load scaling is used to scale selected MWh/month and number of consumers to implement a
year-to-year growth and to scale the resultant kW to match meters on the system. Since this scaling
activity operates on a selection, use the selection tools provided to select the MWh loads to scale.
If you wish to scale all of the MWh loads, you can use the selection tool in combination with the
selection filter to select all of the MWh load shunt items.
To scale the MWh loads:
1. Select a single MWh load or a group of MWh loads on the Diagram or Tree View.
2. Choose Network>Scale MWh Loads from the Main Menu. The Scale MWh Loads
dialog displays (Figure 3-61). The total number of MWh loads selected is displayed
along with the total number of MWh/month, number of consumers and average power
factor is displayed. The resultant kW may be equal to zero. To calculate the resultant
kW, click the Calculate button to update the values of resultant kW.
Figure 3-61. Scale MWh Loads Dialog

3-90
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual


Apply to: Choose whether you want the scaling function to apply to seasonal MWh
loads only, non-seasonal MWh loads only, or both.
Multiply MWh/month by: Allows you to apply a fixed scale factor to the MWH/month.
Multiply number of consumers by: Allows you to apply a fixed scale factor to the
number of consumers.
Multiply resultant kW by: Allows you to apply a fixed scale factor to the resultant kW.
Scale MWh/month so total is: Allows you to specify a desired value for MWh/month.
Scale number of consumers so total is: Allows you to specify a desired value for the
number of consumers.
Scale resultant kW so total is: Allows you to specify a desired value for the resultant
kW.
Scale average PF so total is: Allows you the specify a desired value for the average
PF.
3.9.4 Automatic Load Scaling

Automatic load scaling is used to scale a set of loads upward or downward until a target power (or
current) is obtained at a specified "upstream" branch in the network. The set of scalable loads may
consist of static loads, induction machines and synchronous machines. The location of the measured power (or current) is specified at the FROM or TO end of a Line, Transformer, Switch or
Series Capacitor.
During the automatic load scaling, all selected loads are scaled together. That is, the same resulting
scale factor will be applied to all loads until the measured power (or current) matches the target
power (or current).
Multiplying a load by a scaling factor adjusts its scheduled power. The actual power consumed by
a load after its scheduled power is adjusted is determined from a subsequent load flow calculation.
The scheduled powers are adjusted as follows:
Static loads:
Pschednew =
Pschedorig x
Qschednew =
Qschedorig x
Adjustments are made to the active and reactive power values of all phases in the
load.
Induction machines:
Pschednew =
Pschedorig x
Sizenew
Sizeorig
Machine base size is only modified if the option to adjust machine base and power
together is selected.
Confidential
3-91

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Synchronous machines:
Pschednew =
Pschedorig x
Sizenew
Sizeorig
Qminnew
Qminorig
Qmaxnew
Qmaxorig
Machine base size and the minimum and maximum reactive Var limits are only modified if the option to adjust machine base and power together is selected.
where:
Psched
Scheduled real power.
Qsched
Scheduled reactive power.
Size
Machine base size.
Qmin
Minimum reactive var limit.
Qmax
Maximum reactive var limit.
Scaling factor, as determined by the Automatic Load Scaling analysis.
To scale loads:
1. Select a single static load, synchronous machine or induction machine, or a group of
loads and machines on the Diagram or Tree View. Optionally, the branch whose power
(or current) is to be targeted may also be included in the selection.
Since the scaling operates on a selection, use the selection tools provided to select the
loads to be scaled. If you wish to scale a particular set of loads, use the selection tool
in combination with the selection filter.
2. Choose Network>Automatic Load Scaling from the Main Menu. The Automatic Load
Scaling dialog will be displayed (Figure 3-62). The static loads and machines selected
will be displayed along with their corresponding power totals.
3-92
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Figure 3-62. Automatic Load Scaling Dialog

3. In the Main tab, select the automatic load scaling properties:
Metered/Measured Branch: Select the Line, Switch, Transformer or Series Capacitor
to be measured. If a branch had previously been selected via the Diagram or Tree
View, it will automatically be displayed in the field. The actual FROM and TO nodes provide network connectivity information and cannot be modified.
If any selected loads or machines are upstream of the specified measured branch
then a warning message will appear in the lower portion of the window (Figure 363). Although the program will attempt to scale selected loads upstream of a measured
branch, this is not typical practice and an alternate branch should be selected.
Figure 3-63. Warning Message
Confidential
3-93

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Measurement Node: Allows for the selection of either the FROM or TO end of the
selected line to measured.
The selection of the measured Line, Switch, Transformer or Series Capacitor, along
with the specification of the FROM or TO end will cause the corresponding Average
current, Maximum current and Total KVA values to be displayed in the Original and Target boxes within the window. The Original values provide information for the measured
branch and cannot be modified.
Measurements: Choose one of the measurement types and enter a corresponding
Target Value for the measured Line, Transformer, Switch or Series Capacitor.
Average Current, Amps: Allows you to specify a desired target value for the
average phase current at the metered end of the selected branch.
Maximum Current, Amps: Allows you to specify a desired target value for the
maximum phase current at the metered end of the selected branch.
Total KVA: Allows you to specify a desired target value for the total KVA at the
metered end of the selected branch.
A new Target Value may be directly entered into the field provided, or the value shown
can be increased or decreased in blocks of 10 by clicking on the corresponding "up" or
"down" arrows to the right of the Target Value fields.
Load Group/Loads: All selected static loads, induction machines and synchronous
machines are recorded in the list box.
Adjust machine base and power together: This option is only activated when an
induction machine or synchronous machine is highlighted ("clicked on") within the list
box. When activated, a check mark in this box will cause the machine base and power
of the corresponding machine to be scaled together. Otherwise, only the machines
power is scaled.
The Totals section provides information on the selected loads and machines and
may not be modified. The following information is provided:
3-94
The total number of static loads selected, total power expressed as real and
imaginary power (P and Q), apparent power (S), and power factor (pf).
The total number of induction and synchronous machines selected, total real
power and total size.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

4. On the Options tab, various solution parameters may be defined and selected
(Figure 3-64).
Figure 3-64. Options Dialog

Solution Tolerance: Sets the accuracy required for the automatic load scaling algorithm to be considered solved. This value is completely independent of the solution tolerance value used for the standard load flow solution.
Max Iterations: Sets the maximum number of allowable iterations to be performed during the automatic load scaling optimization. This value is completely independent of the
iteration limit value set for the standard load flow solution.
Max Negative Scale Factor attempts: Sets the maximum number of times the scale
factor can attempt to fall below zero before the automatic load scaling algorithm will terminate.
Min Scale Factor Value: Sets the minimum acceptable value of the scale factor. If the
scale factor is calculated to be below this value, then automatic load scaling will terminate with an error message.
Confidential
3-95

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Max Scale Factor Value: Sets the maximum acceptable value of the scale factor. If
the scale factor is calculated to be below this value, then automatic load scaling will terminate with an error message.
Adjust Switched Capacitors: If you select this option, all switched capacitor banks
will be allowed to adjust during the scaling operation. The value is adjusted based on
the switching increment, the regulated voltage range, and the regulated node specified
on the Capacitor Property sheet. If this option is not selected, the status of switched
capacitor banks will not be changed during the load scaling analysis.
Adjust Transformer Taps: If you select this option, all transformers will be adjustable
during the scaling operation. If this option is not selected, all transformer tap adjustment
is blocked, regardless of the status of individual transformers. In this situation, the
transformer taps will be locked to the current settings specified in the Transformer
Property sheet.
5. Click the OK button to perform the automatic load scaling. If the load scaling is successful, the results are displayed in a new Load Scaling Results dialog (Figure 3-65).
Figure 3-65. Load Scaling Results Dialog

The following information is presented in the Load Scaling Results window:
Loads: The list of static loads, induction machines and synchronous machines
selected for inclusion in the automatic load scaling.
Scale Factor: The resulting scale factor value applied to each of the selected static
loads, induction machines and synchronous machines. This is the value by which the
selected loads must be scaled so that the measured power (or current) of the selected
branch meets the target value specified.
Original P (KW): The actual real power in KW, listed by phase (A,B,C) for each static
load, synchronous machine and induction machine.
3-96
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Scheduled P (KW): The scheduled real power in KW with the new scale factor applied.
Values are listed by phase (A,B,C) for static loads and as a single total power value for
synchronous and induction machines.
Original Q (Kvar): The actual reactive power in kVar, listed by phase (A,B,C) for each
static load, synchronous machine and induction machine.
Scheduled Q (Kvar): The scheduled reactive power in kVar with the new scale factor
applied. Values are listed by phase (A,B,C) for static loads and as a single total reactive
power value for synchronous machines. An "N/A" (Not Applicable) is indicated for
induction machines.
6. Click the OK button to accept the results, or the Cancel button to reject the results and
return to the main Automatic Load Scaling window. When OK is selected, the following
dialog will appear (Figure 3-66).
Figure 3-66. Continue Dialog

7. Click the Yes button to update the network with the new values. The following network
properties will be updated:
Static Loads: The real and reactive power, by phase.
Induction Machine: The total real power consumed or delivered, and the nominal
machine size.
Synchronous Machine: The total real power consumed or delivered, nominal
machine size, maximum reactive power output (pu of machine rating), and minimum
reactive power output (pu of machine rating).
8. Perform a Load Flow Calculation to update the values of the network items on the
diagram.
Confidential
3-97

Rephasing the Network
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.10 Rephasing the Network

Rephasing changes the phase of a portion of the network. For example, suppose you constructed
a network diagram that contains a single-phase section consisting of nodes, lines, loads, etc. This
section is fed by a single-phase feeder ("Line1"), connected to phase A of a three-phase line, as
shown in Figure 3-67a. A load flow analysis shows that phase A is overloaded and you want to
move the entire section from phase A to phase B which is under used. If you select Line1, activate
its property sheet and change the phasing of Line1 from A to B you would effectively disconnect the
remainder of the section from the network because all of the remaining items would still be set to
phase A, as shown in Figure 3-67b.
B A
Line1
Single-Phase
Section
B A
Single-Phase
Section
Line1
b.
a.
Figure 3-67. Example of Incorrect Rephasing

Even though the network itself can contain loops, rephasing is not allowed on any branch that
is part of a network loop.
Rephasing, however, starts at the branch you designate and moves down the tree, making the
appropriate phase change to each device encountered.
3-98
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

3.10.1 Device Rephasing Details

The changes that are made for all but wye-delta and delta-wye transformers are shown in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1. Device Rephasing Starting from ABC
for All Devices but Wye-Delta and Delta-Wye Transformers
Wire
1
Changes to Phase Connections
Description of
what was done
Lines, wye-wye
transformers,
switches, series
capacitors/reactors
Wye-connected shunts
(includes
faults)
Delta-connected shunts
delta-delta transformers
delta-connected
auto regulators
delta faults
Nothing
Nothing
Nothing
Nothing
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate back
Rotate back
Rotate back
Rotate back
Flip B & C
Flip B & C
Flip B & C
Flip A & C
Flip A & B
Flip A & B
Flip A & B
Flip B & C
Flip A & C
Flip A & C
Flip A & C
Flip A & B
The changes for shunt devices apply only to those that are unbalanced, no changes are needed for
three-phase balanced shunts. Since capacitors are presently available as balanced only, no change
needs to be made to them. Figure 3-68 shows an example of how to handle an unbalanced load for
the "rotate forward" situation, which means that A goes to B, B goes to C, and C goes to A.
Before
After
kW
kvar
kW
kvar
Phase A
300.00
100.00
150.00
150.00
Phase B
200.00
50.00
300.00
100.00
Phase C
150.00
150.00
200.00
50.00
Figure 3-68. Unbalanced Load Changes for "Rotate Forward" Situation
Confidential
3-99

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table 3-2 shows what happens to a delta-wye transformer branch during rephasing. Table 3-3
shows the rephasing operations for a wye-delta transformer connection.
Table 3-2. Changes to Delta-Wye Transformers
Wire
Change
C
A
B
C
Changes to Delta-Wye Transformer Connections

Delta-wye +30
Delta-wye -30
Nothing
Nothing
Nothing
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate back
Rotate back
Rotate back
Flip B & C
Flip A&C,
change to delta-wye -30
Flip A&C,
change to delta-wye +30
Flip A & B
Flip B&C,
Flip B&C,
Flip A & C
Flip A&B,
Flip A&B,
Table 3-3. Changes to Wye-Delta Transformers

Wire
Change
Changes to Wye-Delta Transformer Connections
Wye-delta -30
Wye-delta +30
Nothing
Nothing
Nothing
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate back
Rotate back
Rotate back
Flip B & C
Flip B & C,
change to wye-delta +30
Flip B & C,
change to wye-delta -30
Flip A & B
Flip A & B,
Flip A & B,
Flip A & C
Flip A & C,
Flip A & C,
3-100
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To rephase a portion of the network:

1. Select a branch which feeds the portion to be rephased.
2. Choose Network>Rephase from the Main Menu. The Rephasing dialog (Figure 3-69)
displays.
Figure 3-69. Rephasing Dialog

You may modify connections on the upstream (left in the dialog) side of the phase diagram but not those on the downstream (right in the dialog) side. The cursor appears as
a pair of linemans pliers over the rephasing control.
3. To modify a connection, "grab on" to a line and drag it to the terminal to which you want
to connect.
4. Once you have completed your modifications, click the OK button. PSS/ADEPT will
traverse the network downstream of the selected branch and apply the modification to
the phasing of each item it encounters according to its type.
PSS/ADEPT uses the root node to determine which direction is upstream and
which is downstream from the selected branch. If you try to perform rephasing
without selecting a root node you will be notified with an error message. To set the root
node refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.3.
While the linemans pliers control will allow you to attach two or more lines to the same
upstream connection point, if you click the OK button while in this condition you will get an
error message. The PSS/ADEPT analysis software does not presently support this type of
rephasing.
Confidential
3-101

Creating Load Snapshots
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3.11 Creating Load Snapshots

Load snapshots are used to store load sizes, which can then be used when representing the network at a particular time, weather condition, etc. By changing the "active" snapshot, you can easily
compare load flows for different conditions without editing the base load values for your network.
Load snapshots do not presently allow you to change the size of individual loads; instead, the snapshots are implemented by applying scale factors to the load categories. In each snapshot, individual
scale factors can be set for each load category. Figure 3-70 shows that for the snapshot "Peak" all
loads in "Category3" will be multiplied by 1.5 when "Peak" is the active snapshot. Loads that have
not been assigned to categories will exist in all snapshots with a scale factor of 1.0. Loads that
belong to more than one category will be multiplied by the product of the scale factors of the various
categories.
There is always one load snapshot, which contains all categories with a scale factor of 1.0. This
snapshot is called "Base" and cannot be deleted or renamed. By default, the "Base" snapshot is
active.
To create/edit load snapshots:
1. Choose Network>Load Snapshots from the Main Menu or click the Load Snapshots
on the Analysis toolbar. The Load Snapshots dialog displays.
Figure 3-70. Load Snapshots Dialog
3-102
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Creating Load Snapshots

To create a load snapshot: Click the New (Insert)
the pop-up box for the snapshot.
button, and enter a name in
To edit a load snapshot: Click on the snapshot you want to edit, and make your
changes.
The controls to the right of the Snapshot list box are updated based on the currently selected (not active) snapshot. When no snapshot is selected, these controls are disabled. If the currently selected snapshot is "Base", only the relative duration
and description fields are available.
3. Enter/select the information for the load snapshot:
Relative Duration (pu): Enter the relative duration of the snapshot. The default duration value is 1.0, which is used by TOPO and CAPO.
Scaling: For each snapshot, you can choose to scale static loads, machines (both
induction and synchronous), or both. If you choose to scale machines, you can scale
real power only, or real power and machine size.
Load Category: Select the load category to scale. If no load categories exist, load
snapshots will be meaningless.
Scale Factor: Specify the scale factor for the selected snapshot and category. Each
snapshot has a unique scale factor for each load category that has been defined. The
default scale factor is 1.0. For example, suppose you have two load categories, labeled
"Industrial" and "Residential" and you are in the process of creating a snapshot called
"Night." You may want to scale loads belonging to "Industrial" by 0.2 and loads belonging to "Residential" by 0.6. To do this, select the "Night" snapshot, then select "Industrial" from the Load Category list and enter "0.2" in the scale factor field. Then select
"Residential" and enter "0.6" in the scale factor field.
Description: Enter a text description for the currently selected snapshot. This field is
left blank by default.
Active Snapshot: At the bottom left of the property sheet, designate any snapshot
from the drop-down list to make it the active snapshot. Only one snapshot can be active
at a time. This is the snapshot that will be used for load flow, etc.
4. Click the Close button to finish defining your snapshot.
If there is an active snapshot other than the "Base" in which the static loads option
is set (a check mark appears in the Static Loads option), the Static Load Property
sheet will display scaled load values; you will not be able to edit these values. If there
is an active snapshot in which the Machines option is set, the Induction Machine and
Synchronous Machine Property sheet will display scaled values for real power and
(optionally) machine size; you will not be able to edit these values. This is to ensure
that the original load values are preserved.
Confidential
3-103
3-104
Confidential
Chapter 4
Analyzing Network Models
4.1 Overview: Analyzing Network Models
PSS/ADEPT performs load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analyses on a distribution network
that consists of any number of nodes and devices. PSS/ADEPT has no node or equipment limitation; the only limitation is on the hardware of the host PC. PSS/ADEPT uses an iterative Y-Bus
relaxation method to achieve solutions.
The PSS/ADEPT algorithm is more robust than the solution technique used by the PSS/U application; it can handle systems from highly meshed networks to weak radial systems with large electrical
generation far from the loads. Systems that were difficult to solve using PSS/U should be easier to
solve in PSS/ADEPT. The load flow solution in PSS/ADEPT may require more iterations to reach a
stable solution, but the total solution time will be about the same as the time required to solve a load
flow network in PSS/U Revision 8.3.
Additionally, the Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) will find the minimum loss configuration for a
three-phase radial system, and the Optimal Capacitor Placement (CAPO) places fixed and
switched three-phase capacitor banks of specified size to minimize system losses.
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Automatic system validation of input data.
User-initiated validation of the network model.
Available display options for your analysis results on the diagram.
Performing load flow analysis.
Performing short circuit analysis.
Performing motor starting analysis.
Performing CAPO analysis.
Performing TOPO analysis.
Confidential
4-1

Built-In Data Validation Options
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4.1.1 PSS/ADEPT Analysis Conventions

PSS/ADEPT bases its analyses on the following conventions:
Determining Phases at a Node: When placing shunt capacitors and balanced loads
at a node, PSS/ADEPT distributes the specific load evenly over the phases existing at
the node. The existing phases are determined by the branch phasing coming into it. For
example, if there are two branches coming into a node, one with phasing AB and the
other with phasing BC, the phasing of the node will be ABC.
Designating Line-to-Line versus Line-to-Neutral Phasing: The following table

describes the PSS/ADEPT convention used to describe line-to-neutral and line-to-line
phasing on transformers, loads and shunt capacitors:
Phase
Designation
Line-to-Line
(Delta-Connected)
Line-to-Neutral
(Wye-Connected)
A-to-B
A-to-neutral
B-to-C
B-to-neutral
C-to-A
C-to-neutral
4.2 Built-In Data Validation Options

To assist you in the time-consuming and at times complex task of preparing a valid power system
model, PSS/ADEPT has built-in data validation algorithms that will alert you to and, in some cases,
correct invalid data inputs. There are two types of data validation:
Automatic data validation of input data.
User-initiated network validation.
4.2.1 Automatic Validation of Input Data

Power system networks created in PSS/U can be read by PSS/ADEPT. The PSS/U network models
must be in the raw data file format (*.dat) and must have valid Construction Dictionary files. Data
validation criteria is outlined in Appendix C.
PSS/ADEPT automatically performs data validation checking whenever you open a PSS/U raw
data file, and enter/edit values in any field on a network item property sheet.
PSS/ADEPTs data validation procedure checks for invalid data entry (either as a result of opening
a PSS/U raw data file, or as you enter/edit data in fields on the item property sheet) in the network
model. Results of the data validation when opening a PSS/U raw data file will be displayed in the
Progress View. If you attempt to enter an incorrect value into a field on an item property sheet, a
message box is displayed containing the error message. When the OK button is clicked, the program will highlight the erroneous field in the item property sheet.
For example, when you open a PSS/U raw data file, PSS/ADEPT automatically scans it for the error
types listed in Appendix C, Section C.1. If there is a problem, PSS/ADEPT identifies the source of
the problem, and displays a warning or error message in the Progress window, as in Figure 4-1. A
warning message advises you of an error condition that was corrected by PSS/ADEPT; an error
message advises you of an error condition that may require your attention prior to running the network analysis. In this case, a network diagram is not drawn since there were errors detected in the
data file. If only warning messages were printed, the network diagram would be drawn normally.
4-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Figure 4-1. Raw Data File Validation

The resulting PSS/ADEPT validated network model may be different from the original network. We recommend that you save the validated network models in PSS/ADEPT native
binary file format (*.adp).
Confidential
4-3

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4.2.2 User-Initiated Network Validation

PSS/ADEPT allows you to check the network for any unusual circumstances (i.e., the impedance
of a line is equal to zero) at any time. You can initiate the validation check yourself, or specify that
PSS/ADEPT run the check prior to performing any analyses. Appendix C, Section C.2 contains the
list of validation criteria that are used during this process.
To check the network for any unusual circumstances, choose one of the following:
Choose Network>Validate from the Main Menu. The validation check runs immediately and the results display in the Progress View (Figure 4-2).
Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu. Click the Load Flow tab, and click
the Validate network before solving option (a check mark appears in the box). When
you run an analysis, PSS/ADEPT automatically runs the validation operation, reports
the results of the validation check to you, and carries out the analysis regardless of the
validation outcome (no changes are made to your data).
If a device is reported in the Progress View, you can double-click on the name of the device
to locate and select it on the Diagram and Equipment List Views. The item property sheet can
then be accessed by double-clicking on the selected item.
Figure 4-2. Network Validation
4-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Viewing Results on the Diagram
4.3 Viewing Results on the Diagram

PSS/ADEPT allows you to customize the display of your network analysis results on the diagram.
You can:
Set the analysis information displays, such as detailed convergence monitors, voltage
thresholds, and graphical convergence monitor settings.
Color code overloads, voltage violations, etc.
Set display options for load flow, short circuit, motor starting, CAPO, and TOPO
analyses results.
4.3.1 Setting General Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify what options are use when an analysis is selected.
To set up these analysis options:
1. Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu or click the Analysis Options
button from the Analysis Toolbar. The Analysis Options Property sheet displays
(Figure 4-3).
Figure 4-3. Analysis Options Property Sheet: General Tab
Confidential
4-5

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. Click the General tab and select/enter the analysis options you want:
Create PSS/Engines hub file: PSS/ADEPT can create a file,...\example\network.dmp, that tracks user actions and problems. PTI support personnel may request
that you generate and provide this file for problem analysis purposes. This option is
also used to export data to PSS/Engines.
Branch rating index: Specify the rating index (1-4) to use for determining branch overloads. At present, up to four ratings may be entered in the Construction Dictionary or
specified on individual item property sheets.
% loading: Specify the percent of loading used to calculate branch overloads. The
default is to report overloads for branches that are above 100% of their rating value.
Voltage thresholds: Select the low- and high-voltage thresholds for flagging nodes,
which are over/undervoltage, pu of node base voltage.
Power factor limit: Select the upper limit for flagging branches, which have a power
factor (pf) below this specified limit.
Voltage unbalance: Select the method to calculate voltage unbalance. Enter the voltage unbalance upper limit used to color code the diagram and to select the contents of
the voltage unbalance report.
Current unbalance: Select the method to calculate current unbalance. Enter the current unbalance upper limit used to color code the diagram and to select the contents of
the current unbalance report.
MWh load linearization: Select the method to use when linearizing MWh loads. Enter
the MWh load B-factor. The default method is by group. The default B-factor is 0.885.
3. Click the OK button to save the settings. These settings are saved with the diagram
when you request to save a native binary file (*.adp).
You may also set the display of specific analysis results on the diagram Load
Flow, Short Circuit, Motor Starting, CAPO, and TOPO. Refer to Section 4.3.3 in
this chapter for more information.
4-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

4.3.2 Color Coding the Analysis Results

Color-coding analysis results on your diagram enables you to quickly spot on your color monitor any
troublesome areas in your network model. You can assign colors to flag nodes that fall outside a
specified voltage thresholds, flag overloaded branches, and/or flag devices which belong to a certain
group.
To color code analysis results on your diagram:
1. Choose View>Diagram Properties from the Main Menu. The Diagram Property sheet
Figure 4-4. Diagram Property Sheet: Color Tab

2. Click the Color tab and select one of the color settings for your analysis results
diagrams:
To color code nodes based on their calculated voltage: Select Items by result
voltage level. You may specify the color used to show High, Mid, and Low voltage
nodes. The defaults are blue, black, and red, respectively.
To color code nodes based on their nominal voltage level: Select Items by
Nominal Voltage Level.
To color code overloaded branches: Select Overloaded branches and select a
color. The default color is red.
To color code a network group: Select Items by Group. This option does not apply
to analysis results.
Confidential
4-7

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To color code items by category: Select Loads and Machines by Category. This
option does not apply to analysis results.
To color code unbalanced nodes and branches: Select Unbalanced nodes,
branches and select a color. The default color is blue.
To color code branches under a power factor limit: Select Branches under power
factor limit. The default color is green.
4.3.3 Reporting Results on the Network Diagram

Result display options allow you to format and specify what results are displayed on your network
diagram. Result display options are located on the Results tab of the Equipment List View.
Select or check the results you want to see on the diagram. In turn, the diagram will be updated
immediately. Some results cannot be displayed after a particular analysis; in this case the result
option will be disabled or not selectable.
Result options are saved as a program setting, meaning the application will remember the previous
set of result options each time the program starts until they are subsequently modified.
4.3.3.1 Flow Arrows

After a successful load flow, fault, or motor starting calculation, PSS/ADEPT can display flow arrows
on branch items indicating the direction of power flow. The arrow direction is based on respective
signs of power (summing all phases) at the FROM and TO ends of the branch.
Flow arrows are available only after a successful solution and can be toggled on or off by selecting
Diagram>Properties and placing (toggle on) or removing (toggle off) the check mark in the box
titled Show Flow Arrows.
Both P (kW) and Q (kvar) flow arrows can be displayed. Colors of each arrow can be adjusted by
selecting Diagram>Properties... and selecting the color for the "P" and "Q" values.
Flow arrows are only displayed on the diagram when the branch and shunt display are set to
"power".
The flow arrows are displayed in the direction of positive P (kW) and Q (kvar) flow. For flows on a
branch, the convention is to display the flow into the branch from each end. Shunt device (except
sources) flows are displayed into the device. Source flows are displayed out of the device. The positive/negative signs are assigned based on this convention.
Flow arrows can be animated, by placing a check mark in the box labeled Animate on the Diagram
Properties General tab.
Flow arrow color can be specified by selecting Diagram>Properties, selecting the General tab
and choosing Flow Arrow color.
4-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

4.3.3.2 Load Flow and Short Circuit Result Options

After a load flow solution or standard fault calculation, a default set of results will be displayed on
the diagram. To change the settings for the results, select the Results tab in the Equipment List
View and specify the result options you desire. Figure 4-5 illustrates the diagram result display
options after a load flow analysis.
Figure 4-5. Diagram Result Display Options

The following options are available for node, branch and shunt results. Select any or none of the
options according to your desired preferences.
Node Results:
Voltage magnitude: Check the box next to voltage magnitude to display voltage at
each node on the diagram. If you do not select voltage magnitude, the voltage type,
nominal base voltage, and voltage angle will be disabled.
Voltage representation: Select the voltage unit representation in line-line or

line-neutral, and voltage in volts (V), per unit (pu), kilovolts (kV), or voltage on a
specified nominal delivery voltage base (ndV). If you select the ndV option, enter the
nominal delivery voltage base in the field provided.
Voltage angle: Check the box to display voltage angle at each node on the diagram.
Confidential
4-9

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Branch Results:
Current magnitude: Check the box next to current magnitude to display the current at
each branch on the diagram. Current magnitude may be selected only if the branch and
shunt display option is set to current.
Current angle: Check the box next to current angle to display the current angle at each
branch on the diagram. Current angle may be selected only if the branch and shunt display options is set to current.
Results on: Select how you want branch results displayed on the diagram. Your
choices are: both ends, upstream side, downstream side.
Real power: Check the box to the left of real power to display the real power at each
branch on the diagram. Real power may be selected only if the branch and shunt display option is set to power.
Reactive power: Check the box to the left of reactive power to display the reactive
power at each branch on the diagram. Reactive power may be selected only if the
branch and shunt display option is set to power.
Apparent power: Check the box to the left of Apparent power, S(kVA) to display the
apparent power at each branch on the diagram. Apparent power may be selected only
if the branch and shunt display option is set to S, pf.
Power factor: Check the box to the left of Power factor, pf to display power factor at
each branch on the diagram. Power factor may be selected only if the branch and shunt
display option is set to S, pf.
Shunt Results:
4-10
Current magnitude: Check the box next to current magnitude to display the current at
each shunt on the diagram. Current magnitude may be selected only if the branch and
shunt display option is set to current.
Current angle: Check the box next to current angle to display the current angle at each
shunt on the diagram. Current angle may be selected only if the branch and shunt display options is set to current.
Real power: Check the box to the left of real power to display the real power at each
shunt on the diagram. Real power may be selected only if the branch and shunt display
option is set to power.
Reactive power: Check the box to the left of reactive power to display the reactive
power at each shunt on the diagram. Reactive power may be selected only if the branch
and shunt display option is set to power.
Apparent power: Check the box to the left of Apparent power, S(kVA) to display the
apparent power at each branch on the diagram. Apparent power may be selected only
if the branch and shunt display option is set to S, pf.
Power factor: Check the box to the left of Power factor, pf to display power factor at
each branch on the diagram. Power factor may be selected only if the branch and shunt
display option is set to S, pf.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Branches and Shunts Result Options:
Display: Select current, power, apparent power and power factor (S, pf) display from
the available list.
Unit prefix: Select none to display current in amps, real power in watts and reactive
power in var. Select k (kilo) to display current in kiloamp (kA) real power in kilowatts
(kW), and reactive power in kilovar (kvar). For power, an additional unit prefix M is provided for megawatt (MW) and megavar (Mvar).
The following branch and shunt display options are available when you select to display
power:
Total: Select this to show the total power over all phases.
By phase: Select this to show the power on a phase by phase basis.
Branch losses: Check the box to the left of branch losses to show total branch losses
instead of power.
All (options for all node, branch, and shunt items):
Precision: Select the number of decimal places to display from the available list.
Angles: Select to display angles from 180 to +180, or 0 to 360.
Show results for: Select to show results for Phase A only, Phase B only, Phase C only,
the maximum value over phases A, B and C, or the minimum value over phases A, B,
or C. This option may also be selected on the Zoom Toolbar.
Show units: Check the box to the left of show units to show the result units on the diagram. The result units are automatically displayed in the status bar and will be printed
on the hard copy output of the one-line diagram even if this option is not selected.
Fault All Result Options

After a fault all analysis, you may choose the following:
Nodes Results:
Maximum fault current: Select to display the maximum fault current over all phases,
then select the type of fault current to display from the available list. Fault types are
specified from Analysis Options Property sheet, Short Circuit tab (see Figure 4-15). If
maximum fault current is not checked, no fault current results will display on the
diagram.
Phase at which it occurred: If you wish to display the phase with the maximum fault
current, check the box to the left of this text.
Motor Starting Result Options

All load flow and short circuit options described above are also available after a motor starting
analysis. Additionally, you may display the prestart voltage, starting voltage, or voltage difference at
each node in the network. Voltage difference is the magnitude difference between the prestart and
starting node voltages.
Confidential
4-11

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Report Options
The report update feature allows the user to specify that certain report database files be updated
whenever an analysis function (loadflow, fault all, etc.) is run. This is useful when loading custom
reports created with Crystal Reports Designer or modified from one of the standard reports. This
step is transparent to the user when loading the standard reports. To enable report updating open
the Analysis Options dialog and click the Reports tab. Five different classes of reports may be
enabled by checking the appropriate check boxes: branch device reports, shunt device reports,
node reports, harmonics reports and the fault all report. Below each checkbox for the first four
classes is a group of radio buttons corresponding to the various standard reports associated with
that class of report. For each enabled report class PSS/ADEPT will update the database files associated with the standard report that is selected for that class.
Figure 4-6. Analysis Options: Reports Tab
4-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

TOPO Result Options

The purpose of a tie open point analysis is to determine the optimum system switch configuration
that produces the minimal system loss. This is a special analysis activity that updates the diagram
to indicate those switches that have changed from their original status. Result options may be
adjusted after a TOPO analysis, but results are not displayed on the network diagram. To display
the results for the new configuration (Figure 4-7), simply select to run a load flow analysis.
Figure 4-7. TOPO Diagram Displaying New Configuration Results
Confidential
4-13

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
CAPO Result Options

The purpose of a CAPO analysis is to determine the optimal placement of capacitor banks in the
network. This is a special analysis activity that updates the diagram to indicate the placement of
new capacitor banks in the network. These newly added capacitor banks are drawn on the diagram
after the CAPO analysis is complete. Fixed banks are indicated by "FX" and switched banks are
indicated by "SW". Result options may be adjusted after a CAPO analysis, but the results are not
displayed on the network diagram. Simply select to run a load flow to view results for the optimized
network (Figure 4-8).
Figure 4-8. CAPO Diagram Displaying Optimized Network Results
4-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Calculating Load Flow
4.4 Calculating Load Flow

A load flow solution is a steady-state representation of node voltages, current and power flows.
PSS/ADEPT can perform a load flow analysis on your network and display the results on the
diagram.
4.4.1 Setting Load Flow Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you some control over the solution algorithm; you can specify the number of
iterations, solution precision, operation of transformers and capacitors, and the display of convergence details.
To set load flow analysis options:
1. Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu. The Analysis Options Property sheet
2. Click the Load Flow tab.
Figure 4-9. Analysis Options Property Sheet: Load Flow Tab
Confidential
4-15

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Enter/select the load flow options you want for your calculation:
Show detailed convergence information: Click the box to display detailed progress
messages in the Progress View during the analysis operation (Figure 4-10). For example, you may show a detailed convergence monitor, which flags equipment adjustments.
Figure 4-10. Detailed Convergence Monitor Progress Messages

The output indicates the largest node voltage change in pu (from the previous iteration), for iteration "N" occurring at node "name" and for the "(Phase A, B, or C)" voltage.
When the largest change is less than the tolerance (default = 0.00001 pu), the solution
is complete.
This convergence monitor is useful in diagnosing problems. Examples include:
Persistent appearance of a given node may indicate an excessive load, excessive incoming line impedance, or other similar problem with that node. It can
also indicate an error in the input data not detected by the validation algorithms.
Persistent appearance of the largest voltage change in a particular phase may

indicate a high level of imbalance between the three phases of the network.
Large changes or erratic changes of transformer taps may indicate voltage

regulation problems in the network.
Stop Calculation After N Iterations: Enter the number of iterations (N) to perform
before pausing the solution.
When the solution is in a "paused" state, the Solution Paused dialog displays (Figure 411).
Figure 4-11. Solution Paused Dialog
4-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Do one of the following:

To continue the solution: Click the Continue solution button to continue the solution
iterating N more times before reaching another "paused" state. For example, if N = 5,
after iteration 5 the "Solution paused..." dialog will display. If you click the Continue
solution button, iterations 6 through 10 will occur before another "paused" solution
state. If the solution converges before the iteration limit is reached, the Progress View
will display the "Load flow solution converged after X iterations" message. Where X is
the actual number of iterations that were performed.
To continue the solution algorithm one iteration at a time: Click the Single
iteration button.
To adjust your load flow analysis options: Click the Analysis options... button. The
Analysis Options Property sheet displays, giving you the opportunity to change the
analysis options and reenter the solution at the paused point. You will be permitted to
change the maximum iteration limit, the voltage precision, the power precision, and to
toggle the display of detailed convergence information.
To abort the solution: Click the Abort solution button to exit from the solution algorithm and return to normal PSS/ADEPT operation.
The solution may not be in a solved state.
Convergence Precision: Specify the degree of accuracy required for the load flow to
be considered solved. The default value of solution precision is 0.00001 pu of node
voltage change.
Adjustment of the voltage precision from its normal value of 0.00001 pu will not affect
the convergence of iterative solutions. In some feeders, it is possible to have a combination of high impedance branches and branches with very small but nonzero impedance that are so sensitive to small voltage changes that the numerical precision
limitation of the computer prevents convergence to the specified convergence precision. These cases are readily identifiable by a voltage change history that is swaying
randomly around an essentially constant value. When the precision limit is encountered, there is no benefit in persisting with a tight solution tolerance; it is more reasonable to raise the tolerance to a value that is just above the voltage change dithering
band.
Power Precision: Specify the power flow mismatch tolerance. This is the largest discrepancy allowed between power flowing into and out of the nodes.
Validate network before solving: Specify if you want to carry out network data validation (as described in Chapter 4, Section 4.2.2) before the solution analysis is performed. The results of the network validation will be displayed in the Progress View.
Transformer Taps Locked: If you select this option, all transformer tap adjustment is
blocked, regardless of the status of individual transformers. In this situation the transformer taps will be locked to the current settings specified in the Transformer Property
sheet.
Capacitors Locked: If you select this option, the status of switched capacitor banks
will not be changed during the load flow solution (see Chapter 3, Section 3.7.9). If
capacitors are unlocked (no check mark), the load flow solution will adjust the fraction
switched in value for switched capacitor banks in the network. The value is adjusted
Confidential
4-17

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
based on the switching increment, the regulated voltage range, and the regulated node
specified on the Capacitor Property sheet.
During the load flow, if the voltage at the regulated node is not within the specified voltage range, the switched capacitor fraction switched in, will be incremented by the
switching increment until the voltage at the regulated node falls within the voltage
range.
Graphical convergence monitor: Click the box that precedes the Graphical
Convergence Monitor option to view a graphical convergence monitor that shows you
graphically how the solution converges during a load flow analysis. An example of a
graphical convergence monitor is shown in Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12. Graphical Convergence Monitor

When you select the graphical convergence monitor, you may then choose to modify
any of the following:
Monitored node: Select the node where you want the voltage to be monitored.
Quantity: Currently, only the node voltage is available. By selecting a monitored node
you have automatically selected to monitor its voltage.
Phase: Select the phase A, B, or C of the node you wish to monitor.
Polar Plot Radius: Select the initial per unit (pu) scale of the graphical convergence
monitor. As shown in Figure 4-12, the radius is equal to 5.
4. Click the OK button to accept your options and return to the diagram.
4-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

4.4.2 Performing a Load Flow Analysis

To activate the PSS/ADEPT load flow analysis (Figure 4-13), do one of the following:
Choose Analysis>Load Flow from the Main Menu.
Click the Load Flow Calculation
button on the Analysis Toolbar.
The results of the load flow analysis will be displayed on the diagram according to the
results display options you specified (see Section 4.3.3).
Figure 4-13. Sample Load Flow Analysis Diagram
Confidential
4-19

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4.4.3 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Load Flow Solutions

Modeling considerations that form the basis for PSS/ADEPT load flow solutions are listed below.
Diagrams indicating network modeling for all devices are located in Appendix D.
Network Representation
For PSS/ADEPT, components are subdivided into several categories:
Connection points (nodes, also called buses) define where other components are connected in a network. Connection points may or may not correspond to a physical
device.
Shunt devices represent physical components that exist at one connection point.
Branch devices represent physical components that exist between two (or more) connection points.
Electric power systems are usually three-phase systems, and in PSS/ADEPT each three-phase
network component contains information for all three phases and can be manipulated as a single
entity. A node, for example, provides three connection points, one each for phases A, B, and C. Similarly, a branch provides up to three phases (for A, B, and/or C) between two nodes. The actual
number of conductors or phases present is an attribute of a branch. The three-phase branch is
therefore flexible enough to represent one, two, or three phases. Shunt devices, except for shunt
capacitors, are defined similarly to branches, having 3, 2, or 1 phase.
Sources
A network to be solved in PSS/ADEPT must have at least one three-phase balanced source. In
PSS/ADEPT, it is possible to have any number of sources in service at one time. A source is specified by its terminal voltage and positive- and zero-sequence impedance. When only the short circuit
fault MVA of the source is known, it must be converted to positive- and zero-sequence impedances.
Instructions to convert fault MVA to sequence impedances are located in Chapter 3, Section 3.7.6.
Lines and Cables
A line section connects between two nodes and contains at least one phase wire. A line can have
single-, two-, or three-phase wires.
Transposed lines are specified by their positive- and zero-sequence impedances, and by their
positive- and zero-sequence charging susceptance. Single- and two-phase lines are also specified
by positive- and zero-sequence impedances/admittance. A single-phase line has only one series
impedance and charging admittance. When entering a single-phase line, set positive- and zerosequence impedances/admittances equal to each other. The conductors in a two-phase line have
a self-impedance Zs and a mutual-impedance Zm. When entering data for the two-phase line put in
the positive- and zero-sequence impedances in just as you would for a three-phase line (i.e.,
Z1 = Zs Zm and Z0 = Zs + 2 Zm). The two-phase line also has two charging admittances, Bs for
each conductor to ground and Bm between the two conductors. Again, do the derivation as for a
three-phase line, B1 = Bs + 2 Bm, B0 = Bs. A simple way to enter the impedances/admittances is
to just use the values for the line with all three phases present; there will be very little error in how
many phases are specified.
Presently, cable data is entered the same as for overhead lines, by specifying positive- and zerosequence parameters. For a cable with a grounded shield, the positive- and zero-sequence
charging admittances are usually equal to each other.
4-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Transformers
PSS/ADEPT models a wide variety of transformer connections, including wye-wye, wye-delta,
delta-delta, voltage regulators, etc. For a listing of PSS/ADEPT transformers; refer to Appendix A,
Section A.1. Each transformer has positive- and zero-sequence impedance, the values of which
may be listed explicitly or in the Construction Dictionary. The zero-sequence impedance is used to
represent grounding impedances in wye-connected windings. If the transformer has no grounding
impedances, the zero-sequence impedance is normally set equal to the positive sequence value.
For a delta-delta transformer, or a wye-delta transformer with the wye winding solidly grounded, set
the zero-sequence impedance equal to the positive sequence value; PSS/ADEPT will take care of
blocking zero-sequence current, shunting zero-sequence current to ground, etc.
Transformer connections that cannot be directly represented by one of the types shown in
Appendix A, Table A-1 can often be modeled by using combinations of the implicit models. For
example, a three-winding transformer can be modeled using three two-winding units. See
Appendix A for transformer models that are not directly represented by one of the PSS/ADEPT
transformer types.
Because PSS/ADEPT handles transformer types and connections differently from PSS/U,
there can be some changes when transformers are transferred back and forth between the
programs using raw data file (*.dat). For a complete description of transformer adjustments applied
when reading and writing PSS/U raw data files, see Appendix A, Sections A.1.3 and A.1.4. We
advise saving your data in the *.adp format for transformers and other new PSS/ADEPT data (snapshots, etc.).
Machine Modeling
Three-phase synchronous and asynchronous (induction) machines are modeled in PSS/ADEPT.
Both types can be designated either as a generator or motor by choosing the appropriate sign for
the total real power drawn, a negative value indicates a generator. Additional information on
machines in PSS/ADEPT is contained in Appendix A, Section A.3.
Synchronous Machines
In the power flow, the PSS/ADEPT synchronous machine model will attempt to hold its terminal
voltage constant at a user-specified value. The reactive power output or absorption will be adjusted
to control the terminal voltage. If the reactive requirements of the model exceed the defined reactive
capability limit, control of the terminal voltage will be lost, and the synchronous machine will essentially turn into a constant power load. The voltage setpoint and reactive limits of the machine are
specified in the Machine Property sheet (refer to Chapter 3, Sections 3.7.7 and 3.7.8).
If a synchronous machine is operated above its rated current or above its rated terminal voltage,
the rated temperature rise of the copper or iron would be exceeded respectively. These limits can
be graphically represented as illustrated in Figure 4-14 in terms of reactive power versus real
power. The circular arc from B to C, with its radius equal to the rated kVA of the machine and center
at the origin, represents the rated armature current limit at rated voltage. Point B represents the
rated power factor of the machine. The arc from A to B represents rated field current limit of the
machine. When a synchronous machine is operated in the underexcited region, there is a high magnitude of flux in the core ends of the machine. The arc from C to D represents the limit for heating
due to this flux.
Reactive capability curves as shown in Figure 4-14 can be used to determine the reactive limits of
a machine. The typical maximum and minimum reactive limits would correspond to points B and C,
respectively. Note, however, the reactive limits can change for different levels of real power.
Confidential
4-21

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
When a synchronous machine is started, it is represented by its locked rotor impedance. If the synchronous machine is running, and another machine is being started, the running synchronous
machine will be represented by a source behind transient reactance. The value of the source
voltage/angle is determined by running a load flow of the network at the conditions existing just
before the motor starting breaker is closed.
In a short circuit simulation, a synchronous machine is a source behind either the transient or subtransient impedance, according to which you select. The value of the source is determined the
same way as was done for motor starting (i.e., running a prefault load flow).
Rated
Field
Current
Rated
Armature
Current
Reactive
Power (Q)
B
Rated pf
0
Real Power (P)
Limit for End Iron

Core Heating
Figure 4-14. Reactive Capability Curve for a Synchronous Machine
4-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Induction Machines
During a load flow simulation, induction machines normally draw the specified real power. The reactive power consumption and slip are determined from the machine model. There are five induction
machines available in PSS/ADEPT, corresponding to NEMA A, B, C, D, and E designs. However, if
the induction goes beyond its maximum torque capability, it will stall. When that happens the induction machine will be represented by, its locked rotor impedance. When an induction machine is
started it will be represented by, its locked rotor impedance. If the induction machine is running, and
another machine is being started, the running induction machine will be represented by a source
behind transient reactance, the same as for the synchronous.
In a short circuit simulation, induction machines are a source behind either the transient or subtransient impedance, just as with the synchronous machine. For further information, see Appendix A,
Section A.3.
Static Load Modeling
In PSS/ADEPT, static loads are modeled as constant power, constant current, or constant impedance. In addition, PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify the load as grounded or ungrounded. For
grounded load types, the load is represented as connected between phase and neutral, whereas,
ungrounded load entered in phase A is actually connected between phases A-B, ungrounded load
entered in phase B is connected between phases B-C, and ungrounded load entered in phase C is
connected between phases C-A.
Constant Power Load
Common practice in load flow work assumes that distribution tap changing transformers, voltage
regulators, and capacitors hold system voltages to nominal values. This is also valid for industrial
loads that are predominately characterized by electrical motors consuming constant power. Hence,
it is appropriate for loads to be modeled as constant real and reactive power demand:
S n = P n + jQ n = cons tan t
With this type of load representation, the power demand does not vary with voltage. The load current, however, varies inversely proportional to the voltage level (V), as:
Sn *
I L = -------
V
where the asterisk indicates the complex conjugate.
To allow convergence at very low system voltages (i.e., 0.5 pu), as node voltage decreases constant
power loads are gradually converted to constant impedance.
In some cases, treating loads as constant power may not be acceptable. In these studies the
voltage dependence of load can be modeled by, constant current and/or constant impedance loads.
Confidential
4-23

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Constant Current Load

Load may be specified as having a constant current characteristic that is established from the nominal load value (Sn) entered in PSS/ADEPT:
S n *
I L = -------
V n
where Vn is the node base voltage.
With the constant current load representation, the actual power demand varies with node voltage
(V), as:
VS
*
S Actual = VI L = ----------nVn
Constant current loads are also gradually converted to constant impedance as the node voltage
decreases.
Constant Impedance Load
When representing load using the constant impedance model, the value of constant impedance is
determined from the nominal value of power demand that was entered into PSS/ADEPT as follows:
2
Vn
Z L = ----------- = cons tan t
S
n
where Vn is nominal one-per-unit voltage.
The actual power demand varies with the squared of the corresponding node voltage (V) as:
2
2
V Sn
V
S Actual = ------- = -------------ZL
2
Vn
4-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Calculating Short Circuits
4.5 Calculating Short Circuits

A short circuit calculation determines the effect of a fault on the network (e.g., one or more phases
coming in contact with each other, the ground, a tree, etc). In PSS/ADEPT, there are two types of
short circuit calculations: Fault calculation, and Fault All.
For Fault calculations, you place the desired faults at single or multiple nodes in the network. You
select the fault from the Diagram Toolbar and attach it to the node as a shunt device. Each fault has
a property sheet where you can specify the fault details (e.g., three-phase, phase-to-ground, etc).
When PSS/ADEPT runs the fault simulation, all node voltages, branch currents, and fault currents
are calculated based on the options specified under the Short Circuit tab of the Analysis Options
Property sheet.
In the Fault All (includes all nodes in the network) calculation, a series of faults (as specified in the
Analysis Options Property sheet) is sequentially and individually applied. Only the current magnitudes in each of the faults, is returned. For example, suppose there are only two nodes in the
network (Node1 and Node2), and that the fault types are three-phase and phase-ground. A threephase fault is placed at Node1 and the fault current is calculated. Next, a phase-ground fault is
placed at Node1 and the fault current is calculated, then the three-phase and phase-to-ground
faults are placed in the same manner on Node2. Four fault current results will be returned.
Short circuit calculations are done using the network state just prior to the fault occurrence. With
the fault(s) removed, a load flow is done to let transformer taps set, capacitors switch, and to get
the prefault voltage at each node. Static loads are then converted to constant impedance, based on
their specified power and the voltage at the node where they are connected. Machines are represented as internal voltage sources behind an impedance; the magnitude and angle of the internal
source being determined from the proceeding load flow solution. The actual short circuit calculation
is then done. No transformer tap or capacitor switching is done during the actual short circuit
simulation.
After a Fault All calculation, Thevenin impedance and X/R ratios are available. To view these values
select Report>Fault All Current.
The Fault All Current report displays the values of Z00 and Z11 at each node. When the network is
completely balanced, the off diagonal terms of the modal impedance matrix are zero, and the values
of Z00 and Z11 are meaningful. Usually the negative-sequence Thevenin impedance is the same
as Z11, although they can be different when there is rotating equipment (e.g., machines) on the network. As the network becomes unbalanced, the off diagonal terms of the Thevenin modal
impedance matrix Z012 become more important and the display of only Z00 and Z11 become less
meaningful. When the only cause of system imbalance is unbalanced loads on the network, the off
diagonal terms are probably small and can be ignored. In the case where there are single or twophase branches, the situation becomes more serious. Sequence voltages, currents, and impedances are based on the concept of three phases. When you have two or single-phase branches,
the idea of sequence impedances falls apart.
The fault all report has been modified to account for three, two, and single-phase branch connections. For nodes where one or two phases are energized, phase impedances are displayed instead
of sequence impedances. The node phases, now displayed on the fault all report, are determined
by the phases of the branches that are connected to it. If a node has only one phase energized,
the phase impedance will be displayed in the R1 and X1 columns. The R0 and X0 columns will be
displayed as a blank field (not applicable). If a node has two phases energized, the value displayed
in the R1 and X1 columns is the Thevenin impedance for a phase-to-phase fault and the value displayed in the R0 and X0 columns is the impedance for a phase-to-phase-to-ground fault.
Confidential
4-25

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4.5.1 Setting Short Circuit Analysis Options

For short circuit calculations, PSS/ADEPT allows you to define the fault types for a Fault All calculation, whether to use machine transient or subtransient impedance, and the impedance to be used
for phase-to-ground faults.
To set short circuit analysis options:
Figure 4-15. Analysis Options Property Sheet: Short Circuit Tab

2. Click the Short Circuit tab.
3. Enter/select the short circuit options you want for your calculation:
Machine Impedance: PSS/ADEPT allows you to use the machine transient or subtransient impedance in the short circuit analysis. The decision to select a machines
transient or subtransient parameter is based on the fault duration period. The subtransient impedance will be smaller than transient impedance, and determines the current
immediately following a fault (approximately two cycles).
The transient impedance determines fault current after the subtransient period. The
length of time the transient impedance holds depends on machine time constants, and,
for a synchronous machine, the type of exciter.
4-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Impedance for phase-to-ground faults: You can enter a fault grounding impedance.
The default grounding impedance is zero representing a solidly grounded (bolted) fault.
This grounding impedance is only applicable to the "Phase-to-ground through impedance" fault type.
Fault All Types: Specify the type(s) of Fault All calculation(s) you want to perform on
the network. A Fault All will perform calculations for all fault types applied sequentially
and individually at each node in the power system network. This option is not used for
standard fault calculations.
4. Click the OK button to accept the short circuit analysis options.
Confidential
4-27

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4.5.2 Performing a Short Circuit Analysis

To activate the PSS/ADEPT short circuit analysis, do one of the following:
Choose Analysis>Fault or Analysis>Fault All from the Main Menu.
Click the Fault Calculation

ysis Toolbar.
button or Fault All Calculation
button on the Anal-
The results of the short circuit analysis will be displayed on the diagram (Figure 4-16)
according to the result display options you selected.
Figure 4-16. Sample Short Circuit Analysis Diagram

A Fault All calculation can only be performed if, there are no standard faults specified in the
network or the standard faults are out of service. Use the Toggle Fault status or Clear Faults
button on the Analysis Toolbar to adjust faults, which are present in the network.
4-28
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

4.5.3 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Short Circuit Solutions

Modeling considerations that form the basis for PSS/ADEPT short circuit solutions are listed below.
Sources
In short circuit analysis, sources are treated as a constant voltage behind the specified sequence
impedance. The source impedance is specified on the system kVA base and node base voltage
(see Chapter 3, Section 3.7.6). The source voltage is determined from the prefault load flow.
Lines and Cables
A line section connects between two nodes and contains at least one phase wire. A line can have
single-, two-, or three-phase wires.
Transposed lines are specified by their positive- and zero-sequence impedances, and by their
positive- and zero-sequence charging susceptance. Single- and two-phase lines are also specified
by positive- and zero-sequence impedances/admittance. A single-phase line has only one series
impedance and charging admittance. When entering a single-phase line, set positive- and zerosequence impedances/admittances equal to each other. The conductors in a two-phase line have
a self-impedance Zs and a mutual-impedance Zm. When entering data for the two-phase line put in
the positive- and zero-sequence impedances in just as you would for a three-phase line (i.e.,
Z1 = Zs Zm and Z0 = Zs + 2 Zm). The two-phase line also has two charging admittances, Bs for
each conductor to ground and Bm between the two conductors. Again do the derivation as for a
three-phase line, B1 = Bs + 2 Bm, B0 = Bs. A simple way to enter the impedances/admittances is
to just use the values for the line with all three phases present; there will be very little error in how
many phases are specified.
At the present time, cable data is entered the same as for overhead lines, by specifying positiveand zero-sequence parameters. For a cable with a grounded shield, the positive- and zerosequence charging admittances are usually equal to each other.
Transformers
PSS/ADEPT models a wide variety of transformer connections, including wye-wye, wye-delta,
delta-delta, voltage regulators, etc. For a listing of PSS/ADEPT transformers; refer to Appendix A,
Section A.1. Each transformer has positive- and zero-sequence impedance, the values of which
may be listed explicitly or in the construction dictionary. The zero-sequence impedance is used to
represent grounding impedances in wye-connected windings. If the transformer has no grounding
impedances, the zero-sequence impedance is normally set equal to the positive sequence value.
For a delta-delta transformer, or a wye-delta transformer with the wye winding solidly grounded, set
the zero-sequence impedance equal to the positive sequence value; PSS/ADEPT will take care of
blocking zero-sequence current, shunting zero-sequence current to ground, etc.
Transformer connections that cannot be directly represented by one of the types shown in
Appendix A, Table A-1 can often be modeled by using combinations of the implicit models. For
example, a three winding transformer can be modeled using three two winding units. See
Appendix A for transformer models that are not directly represented by one of the PSS/ADEPT
transformer types.
Because PSS/ADEPT handles transformer types and connections differently from PSS/U,
there can be some changes when transformers are transferred back and forth between the
programs using raw data file (*.dat). For complete description of transformer adjustments applied
when reading and writing PSS/U raw data files, see Appendix A, Sections A.1.3 and A.1.4. We
advise saving your data in the *.adp format for transformers and other new PSS/ADEPT data (snapshots, etc.).
Confidential
4-29

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Machine Modeling
In the short circuit calculations, synchronous machines are treated as constant voltage behind an
impedance. You may specify transient or subtransient machine impedance for the fault calculation:
choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu, click the Short Circuit tab, and click the option
you want.
Running induction machines are represented the same as synchronous machines in the short circuit solutions; that is, they are treated as constant voltage behind an impedance. The impedance
used is either subtransient or transient, as specified by the user. The internal voltages for both synchronous and induction machines are determined form the prefault load flow, just as for sources.
Static Load Modeling
In PSS/ADEPT, static loads are modeled as constant power, constant current, or constant impedance. In addition, PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify the load as grounded or ungrounded. For
grounded load types, the load is represented as connected between phase and neutral, whereas,
ungrounded load entered in phase A is actually connected between phases A-B, ungrounded load
entered in phase B is connected between phases B-C, and ungrounded load entered in phase C is
connected between phases C-A.
PSS/ADEPT considers the load connection in the short circuit calculation. For example, if a transformer is delta-grounded wye through a resistance, Rg, and the load is grounded wye connected,
then for a single line-to-ground fault, the transformer neutral resistance, Rg, will be in parallel with
the load impedance in the zero sequence. This will produce more accurate results then the methodology used in PSS/U.
4.5.4 Thevenin Equivalent Impedance

Thevenin equivalent impedance is the complex impedance seen from one point (node) in the network. The network, all loads and all sources are replaced by an equivalent voltage behind an
equivalent impedance as shown below (Figure 4-17).
Figure 4-17. Thevenin Equivalent

The Thevenin equivalent is used in place of the full network for short circuit calculations. The functions described on the next few pages permit an application to acquire Thevenin impedance or the
equivalent voltage behind Thevenin impedance.
4-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

In a three-phase unbalanced network, Thevenin impedance is a complex matrix rather than a single
complex number. Similarly, the equivalent voltage is a complex vector rather than a single complex
number. These are shown below in phase (ABC) space.
Z aa Z ab Z ac
Z abc = Z ba Z bb Z bc
Z ca Z cb Z cc
Va
V abc = V b
Vc
In symmetrical component (012) space, the Thevenin impedance is also a complex matrix and the
equivalent voltage is a complex vector.
Z 00 Z 01 Z 02
Z 012 = Z 10 Z 11 Z 12
Z 20 Z 21 Z 22
V0
V 012 = V 1
V2
The cross terms (Z01, Z02, Z10, Z12, Z20, and Z21) are often insignificant and are usually ignored.
The ratio of reactance to resistance, called the X over R ratio, is an important quantity and the following can be obtained directly from the functions that calculate Thevenin equivalent impedance:
Zero sequence X over R ratio:
Im ( Z 00 ) Re ( Z 00 )
Positive sequence X over R ratio:
Im ( Z 11 ) Re ( Z 11 )
Negative sequence X over R ratio:
Im ( Z 22 ) Re ( Z 22 )
Short Circuit Current

Once the Thevenin equivalent impedance is determined, it is possible to estimate the short circuit
current. The fault is represented by its impedance and the rest of the network is represented by a
voltage behind the Thevenin equivalent, as shown below (Figure 4-18).
Figure 4-18. Use of Thevenin Equivalent to Get Short Circuit Current
Confidential
4-31

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Determining short circuit current in this manner has the advantage of being fast. It is particularly fast
to calculate fault current for several different types of fault at one location. There is a small amount
of overhead in moving the fault to another location; the process is still relatively fast however. Note
that it is not possible to calculate current in the lines, transformers, switches, and other branches of
the network. It is only possible to get fault terminal current.
The only current available from these functions is the fault terminal current (Ia, Ib, Ic). For faults of
type line-to-ground and faults of type line-to-line-to-ground, there is no ambiguity between current
in the fault and the fault terminal current. For faults of type line-to-line there may be ambiguity
between terminal current (Ia, Ib, Ic) and current in the fault (Iab, Ibc, Ica) as shown below (Figure 419). Terminal current (Ia, Ib, Ic) is available. Current in the fault (Iab, Ibc, Ica) is not available.
Figure 4-19. Line-to-Line Fault Currents
4-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Calculating Motor Starting
4.6 Calculating Motor Starting

In PSS/ADEPT, a motor starting analysis is a calculation of voltages and currents in the network
when a motor (or motors) is being started. The motor starting activity allows you to choose the
motor(s) to be started and to compare the network conditions before and after the motor(s) is started.
4.6.1 Setting Motor Starting Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you to select the machine or machines to be started during the motor starting
analysis. For the selected machines, PSS/ADEPT will calculate the voltages and currents in the network for a simultaneous start of all machines.
To set motor starting analysis options:
Figure 4-20. Analysis Options Property Sheet: Motor Starting Tab

2. Click the Motor Starting tab.
The Machines to Start column shows all the machines in the network that can be
selected for a motor start analysis, in alphanumeric order by machine name and with
the name of the node where the machine is located. To select a machine to start from
the diagram, click on the machine to select it, right-click and select Add Item(s) to, then
select Motor Starting.
Confidential
4-33

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Select the machine(s) you want to start:

Machines to Start: Click the box that precedes the machine name. A check mark displays in the box. Repeat this step for each machine you want in the analysis.
To remove a machine from the list, click the box that precedes the machine name
(the check mark disappears).
4. Click the OK button to accept the motor starting options.
4.6.2 Performing a Motor Starting Analysis

To activate the PSS/ADEPT motor starting analysis, do one of the following:
Choose Analysis>Motor Starting from the Main Menu.
Click the Motor Starting Calculation
Motor starting will appear disabled until a machine has been selected for starting.
The results of the motor start analysis will be displayed on the diagram (Figure 4-21)
according to the result display options you selected.
Figure 4-21. Sample Motor Starting Analysis Diagram
4-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

The motor starting analysis performs a simultaneous motor start of all designated motors.
PSS/ADEPT automatically performs a prestart solution with the starting motors off-line (a load flow),
then runs a starting solution. A comparison between the prestart and starting conditions can be
obtained either on the diagram or by selecting a Voltage Drop report.
The event sequence for motor a starting study is as follows:
1. Specify the motors to start in the Motor Starting tab of the Analysis Options Property
sheet.
2. Select Analysis>Motor Starting from the Main Menu.
3. The designated motors to be started are disconnected from the network. A load flow is
performed to establish prestart conditions.
4. Simultaneous motor starting is carried out by switching all starting motors online. A load
flow is again performed to established starting conditions. All transformer taps are
locked during the starting calculation.
5. Compare
the
prestart
and
starting
Report>Node Voltage>Drop from the Main Menu.
conditions
by
choosing
6. Examine the network prestart and starting current and voltages on the Diagram View.
Voltage difference between prestart and starting conditions for nodes in the network
can be obtained by clicking the Results Tab in the Equipment List View and choosing
Voltage change from the Condition drop-down menu.
You can see this only after a motor start analysis, and you may have to scroll
down the Results tab, which is located on the Equipment List View.
4.6.3 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Motor Starting Solutions

Modeling considerations that form the basis for PSS/ADEPT motor starting solutions are listed below.
Sources
Sources are represented the same as for short circuit analysis.
Running Machines
Running machines are modeled the same as in short circuit analysis, except transient impedance
is always used.
Machines Being Started
In motor starting, the synchronous motor being started is modeled as its locked rotor impedance,
usually the synchronous machine subtransient impedance. To account for extra starting impedance, you can change the locked rotor impedance value.
An induction machine being started is also represented by its locked rotor impedance. The value of
the locked rotor impedance can be changed on the Induction Machine Property sheet.
Autotransformer Starting
In PSS/ADEPT, you can choose to start the motor with a series autotransformer starter (starting
compensator) to reduce the motor in-rush current; under the Start-up tab of the Synchronous
Machine Property sheet, click the Use autotransformer box (a check mark appears).
Confidential
4-35

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The starting transformer impedance may be entered directly into the fields provided. The transformer impedance you specify is for a transformer tap of 0.65 pu.
The actual tap setting to be used for the motor starting is specified on the field provided
(Figure 4-22).
Figure 4-22. Machine Property Sheet Showing Series Starting Autotransformer Option
4-36
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Optimal Capacitor Placement (CAPO)
4.7 Optimal Capacitor Placement (CAPO)

PSS/ADEPTs CAPO is an optional solution package you may purchase in addition to the
PSS/ADEPT base license. If you are not licensed to run this option, the Analysis>CAPO and
Report>Capacitor Placement Optimization menu options, and the CAPO Toolbar button will be
unavailable to you. Additionally, the Analysis>Options CAPO tab will not be present.
CAPO places capacitors on the network as long as they are economic (i.e., as long as the value of
the monetary savings from the placement is greater than the cost of the capacitor itself). CAPO
selects the node for the nth capacitor that results in the largest monetary savings. Load snapshots
are implemented in PSS/ADEPT to provide modeling of the load variations, which occur with time,
temperature, or other factors. When switched capacitors are placed by CAPO, the capacitor
switching increment for each snapshot is also calculated.
4.7.1 Setting CAPO Network Economics

Network economics are used during optimal capacitor placement.
To set economics, choose Network>Economics from the Main Menu. The Economics dialog displays. Refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.9, in this manual and the information given below to help you
complete the prompts.
The cost of electrical energy, cP, is in monetary units per kWh. Based on the units, it should be clear
that this is "real" energy. In the United States, the monetary unit would normally be dollars but neither PSS/ADEPT, or CAPO assumes any monetary unit; you can use any local currency, as long as
consistency is maintained across the various variables.
The cost of reactive energy, cQ, is similar to the cost of real energy, again in the your monetary unit.
This cost (as can others) be set to zero if reactive energy has no perceived value.
The cost of electric demand, dP, is the cost of generation or capacity that would have to be purchased to replace the systems losses. It is not presently used by CAPO.
The cost of reactive demand, dQ, is similar to the real electric demand above. This cost is not presently used by CAPO.
The discount rate, r, is used to bring future savings and costs back to the present time. If funds were
borrowed from a bank to purchase and install the capacitors, the discount rate should be the same,
or very close, to the bank loan rate. No tax consequences or other factors are considered by CAPO
when applying the discount rate. The actual equations used by CAPO will be shown after the other
variables on the form are explained.
The inflation rate, i, is the yearly increase in the cost of energy and capacitor maintenance. Notice
that this rate is expressed as a fraction (pu), not a percentage (%). Typical values for this variable
might be 0.02 to 0.08 per year.
The evaluation period, N, is the amount of time the capacitors have to produce savings which
cancel their installation and maintenance cost (i.e., the payback period). Your utility might have a
policy that investments of this type pay for themselves within five years. In this case, the evaluation
period should be 5.
The installation cost for fixed capacitors, cF, is specified in monetary units per kvar of capacitor size;
you will need to estimate this cost reasonably close for your utility or customer. It may include the
actual price of the capacitor cans, transportation costs, labor, etc.
Confidential
4-37

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The installation cost of switched capacitors, cQ, is like that for fixed capacitors, except that switched
capacitors will probably cost more, so they have a separate field.
The maintenance rate for fixed capacitors, mF, is the yearly cost of keeping them in service. The
rate is expressed per kvar-yr. Maintenance costs increase at the inflation rate.
The maintenance rate for switched capacitors, mS, is similar to that for fixed banks. A separate field
is provided for the switched units because maintenance costs are expected to be higher for them.
4.7.2 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates CAPO Financials

The CAPO financial calculations are explained below for a fixed capacitor for a single load snapshot. Assume CAPO is considering placing the nth capacitor, of size sF. All the eligible nodes in the
network are searched to find where the capacitor can be placed to produce the greatest monetary
savings; suppose the real power saving is xP (kW) and the reactive savings is xQ (kvar). The
energy savings and maintenance occur over a period of time so they are leveled, by calculating an
equivalent period Ne. Using the variables defined above, Ne is:
N
Ne =
1 + -i n
---------1+r
n=1
The present value of the energy savings is then:
Savings F = 8760 Ne ( xP c P + xQ cQ )
The present value of the cost of the capacitor is:
Cost F = sF ( cF + Ne m F )
If the savings is greater than the cost, CAPO considers placing the (n+1)th capacitor; if the savings
are less than the cost, CAPO discards the nth capacitor and stops.
4-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

4.7.3 Setting CAPO Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you to define capacitor placement solution options.
To set CAPO analysis options:
2. Click the CAPO tab.
If you are not licensed to run the CAPO option, this tab will not be visible to you.
Figure 4-23. Analysis Options Property Sheet: CAPO Tab

3. Enter/select the CAPO options you want for your analysis:
Connection type: Choose the capacitor type you want to place: Wye or Delta. The
connection type applies to both fixed and switched capacitors for all nodes in the
system.
Load snapshots to consider: Any number of load snapshots may be considered in
the optimization process: check the box(es) that precede the snapshot name. These
load profiles exist for a given time fraction and are used during the optimization to determine the feasibility of placing a capacitor bank on the system. Since the CAPO analysis
Confidential
4-39

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
is being done on a yearly basis, the duration is the fraction of the year during which the
snapshot applies. Normally, you probably have the sum of the duration of all the snapshots you are using in CAPO sum to 1.0; however, there is no requirement that this be
so. For example, if your utility is only open 10 months of the year, CAPO can still be
used. For more information on defining load snapshots, refer to Chapter 3,
Section 3.11.
Number of banks available: Specify the number of fixed and switched capacitor
banks you have available for placement (e.g., the number in the warehouse). Initially,
the number of fixed and switched capacitors available for placement will be equal to
zero. If there are no banks available and you run the CAPO analysis, the Progress View
will display the "No Capacitors are available for placement" message.
Three-phase bank size: Specify the total three-phase capacitor bank size in kvar for
both fixed and switched banks to place on the network. For example, if one 100-kvar
fixed capacitor bank is indicated for placement, the analysis will place as many 100kvar fixed banks as it finds necessary to reach the optimal condition. The same is true
for switched capacitor banks.
Eligible nodes: Indicate which nodes are eligible for both fixed and switched capacitors by checking the box that precedes the node name. Initially, all nodes in the system
will be available for placement of both fixed and switched capacitor banks. (A check
mark appears in all boxes.)
To mark or unmark multiple consecutive nodes: Click the first item in a range, press
and hold down the Shift key, click the last node in the range.
To mark or unmark multiple nonconsecutive nodes: Press and hold down the Ctrl
key, and click the box that precedes each node.
4.7.4 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Capacitor Placement

The following paragraphs provide a complete description of CAPO, considering fixed and switched
capacitors and multiple snapshots. First, for each snapshot a load flow is done to let transformer
taps and existing switched capacitors adjust. These transformer tap and capacitor increment settings are then saved with each snapshot. There will be no further adjustments of these
transformer/capacitor settings as CAPO progresses.
CAPO first considers fixed capacitors, which, by definition, are on during all load snapshots. All the
eligible nodes in the network are then examined to see at which one the capacitor placement offers
the greatest monetary savings. Since there are multiple snapshots, this reduction is calculated as
the weighted sum from each snapshot, where the weighting factor is the snapshot duration. The
following conditions can then stop the capacitor from actually being placed on the selected node:
The present worth of the savings does not offset the present worth of the costs. With
multiple snapshots the savings are evaluated as in the simple example considered
above, except now a weighted sum over all the profiles is calculated.
There are no more fixed capacitors available to be placed (actually, this can be checked
before all the nodes are searched, but is listed here for completeness).
An upper voltage limit is violated in one of the profiles (the network upper voltage limit
is set from the Analysis Options Property sheet under the General tab).
Fixed capacitors continue to be placed until one of the above three conditions are encountered; at
that point the fixed capacitor placement ends and the switched placement begins. This procedure
4-40
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

is a bit more complicated, and before we begin this is probably a good point to make a comment. If
only one load snapshot is used, you might expect that after the fixed capacitors are placed there
will be no placement of switched capacitors. There are at least four conditions where this is not true:
You had only a few fixed capacitors available, and there was still considerable opportunity for savings when these fixed units were depleted.
The eligible nodes for switched capacitors are different than those eligible for fixed
capacitor placement.
You make the cost of switched capacitors less than that of fixed capacitors, and after
the fixed capacitors are placed it will still be cost effective to place switched capacitors.
You make the size of the switched capacitor bank smaller than that of the fixed bank.
The eligible nodes (for switched capacitors) in the network are reviewed to find the node, which produces the greatest savings summed over all the snapshots. There are a couple of subtleties in this
evaluation. First, if placing the switched capacitor causes a voltage violation in any snapshot, the
capacitor is turned off during that period. Second, if the capacitor causes a cost penalty for a snapshot, it is also turned off for that snapshot. The calculation of the present worth of the savings is then
calculated considering only the snapshots during which the capacitor is turned on. This process
continues until a point is reached where:
The savings do not offset the cost of the switched capacitor.
CAPO runs out of switched capacitors to place.
For reference, the complete set of CAPO equations are listed below. The cost of a capacitor, which
consists of installation cost and maintenance cost, is shown first for a fixed capacitor. The form is
the same for a switched capacitor.
Cost F = sF ( cF + Ne m F )
With multiple snapshots, three more variables must be defined. Let there be K total snapshots used
by CAPO, each of which has a duration dk. For any switched capacitor, let switchk be the switch
state, where switchk = 1 if the capacitor is on during the snapshot and = 0 if it is off. The savings for
a fixed capacitor (which is always switched on) is the sum of the savings over all snapshots.
K
K
Savings F = 8760 Ne cP xP k + cQ xQ k
k=1
k=1
The savings for a switched capacitor also involves the switching schedule.
K
K
Savings S = 8760 N e cP switch k xP k + cQ switch k xQ k
k=1
k=1
Confidential
4-41

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
For completeness, we include again the equation for Ne:

N
Ne =
1 + -i n
---------1+r
n=1
In summary, CAPO places fixed capacitors on the network until one of the stop conditions are
encountered. Then switched capacitors are placed until one of the switched capacitor stop conditions occurs. The total cost of the optimization is then the installation and maintenance cost of all
the capacitors placed; the total savings is the sum of the savings from each capacitor.
CAPO may place multiple fixed and/or multiple switched capacitors at a node. PSS/ADEPT will
combine these capacitors into a single fixed capacitor and/or a single switched capacitor. The single
switched capacitor will have a switching increment assigned to it, and the switching schedule will
show the steps in service for the single capacitor.
4-42
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

4.7.5 Performing an Optimal Capacitor Placement Analysis

To run the optimal capacitor placement analysis, do one of the following:
Choose Analysis>CAPO from the Main Menu.
Click on the CAPO
If you are not licensed to run the CAPO option, this button will not be available.
During the optimization, messages are written to the Progress View indicating the size and type of
the placed capacitor bank(s) and its node location along with the system losses. When the optimization is complete, the final system configuration including the newly added capacitors is redrawn
with the bank size and either the "FX" or "SW" indicating that a fixed or switched capacitor bank has
been added. A sample diagram and Progress View after placement is shown in Figure 4-24.
Figure 4-24. Diagram and Progress Views After Optimal Capacitor Placement
4.7.6 Reporting CAPO Analysis Results

To obtain a tabular report containing input parameters and analysis results, choose
Report>Capacitor Placement Optimization from the Main Menu.
Confidential
4-43

Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO)
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4.8 Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO)

The TOPO feature is an optional solution analysis package that you may purchase in addition to the
PSS/ADEPT base package. If you are not licensed to run this option, the Analysis>TOPO and
Report>Tie Open Point Optimization menu options, and the TOPO button on the Analysis Toolbar
will not be available to you. Additionally, the Analysis>Options TOPO tab will not be present.
TOPO optimizes the portion of a radial network connected to the root node. That is, of all possible
radial configurations, TOPO finds the one with the lowest real power loss. At the present time,
TOPO works only with radial systems. The root node is commonly the first source node, but you
may specify a different root node by selecting Network>Properties from the Main Menu.
The TOPO algorithm uses a heuristic method based on an optimum power flow. A characteristic of the
heuristic algorithm is that it is not possible to find the second best answer, the third best answer, etc.
It is also not possible to prove that the TOPO solution is, indeed, the best solution. Such proof would
require searching through all the possible radial combinations, which could be a very large number.
The TOPO-controllable switches are designated on the Switch Property sheets. Any of the controllable switches that are initially open must cause a network loop to be formed when they are closed.
If they do not form a loop, they are either in an island, or would connect to an island if closed. The
switches that do not form a loop are discarded by TOPO before the analysis begins, and only the
loop forming initially open switches are used. Likewise, closed controllable switches must be in the
part of the network in the root node tree; closed switches in islands will be discarded.
For a single load snapshot, and no branch overload checking, the operation of TOPO is easily
explained. Starting with the initial radial system, TOPO closes one of the open controllable switches
to form a loop. An optimum power flow procedure is then done on the loop to determine what is the
best switch to open to change the network back to radial. This process continues until the switch
that is opened is always the one that was closed, at which time TOPO is finished. The resulting network is the radial network with minimum real power loss.
TOPO can work with multiple load snapshots; in which case a single network configuration is found
which has the lowest real power loss over all snapshots. That is, the switch setting may not be
optimum for any one particular load snapshot, but it will be for the combination of them. When doing
the analysis with multiple snapshots, TOPO uses the real power loss from each snapshot weighted
by its relative time duration.
TOPO can consider branch overloads. If this option is chosen, and the initial network has no overloads, the optimized network will also have no overloads. If the initial system does have overloads,
the procedure is slightly more complex. As TOPO is going through the optimization procedure, each
time the network is restored to radial (by breaking a loop formed when a controllable switch was
closed) all load snapshots are checked to see if they are any overloaded branches. If, at any time
during the optimization procedure, a configuration is found with no overloads, then the final optimized network will have no overloads.
TOPO needs a "Flat" network to operate on. Therefore, all transformer taps should be set to unity.
You can set the transformer taps to unity by selecting Network>Flat Transformers from the Main
Menu. If you have open controllable switches connected between parts of the network at two
different voltage levels (for instance a switch connected between a 4-kV portion of the network and
a 13.2-portion), TOPO may produce strange results.
TOPO provides as output the initial and final system losses, and also the monetary value of the loss
savings. These loss savings are on a one year basis, and include both energy (real and reactive)
an d de m an d (re al an d re ac tive) ca lcula ted usin g the valu es yo u sp ecified un de r
Network>Economics from the Main Menu.
4-44
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

4.8.1 Setting TOPO Network Economics

Network economics are used during the analysis to calculate energy and demand costs: price of
electrical energy, price of electrical reactive energy, price of electrical demand, and price of electrical reactive demand.
To set economics, choose Network>Economics from the Main Menu. The Economics dialog displays. Refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.9, in this manual for information on completing the prompts.
4.8.2 Setting TOPO Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify the solution options you want to use in your TOPO analysis.
To set your TOPO analysis options:
Figure 4-25. Analysis Options Property Sheet: TOPO Tab

2. Click the TOPO tab.
If you are not licensed to run the TOPO option, this button will not be available.
Confidential
4-45

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Enter/select the TOPO option you want for your analysis:

Consider branch overload limits: Click the check box to consider overloaded
branches in the optimization process. A rating index displays the rating limit to use for
all branches. This rating index (1-4) is specified under the General tab of the Analysis
Options Property sheet, and is the branch rating defined in the Item Property sheet. If
overloading occurs during the analysis, the algorithm will back up to a condition where
there is no overloading. If overloaded branches are present in the initial system, the
final optimized network may also contain overloads.
Load snapshots to consider: Any number of load snapshots in addition to the current
(base) load data specification may be considered in the optimization process: check
the box(es) that precedes the snapshot name. These load snapshots exist for a given
time fraction and are used to find the single radial configuration with minimum losses
for the set of load snapshots and weighting factors specified here. For more information
on defining load snapshots, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.11.
4.8.3 Performing a Tie Open Point Optimization Analysis

To run the tie open point optimization, do one of the following:
Choose Analysis>TOPO from the Main Menu.
Click on the TOPO
If you are not licensed to run the TOPO option, this button will not be available.
During the optimization, messages are written to the Progress View indicating which switches have
changed status and the system losses before and after the optimization. When the optimization is
complete, the final radial system configuration is displayed on the diagram (Figure 4-26) with
switches that have changed status during the analysis indicated with the text "Open" or "Closed".
4-46
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

4.8.4 Reporting TOPO Analysis Results

To obtain a tabular report containing input parameters and the final switch configuration, choose
Report>Tie Open Point Optimization from the Main Menu.
Figure 4-26. Diagram and Progress Views After TOPO Analysis
Confidential
4-47

How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Voltage and Current Unbalances
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4.9 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Voltage and Current Unbalances

In PSS/ADEPT you can select to color code and/or view voltage and current unbalances at
branches and nodes that violate a specified percentage limit. You can select to color code the diagram by choosing the Unbalance nodes, branches option in the Diagram Properties, Color
Coding tab. You can also specify the unbalance thresholds along with how you want the program
to determine the voltage and current unbalances by selecting the option of your choice in the Analysis Options, General tab.
Resulting unbalances are expressed as a percentage and are displayed if they are in violation of
the user-specified upper limit, also expressed in percent. You may also select to view unbalances
in a tabular report that lists the network items that violate the upper limit.
4.9.1 Voltage Unbalance

Voltage unbalances that violate the specified upper limit can be color-coded on the one-line diagram. In addition, a tabular report is provided that will list all of the nodes that violate the upper limit.
The tabular report contains the node name, the phasing coming into the node, the maximum voltage
over all phases present, the minimum voltage over all phases present, the average voltage, and the
percent unbalance. This report may be selected by choosing Report>Node Voltage>Unbalance.
Percent Difference Between the Maximum and Minimum Phase Voltage
The equation used to calculate the percent difference between the maximum and minimum phase
voltage is given below:
Three Energized Phases
V max
V min
ln V
( ln )
( ln )
= max Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln ) , Vc ( ln )
= min Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln ) , Vc ( ln )
Va + Vb + Vc
= -----------------------------------------3
avg
V min ) ln V
*100.0
( %difference ) ln = ( V max
( ln )
( ln )
avg
V max
V min
ll V
( ll )
( ll )
= max Vab ( ll ) , Vbc ( ll ) , Vca ( ll )

= min Vab ( ll ) , Vbc ( ll ) , Vca ( ll )
Va Vb + Vb Vc + Vc Va
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------3
avg
( %difference ) ll = ( V max V min ) ll V

*100.0
( ll )
( ll )
avg
4-48
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Two Energized Phases (e.g., A & B, also valid for B&C, C&A by substitution)
V max
V min
ln V
( ln )
( ln )
= max Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln )
= min Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln )
Va + Vb
= ------------------------2
avg
V min ) ln V
*100.0
( ln )
( ln )
avg
( %difference ) ll = 0
One Energized Phase
( %difference ) ln = 0
Percent Difference Between the Maximum and Average Phase Voltage
(NEMA No. MG 1, ANSI/IEEE C84.1) [default]
The equation used to calculate the percent difference between the maximum and average phase
voltage is given below:
ln V
Va + Vb + Vc
= -----------------------------------------3
avg
V max
( ln )
ln V
) ln V
*100.0
( ln )
avg
avg
ll V
Va Vb + Vb Vc + Vc Va
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------3
avg
V max
( ll )
= max Vab ( ll ) , Vbc ( ll ) , Vca ( ll )
) ll V
( %difference ) ll = ( V max ll V
*100.0
( ll )
avg
avg
Confidential
4-49

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
ln V
Va + Vb
= ------------------------2
avg
V max
( ln )
ln V
) ln V
*100.0
( ln )
avg
avg
One Energized Phase
( %difference ) ln = 0
Ratio of Negative-Sequence to Positive-Sequence Voltage
The equation used to calculate the ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence voltage is given
below:
a =
cos ( 120 ) + j sin ( 120 )

2
V a + aV b + a Vc
V 1 = ------------------------------------------3
2
V a + a Vb + aV c
V 2 = ------------------------------------------3
V 2
Ratio ( % ) = 100 -------
V 1
Two Energized Phases
Ratio ( % ) = 0
One Energized Phase
Ratio ( % ) = 0
4-50
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Percent Difference Between Phase and Average Voltage

The equation used to determine the percent difference between phase and average voltage is given
below:
Va + Vb + Vc
V avg = -----------------------------------------3
*100.00
a = ( V a V avg ) V
avg
*100.00
b = ( V b V avg ) V
avg
c = ( V c V avg ) V avg *100.00
( %difference ) = max ( a, b, c )
V avg = max V a , V b
Va + Vb
V avg = ------------------------2
( %difference ) = ( V max V avg ) V avg *100.0
One Energized Phase
( %difference ) = 0
4.9.2 Current Unbalance

Current unbalances that violate the specified upper limit in percent can be color-coded on the oneline diagram. In addition, a tabular report is provided that will list all of the branches that violate the
upper limit. The tabular report contains the branch name, the first node (upstream), the second node
(downstream), branch type, branch phasing, phase A current, phase B current, phase C current,
maximum current over all phases, average current, and the percent unbalance. This report may be
selected by choosing Report>Branch Current>Unbalance.
Percent Difference Between Maximum and Average Phase Current
The equation used to determine the percent difference between the maximum and average phase
current is given below:
I max = max Ia , Ib , Ic
Ia + Ib + Ic
I avg = ----------------------------------3
( %difference ) = ( I max I avg ) I avg *100.0
Confidential
4-51

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
I max = max Ia , Ib
Ia + Ib
I avg = --------------------2
( %difference ) = ( I max I avg ) I avg *100.0
One Energized Phase
( %difference ) = 0
Percent Difference Between Phase and Average Phase Current
The equation used to determine the percent difference between phase and average phase current
is given below:
Ia + Ib + Ic
I avg = ----------------------------------3
a = (I I
a
avg ) I avg *100.0
b = (I I
b
avg ) I avg *100.0
c = (I I
c
avg ) I avg *100.0
( %difference ) = max ( a, b, c )
Two Energized Phases (e.g., A & B, also valid for B & C, C & A by substitution)
Ia + Ib
I avg = --------------------2
( %difference ) = max ( I I
,
a
avg ) I avg *100.0 ( I b I avg ) I avg *100.0
One Energized Phase
( %difference ) = 0
4-52
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Ratio of Zero-Sequence to Positive-Sequence Current

The equation used to determine ratio of zero-sequence to positive-sequence current is given below:
a =
cos ( 120 ) + j sin ( 120 )

2
I a + aI b + a I c
I 1 = -----------------------------------3
Ia + Ib + Ic
I 0 = -------------------------3
I 0
Ratio ( % ) = 100 ----
I 1
Ratio ( % ) = 0
One Energized Phase
Ratio ( % ) = 0
Ratio of Negative-Sequence to Positive-Sequence Current
The equation used to determine ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence current is given
below:
a =
cos ( 120 ) + j sin ( 120 )

2
I a + aI b + a I c
I 1 = -----------------------------------3
2
I a + a I b + aI c
I 2 = -----------------------------------3
I 2
Ratio ( % ) = 100 ----
I 1
Ratio ( % ) = 0
One Energized Phase
Ratio ( % ) = 0
Confidential
4-53

How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Power Factor Limits
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4.10 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Power Factor Limits

You can select to color code branches on the diagram that are below a user-specified limit. In addition, you may select to view power factor as a branch result on the diagram. To color code the
diagram, choose the Branches under power factor limit option in the Diagram Properties, Color
Coding tab. You can specify the lower limit for power factor on the Analysis Options, General tab.
The equation to calculate power factor is:
P
pf = ------------------------2
P +Q
If the square root of (P2 + Q2) is equal to zero, pf = 0.0.
4-54
Confidential
Chapter 5
Results Reporting
5.1 Overview: Reporting Results
Solution results from any analysis may be displayed on the Diagram View, or in a tabular report.
Results on the diagram are fully customizable by setting diagram properties in combination with
clicking the Results tab located on the Equipment List View (see Chapter 1, Figure 1-5, and
Chapter 4, Section 4.3.3). In addition to viewing results on the diagram, results may also be printed
in tabular form by requesting a report. Several predefined tabular reports are available including
voltage, power, and current reports as well as device status reports, input data reports, and network
summaries. Customized reports can be designed if you purchase a copy of Crystal Reports 7.0 or
later. Using Crystal Reports with the reports database allows you to have limitless customizability
in report design. The report database tables supplied with PSS/ADEPT are outlined in Appendix G.
In this chapter you will learn about:
Tabular reports distributed with PSS/ADEPT.
Specifying the report units to be displayed on the tabular report.
Specifying report options for tabular reports.
Selecting items to include in a report.
Selecting a tabular report to view.
Exporting tabular reports to other applications.
5.2 Selectable Tabular Reports

PSS/ADEPT is distributed with several predefined reports. Some reports may appear disabled, usually because you have not performed an analysis on the network.
Phasing in all output reports is indicated by the following convention: if the phase wire is present,
the field in the output report will contain a value otherwise, the field will be blank.
You can select the units for power, current, angle, and voltage from the Report Units dialog (see
Section 5.4).
The predefined reports available are described in the following subsections.
Confidential
5-1
Results Reporting
Selectable Tabular Reports
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
5.2.1 Branch Current Reports

Branch current reports, available after load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analyses, contain
currents in lines, transformers, switches, and series capacitors/reactors.
There are three types of branch current reports:
By phase.
By sequence.
Overloads.
Unbalance.
The branch current by phase report contains the branch current at each phase of the branch. The
branch current by sequence report contains the branch current in the positive, negative, and zero
sequence. The branch overload report contains a list of branches that exceed a specified rating
limit. The rating limit is defined under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet. The
branch unbalance report contains a list of branches that exceed a specified limit. The unbalance
limit is defined under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet.
5.2.2 Branch Power Report

The branch power report, available after load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analyses, contains the branch power at each phase.
5.2.3 Branch Power Losses Report

The branch power loss report, available after load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analysis,
contains the branch losses at each phase.
5.2.4 Input List of Network Data Report

The input list of network data contains a list of the network input data (i.e., the data defined on the
Item Property sheet). You can select this report at any time.
5.2.5 Node Voltage Reports

Node voltage reports, available after load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analyses contain
node voltages at nodes in the network.
There are five types of node voltage reports:
By phase.
By sequence.
Over threshold.
Under threshold.
Drop unbalance profile.
The node voltage by phase report contains node voltages at each phase. The node voltage by
sequence report contains node voltages in the positive, negative, and zero sequence. The node
voltage over threshold report displays nodes that are over the upper voltage threshold. The node
voltage under threshold report displays nodes that are under the lower voltage threshold. You can
specify the voltage thresholds under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet. The
5-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Results Reporting
voltage drop report contains the prestart voltage, the starting voltage, and the voltage difference
between nodes in each phase. The voltage drop report is only available following a motor starting
analysis. The unbalance report contains a list of nodes that exceed a specified limit. The unbalance
limit is defined under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet. The voltage profile is
a plot of voltage versus distance. You select a node in the network and a direct trace back to the
root node is performed. The root node is specified in Network Properties. Each node voltage is
plotted as a point on the graph. For reference, the upper and lower voltage thresholds are also
plotted (Figure 5-1).
Figure 5-1. Voltage Profile
5.2.6 Shunt Current Reports

Shunt current reports, available after a load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analysis, contain
shunt current at each phase of a shunt item (machine, load, fault).
There are two types of shunt current reports:
By phase.
By sequence.
The shunt current by phase report contains shunt currents at each phase of the shunt item. The
shunt current by sequence report contains shunt currents in the positive, negative, and zero
sequence.
Confidential
5-3
Results Reporting
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
5.2.7 Shunt Power Report

The shunt power report is available after a load flow, short circuit, or motor starting analysis and
contains the shunt power at each phase of the shunt item (machine, load, fault).
5.2.8 Status Reports

Status reports contain results and status information for certain items in the network. Transformer,
synchronous machine, induction machine, and switched capacitor status reports are available only
after you have performed a load flow, short circuit, or motor starting analysis. Out-of-service reports
are available at all times.
There are seven types of status reports:
Transformer.
Synchronous machine.
Induction machine.
Switched capacitors.
Converted MWh loads.
Out-of-service shunt devices.
Out-of-service branch devices.
The transformer status report contains transformer status and results including tap settings. The
synchronous machine status report contains synchronous machine status and results including
actual power drawn or supplied by the machine. The induction machine status report contains
induction machine status and results including total power and slip. The switched capacitor status
report contains switched capacitor status including the fraction switched in and the voltage at the
regulated node. Out-of-service shunt and branch device reports contain those devices, which are
currently out of service.
The converted MWh load report will display the real (kW) and reactive (kvar) values obtained from
the original MWh load data. If the original MWh load data is not concentrated, the calculated loads
are split between the FROM and TO nodes internally, and are not included in this report.
5.2.9 Network Summary Report

The network summary report contains summary information such as: the number of each type of
network item (nodes, lines, machines, etc.) in the network, the number of loops, total system load,
total power drawn and supplied by machines, and total losses. This report is available only after you
have performed a load flow, short circuit, or motor starting analysis on the network.
5.2.10 Power Flow Summary

The power flow summary provides a report of the network conditions following an analysis. This
report contains the branch name, the first node (upstream), the second node (downstream), the
branch phasing, the branch construction type, maximum current over all phases present, minimum
voltage over all phases present, total branch power, and distance. The voltage is given at the downstream end of the branch.
5-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Results Reporting
Setting the Report File Location
5.2.11 Power Flow Details

The power flow details report provides a report of the network conditions after an analysis has been
performed. This report is more extensive than the power flow summary and contains the branch
name, first node (upstream), second node (downstream), branch phasing, construction type, the
current in each phase, the voltage in each phase, the minimum voltage, total branch power, total
branch losses, and total distance. All voltages are given at the downstream end of the branch.
5.2.12 Fault All Current Report

The Fault All current report is available only after you have performed a fault all calculation. It contains fault current at each node in the network for each fault type you specified in the Short Circuit
tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet.
5.2.13 Capacitor Placement Optimization (CAPO) Report

The CAPO report contains economics, losses, and capacitor placement information after an CAPO
analysis. For each load snapshot, the switched capacitor-switching schedule is also displayed.
5.2.14 Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) Report

The TOPO report contains economics, losses, and a list of switches along with their in-service
status after a TOPO analysis.
5.2.15 Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA) Report

The DRA report contains reliability indices after a DRA analysis.
5.3 Setting the Report File Location

Report files distributed with PSS/ADEPT are located in the \rpt directory of the PSS/ADEPT installation. The default will be \Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT5\rpt. This path is a program setting that
can be modified by selecting File>Program Settings from the Main Menu. If this path is not specified, or there are no files with the extension .rpt located in the report directory, an error message
will be generated. These report files are read only and should not be directly modified with Crystal
Reports. If you wish to customize these reports, make a writable copy of the report and rename it.
PSS/ADEPT will allow you to open any report file by selecting Report>Open and specifying the
name of the report file.
Confidential
5-5
Results Reporting
Setting Report Units
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
5.4 Setting Report Units

Report units define the representation of voltage, current, power, and angle on the tabular output
reports. Report units are program settings that will be remembered on application start-up until
subsequent modifications occur. Selected units are displayed at the top of each page of every report.
To set the report units:
1. Select Report>Units from the Main Menu. The Report Units dialog displays
(Figure 5-2).
Figure 5-2. Report Units Dialog

2. Select/specify the report units:
Identifier Tag: Enter a text identifier to appear at the top of the first page of the
report. This identifier tag will be automatically set to the company name you specified during the PSS/ADEPT installation.
Voltage Units:
5-6
Voltage: Select how you want the voltage to be displayed on the output reports;
kV, pu, or voltage on a nominal delivery voltage base.
Decimal precision: Specify the number of significant digits to display following the
decimal for voltage. The reports are set up for a maximum of nine decimal places.
Representation: Select the voltage output display as either line-to-line (LL) or lineto-neutral (LN).
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Results Reporting
Setting Report Units
Power and Losses Units:
Power and Losses Units: Select how you want the power and losses to be displayed on the output reports.
Decimal Precision: Specify the number of significant digits to display following the
decimal for power and losses. The reports are set up for a maximum of nine
decimal places.
Representation: Select either rectangular (P, Q) or polar (S, kVA, pf, lead/lag) representation of power.
Angle:
Angle Units: Select how to display angles in the output reports; 0 to 360, 180 to
180, 0 to 2 , to raid.
decimal for angle. The reports are set up for a maximum of nine decimal places.
Current:
Current Units: Select how you want to display current in the output reports (amps,
kA).
decimal for current. The reports are set up for a maximum of nine decimal places.
Thevenin Impedance:
Confidential
Units: Select how you want to display Thevenin impedance values following a
Fault All Analysis (Ohms or pu).
5-7
Results Reporting
Setting Report Options
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
5.5 Setting Report Options

Report options specify the sorting key to sort the contents of the report and set the report description. These options are specified for each report individually; you will be prompted for this
information each time you select a report. If you do not want to be prompted for these options every
time you select a report, turn the option off by removing the check mark from the
Show Options Dialog located under the Report Menu.
To set report options:
1. Select any report from Report on the Main Menu (hereafter in this chapter referred to
as the Report Menu). The Report Options dialog displays (Figure 5-3).
Figure 5-3. Report Options Dialog

2. Select/specify the report options:
Description: Specify the report description you want to appear on the top of the first
page of every report. The description will be automatically set to the first title line you
specified in Network>Properties.
Sort by: You may select how the devices in the report are to be sorted. Some of the
sort by options will be disabled indicating that this particular item is not available on the
requested report. The following options can be selected:
5-8
Device Name: Sort the devices in alphabetical order by device name.
Node base voltage: Sort the nodes in ascending order of base voltage.
Phasing: Sort the devices in alphabetical order by phasing.
Device type: Sort the devices in alphabetical order by device type.
Node Name: Sort the report in alphabetical order by node name.
Tree: Sort the report based on the specified item ordering method.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Results Reporting
Reporting on a Selection
5.6 Reporting on a Selection

If you want the report to contain only those items that are currently selected in the Diagram View
and Equipment List View, select Report>Report on Selected Items. A check mark next to this
report option indicates that you have selected to report only on the selected items. If this option is
checked and you have not selected any devices, the program will produce an error message indicating that there are no selected devices in the network.
5.7 Previewing the Report

When you select a report, the report will be displayed in a print preview window. From this window,
the report may be viewed, printed to a printer, or exported to another application. Below is an
example of a Report Preview window (Figure 5-4).
Previous Page
Next Page
First Page
Last Page
Print
Zoom Level
Export
Figure 5-4. Report Preview Window

From this preview window you can select to do the following operations:
View the previous, next, first, or last pages of the report.
Zoom to a certain level.
Select another report.
Export the file to another supported file format.
Print the report.
Confidential
5-9
Results Reporting
Exporting a Report to Another Format
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
5.8 Exporting a Report to Another Format

A report may be exported to a file supported by another application such as Microsoft Excel.
To export a report:
1. Select File>Export from the Report Menu, or click the Export button. The Export
Figure 5-5. Export Dialog

2. Select the format and destination for the report:
Format: Select from the available list the file format you wish to export the report to. In
this example, Separated Values (.CSV) has been chosen.
Destination: Select the destination of the report. Your choices are:
Disk file: creates a file in the format you specified in Step 1 on the hard disk.
Application: exports the report and automatically loads it into the application specified in Step 1.
Lotus Notes database: If you have Lotus Notes, you may export the report to a
Lotus Notes database file.
In some cases, exporting a report will not display certain fields correctly. For
example, exporting to Excel 8.0 (xls) may not display date information correctly.
This is due strictly to limitations of Crystal Reports. Try selecting another format, such
as Excel 8.0 (xls) (Extended) to see if the problem can be rectified.
5-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Results Reporting
Creating and Designing Reports Using Crystal Reports
5.9 Creating and Designing Reports Using Crystal Reports

PSS/ADEPT can open report files generated with the Crystal Reports Designer, Version 7.0 or later.
These report files can be generated off line by purchasing Crystal Reports and interacting with the
PSS/ADEPT results database. The results database is documented in Appendix G. You may use
the Crystal Reports Designer to generate customized reports or you may use the designer to edit
and save modifications to the report files distributed with PSS/ADEPT. If you choose to edit report
files distributed with PSS/ADEPT, make a copy of the report file and apply changes to the copy of
the original report file. If you do not do this, you may destroy the original report.
To open a customized report:
1. Select Report>Open from the Main Menu. An Open File dialog displays (Figure 5-6).
Figure 5-6. Open File Dialog

2. Select the report file to open.
3. Click OK. The report displays in a print preview window.
Confidential
5-11
5-12
Confidential
Chapter 6
Line Properties Calculator
6.1 Overview: Line Properties Calculator
The Line Properties Calculator (LineProp) calculates line constants used in many power system
analysis problems. The constants include:
Zero- and positive-sequence impedances for each circuit in the corridor.
Zero- and positive-sequence admittances for each circuit in the corridor.
Self and mutual impedances for each circuit in the corridor.
Self and mutual admittances for each circuit in the corridor.
Average mutual impedances and admittances for each pair of circuits in the corridor.
Impedance matrix for the corridor.
Admittance matrix for the corridor.
The calculations performed by LineProp rely on tables of conductor characteristics. These tables
are described in Appendix H.
LineProp supports the following unit configurations:
60 Hz, English
60 Hz, SI (metric)
50 Hz, English
50 Hz, SI (metric)
English units use input in feet and output in feet. SI units use input in meters and output in meters.
In this manual you will learn how to:
Start the LineProp Calculator.
Set-up data for a corridor.
Perform an analysis.
View results from an analysis.
Save the results.
Confidential
6-1

Overview: Line Properties Calculator
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6.1.1 Nomenclature
Throughout this manual the following nomenclature is used:
6-2
Corridor A set of parallel electrical Circuits, each with the (nearly) same geographic
beginning and end point. A Corridor generally has a width, which may be from 30 to
500 ft, and a length, which may be up to hundreds of miles.
Position A set of 1 to N parallel Conductors of the same type arranged in a regular

pattern around a center point, and electrically tied together at intervals much less than
a wavelength, so each Conductor in the Position has the same voltage. Every position
has either a single-phase assignment or is grounded. A Position with only one Conductor is often called a Conductor instead of a Position. A set of Positions, make up a
Circuit. (Also referred to as a Bundle.)
Circuit A set of parallel Positions used to transmit electrical power. A Circuit is said
to have a certain number of phases; the vast majority of Circuits in actual use have
three phases, which are given the tag names of ABC, RYB, etc. The phase of a Position
is a tag designated by the electrical utility, and can be changed at any time. A Position
can only have one phase but multiple Positions in a circuit can have the same phase.
A set of Circuits, make up a Corridor. (Also referred to as a Line.)
Ungrounded Position A Position not electrically connected to earth within the

Corridor.
Grounded Position A Position electrically connected to earth at regular intervals

along the Corridor.
Shield wire Another name for Grounded Position. A Position grounded often enough
so it can be assumed to be continuously grounded and have zero voltage on it. Also
called a ground wire or neutral wire. Shield wire Positions usually have only one Conductor, hence the name, shield wire. (Also referred to as neutral wire.)
Conductor A physical wire used to carry current. A set of Conductors make up a

Position.
Conductor Type A designation, that usually indicates the physical construction of a

conductor. Common types for transmission and distribution lines are: ACSR, AAC,
AAAC, ACAR, ALUMOWELD, CU, EHS, HS.
Conductor Name A tag applied to a particular conductor. Some conductors used by

United States utilities have bird names (e.g., Drake, Robin, etc.).
Wire Another name for Conductor especially used when referring to Grounded
Positions.
Phase A tag applied to each bundle of a line used for the transmission of ac electrical
power. A line in a three-phase power system in the United States (and some other
countries) usually has the bundles labeled A, B, and C.
Conductor resistance The ac resistance per unit length of the Conductor at a designated temperature.
Conductor reactance The ac reactance per unit length of the Conductor at a designated frequency and spacing (usually a 1 foot spacing, but 1 meter is also possible).
Conductor diameter The physical diameter of the Conductor.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Using the Line Properties Calculator
Circuit impedance A measure of the gradient of voltage versus current along the Circuit. Usually expressed in ohms () or /unit length. Impedance consists of a real part
called resistance (R) and an imaginary part call reactance (X).
Circuit admittance A measure of the gradient of current versus voltage along a Circuit. Usually expressed in Siemens (S) or S per unit length. An older name for
Siemens was mho. Admittance consists of a real part called conductance (G) and an
imaginary part called susceptance (B).
Sag For a Position or Conductor, the difference between the height at the structure
and the height at the lowest point, which would be at mid-span for a Conductor over
level ground.
Earth resistivity A specification of the bulk resistance properties of the earth, designated by the symbol , and always in units of m. Occasionally the inverse of
resistivity, called conductivity and designated by , may be encountered.
The nomenclature used to describe a Corridor hierarchy is:

Corridor
Circuit
Position
Conductor
6.2 Using the Line Properties Calculator

An illustrated example (see Figure 6-1), with a fairly standard 345 kV circuit (in the U.S.) and a parallel distribution circuit, will be used to illustrate data entry and calculations using the Line Properties
Calculator. The view is across the width of the corridor. The conductors/positions are shown at their
connection points to the structure. Units are English (miles) for this example. The 345 kV circuit is
the 1st circuit, and the distribution circuit the 2nd circuit. The angle to the first conductor in the position for the 345 kV circuit is specified as 180. The first circuit was entered with an X (horizontal)
position of 0 ft and the second with a position of 75 ft.
27 ft
10 ft
sag = 9 ft
12 ft
2 ft
sag = 15 ft
2 ft
bundle separation = 18 in
4 ft
30 ft
50 ft
conductor & shield

wire sag = 6 ft
0 ft
75 ft
Figure 6-1. Example Corridor for Illustration of Line Property Calculations

Confidential
6-3

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To initiate the Line Properties Calculator choose Tools>Line Constants from the PSS/ADEPT
Main Menu. The Corridor View is displayed. Referring to Figure 6-2 notice:
the Title Bar, at the top of the view, is now PSS/ADEPT - [LineProp1],
the menu at the top of the view is now changed,
the Corridor View is now where the Diagram View was, and
the LineProp Calculator has its own toolbar shown at the top of the Corridor View.
Figure 6-2. Initial Corridor View
6-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

6.2.1 Corridor View

To add a circuit to the corridor:
1. Click the Add New Circuit
button on the LineProp Toolbar. The Add New Circuit
dialog is displayed (Figure 6-3).
Figure 6-3. Add New Circuit Dialog

2. Enter the Circuit Name; the default name is Circuit_x, where x is the default horizontal
position.
3. Enter the Horizontal Position of the new circuit. The first circuit assumes a horizontal
reference point of (0) which is the base of the circuit tower. For subsequent circuits, you
can specify the horizontal position (reference point of the base of the circuit tower). The
horizontal position for circuits added after the first will default to 20 ft (m) from the center
line of the last positioned circuit.
Confidential
6-5

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4. Click OK to accept the input. The Corridor View is now changed as illustrated in
Figure 6-4. Notice that there are two circles at position 0, one on top of the other. The
top circle represents a Position.
Figure 6-4. Initial Circuit View

5. Click on or near the top circle, in this case at position (0,0), and a dashed box will
appear around the circuit. This selects the circuit.
6-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

6. Double-click anywhere inside the dashed box and the Current Circuit Properties sheet
is displayed. Figures 6-5 and 6-6 illustrate completed Current Circuit Properties sheets.
Figure 6-5. Circuit_1 Properties Sheet
Confidential
6-7

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 6-6. Circuit_2 Properties Sheet

7. In the Current Circuit Properties sheet:
6-8
You can change the Circuit Name and Circuit Location.
When you change the Number of Positions, the appropriate number of Position
Details lines appear. The maximum number of positions is 10; the default number
is 1.
Choose the name of each position from the list of acceptable names; ground wires
are noted by a name with the first two characters of "Gr". The same position name
may be assigned to one or more positions within a circuit. All conductors in all positions with the same phase in a circuit are equivalenced to a single entry in the Z
impedance matrix and the Y admittance matrix for the circuit.
Specify the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) location and midspan sag for each of the
positions. X location is specified relative to the circuit origin. Y location is specified
as the height at the structure connection relative to the earth.
When you specify that the number of conductors per position (bundle) is greater
than one (max=8), the separation between adjacent position conductors (measured center to center) and the position of the first conductor relative to a zero horizontal position must be specified. Another term used to describe this separation is
"bundle spacing".
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Specify the position angle. The XY position of a bundle is its center point. A configuration occasionally seen on U.S. 345 kV lines is a vertical bundle of two conductors with 18 inch separation. This is specified as two conductors (in the bundle),
separation of 18 inches (also bundle diameter in this case) and 90 to the first conductor. A drawing of the bundle is shown in Figure 6-7.
Conductor
90 degrees
18 inches
x/y position of
center point
Figure 6-7. Conductor Bundle Diagram
Confidential
To choose a conductor type, click the Browse

button located to the right of the
Conductor Type field. The Select Conductor Type dialog appears (Figure 6-8a).
6-9

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
a. Partial View Before Fit All Columns
b. After Fit All Columns
Figure 6-8. Select Conductor Type Dialog

8. The Select Conductor Type dialog allows you to view the properties of various conductors and to select the conductor for the previously selected position. This dialog has the
following features:
6-10
You can sort the conductor data based on a combination of several sort criteria.
When the Clear Sort Fields button is clicked, the sort criteria are cleared.
To select a sort criteria highlight and click on the criterion, it is moved to the Sort
Fields criteria. The criteria are cumulative. In the example shown above, conductors are to be sorted by type and then by name.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To perform the sort, click the Do Sort button. For the example shown above the
conductors in the database are sorted by type and then by name.
Conductor properties will be shown in English or International System (SI) units

depending on the option chosen.
Scroll through the conductor database. To select a conductor, click on the conductor name (the selected conductor is shown in the box in the lower right side of the
dialog) and select OK, or double-click on the conductor name to select it and return
to the Current Circuit Properties sheet.
The Fit All Columns button above the conductor table allows the user to view all
data for the conductors in one dialog, see Figure 6-8b.
9. When you click the OK button in the Current Circuit Properties sheet:
Checks are made on the circuit properties and appropriate messages displayed to
indicate improper locations (e.g., conductor separations that are not feasible,
phase positions that are not feasible, etc.).
Corrections must be made to the data before the program can proceed.
Once all infeasible data are corrected, program control is returned to the LineProp
Corridor View and the circuit is displayed as illustrated in Figure 6-9. Each position
in the circuit is shown and labeled.
Figure 6-9. Corridor View
Confidential
6-11

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6.2.2 Status Bar

The Status Bar at the bottom of the Corridor View serves two purposes. First, when the cursor is
positioned over a LineProp Toolbar button, the meaning or use of the button is stated. Second,
when the cursor is not over a LineProp Toolbar button the Status Bar shows:
The name of the Corridor File currently being viewed. The name is blank if the current
data have not been saved to a file.
The name of the circuit that is currently highlighted (the circuit surrounded by a dashed
box).
The number of positions associated with the circuit.
The location of the centerline of the circuit.
6.2.3 Menu Bar

The LineProp Menu Bar (Figure 6-10), is located at the top of the LineProp View.
Figure 6-10. LineProp Menu Bar
6.2.3.1 File Menu

The File Menu provides options for opening an existing Corridor file, saving an existing Corridor file,
saving the current corridor data to a new file, printing the corridor view, and exiting the line properties calculator.
6.2.3.2 Edit Menu

The Edit Menu provides options to insert a circuit at a specified location, go to and highlight a specified circuit, delete one or all circuits, copy a circuit, and paste a circuit.
6.2.3.3 View Menu

The View Menu allows you to zoom in or out of the corridor view, zoom to the full extent of the corridor, and to refresh the corridor view.
6.2.3.4 Analysis Menu

The Analysis Menu allows you to calculate and report the circuit impedances. The results of this
calculation are described in Section 6.3.3.3.
6.2.3.5 Options Menu

The Options Menu allows you to specify default settings for User Options, Circuit Options, and
Corridor Options. These are discussed in more detail in Section 6.2.6.
6.2.3.6 Window Menu

The Window Menu options allow you to control the placement of views in the application. New
instances of corridor views may be created and multiple views may be cascaded or tiled. Views that
have been previously minimized may be arranged by choosing Arrange Icons.
6-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

6.2.3.7 Help Menu

The Help Menu options provide information about the program.
6.2.4 Toolbar
The LineProp Toolbar (Figure 6-11) provides quick access to LineProp functions. The toolbar allows
you to quickly create, open, or save a corridor file; print the corridor file; add, copy, or delete circuits;
change the viewing area; change defaults; validate the circuit dimensions; and calculate impedances. The About LineProp button provides information on the LineProp version that is being used.
Create New Corridor File
Save Corridor File
Add New Circuit

Delete Circuit
Zoom In
Refresh Window
Zoom Window
About LineProp
Validate Circuits
Delete All Circuits

Zoom Extent
Calculate Impedances
Paste Circuit
Copy Circuit
Zoom Out
Change Defaults
Print Corridor
Open Corridor
Figure 6-11. LineProp Toolbar
6.2.5 Zoom and Refresh Capabilities

The Zoom and Refresh capabilities allow you to view specific areas of the Corridor View in more or
less detail. The Zoom In and Zoom Out features operate much like a cameras zoom lens. You see
more (Zoom Out) or less (Zoom In) of the view centered on the starting point of the zoom
operations.
The toolbar Zoom Window button and the Main Menu View>Zoom Rect option operate in the
same manner. To activate this feature:
select View>Zoom Rect from the Main Menu or select the Zoom Window button from
the toolbar,
position the mouse pointer in the drawing area near the area of interest,
hold the left mouse button down and drag the mouse diagonally (you should see a rectangle around the objects of interest),
release the mouse button, and
the area of interest is the focus of the corridor view.
The Refresh Window and Zoom Extent options cause the Corridor View to return to a view of the
full corridor.
Confidential
6-13

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6.2.6 Setting Options

The LineProp module has several default settings that you may alter.
To view and edit the LineProp defaults, select Options>Setup from the Main Menu or click the
Change Defaults button.
The LineProp defaults are arranged into three groups: User Options, Circuit Options, and Corridor Options.
6.2.6.1 Users Options

When you elect to view and/or change the LineProp defaults, the LineProp Options dialog is
displayed (Figure 6-12). The first tab is for User options.
Figure 6-12. LineProp Options Dialog: User Tab

Corridor Display: Here the you can choose to have or not to have Position Names displayed in the Corridor View, to have the earth shown in the diagram, to have the scale indicator shown, and to have the grid shown. If you want to have the grid shown, the grid
spacing must be specified.
Colors: This allows you to specify the colors for the background, the circuit centerline, and
the conductor and ground wires. Clicking on the button to the right of the display box allows
you to pick a color from the color palette.
6-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Units: This allows you to specify that all measurement units used in LineProp are to be
English or International System (SI). English units specify resistance and reactance in
ohms/mile, diameter in inches, conductor locations in feet, spacing in inches and output in
ohms/mile and s/mile.
SI units specify resistance and reactance in ohms/km, delimiter in mm, conductor locations
in m, spacing in cm and output in ohms/km and s/km.
Changing units while a circuit corridor is opened will not automatically convert specified
conductor positions. This must be done manually if you are not using a "Default" conductor
and ground wire.
Default Ground Conductor: This allows you to select the default ground conductor from
the conductor file and to modify the conductor reactance, resistance, and diameter. The
operation to select a new default ground conductor is the same as that used to select a specific conductor for a position (see Section 6.2.1, Step 8).
Default Conductor: This allows you to select the default phase conductor and to modify
the conductor reactance, resistance, and diameter. The operation to select a new default
conductor is the same as that used to select a specific conductor for a position (see
Section 6.2.1, Step 8).
General: This allows you to select the system frequency, the number of decimal places for
display, and the default conductor and corridor file names.
Confidential
6-15

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6.2.6.2 Circuit Options

The second tab is for Circuit options (Figure 6-13). This option sheet is similar to the sheet used to
specify the Current Circuit Properties. In fact, the format designated here will be used whenever a
new circuit is placed in the Corridor View.
Before you can accept and exit the Circuit tab, position locations must not conflict with each
other.
Figure 6-13. LineProp Options Dialog: Circuit Tab
6-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

6.2.6.3 Corridor Options

The third tab is for Corridor options (Figure 6-14). Here you can set the default for the earth resistivity, the options to use line length and hyperbolic correction factors, and a description of the
corridor.
Figure 6-14. LineProp Options Dialog: Corridor Tab
Confidential
6-17

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
For short transmission lines (less than about 50 miles), exact and approximate equivalent-circuit
parameters are very nearly equal and could be modeled satisfactorily by the equivalent circuit
shown in Figure 6-15. A long transmission line (greater than 50 miles) cannot be represented by an
equivalent circuit (shown in Figure 6-16) because of the behavior of Zex and Yex of a long line do
not correspond to constant values of Rs, Ls, and Cs.
LR
LL
LC
s
----------2
LC
s
----------2
L mi
Figure 6-15. Equivalent Circuit for Short Transmission Line

The exact parameters, Zex and Yex , of the equivalent circuit shown below may be written as:
Z
Y
ex
---------2
ex
Y
ex
---------2
Figure 6-16. Pi-Form Transmission Line Equivalent Circuit
Z ex = R ex + jL ex
Y ex = jC ex
6-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

The parameters Rex, Lex, and Cex are not constants; they vary significantly as frequency is varied
with the variation becoming stronger as line length is increased. Figure 6-17 considers a 400 mile
length; it shows the exact pi-equivalent parameters for frequencies of 60 and 65 Hz.
R = 10.59
L = 0.5276 H
C = 8.542 F
C = 8.542 F
Pi-Equivalent at 60 Hz
R = 10.08
L = 0.5168 H
C = 8.634 F
C = 8.634 F
Pi-Equivalent at 65 Hz
Figure 6-17. "Exact" Pi-Equivalent Circuits for 400-Mile Length of Example

Transmission Line at 60 and 65 Hz (Skin Effect Neglected)
Confidential
6-19

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 6-18 shows the percentage difference between the 60 and 65 Hz values of Rex, Lex, and
Cex of the line as its length is increased through the practical range. Apparently, the use of constant
effective resistance, inductance, and capacitance values in the pi-equivalent circuit is reasonable
for line sections up to about 100 miles long, but longer lines are not properly represented by an
equivalent with constant resistance, inductance and capacitance.
Difference,%
Length
(mi)
10
50
0.07
0.02
100
0.25
0.14
0.06
200
1.02
0.52
0.25
300
2.42
1.14
0.58
400
4.67
2.09
1.07
500
8.23
2.55
1.75
10
8
,%
6
4
0
100
200
300
400
Length, miles
500
Figure 6-18. Difference Between 60 and 65 Hz Values of Rex, Lex, and Cex
as a Function of Line Length
For long transmission lines, it is recommended that you use the line length option by checking the
Use Length box. Enter the line length in the box provided and select whether or not you want a
hyperbolic correction to be applied. If the hyperbolic box is checked a correction factor will be
applied to the impedance as described in Figure 6-18.
6-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Corridor Files
6.3 Corridor Files

6.3.1 Opening/Saving/Printing Corridor Files
6.3.1.1 Opening a Corridor File
To open an existing corridor file:
1. Select File>Open from the Main Menu or click the Open
Toolbar. The Open dialog is displayed (Figure 6-19).
button on the LineProp
2. Enter/select the directory and filename of the desired corridor file.

3. Click the Open button to display the diagram.
Figure 6-19. Open Dialog
Confidential
6-21

Corridor Files
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6.3.1.2 Saving a Corridor File

To save a corridor view:
1. Click the Save
button on the LineProp Toolbar, or choose File>Save or File>Save
As from the Main Menu. The Save As dialog displays (Figure 6-20).
2. Enter the directory path and filename you want for the file.
3. Click the OK button to save the data.
Figure 6-20. Save As Dialog
6-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Corridor Files
6.3.1.3 Printing a Corridor File

The corridor diagram may be printed, and, if desired, previewed on the computer terminal screen.
To print or preview the diagram:
1. Click the Print
button on the LineProp Toolbar and choose Print Corridor or Print
Preview Corridor or choose File>Print or File>Print Preview from the Main Menu.
2. If Print Preview is selected the corridor diagram will be displayed on the computer
screen (Figure 6-21). You can:
a. Zoom In to see a particular area of the diagram,
b. Close the Print Preview and return to the Corridor View,
c.
Print the corridor diagram.
Figure 6-21. Print Preview
Confidential
6-23

Corridor Files
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. When you click the Print button, the Print dialog is displayed (Figure 6-22).
4. In the Print dialog you can specify where the printed output is to go, the number of
pages to print, and the number of copies to print.
5. Click OK to print the corridor diagram.
Figure 6-22. Print Dialog
6-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Corridor Files
6.3.2 Modifying Corridor Files

There are several ways that existing corridor files may be modified. You need to first select the circuit and then operate on the circuit.
6.3.2.1 Selecting a Circuit

To select a circuit, move the mouse pointer near the circuit and click once. A dashed rectangle
should appear around the circuit. If the rectangle does not appear, move the mouse closer to the
circuit tower and click once again. The Corridor View will appear, as illustrated in Figure 6-23. Note
the dashed box surrounding the circuit.
Figure 6-23. Selected Circuit View
Confidential
6-25

Corridor Files
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6.3.2.2 Adjusting Circuit Properties

To adjust the current circuit properties, double-click inside the dashed box surrounding the circuit.
The Current Circuit Properties sheet, illustrated in Figure 6-24, will appear. You may change any of
the values shown on this properties sheet. Click Cancel to reject any changes and to return to the
Corridor View. Click OK to accept all changes and to return to the Corridor View.
Figure 6-24. Current Circuit Properties Sheet
6.3.2.3 Copying a Circuit

To copy a circuit:
1. Select the circuit to be copied.
2. Click the Copy
the Main Menu.
button on the LineProp Toolbar or select Edit>Copy Circuit from
3. Paste the circuit at a new location as instructed in the next section of this manual.
6-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Corridor Files
6.3.2.4 Pasting a Circuit

To paste a circuit:
1. Click the Paste
Menu.
button on the LineProp Toolbar or select Edit>Paste from the Main
2. The dialog illustrated in Figure 6-25 will appear.

3. Enter the name and horizontal position of the new circuit. Default values are given
which may be accepted or rejected by you.
4. Click OK to paste the new circuit into the corridor. Note that the circuit just pasted into
the Corridor View is now selected.
Figure 6-25. Copy Circuit Dialog
6.3.2.5 Deleting a Circuit

To delete a circuit:
Select the circuit to be deleted.
1. Click the Delete
the Main Menu.
button on the LineProp Toolbar or select Edit>Delete Circuit from
2. You are asked to verify that the circuit is to be deleted, as illustrated in Figure 6-26.
"New Circuit" is the name of the designated circuit to delete.
Figure 6-26. Verify Circuit to Delete Message Box
Confidential
6-27

Corridor Files
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6.3.2.6 Deleting All Circuits

All circuits in the Corridor View may be deleted at one time:
1. Click the Delete All
button on the LineProp Toolbar or select Edit>Delete All
Circuits from the Main Menu.
2. You are asked to verify that all circuits are to be deleted, as illustrated in Figure 6-27.
Figure 6-27. Verify to Delete All Circuits Message Box
6.3.3 Analyzing Corridor Files

Once the corridor configuration has been set it is time to analyze the corridor by:
validating the corridor data,
performing an analysis, and
reporting the results.
6.3.3.1 Automatic Validation

Validation of the circuit parameters is automatically done when you click OK in the Current Circuit
Properties sheet. Any physical property errors detected by the LineProp logic are displayed below
the properties sheet, as illustrated in Figure 6-28. Note that the y-coordinate of position A of the first
circuit is the same as the ground wire, which is reported.
The following validation checks are made:
6-28
Two or more conductor bundles are not touching at the structure.
Two or more bundles are not touching at their effective height. The bundle effective
height is the height at the structure minus 2/3 of the sag.
Two or more conductors within a bundle are not touching each other.
Conductor bundle does not touch the ground.
Corridor length is greater than or equal to 0.0.
Earth resistivity is greater than or equal to 0.001.
Conductor Y position (vertical) is greater than or equal to 0.
Conductor sag is greater than or equal to 0.0.
Conductor diameter is greater than 0.001.
Conductor resistance is greater than or equal to 0.
Conductor reactance is greater than or equal to 0.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Corridor Files
Conductor separation is greater than or equal to 0. Conductor separation is allowed to

be zero when only one conductor per bundle is specified.
Figure 6-28. Validation of Circuit Properties
6.3.3.2 User-Initiated Validation

You can initiate the validation process by clicking the Validation
button on the LineProp Toolbar.
6.3.3.3 Performing an Analysis

To calculate the impedances of the corridor either click the Calculation
button on the LineProp
Toolbar or select Analysis>Impedance from the Main Menu. When the calculations are complete,
the Results Window is displayed.
Confidential
6-29

Corridor Files
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The results shown in this section are for a two circuit corridor. The circuit data are shown in
Figures 6-29a and 6-29b.
a. First Circuit Data
Figure 6-29. Corridor Circuit Data
6-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Corridor Files
b. Second Circuit Data
Figure 6-29 (Cont). Corridor Circuit Data
Confidential
6-31

Corridor Files
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6.3.3.4 Calculation Results

The results of the calculations are:
Zero- and Positive-Sequence Impedances for Each Circuit (Z0-Z1 (Per Circuit)
Tab). In Figure 6-30, each circuit in the corridor is listed along with the calculated
positive- and zero-sequence resistance and reactance in ohm per circuit length. If
English units are being used, then the reported units are ohm per mile. Note that transposition is assumed.
The Save Results button allows you to save the results in a spreadsheet format (see
Section 6.3.3.5). A click the Cancel button returns you to the LineProp View.
Figure 6-30. Sample Zero- and Positive-Sequence Impedances Report
6-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Corridor Files
Zero- and Positive-Sequence Admittances for Each Circuit (Y0-Y1 (Per Circuit)
Tab). The positive- and zero-sequence admittances are in micro-Siemens per unit
length. For the case illustrated in Figure 6-31, the admittances are in micro-Siemens
per mile.
Figure 6-31. Sample Zero- and Positive-Sequence Admittance Report
Confidential
6-33

Corridor Files
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Self and Mutual Impedances for Each Circuit (Self-Mutual Z (Per Circuit) Tab). The
self and mutual impedances are ohm per unit length. In the case shown in Figure 6-32,
the impedances are ohm per mile.
Figure 6-32. Sample Self and Mutual Impedances Report
6-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Corridor Files
Self and Mutual Admittances for Each Circuit (Self-Mutual Y (Per Circuit) Tab). The
self and mutual admittances are in micro-Siemens per unit length. In Figure 6-33, these
are micro-Siemens per mile.
Figure 6-33. Sample Self and Mutual Admittances Report
Confidential
6-35

Corridor Files
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Average Mutual Impedance and Admittance for Each Circuit (Zm-Ym Avg (Per Circuit) Tab). The report shown in Figure 6-34, requires two or more circuits on the
corridor. This report shows the calculated average mutual impedance and admittance
between two circuits. The average mutual impedance (ZmAvg-R and ZmAvg-X) is
reported in ohm per circuit length (miles for the sample case); the average mutual
admittance (YmAvg-G and YmAvg-B) is reported in micro-Siemens per circuit length
(miles for the sample case).
Figure 6-34. Sample Average Mutual Impedance and Admittance Report
6-36
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Corridor Files
Impedance for the Corridor (Z (Corridor) Tab). This report shows the impedance
matrix for the corridor. The numbers listed across the top of the report correspond to
the circuit phases. Thus, 1 corresponds to Circuit_0.A, 2 corresponds to Circuit_0.B,
etc. The off-diagonal terms are for the coupling of the phases.
All values are expressed in ohm per circuit length. In the sample case (Figure 6-35),
this is ohm per mile.
Figure 6-35. Sample Corridor Impedance Report
Confidential
6-37

Corridor Files
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Admittance for the Corridor (Y (Corridor) Tab). This report shows the admittance
matrix. The numbers listed across the top of the report correspond to the circuit phase.
Thus, 1 corresponds to Circuit_0, Phase A, 2 corresponds to Circuit_0, Phase B, etc.
All values are given in micro-Siemens per corridor length. In the sample case (Figure 636), all values are given in micro-Siemens per mile.
Figure 6-36. Sample Corridor Admittance Report
6-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Corridor Files
6.3.3.5 Saving Output to a File

The results of the analysis may be saved to an Excel spreadsheet. To perform the save:
1. Click the Save Results button at the bottom of the Analysis dialog.
2. The Save Results dialog is displayed (Figure 6-37).
3. Select the directory and filename where the data are to be stored.
4. Click the Save button to save the data are return to the previous dialog.
Figure 6-37. Save Results Dialog
Confidential
6-39

Corridor Files
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6.3.3.6 Saving Impedances to the Construction Dictionary

PSS/ADEPT uses a Construction Dictionary. This dictionary stores data for switches, lines, transformers, and series capacitors. (See Appendix B, Section B.2 of the PSS/ADEPT Users Manual for
a description of this file.) To add to an existing construction dictionary or to create a new construction dictionary:
1. Select the Construction Dictionary option under the Analysis menu item. When the
Construction Dictionary option is selected, a dialog similar to that shown in Figure 6-38
is shown on the computer screen. The Construction Dictionary filename defaults to the
directory and filename specified in the PSS/ADEPT program settings.
This menu item will be disabled if you have chosen the option to use line length
when calculating the impedance matrix.
2. Click the Browse
button to the right of the name to select the directory where the
construction file is to be put and the filename. To use a new file, the PSS/ADEPT program settings will have to be changed to the new specification. The drop-down box on
the top right of the dialog allows you to view the name of all currently stored equipment.
The records to be added to the dictionary are shown on the dialog. Note that you may change the
Line Names, the first column in the table. To do this:
1. Click once on the Line Name to be changed, pause a second and click once again. A
solid line will surround the line name.
2. You may now enter a new name. Note that the new name may not exceed 10 characters and may not duplicate a name already stored in the dictionary.
3. Click OK. When the OK button is clicked the line name, positive and zero sequence
impedances and the positive and zero charging admittances are saved in the designated file and program control is returned to the LineProp View.
Figure 6-38. Update Construction Dictionary Dialog
6-40
Confidential
Chapter 7
Protection and Coordination
7.1 Overview: Protection and Coordination
The protection and coordination module uses protective devices in conjunction with analysis activities to perform a coordination study on a given network. The protective devices guard the network
from threat of damage caused by overcurrents and transient overvoltages that can result in equipment loss and system failure. These protective devices are specified by adding protection
equipment packs to the network.
The protection and coordination module displays the characteristic curves of selected overcurrent
relays and fuses along with operating times of these protective devices for use in a coordination
study. A library of protective devices is provided in an Microsoft Access database and can be
modified at any time by using the tools provided by Microsoft Access. It is recommended that you
close all applications using Protection and Coordination. This ensures that your changes to the
database are seen in the application. You may view the operating times of the selected devices
based on a user-entered current, or you may use the current obtained from any analysis.
The protection and coordination module is an option in PSS/ADEPT. You will be unable to access
the protection and coordination module if you have not purchased the license. If you wish to purchase a license for the protection and coordination module, please contact PTI for further
assistance.
Adding protection equipment to the network.
Editing protection equipment properties.
Performing a coordination study.
Adding devices to the protective device database.
7.2 Adding Protection Equipment Packs

Protection equipment packs are containers that hold any number of protective devices. A protection
equipment pack can contain fuses and relays. You may consider protection equipment packs that
hold any combination of one or more protective devices. A protective device may be a fuse or relay.
They are placed on a branch in the network and can contain any number of different types of protective devices.
Confidential
7-1

Adding Protection Equipment Packs
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A protection equipment pack is connected to the upstream or downstream end, of an existing

branch in the network. The application will not let you place more than two protection equipment
packs at a single branch.
To place a protection equipment pack on a branch:
1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Protection Equipment
button.
2. Position the mouse pointer over the branch where the protection equipment pack will
be connected. Click on the branch and the protection equipment pack will appear on
top of the selected branch (Figure 7-1).
You must click no more than 25% of the line length away from the node where
the protection equipment pack will be placed.
You cannot place more than two protection equipment packs on a branch
Figure 7-1. Branch with Two Protection Equipment Packs
7-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Editing Protection Equipment Packs
To move a protection equipment pack:

1. Click on the protection equipment pack to select it.
2. While holding the left mouse button down, drag the protection equipment pack along
the branch to position it to the new location.
3. Release the mouse button. The protection equipment pack will snap to the new location
on the branch.
You will not be able to drag the protection equipment pack more than 25% away
from the node connection point.
7.3 Editing Protection Equipment Packs

The characteristics of protection equipment packs are modified using its property sheet. You can
retrieve a property sheet for the selected protection equipment pack from either the Equipment List
View or the Diagram View.
To display an Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet from the Diagram View:
1. Double-click the desired item, which will automatically display the Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet; or,
2. Left-click the pack once to select it then right-click on that same pack to display the popup menu; choose Properties from the pop-up menu to display the Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet.
To display an Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet from the Equipment List View:
1. Expand the tree section titled "Protection Equipment" by clicking on the "+".
2. Double-click the protection equipment pack, which will automatically display the
Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet; or,
3. Left-click the pack once to select it then right-click on that same pack to display the popup menu; choose Properties from the pop-up menu to display the Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet.
As an alternative, you may also use the applications selection tools to select protection equipment
packs.
Confidential
7-3

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the properties of a protection equipment pack:

1. Double-click on the protection equipment pack to display its property sheet or right-click
and choose Properties. Notice that there are two tabs for this property sheet: Select
and Plot Options (Figure 7-2).
Figure 7-2. Protection Equipment Pack Property Sheet

2. Under the Select tab, enter/select the properties for your protection equipment pack.
Press the Tab key to move to the next field or click in the field of interest, then add or
change information in the fields on the property sheet as needed.
Name: Each network item in the network must have a unique name identifier. You may
enter an alphanumeric character name up to 12 characters. The name may not contain
embedded blanks.
Branch: Specifies the branch where this protection equipment pack is connected. This
item is provided for information only and is not editable.
Location: The node location of the branch where this protection equipment pack is
connected. This item is provided for information only and is not editable.
Description: You may enter a description to describe the protection equipment pack.
7-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Plot color: You may change the plot color of the selected device by clicking the
Browse
button. When a row is selected, the plot color for the device in that row is
shown.
Groups...: To add the selected protection equipment pack to an existing group(s), click
Groups... button and click the box that proceeds the group name you want. Click the
OK button to accept the assignment. The group button is visible only if there are groups
defined in the network model.
Add Default: You can choose to make the default protection equipment pack the existing one by selecting the Add Default button. This will update your protection equipment pack to contain those devices you have previously defined in the default
Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet. For more information on default items see
Chapter 1, Section 1.7. This button is visible only if a default protection equipment pack
is defined.
Plot...: You may view the characteristic curves of all the selected devices in the protection equipment pack by selecting the Plot button. This plot will not produce any operating times. To display operating times you must run a coordination study (see
Section 7.4). To adjust the display, you can alter the plot options by clicking on the
Options tab (see Step 6). For information on the operations you can perform while in
this view, refer to Section 7.4.2.
When viewing the device curves in a protection equipment pack does not contain operating times (Figure 7-3).
Print Setup
Print
Refresh
Figure 7-3. Curve Plot View

Confidential
7-5

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Selected Devices: The contents of the protection equipment pack will be displayed in
the selected device list. Devices are added to this list by selecting a protective device
from the list of available devices. You may select to populate this list with the default
protection equipment pack by clicking the Add Default button.
To add a device to the selected list: Select the device from the available list in
the available devices section. Click on the first column and, while holding down the
left mouse button, drag the selection over the selected device list and release the
mouse button, or, select the first column and click the Add button. If you doubleclick on column one of any row in the available list, you will get more information
for the device. Use this if you want to narrow down your choices.
To edit a device in the selected list: Double-click on the manufacturer field of the
device you want to modify, or, select the device in the list by clicking on the manufacturer field then clicking the Edit button. The property sheet for the selected
device will display.
To delete a device from the selected list: Select the device to delete by clicking
on the manufacturer field of the device you want to delete then click the Delete button, or, select the device to delete, and, while holding down the left mouse button,
drag the device outside of the selected device list area.
Available Devices: The available device list contains the contents of the coordination
database. The list of available devices is populated when you select to edit a protection
equipment pack.
For fuses, relays, and reclosers:
You can sort the database fields based on a combination of several sort criteria.
When the Clear button is clicked, the Sort Fields criteria will be cleared. Use the
Select Sort Fields list to select the sorting criteria. When the Do Sort button is
clicked, the fields in the database will be sorted by your selected criteria and displayed in the available device list. The default, sort criteria, is to sort the database
by manufacturer, followed by model, followed by rating. If you change the sort fields
and click OK on the Select Protection Equipment dialog, your sort order is saved.
The contents of the device database can be modified by using Microsoft Access.
You cannot add or remove devices from the database by using the protection
equipment pack property sheet. For more information, refer to Section 7.5.
For transformers, conductors, and machines, select the oppropriate tab and enter the
required parameters.
3. To display the protection equipment pack on the diagram, click once in the Visible
check box to place a check mark there.
4. To add a protection equipment pack to an existing group(s), click the Groups button
and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept
the assignment. If no groups have been specified, the Groups button will not be visible.
5. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the protection equipment pack.
7-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

6. Click the Plot Options tab and enter/select the plotting options for viewing the device
curves (Figure 7-4).
Figure 7-4. Protection Equipment Pack Plot Options Tab

X-Axis (Current): Select the options for the x-axis, the display of current on a log-log
plot. Your choices are:
Confidential
Show major grid lines: When checked, shows the major axis grid lines in log-log
format.
Show minor grid lines: When checked, shows the minor axis grid lines in log-log
format.
Maximum current (A): Specifies the maximum value of the x-axis (current). You
may select a value from the supplied list containing values in the range 0.01 to
10000000. The default value is 100000.
Minimum Current (A): Specifies the minimum value of the x-axis (current). You
may select a value from the supplied list containing values in the range 0.01 to
10000000. The default value is 1.0.
7-7

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Y-Axis (Time):
Show major grid lines: When checked, shows the major axis grid lines in log-log
format.
Show minor grid lines: When checked, shows the minor axis grid lines in log-log
format.
Maximum time (sec): Specifies the maximum value of the y-axis (time). You may
select a value from the supplied list containing values in the range 0.01 to
10000000. The default value is 1000.
Minimum time (sec): Specifies the minimum value of the y-axis (time). You may
select a value from the supplied list containing values in the range 0.01 to
10000000. The default value is 1.0.
Display:
Show curve hatching: When checked, curves will be shaded (hatched) between
the minimum and the maximum. For example, for a fuse the application will hatch
between the minimum melt and total clearing curves.
Show text annotation for plots: When checked, text annotation for each device
curve will be displayed directly on the plot.
Text annotation uses text color: When checked, the text annotation color will be
set to the color specified as the "Text color" in the Colors option.
Use only solid lines for plots: When checked, no patterned lines will be drawn
(i.e., dot-dash, dashed, etc.). All curves will be represented as solid lines.
Plot annotation text size: Specifies the font size for text annotation on the coordination plot.
Axis text size: Specifies the font size of the axis labels on the coordination plot.
Misc.:
Auto-scale axes: When checked, parameters specified for maximum current and
time, and minimum current and time are ignored and the axes will be automatically
scaled.
Axis label format: Select how you want the axes labeled, Decimal or Scientific.
Light table mode: When checked, you may enter a specific fault current to use to
determine the operating time of the protective devices. When this option is
selected, the program will not use any previously calculated current values.
Reference voltage (kV): Reference voltage is used to convert protective devices

to a common voltage base. Conversion to a reference voltage will apply when protective devices are present in the system at different voltage levels (i.e., there may
be a fuse at the high side of a transformer connection and a relay at the low side).
Line Widths:
7-8
Axis: Specifies line thickness for the X and Y axis.
Curve: Specifies line thickness for the device curves.
Grid: Specifies line thickness for the grid.
Current: Specifies line thickness for the current intersection point on each device
curve.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Colors:
Background: Specify the background color for the plot window (default = white).
Text: Specify the color of the text values in the plot window (default = black).
Axis: Specify the color of the x- and y-axis in the plot window (default = blue).
7.3.1 Editing Selected Devices

Protective devices (fuses, relays, etc.) may be modified by altering the properties of the device
through its property sheet. Protective Device Property sheets have information in common, such as
the Plot Options and More Info tabs.
1. To change the Plot Options, click the Plot Options tab (Figure 7-5).
Figure 7-5. Plot Options Tab

Plot Color: Select the plot color for this device by clicking the Browse
button.
Current Multiple: The current multiple will offset the values of current by a specified
factor. The default is 1.0.
Time Multiple: The time multiple will offset the values of time by a specified factor. The
default is 1.0.
Time Adder: The time adder will add the specified value to the time specified in the
manufacturer curve. The default is 0.0.
Confidential
7-9

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. To view more information for a device, click the More Info tab (Figure 7-6).
Figure 7-6. More Info Tab

Database List: This list view contains all of the values that are specified in the database for the selected device including manufacturer, rating, model, speed characteristic, etc. Values that are blank have not been entered into the device database. This
view is provided for reference purposes only and is not editable.
7-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

7.3.1.1 Editing Fuses

A fuse is a type of protective device that can be added to a protection equipment pack. Fuses are
specified in the database of protective devices. Once you choose a fuse from the database, you can
alter some of its properties that get saved along with the network file properties by selecting to view
its property sheet. These properties are for your reference to the network not the values started in
the device database.
To change the properties of a fuse:
1. Double-click on the manufacturer field to select it and view the Fuse Property sheet, or,
select the manufacturer field in the selected device list and click the Edit button to
display the Fuse Property sheet. There are three tabs for this property sheet: General,
Plot Options, and More Info (Figure 7-7).
Figure 7-7. Fuse Property Sheet

2. In the General tab, enter/select the properties you wish to modify for the selected fuse:
Name: Each item in the network must have a unique name identifier. Enter the name
of this device in the space provided.
Branch: Name of the branch where this fuse is located.
Damage Multiplier: Enter the damage multiplier for the selected fuse. This multiplier
will be used to adjust the time values of the minimum melt curve. For example, entering
a value of 0.75 indicates that the fuse may be damaged on the minimum melt curve
75% of the time. The plot will take this value into consideration.
Description: Enter a description for this fuse device.
Visible: Indicate whether the curve should be visible on the coordination plot.
Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the fuse.
Show I2T Curve: Check the box to show the I-squared-T curve for the fuse. The Isquared-T curve is determined by squaring the current of the minimum melt curve.
Confidential
7-11

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Click the Plot Options tab and enter/select the plot options for this fuse.
4. Click the More Info tab to view additional data values associated with the selected
fuse.
7.3.1.2 Editing Relays

A relay is another type of protective device that can be added to a protection equipment pack.
Relays are specified in the database of protective devices. Once you choose a relay from the database, you can alter some of its properties that get saved along with the network file properties by
selecting to view its property sheet. These properties are for your reference to the network not the
values started in the device database.
To change the properties of a relay:
1. Double-click on the manufacturer field to select it and view the Overcurrent Relay Property sheet, or, select the manufacturer field in the selected device list and click the
Edit button to display the Overcurrent Relay Property sheet. There are three tabs for
this property sheet: General, Plot Options, and More Info (Figure 7-8).
Figure 7-8. Overcurrent Relay Property Sheet

2. In the General tab, enter/select the properties you wish to modify for the selected fuse:
7-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Name: Each item in the network must have a unique name identifier. Enter the name
of this device in the space provided.
Branch: Name of the branch where this relay is located.
Phasing: The phasing value indicates what phase is used to calculate device operating times. The available choices are: A, B, C, Positive Sequence (Pos-Seq), Negative
Sequence (Neg-Seq), Zero Sequence (Zero-Seq), Maximum over all Phases (MaxPhase), Maximum over all Sequences (Max-Seq), Neutral-to-Ground (Neutral).
Description: Enter a description for this relay device.
Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the relay.
Primary CT Setting: Specify the current transformer (CT) primary (line side) current in
amps.
Secondary CT Setting: Specify the current transformer (CT) secondary (relay side)
current in amps.
Time Dial setting: The time dial setting of this relay. You may enter the time dial setting
by directly specifying the value in the box provided, or by sliding the dial from left to right
until the proper time dial setting is displayed. You will not be allowed to specify a time
dial setting outside the range indicated by the manufacturer. The Interpolate check box,
when checked, indicates that the curve displayed on the coordination plot is derived by
interpolation between two time dial settings in the database. This option allows for time
dial settings to be specified that are between time-dials located in the database. For
example, if time dial settings in the database are 1 and 2, the interpolate option will
allow a time dial of 1.5. PSS/ADEPT will interpolate between the curves for a time dial
setting of 1 and a time dial setting of 2.
Pick Up (Tap) setting: The pick up (tap) setting of this relay. You may enter the pick
up setting by directly specifying the value in the box provided, or by sliding the dial from
left to right until the proper pick up setting is displayed. You will not be allowed to specify a pick up setting outside the range specified by the manufacturer. Pick up setting is
equivalent to tap setting.
Instantaneous setting: The instantaneous setting of the relay. You may enter the
instantaneous setting by directly specifying the value in the box provided, or by sliding
the dial from left to right until the proper instantaneous setting is displayed. You will not
be allowed to specify an instantaneous setting outside the range specified by the manufacturer.
Instantaneous operation time: Used to specify the time delay for the instantaneous
operating time of the relay. If the database contains several different instantaneous
ranges, select the desired range from the list box provided.
Multiple of PU: When checked, instantaneous setting is specified as a multiple of
pickup (Tap).
Disable: When checked, disables the instantaneous functions of the relay.
3. Click the Plot Options tab and enter/select the plot options for this fuse.
4. Click the More Info tab to view additional data values associated with the selected fuse.
Confidential
7-13

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7.3.1.3 Editing Transformer Damage Curves

A transformer damage curve can be used to check against the maximum overcurrent level at which
the transformer protective devices may be set. The maximum protection levels are dependent upon
the transformer impedance and secondary voltage. Transformer primary protective devices are
required to clear a bolted secondary short circuit within time specified limits. These time limits define
the transformer withstand capability curves and are based on the impedance of the transformer.
Normally, transformer damage curves will be specified in a protection pack placed at a transformer
branch but this is not a requirement. If the damage curve is specified at a transformer branch the
impedance and kVA rating of the transformer will be used to pre-set the values on the transformer
damage curve property sheet. If the damage curve is not specified at a transformer branch, initial
values of transformer impedance and kVA rating will be set to pre-determined default values as
described further in this section. Transformer damage curve properties are editable, however,
changing the transformer damage curve properties will not change the original transformer properties in the network.
The transformer category is determined based on the nameplate kVA specified on the transformer
damage curve property sheet and Table 7-1. If the transformer damage curve is specified on a
transformer branch, the nameplate kVA will default to the nameplate kVA specified on the transformer property sheet. System impedance is also used for Category III and IV transformers. The
system impedance will default to the source impedance specified on the source property sheet.
Zero values for system impedance are allowed.
Table 7-1. Transformer Categories
Minimum Nameplate kVA
Category
Single-phase
Three-phase
5-500
15-500
II
502-1667
501-5000
III
1668-10000
5001-30000
IV
Above 10000
Above 30000
For Category I transformers, the transformer damage curve is represented by a two-point curve represented by calculation points 1 and 4. For Category II, III, and IV transformers, the transformer
damage curve is represented by a four-point curve represented by calculation points 1, 2, 3, and 4.
For Category III and IV transformers, the source impedance is also used in calculating damage
curve points. The curve points are determined from the information contained in Table 7-2.
7-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Table 7-2. Transformer Damage Curve Points

Calculation
Point
Transformer
Category
Time (sec)
Current (Amps)
T = 1250 (Zt)2
I = AF * Rated Current / Zt
II
T=2
I = AF * Rated Current / Zt
III, IV
T=2
I = AF * Rated Current / (Zt + Zs)
II
T = 4.08
III, IV
T = 8.00
I = AF * 0.7 Rated Current / Zt

I = AF * 0.5 Rated Current / (Zt + Zs)
II
T = 2551 (Zt)2
I = AF * 0.7 Rated Current / Zt
III, IV
T = 5000 (Zt + Zs)2

T = 50
I = AF * 0.5 Rated Current / (Zt + Zs)
3
4
I, II, III, IV
I = AF * 5 * Rated Current
where:
Zt = Transformer impedance in per-unit on transformer kVA base.
Zs = Source (system) impedance in per-unit on transformer kVA base.
AF = ANSI Factor (default = 1.0). See Table 7-3.
Table 7-3. ANSI Factors
Transformer
Connection
Fault Type
Three-Phase
Phase-Phase
Line-to-Ground
ANSI
Factor
Delta-Delta
1.0
0.87
N/A
0.87
Delta-Wye-Grounded
1.0
1.15
0.58
0.58
Delta-Wye
1.0
1.15
N/A
1.0
Wye-Wye
1.0
1.0
N/A
1.0
Wye-Delta
1.0
1.0
N/A
1.0
To add a transformer damage curve to a protection pack:

1. Select the Transformers tab from the Available Devices list (Figure 7-9). Note that the
transformer damage curve does not have a database connection.
The transformer damage curve properties will automatically default to the transformer properties specified in the transformer property sheet if the protection pack
has been placed at a transformer branch.
Confidential
7-15

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 7-9. Transformer Damage Curve Tab

2. Enter/select the properties you wish to modify:
Name: Enter the name of the transformer damage curve. The name is used as text
annotation for the damage curve.
3 Phase Rating (kVA): The nameplate rating of the transformer in kVA. For transformer damage curves located at a transformer branch, this is the nameplate kVA
specified on the transformer property sheet. For damage curves located elsewhere the
nameplate kVA will default to a value of 1000.
Inrush Multiplier: When checked, the transformer inrush point will be displayed on the
coordination plot and the multiplier may be entered in the text box provided. The transformer inrush current is approximately 8 to 12 times the transformer full-load current for
a maximum period of 0.1 seconds. If the point is plotted on the time-current curve, it
should fall below the transformer primary protection device curve.
ANSI Factor: When checked, the specified ANSI factor will be used to apply a shift to
the transformer damage curve. *In order to meet the ANSI withstand requirements, it
is sometimes necessary to shift the ANSI curve. Tables 7-3 shows the ratio of per-unit
* Conrad R. St. Pierre and Tracey E. Wolny, "Standardization of Benchmarks for Protection Device Time-Current Curves,"
IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, Vol. IA-22, No. 4, pp. 623-632, July/August 1986.
7-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

primary-side current to per-unit transformer-winding current for delta-delta. delta-wye,

and wye-wye connected transformers.
For example, a line-to-ground fault on a grounded system supplied by a delta-wye
transformer produces a maximum primary current seen by a protective device to be
58% of the maximum line current in the faulted secondary winding. One per-unit current
flows in a secondary winding for both the line-to-ground and three-phase faults. Therefore, the ANSI curve must be shifted by 58% of the three-phase current level in order
to ensure that the transformer primary device is capable of detecting lower primarywinding currents. See Tables 7-2 and 7-3 for more information.
Phasing: The phasing of the transformer connection. If the damage curve is located at
a transformer branch, this value will be the phasing specified on the transformer
branch. For damage curves located elsewhere the phasing will default to "ABC".
Transformer R1 (pu on transformer kVA base): The positive-sequence resistance
of the transformer. If the damage curve is specified at a transformer branch, this value
will default to the transformer R1 specified on the transformer property sheet, otherwise, the value of R1 will be set to 0.01.
Transformer X1 (pu on transformer kVA base): The positive-sequence reactance of
the transformer. If the damage curve is specified at a transformer branch, this value will
default to the transformer X1 specified on the transformer property sheet, otherwise,
the value of X1 will be set to 0.057.
Transformer R0 (pu on transformer kVA base): The zero-sequence resistance of
the transformer. If the damage curve is specified at a transformer branch, this value will
default to the transformer R0 specified on the transformer property sheet, otherwise,
the value of R0 will be set to 0.01.
Transformer X0 (pu on transformer kVA base): The zero-sequence reactance of the
transformer. If the damage curve is specified at a transformer branch, this value will
default to the transformer X0 specified on the transformer property sheet, otherwise,
the value of X0 will be set to 0.057.
System R1 (pu on system kVA base): The positive-sequence resistance of the
source used for transformers falling into Category III and IV only. If a source is specified
in the network, this value will default to the source R1 specified on the source property
sheet, otherwise, the value of R1 will be set to 0.0.
System X1 (pu on system kVA base): The positive-sequence reactance of the source
used for transformers falling into Category III and IV only. If a source is specified in the
network, this value will default to the source X1 specified on the source property sheet,
otherwise, the value of X1 will be set to 0.0.
System R0 (pu on system kVA base): The zero-sequence resistance of the source
network, this value will default to the source R0 specified on the source property sheet,
otherwise, the value of R0 will be set to 0.0.
System X0 (pu on system kVA base): The zero-sequence reactance of the source
network, this value will default to the source X0 specified on the source property sheet,
otherwise, the value of X0 will be set to 0.0.
Confidential
7-17

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the transformer.
3. To add the transformer damage curve to the protection equipment pack, click the Add
button. The transformer damage curve will be displayed in the selected device list.
To edit an existing transformer damage curve, double-click on the device ID associated with the
transformer in the selected devices list, or select the device ID and click the Edit button. Modify
the properties you desire and click the OK button when finished.
7.3.1.4 Editing Cable/Conductor Damage Curves

Mechanical and thermal stress on cables and conductors can be seen by the flow of short circuit
current through the electric system. To avoid severe permanent damage to cable insulation during
the interval of the short circuit current flow, the conductor damage characteristics should be considered when coordinating short circuit protective devices. The conductor damage curve, represented
by a constant I2t limit, should fall above the clearing time curve of its respective protective device.
The conductor damage curve is dependent upon the conductor material and the maximum temperature that the insulation can be permitted to reach during a transient short circuit condition without
incurring severe damage. Recommended short circuit temperature limits vary according to insulation type and are used in PSS/ADEPT as described in the Table 7-4. The recommended initial
temperature of the conductor is 80 C.
Table 7-4. Recommended Conductor Temperatures
Conductor Material
7-18
Insulation Type
Maximum Temperature (C)
ACAR
None
340
Copper
None
340
Aluminum
None
340
ACSR (single-strand)
None
340
ACSR (multiple-strand)
None
645
Any
BUTYL
200
Any
CAMBRIC
200
Any
CP
250
Any
EPR
250
Any
ETFE
250
Any
FXLPE
250
Any
HDPE
180
Any
HMWPE
150
Any
LDPE
150
Any
OBR
200
Any
PAPER
200
Any
PPP
200
Any
PVC
150
Any
SBR
200
Any
SR
250
Any
XLPE
250
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Equations for calculating the conductor damage curve points in PSS/ADEPT are:
For Copper:
I = A ( [ ( 0.0125LOG 10 ( ( T 2 + 234 ) ( T 1 + 234 ) ) ) t ] )
For Aluminum:
I = A ( [ ( 0.0125LOG 10 ( ( T 2 + 228 ) ( T 1 + 228 ) ) ) t ] )
For ACAR:
I = 0.093 A ( [ ( 0.0125LOG 10 ( ( T 2 + 228 ) ( T 1 + 228 ) ) ) t ] )
For ACSR (single and multiple):
I = A ( [ ( 0.0125LOG 10 ( ( T 2 + 228 ) ( T 1 + 228 ) ) ) t ] )
where:
I
Current in Amperes
Conductor area in circular mils
Circular mils = kcmil * 1000.0
Circular mils = mm2 * 1973.5
Time (fixed at the following intervals {t = 1000, 100, 10, 1, 0.5, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01})
T1 =
Initial conductor temperature (C)
T2 =
Recommended Maximum Temperature (C)
The actual values used for initial conductor temperature and maximum conductor temperature may
be re-specified by entering the value directly on the conductor damage curve property sheet.
Confidential
7-19

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To add a conductor damage curve to a protection pack:

1. Select the Conductors tab from the Available Devices list (Figure 7-10). Note that the
conductor damage curve does not have a database connection.
Figure 7-10. Conductor Damage Curve Tab

Name: Enter the name of the conductor damage curve. The name is used as text annotation for the damage curve.
Type: Select the conductor type. Conductor type may be either overhead conductor or
underground cable.
Units: The units to use for specification of conductor area. English units for conductor
area are kcmil. Metric units for conductor area are mm2.
Conductor Area: Select the conductor area from the list box provided. If the conductor
area is not provided in the list, you can specify a user-defined conductor area by checking the user-defined box and entering the conductor area in the box provided.
Conductor Material: Select the conductor material from, either, Aluminum, Copper,
ACAR, ACSR (single-strand), or ACSR (multiple-strand). The difference between
7-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

ACSR (single-strand) and ACSR (multiple-strand) is the recommended maximum temperature used to calculate the damage curve. ACSR single stranded conductors are
those conductors that have only an aluminum stranding (i.e., 1 AWG (Robin), 1/0 AWG
(Raven), 2/0 AWG (Quail)). The recommended maximum temperature for single strand
ACSR conductors is 340 C. ACSR multiple stranded conductors are those conductors
that have both aluminum and steel stranding (i.e., Drake (26/7)). The recommended
maximum temperature for multiple stranded ACSR conductors is 640 C.
Insulation Type: Select the insulation type from the available list. If the conductor has
no insulation, select (Bare).
Max temperature (deg. C): Enter the desired maximum temperature of the conductor
to consider. This value will default to the recommended maximum temperature determined from your selection of conductor material and insulation type.
Initial temperature (deg. C): Enter the desired initial temperature of the conductor to
consider. This value will default to the recommended initial temperature.
Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the fuse.
3. Click the Add button to add the conductor damage curve to the protection equipment
pack.
To edit an existing conductor damage curve, double-click on the device ID associated with the conductor in the selected devices list, or, select the device ID and click the Edit button. Modify the
properties you desire and click the OK button when finished.
7.3.1.5 Editing Reclosers

Reclosers sense fault currents and interrupt or re-close automatically in an attempt to re-energize
a line. Recloser operations normally utilize two time-current curves. The first curve is an "instantaneous" or "A" curve that us used to save lateral fuses under temporary short circuit conditions. The
second "time delay" curve is used to delay tripping and allow the fuse to blow under a permanent
short circuit condition.
PSS/ADEPT allows representation of any number of recloser curves; there is no limit. Each recloser
curve is specified as a distinct recloser device in the protection equipment pack. As an example, if
you want to coordinate with the instantaneous "A" curve and the time-delay "E" curve you will select
two reclosers of the same type then specify the "A" curve for one and the "E" curve for the other. In
this case, two recloser devices will be specified in the selected list of devices in the protection equipment pack even though there is only one physical recloser in the field (see Figure 7-11).
Confidential
7-21

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 7-11. Protection Equipment Pack Showing Two Recloser Curves

Recloser curves plotted on the coordination plot are adjusted based on the trip-coil rating for
hydraulic control or the minimum trip rating for electronic control specified in the recloser property
sheet. In all cases the minimum trip rating is used to determine the starting current point of the
recloser time-current curve. For hydraulic controls, the minimum trip rating is equal to two times the
trip-coil rating.
Reclosers are selected from the recloser database tables in the same way as fuses and over-current relays and then modified to ensure the correct representation of the time-current curves. The
recloser trip-coil rating, minimum trip rating, and curve will default to acceptable values.
7-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To change the properties of a recloser curve:

1. Double-click on the device ID field to select it and view the Recloser Properties sheet,
or, select the device ID field and click the Edit button to display the property sheet.
There are three tabs: General, Plot Options, and More Info (Figure 7-12).
Figure 7-12. Recloser Properties Sheet

Name: Enter the name of the recloser. The name is used as text annotation for the
damage curve.
Branch: Name of the branch where this recloser is located.
Description: If desired, enter a description for this recloser curve.
Nom Voltage (kV): Nominal voltage of the recloser from the manufacturers catalog.
This field is used for display only.
Interrupting Rating (Amps): The interrupting ratings for this recloser. Interrupting ratings are obtained from the manufacturer catalog. This field is used for display only and
will display up to three interrupting ratings for each recloser.
Curve Annotation: Specify how you want the recloser curve to be annotated on the
coordination plot. Based on your selection, the coordination plot will use a text string to
indicate your selection in the text annotation box for the time-current curve. The curve
annotation is:
Confidential
Total Clearing = "Tot Clr"
Minimum Response = "Min Resp"
Phase Trip = "Phs Trip"
Ground Trip = "Grd Trip"

7-23

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Trip Coil (cont. Amps): Select the trip-coil rating in continuous Amps of the recloser
with hydraulic control. This field will be not be available if the recloser has electronic
control.
Min trip (A): Select the minimum trip rating in Amps of the recloser with electronic control. This field will not be available if the recloser has hydraulic control, however, it will
be automatically set to two times the trip-coil rating.
Time-current curve: Select the time-current curve to plot from the available list of
recloser curves.
Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the recloser.
7.3.1.6 Editing Machine Protection Curves

Machine protection is used to minimize the damage to machines from short circuits inside or near
the machine and abnormal operating or system conditions (overloads, over voltage). Induction
machines receive various degrees of protection, depending primarily on the size of the machine
(cost) and the importance of the machine's function. Most machines have, at a minimum, short circuit and overload protection. Inverse-time phase overcurrent relays with an instantaneous element
are often used to protect the machine. These overcurrent relays are set to allow the relay to ride
through machine starts but trip on short circuit conditions. For ground fault protection usually consists of overcurrent relays with CT's in the residual connection. Some machines have protections
against negative-sequence overcurrent and overvoltage, undervoltage protection, loss of synchronism, loss of excitation, field ground faults, and/or excessive stator temperatures.
Overcurrent relays used to protect the machine can be defined directly in PSS/ADEPT's protection
and coordination module. These over current relays and associated motor starting time-current
characteristic curves can be used to establish proper machine protection during short circuit events.
To add a machine starting curve to a protection pack:
1. Select the Machines tab from the Available Devices list (Figure 7-13). Note that the
machine curve does not have a database connection.
The machine curve properties will automatically default to the machine properties
specified in the machine property sheet if the protection pack has been placed at
a node where a machine is located.
7-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Figure 7-13. Machine Starting Curve Property Sheet

Name: Enter the name of the machine-starting curve. The name is used as text annotation for the starting curve.
Mechanical power units: Select whether the machine power is specified as hp or kW.
This will designate the machine as NEMA or IEC.
Mechanical rating: Enter the rating of the machine in the appropriate units.
Rated (nominal) terminal voltage (kV): Enter the rated voltage of the machine. The
voltage will default to the node base voltage of the node where the machine is located.
Power factor: Enter the power factor for the machine.
Efficiency: Enter the machine efficiency in per unit where 1.0 indicates 100%.
Full load (amps): The value of full load amps will be calculated using the rating, nominal terminal voltage, power factor and efficiency. To specify the full load amps, check
the box labeled user-defined. The field will be enabled allowing the entry of a value for
full load amps.
Confidential
7-25

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Locked rotor (amps): The value of locked rotor amps will be calculated as six times
the full load (amps). To specify the value of locked rotor amps, check the box labeled
user-defined. The field will be enabled allowing the entry of a value of full load amps.
Acceleration time (sec): Enter the value to use for the motor acceleration time. The
motor acceleration time is the amount of time required for a motor to achieve rated revolutions per minute after the rated voltage has been applied to the motor terminals.
Machine starting characteristics: Select the machine-starting characteristic desired:
full voltage or autotransformer. The machine-starting curve will be adjusted based on
the option specified. If the machine is to be started through an autotransformer to
reduce inrush, specify the tap setting of the autotransformer. The motor-starting curve
will then be determined by adjusting the curve based on the tap setting of the transformer where 1.0 is 100%.
Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the recloser.
7-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Performing a Coordination Study
7.4 Performing a Coordination Study

The primary purpose of a coordination study is to determine the satisfactory ratings and settings for
the protective devices in the network. The protective devices should be chosen so that pickup currents and operating times are short but sufficient to override system transient overloads such as
inrush currents experienced when energizing transformers or starting motors. In addition, the protective devices should be coordinated so that the protective device closest to the fault opens before
the other devices.
You can use the coordination analysis feature to determine the operating times of all the protection
equipment in a selected portion of the network. In addition, you may enter your own current for
determination of device operating times, or you may run a short circuit analysis to determine the
fault current at a location within the selected coordination area. You can use the difference table
provided in the coordination curve plot to help establish protective device coordination. The coordination curve plot provides a record of the time-current operating relationship of the protection of
your system. The coordination curve plot is made on log-log paper with current as the abscissa and
time as the ordinate. You can print the coordination curve plot for future reference.
The manufacturers of protective devices publish time-current operating characteristic curves and
other performance data for all devices used in this application. The curves are stored in the protective device database and are selected when you add or modify the data in a protection equipment
pack. The plotting offsets are applied to these plots (see Section 7.3.1).
7.4.1 Preparing for a Coordination Study

In order to perform a coordination study, the following information is required:
The system one-line diagram containing protection equipment packs. You can add protection equipment packs to the network in the Diagram View by selecting the
Protection Equipment button (see Section 7.2).
An analysis solution to indicate the values of current that are expected to flow through
each protective device. Values of current may be from a power flow, short circuit, or
motor starting analysis. Current may be specified directly by selecting the Light table
mode option located on the P&C Options tab of the Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet.
A selected area on the one-line diagram indicating the area to study during the coordination analysis. You can select an area on the one-line diagram by using the selection
tools provided with the application.
After you have selected an area to study, choose Analysis>Coordination. The Protection and
Coordination View will display.
7.4.2 The Coordination View

The Coordination View is displayed when you select to perform a coordination study by selecting
Analysis>Coordination from the Main Menu (Figure 7-14). The Coordination View is used to display manufacturers curves and operating times for the selected protective devices in the network.
The selected protective devices that are plotted in this view are determined from your selection of
protection equipment packs. This selection is determined when you select the coordination area on
the one-line diagram.
You may toggle between the Protection and Coordination View and the Diagram View at any time
by using the Window menu to select the view to bring to the top of your viewing area.
Confidential
7-27

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Located on the lower left side of the plot area are the X and Y coordinates of your mouse pointer.
You may use this mouse pointer to locate a current/time point in the plot by moving your mouse over
the curve area. Modification of the axis title, can be accomplished by double-clicking on the text and
altering the desired property values.
List View
Text Annotation
Figure 7-14. Coordination View
7-28
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

7.4.2.1 The Coordination Menu Bar

The Coordination View has its own menu bar (Figure 7-15).
Figure 7-15. Coordination View Menu

File Menu
The File Menu provides options for saving the coordination view to a Metafile, closing the coordination view, and printing the coordination view to a printer.
View Menu
The View Menu provides options that allow you to display or hide the toolbar and status bar. It also
provides an option to refresh the coordination view.
Options Menu
The Options Menu allows you to change the plotting options. Refer to Editing Protection Equipment
Packs Step 6 for more information on changing the plot options. The Coordination View may be
broken into two distinct sections: the coordination curve plot and the list view. Each of these sections is addressed below. The Help menu allows you to access on-line help.
7.4.2.2 Coordination Curve Plot Annotation

The coordination curve plot will plot the protective device curves in the selected coordination area.
As part of the coordination curve plot, text annotation boxes will be placed on the plot to provide
more information on each device curve such as the manufacturer and model number.
Moving text annotations: The text annotation can be moved to another location by double-clicking over the text annotation and altering the x and y values in the text properties,
or by clicking and holding the left mouse button down and dragging the text to a new location.
Modifying text annotations: The text annotation can be modified by, double-clicking on
the text and modifying any of the available properties.
Refreshing the plot will not remember the changes made to the text annotations. So
we recommend you do these changes just before printing the plots.
7.4.2.3 Changing Protective Device Settings

To change the settings of a protective device from the coordination view:
1. Double-click on the curve you want to modify.
2. Choose Modify to display the Device Property sheet.
3. Click the OK button. The curve will be redrawn based on the settings you specified.
Confidential
7-29

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To select a different device from the database:

1. Double-click on the device you want to change.
2. Choose Replace.
3. The property sheet for the protection equipment pack will display. From this sheet you
may specify another protective device.
4. Click the OK button. The new device will be drawn in the Coordination View.
7.4.2.4 The Coordination List View

The list view is located at the right edge of the Coordination View. The list view contains additional
information regarding each device that is plotted in the coordination curve view including operating
times.
The list view provides the following information:
Plot: The number assigned to the curve in the Coordination View
Device ID: Device identifier from protection equipment database.
Branch: The branch where the protective device is located.
End: The node end where the protective device is located.
Current: The current that the protective device sees.
Max time, min time: The time at which the device will operate. For fuses, there is a maximum time and a minimum time indicating the intersection point of the minimum melt curve
(min time) and the intersection point of the total clearing curve (max time). A value of "Noop" indicates that this device will not operate based on the given current.
Difference: The time elapsed between protective devices.
This list view may be printed along with the curve plots.
7-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

7.4.2.5 Printing the Coordination View

The coordination view and its accompanying list view can be printed to any Windows printer. To print
the coordination view:
1. Select File>Print. The Print Parameters dialog displays (Figure 7-16).
Figure 7-16. Print Parameters Dialog

2. Select the printing style you want.
Print graphs to max size: Prints the graph maximized to the size of the paper.
Proportionate: Prints the graph proportionately to the size of the paper.
Exact size: Prints the graph as they are displayed in the application.
3. Select OK.
Once the coordination view is sent to the printer, you will be asked if you wish to print the list view
also (Figure 7-17).
Figure 7-17. Prompt to Print the List View

Select Yes to print the contents of the list view. Select No to return to the coordination view.
Confidential
7-31

The Protective Device Database
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7.5 The Protective Device Database

The protective device database is a Microsoft Access database that contains manufacturers information for various protection devices such as fuses and relays. This database is installed on your
machine when you install PSS/ADEPT. You may modify this database using the tools available in
Access to include new protection devices or you may delete records from the database at your
discretion.
The protective device database consists of a set of three tables each for fuses and relays. These
tables are specifically described in the following sections.
7.5.1 Fuse Tables

7.5.1.1 Fuse
The Fuse table contains a device identifier, the manufacturer name and the nominal rating of the
device. The device identifier is a unique number and also a primary key for referencing the other
tables. All of the entries in the fuse table must be unique and there can be no duplicate device
identifiers.
The format of the Fuse table is given below (Table 7-5).
Table 7-5. Fuse Table
Field Name
Required
Type
Description
DevId
Text
(Primary Key)
MANUFACTURER
Text
Manufacturer name.
NOMINAL_RATING
Text
Nominal device rating.
CONTINOUS_LOADABILITY
Text
DAILY_LOADABILITY_05
Text
DAILY_LOADABILITY_1
Text
DAILY_LOADABILITY_2
Text
DAILY_LOADABILITY_4
Text
DAILY_LOADABILITY_8
Text
EMERG_05
Text
EMERG_1
Text
EMERG_2
Text
EMERG_4
Text
EMERG_8
Text
7-32
Device identifier. Must be unique.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

7.5.1.2 Fuse Catalog

The Fuse Catalog table contains model information about the fuses defined in the Fuse table. In this
table, the device identifier you enter must match the DevId that has previously been entered in the
Fuse table. In this table, you may define more than one model for the same device identifier. For
example, you may have the same device curve for more than one fuse model (S&C SM-5 4.16 to
14.4kV and S&C SM-5 23&34.5 kV). In this case there will be two entries in the table with the same
DevId and model but different nominal voltage ranges.
The format for the Fuse Catalog table is given below (Table 7-6).
Table 7-6. Fuse Catalog Table
Field Name
Required
DevId
MODEL
Type
Description
Text
Device identifier. Must match the

DevId specified in the Fuse table.
Text
Model number
SPEED_CHARACTERISTIC
Text
Speed characteristic (Extremely

inverse, very inverse, etc.).
NOMINAL
Text
Nominal voltage range.
MAX
Text
Maximum voltage range.
CURVE_CODE
Text
Curve number or code from

manufacturers sheet.
SYM_AMPERES
Text
Symmetrical fault current (amps).
ASYM_AMPERES
Text
Asymmetrical fault current (amps).
FUSE_UNIT_CATALOG_NUM
Text
Fuse unit catalog number.
MOUNTING_CATALOG_NUM
Text
Fuse unit mounting catalog number.
DevIndex
Number (Auto)
Automatic number used to make all

entries unique.
Confidential
7-33

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7.5.1.3 Fuse Curve

The Fuse Curve table contains the time and current points for a fuse. Each point on the curve is
represented as one record. For fuses that have both a minimum melt and a total clearing curve, the
minimum melt curve is defined by specifying an MM in the CurveType field. The total clearing curve
is defined by specifying an MC in the CurveType field.
The format for the Fuse Curve table is given below (Table 7-7).
Table 7-7. Fuse Curve Table
Field Name
Required
Type
Description
DevId
Text

DevId specified in the Fuse table.
CurveType
Text
Curve Type:
MM = minimum melt curve
MC = total clearing curve
Time
Number
Time point (Y, ordinate).
Current
Number
Current point (X, abscissa).
7-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

7.5.2 Relay Tables

7.5.2.1 Relay
The Relay table contains a device identifier, the manufacturer, model, type and other information for
a relay. The device identifier is a unique number and also a primary key for referencing the other
relay tables. All of the entries in the relay table must be unique and there can be no duplicate device
identifiers.
The format of the Relay table is given below (Table 7-8).
Table 7-8. Relay Table
Field Name
DevId
Required
Type
Description
Text (Primary
Key)
DEVICE_NUM
Text
IEEE - Device Number, also known as

ANSI No. (e.g., 50/51).
RELAY_CATEGORY_NAME
Text
Group according to OverCurrent,

Phase_Distance, Ground_distance,
Directional_Ground, Differential,
Timer, Instantaneous.
Text
Manufacturer name
(e.g., GE,WE,ASEA).
TYPE
Text
Type as specified by the manufacturer

(e.g., IAC, JBC).
MODEL
Text
Manufacturer given model name

(e.g., IAC51, JBC53, etc.).
TIME_CHARAC_1
Text
Time Characteristic (e.g. Inverse,

Extremely Inverse, Very Inverse, etc.).
MANUFACTURER
TAP_UNITS
Number
Enter 0 if taps are displayed in per unit

(pu), enter 1 if taps are displayed in
amps.
TIMEDIAL_FORMAT
Number
Enter a 1 to look up max and min timedial and step using time-dial step enter a
0 to read the RelayCurve table for Devid
and Time-Dial.
MIN_TIMEDIAL_SETTING
Number
Minimum time dial setting.
MAX_TIMEDIAL_SETTING
Number
Maximum time dial setting.
TIMEDIAL_STEP
Number
Time dial step, enter a blank if relay has

no time dial step.
CURVE_NUMBER
Text
Manufacturer curve number.
ELEMENT_DESIGNATION
Text
If the same relay is used for multiple purposes, use this field to uniquely identify
the relay.
RATED_CURRENT
Number
Rated current of the relay in amps.
PICKUP_FACTOR
Number
Manufacturer given pickup factor, enter

blank to default to 1.0.
Confidential
7-35

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7.5.2.2 Relay Catalog

The Relay Catalog table contains additional information about the relays defined in the Relay table.
In this table, the device identifier you enter must match the DevId that has previously been entered
in the Relay table. In this table, you may define more than one entry for the same device identifier.
For example, you may have the same relay curve for more than one tap range (Basler BE-151tap
range R1, R2, R3 each with a different minimum and maximum tap setting range). In this case there
will be three entries in the table with the same DevId but different tap range identifiers and different
minimum and maximum tap settings.
The format of the Relay Catalog table is given below (Table 7-9).
Table 7-9. Relay Catalog Table
Field Name
Required
Type
Description
DevId
Text
(Primary
Key)
Device identifier. Must match

the DevId specified in the Relay
table.
DevIndex
Number
(Auto)
Automatic number used to

make all entries unique. This
number is incremented each
time a new record is added to
the table.
Text
Text, indicating the number of

tap ranges on the relay (e.g.,
An IAC53 relay has 4 different
tap ranges. The tap range id
will be IAC53_1, IA53_2,
IAC53_3, IAC53_4).
Text
Comma separated list of tap

settings that are available.
(e.g., 0.5,0.7, etc.). Note: Enter
a blank in the TAP_STEP field
multiple tap settings are defined
in this field and the step
between settings is not uniform.
MIN_TAP_SETTING
Text
Minimum Tap Setting.
MAX_TAP_SETTING
Text
Maximum Tap Setting.
TAP_STEP
Text
For relays with uniform steps,

enter the tap step (e.g., 0.1)
Enter a blank and fill in the field
AVAILABLE_TAP_
SETTINGS to enter non-uniform tap settings.
INST_RANGE
Text
Comma separated list of both

maximum and minimum instantaneous settings (e.g., 10-40,
20-80, 60-120). In this case,
10-40 translates to a minimum
instantaneous setting of 10 and
a maximum instantaneous setting of 40.
TAP_RANGE_ID
AVAILABLE_TAP_SETTINGS
7-36
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Table 7-9. Relay Catalog Table (Cont.)

Field Name
Required
Type
Description
INST_STEP
Number
Instantaneous setting step

(e.g., 0.1). Enter a blank if no
step setting is available.
SUPERVISING_ELEMENT_CODE
Text
Should be one of the following:

IOC, TOC, DIR, DIST, TIME,
AUX.
SUPERVISING_ELEMENT_DESIGNATION
Text
The supervising element of a

relay used for multiple purposes. This field should match
the ELEMENT_DESIGNATION
field located in the Relay table.
STYLE
Text
Manufacturer's given style

number (e.g., 12IAC51A801).
7.5.2.3 Relay Curve

The Relay Curve table contains the time and current points for each time-dial of the relay. Each point
on the curve is represented as one record. For relays that have multiple time-dials, the time dial is
specified with the curve points.
The format of the Relay Curve table is given below (Table 7-10).
Table 7-10. Relay Curve
Field Name
Required
Type
Description
DevId
Text
(Primary Key) DevId specified in the Relay table.
Time-Dial
Number
The time-dial setting of the relay corresponding to the curve point.
Time
Number
Time point (Y, ordinate).
Current
Number
Current point (X, abscissa).
Confidential
7-37

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7.5.3 Recloser Table

7.5.3.1 RecloserMfrSpecs
The RecloserMfrSpecs table contains manufacturer catalog information for recloser devices. The
device ID (DEVID) is used as a unique key to reference other recloser tables in the database. Information that is entered into this table is normally obtained from the catalog of reclosers provided by
the manufacturer.
The format of the RecloserMfrSpecs table is given below (Table 7-11).
Table 7-11. RecloserMfrSpecs
Field Name
Required
Type
Description
DEVID
Text
MANID
Text
Manufacturer ID, must match a manufacturer defined in the

Recloser_Manufacturers table.
REC_TYPE
Text
Recloser type (e.g., 4E, R, PWE).
NOM_VOLT
Text
Nominal voltage range (e.g., 4.8, 4.814.4).
CON_TYPE
Text
Control type: Hydraulic or Electronic.

Default = Hydraulic.
INTERUP_MED
Text
Interrupting medium: Oil or Vacuum.
BIL
Number
Basic impulse level.
MAX_CUR_RATING
Number
Maximum current rating (Amps).
CATALOG_NUM
Text
Catalog number.
ELEC_CONTROL_NUM
Text
Electronic control catalog number.
7-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

7.5.3.2 RecloserRatings
The RecloserRatings table contains coil sizes and minimum trip ratings along with interrupting ratings for each recloser type that is specified in the RecloserMfrSpecs table. The RecloserRatings
table also defines a pointer to the recloser time-current curve along with a current offset if necessary. The current offset (X_OFFSET) is used to shift the recloser curve to the correct minimum trip
value. This allows you to specify one "base" curve in the database that indicates the manufacturers
minimum trip coil/minimum trip rating and adjust for other trip coil/minimum trip ratings by specifying
an offset multiplier (X_OFFSET) to the "base" curve. The "base" curve would be represented by the
field CURVE_PTR which indicates which recloser curve to extract from the database. If no shift is
required, specify an X_OFFSET of 1.0. For reclosers that cannot be represented by a "base" curve
specify a unique curve pointer (CURVE_PTR) and an X_OFFSET of 1.0.
The format of the RecloserRatings table is given below (Table 7-12):
Table 7-12. RecloserRatings Table
Field Name
Required
Type
Description
DEVID
Text
Device identifier. Must match a DEVID

specified in RecloserMfrSpecs table.
TRIP_COIL_RATING
Text
The trip-coil rating of the recloser.

Used for hydraulic reclosers, enter N/A
for electronic reclosers.
MIN_TRIP_RATING
Text
The minimum trip rating, normally 2

times the trip coil rating for hydraulic
reclosers.
OPER_VOLTAGE_INDEX
Text
Operating voltages of the recloser.

Specify one operating voltage for each
interrupting rating. A recloser with
operating voltages of 4.8, 8.32, and
14.4 would have three distinct records
in this table.
Text
Interrupting rating for specified operating voltage index.
INTERRUPT_RATING
CURVE_PTR
Text
Text identifier of the recloser curve

specified in the RecloserTCCCurve
table.
X_OFFSET
Number
Multiplier used to shift recloser curve to

the correct minimum trip rating. For no
curve shift, enter a value of 1.0.
Confidential
7-39

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7.5.3.3 RecloserTCCCurve
The RecloserTCCCurve table contains the recloser time-current curves. Time-current curves are
entered into the database with current specified in Amps and time specified in seconds. Each curve
is defined by a curve pointer (specified in the RecloserRatings table) and a curve type (A, E, 101,
102, etc.). The curve type is indicated on the time-current curve by the manufacturer of the recloser.
The format of the RecloserTCCCurve table is given below (Table 7-13).
Table 7-13. RecloserTCCCurve Table
Field Name
Required
Type
Description
CURVE_PTR
Text
Curve identifier. Must match the curve

pointer specified in RecloserRatings
table.
CURVE_SET_TYPE
Text
The curve identifier that the manufacturer provides on time-current plot.

Examples of a curve identifier are A, B,
D, 102, 101.
Number
Current point (Amps).
Number
Time point (seconds).
7-40
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

7.5.4 Using the Protective Device Database Interface

The protective device database interface provides the ability to add, delete, and modify protective
device database tables interactively through an easy to use interface. The interface will automatically display when the database is opened as shown in Figure 7-18.
Figure 7-18. Main Switchboard

If you want to open the database without the automatic interface, hold the Shift key down while
opening the protective device database and Microsoft Access will bypass the interface and open
normally.
Confidential
7-41

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7.5.4.1 Adding Fuses

To add a fuse to the database:
1. Click the Add Fuse button. The Add Fuse form will display (Figure 7-19).
Figure 7-19. Add Fuse Form

2. Enter the properties of the fuse (required fields are indicated by a *).
3. Enter the properties of the fuse catalog and select Add Record to add the catalog information to the fuse catalog table.
4. Enter the minimum melt and maximum clearing curves for the fuse. The minimum melt
curve values are specified as (time,current) point values with a curve type of "MM". The
maximum clearing curve values are specified as (time,current) point values with a
curve type of "MC".
5. Select Close to exit the form and add the fuse record into the database.
6. If a new fuse manufacturer is added, update the fuse manufacturer table as described
in Section 7.5.4.5.
7-42
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

7.5.4.2 Adding Relays

To add a relay to the database:
1. Click the Add Relay button. The Add Relay form will display (Figure 7-20).
Figure 7-20. Add Relay Form

2. Enter the properties of the relay (required relays are indicated by a *).
3. Enter the properties of the relay catalog and select Add Record to add the catalog
information to the relay catalog table.
4. Enter time dial, time, and current values that define the curve for the relay.
5. Select Close to exit the form and add the relay record into the database.
6. If a new relay manufacturer is added, update the relay manufacturer table as described
Section 7.5.4.5.
Confidential
7-43

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7.5.4.3 Adding Reclosers

To add a recloser to the database:
1. If you need to add a new recloser manufacturer, select Database Maintenance from
the main switchboard and choose Add Recloser Manufacturer. The Add Recloser
Manufacturer form will display (Figure 7-21). Select the New Record
button, enter
a manufacturer identifier and the manufacturer name, then select Close to add the
manufacturer to the database.
Figure 7-21. Add Recloser Manufacturer Form

2. Click the Add Recloser button to display the Add Recloser form (Figure 7-22).
Figure 7-22. Add Recloser Form

3. Enter the properties of the relay.
4. Enter the properties of the relay ratings including ratings. If the recloser is hydraulic,
enter the trip coil rating and the minimum trip rating (normally 2 times the trip coil
rating). If the recloser is electronic, enter N/A in the Trip Coil Rating field. Select the
Add Record button to add the rating information to the relay ratings table. Assign a
curve pointer and X offset (multiplier) used to look up the correct time-current curve.
7-44
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

5. Under the RecloserCurve area, type the curve pointer defined in Step 3 and the associated current and time points that identify the time-current curve for this recloser. The
curve identifier (Curve ID) is normally the number or letter of the TCC curve supplied
by the manufacturer.
6. Select Close to exit the form and add the recloser record into the database.
7.5.4.4 Viewing and Modifying Fuses

To view or modify a fuse in the database:
1. Select View/Modify Fuse. The View/Modify Fuse form is displayed (Figure 7-23).
Figure 7-23. View/Modify Fuse Form

2. Select the manufacturer and fuse type from the drop down list provided and the fields
in the form will be filled in automatically.
3. If you want to change any fuse properties or curve points, select the field(s) you want
to change and enter the new value.
4. Select Close to save your changes and exit the form.
Confidential
7-45

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7.5.4.5 Viewing and Modifying Relays

To view or modify a relay in the database:
1. Select View/Modify Relay. The View/Modify Relay form is displayed (Figure 7-24).
Figure 7-24. View/Modify Relay Form

2. Select the manufacturer and relay type from the drop down list provided and the fields
in the form will be filled in automatically.
3. If you want to change any relay properties or curve points, select the field(s) you want
to change and enter the new value.
4. Select Close to save your changes and exit the form.
7-46
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

7.5.4.6 Viewing and Modifying Reclosers

To view or modify a recloser in the database:
1. Select View/Modify Recloser from the Main Switchboard. The View/Modify Recloser
form is displayed (Figure 7-25).
Figure 7-25. View/Modify Recloser Form

2. Select the manufacturer and recloser type from the drop down list provided and the
fields in the form will be automatically filled in. To add a manufacturer to the database,
refer to Step 1 of the section titled Adding Reclosers.
3. If you want to change any properties or curve points, select the field(s) you want to
modify and enter the new value.
4. Select Close to save your changes and exit.
Confidential
7-47

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7.5.4.7 Updating Device Manufacturers

If you have added new fuse or relay manufacturers during any add or modify operation, you must
update the manufacturer tables in order for the manufacturers to be correctly added into the
database.
To update fuse manufacturers:
1. Click the Database Maintenance button.
2. Click the Update Fuse Manufacturers button and select Yes to the message "The
existing table "Fuse Manufacturers" will be deleted before you run the query. Do you
want to continue anyway?"
3. The fuse manufacturer table will now be updated.
To update relay manufacturers:
2. Click the Update Relay Manufacturers button and select Yes to the message "The
existing table "Relay Manufacturers" will be deleted before you run the query. Do you
want to continue anyway?"
3. The relay manufacturer table will now be updated.
7-48
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

7.5.4.8 Removing Devices

Any number of fuse or relay devices may be permanently removed from the database in a single
operation.
To delete a fuse:
2. Click the Delete Fuse Records button. The Delete Fuse Records form is displayed
(Figure 7-26).
Figure 7-26. Delete Fuse Records Form

3. Select the manufacturer and fuse type that you want to remove from the database.
Properties of the fuse will be updated automatically.
4. Click the Delete Record button to remove the record from the database.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired fuses are removed.
6. Select Close to exit the form.
Confidential
7-49

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To delete a fuse:
2. Click the Delete Relay Records button. The Delete Relay Records form is displayed
(Figure 7-27).
Figure 7-27. Delete Relay Records Form

3. Select the manufacturer and relay type that you want to remove from the database.
Properties of the relay will be updated automatically.
4. Click the Delete Record button to remove the record from the database.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired relays are removed.
7-50
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To delete a recloser:
1. Click the Database Maintenance button on the Main Switchboard.
2. Click the Delete Recloser Records button. The Delete Recloser Records form is displayed (Figure 7-28)
Figure 7-28. Delete Recloser Records Form

3. Select the manufacturer and recloser type that you want to remove from the database.
The properties for this recloser will automatically appear in the fields on the form.
4. Click the Delete Record button to remove the recloser record from the database. You
will be asked at this time whether to remove the associated recloser ratings records
from the database (Figure 7-29). Select Yes to remove the recloser ratings records or
No to remove only the recloser manufacturer information.
Figure 7-29. Verify Removal of Recloser Ratings Records

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the desired recloser records are removed.
Confidential
7-51

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To delete a recloser curve:

1. Click the Database Maintenance button on the Main Switchboard.
2. Click the Delete Recloser Curve button. The Delete Recloser Curve form is displayed
(Figure 7-30)
Figure 7-30. Delete Recloser Curve Form

3. Select the curve pointer and curve ID that you want to remove from the database.
4. Click the Delete Curve button to remove the recloser curve from the database.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all desired curves have been removed.
7.5.5 Printing the Contents of the Database

The contents of the protective device database may be printed by, using the Reports available in
Microsoft Access. To obtain a report:
1. Click the Reports tab.
2. Double-click on the report name, or select the report and click the Preview button. The
report will display. You can print this report by selecting File>Print.
7-52
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

7.5.6 Importing Customized Database Tables

If you have customized the protective device database to meet your needs and wish to stay current
with future releases of our products, import your customized database tables into the current version of our distributed database.
You can import your customized database tables into the latest version of PTIs protective device
database using functions provided by Microsoft Access. Importing tables will use an import followed
by an append query to add records into existing tables. Instructions for importing tables and writing
append queries are provided by Microsoft Access on-line help and are also detailed below for your
convenience.
Import data from another database:
1. Hold the Shift key down while opening the PTIProt.mde database.
2. Select File>Get External Data>Import.
3. Select the database file that you want to import.
4. Select Import.
5. In the Import Objects dialog, select the table(s) that you want to import.
6. Select OK. A new table will be created in the database for each of the tables you have
selected.
Create an append query to append the imported table records to an existing database table.
1. Create a query by selecting New on the Query tab. Select Design View.
2. In the Show Table dialog, choose the new table that was created during the import
process.
3. Include all the fields in the table by dragging the * to the query design grid.
4. Select Query>Append Query and select the table that you want the new table to be
appended to.
5. Select OK.
6. Select Save and provide a name for the query.
7. Select Query>Run to run the query and update the table. Some database tables will
not allow duplicates. If you are prompted that Microsoft Access cannot append all the
records in the append query, select Yes. This indicates only unique records will be
added to the new table.
Confidential
7-53
7-54
Confidential
Chapter 8
Harmonic Analysis
8.1 Overview: Harmonic Analysis
A harmonic analysis can be used model power system distortion. The deviation between the perfect
sinusoid is expressed in terms of harmonic components. PSS/ADEPT can perform harmonic analysis on your network and display graphical results. After the network is solved at the fundamental
frequency (e.g., 50 Hz, 60 Hz), all of the network components are converted into impedances.
These impedances are varied according to the harmonic number and the network is solved for each
specific harmonic (e.g., 1st, 3rd, 5th). For each device type within the network there are various
ways of modeling the effect of the harmonic number on the device impedance.
A current injection technique is used to inject current of a certain magnitude and angle into the network. Harmonic filters may also be defined directly in the network by specifying a shunt device of
this type at any node in the network.
Harmonic analysis can be used to calculate the total harmonic distortion, telephone influence factor,
and Thevenin impedance. In addition, a harmonic scan is also possible over a range of harmonic
numbers.
The harmonics module is an option in PSS/ADEPT. You will be unable to access the harmonics
module if you have not purchased the license. If you wish to purchase a license for this module,
please contact PTI for further assistance.
Adding harmonic injections to the network.
Adding harmonic filters to the network.
Editing harmonic injections and filters.
Specifying harmonic analysis options.
Performing a harmonic analysis.
Viewing results of a harmonic analysis.
Confidential
8-1
Harmonic Analysis
Adding Harmonic Injections
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8.2 Adding Harmonic Injections

A harmonic injection is a current injection that can be used to eliminate harmonics and is described
by a set of "triplets" that define magnitude and angle of harmonic injection as a function of harmonic
number. The magnitude of each triplet is defined in per-unit terms so the base current of the injection is also required.
Harmonic injections specified in the network are only considered by the harmonic analysis module
and are irrelevant to any other analysis.
Harmonic injections can be associated with another network item, such as a static load, or can exist
separately attached to a node in the network. When a harmonic injection is associated with a specific network item (static load, machine, etc.) that item is replaced by the specified harmonic
injection during a harmonic analysis. A transformer branch is an exception since replacing the transformer branch by a harmonic injection would cause an islanded network to be implicitly created.
With respect to harmonic injections, the following rules are applied:
8-2
You cannot define a harmonic injection at a line branch.
You can specify a harmonic injection only at the FROM side of a transformer branch.
Nodes that are connected by a zero impedance line branch will be handled as one
node, not two.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
8.2.1 Adding Harmonic Injections to Shunt Items

You can specify a harmonic injection at a static load, induction machine, synchronous machine, or
a shunt capacitor/reactor bank. When a harmonic analysis is performed, the injection will be placed
at the same node as the shunt item and the associated shunt item will be temporarily removed from
the network. For example, if a harmonic injection is associated with a static load, the static load item
will be removed from the network and replaced by the specified injection during harmonic analysis.
In the initial load flow, the base shunt current is determined from the phase current of the associated
shunt device. The angle of the injection is determined from the angle of the positive-sequence node
voltage.
To add a harmonic injection to a shunt item:
1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Harmonic Injection
button.
2. Position the mouse pointer over the connection line of the shunt item, click just over
half the distance toward the shunt item symbol. The harmonic injection symbol
(Figure 8-1) will appear on top of the connection line between the node and the shunt
item symbol.
Figure 8-1. Harmonic Injection Symbol on a Shunt Item
Confidential
8-3
Harmonic Analysis
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8.2.2 Adding Harmonic Injections to Transformers

You can specify a harmonic injection at the FROM side of a transformer branch. During harmonic
analysis, this transformer remains in the network to prevent an island from forming.
In the initial load flow, the base branch current is determined from the phase currents at the FROM
node of the transformer. The angle of the injection is determined from the angle of the positivesequence FROM node voltage of the transformer branch.
To add a harmonic injection to a transformer:
button.
2. Position the mouse pointer over the sending end of the branch and click within a quarter
of the total length of the transformer from the node. A harmonic injection symbol will
appear on the selected transformer branch (Figure 8-2).
Figure 8-2. Harmonic Injection Symbol on a Transformer
8-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
8.2.3 Adding Harmonic Injections to Nodes

You can specify a harmonic injection that is directly attached to a node in the network much like a
static load or induction machine. In this case, the base current must be specified in the Harmonic
Injection Property sheet. The angle of the injection is found from the angle of the positive-sequence
node voltage.
Only one harmonic injection is allowed at a node in the network. Nodes that are connected by
a zero impedance line branch will count as one node.
To add a harmonic injection to a node:
button.
2. Position the pointer over the node to which the harmonic injection will be connected.
3. Click and hold down the mouse button while dragging the harmonic injection symbol
(Figure 8-3) to the desired position.
Figure 8-3. Harmonic Injection Symbol on a Node
Confidential
8-5
Harmonic Analysis
Editing Harmonic Injections
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8.3 Editing Harmonic Injections

The characteristics of harmonic injections are modified using its property sheet. You can display the
property sheet for the selected harmonic injection from either the Equipment List View or the Diagram View.
To display the Harmonic Injection Property sheet from the Diagram View:
1. Double-click on the desired harmonic injection; or,
2. Left-click on the harmonic injection to select it, then right-click to display a pop-up
menu; choose Properties. The Harmonic Injection Property sheet will display.
To display the harmonic injection from the Equipment List View:
1. Expand the tree section titled "Harmonic Injections" by clicking on the "+".
2. Double-click on the harmonic injection which will automatically display the Harmonic
Injection Property sheet; or,
3. Left-click on the harmonic injection to select it then right-click to display the pop-up
menu; choose Properties from the pop-up menu to display the Harmonic Injection
Property sheet.
As an alternative, you may also use the applications selection tools to select harmonic injections.
To change the properties of a harmonic injection:
1. Double-click on the harmonic injection or select the harmonic injection, right-click and
choose Properties. The Harmonic Injection Property sheet will display (Figure 8-4).
Figure 8-4. Harmonic Injection Property Sheet
8-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Adding Harmonic Filters
2. Enter/select the properties for the harmonic injection. Press the Tab key to move to the
next field or click in the field of interest, then add or change information as needed.
Name: Each item in the network must have a unique name identifier. You may enter
an alphanumeric character name up to 12 characters. The name cannot contain
embedded blanks.
Harmonic Injection List: Adding an item to the list specifies a new harmonic injection.
To add an item to the list, click the New
button and specify the requested data. To
remove an item from the list, click the Delete
button. To edit an existing item in the
list, double-click on the desired item in the list.
For each harmonic injection enter the following parameters:
Harmonic number: Specify the harmonic number where this current injection will be
used (e.g., 1, 5, 7, 9, etc.). Normally the harmonic number is specified as an integer
value, however, real numbers are allowed.
Current magnitude: Specify the current magnitude in per-unit of base current.
Current angle: Specify the current angle in fundamental degrees.
If you specify a harmonic injection at a node, the base current for the injection
must be specified in amps. If you specify a harmonic injection at a transformer or
shunt item, the branch or shunt current is used as the base value and the base current
field will not appear on the property sheet.
3. To display the harmonic injection on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box
to place a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected harmonic injection is in service, click the In service check
box. This is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the harmonic injection is out
of service.
5. Click the OK button to accept your changes.
8.4 Adding Harmonic Filters

Harmonic filters are specified as a shunt item and are used to reduce the amplitude of one or more
fixed frequency currents or voltages.
To add a harmonic filter:
1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Harmonic Filter
button.
2. Position the pointer over the node to which the harmonic filter will be connected.
3. Click and hold down the mouse button while dragging the harmonic filter symbol to the
desired position.
Confidential
8-7
Harmonic Analysis
Editing Harmonic Filters
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8.5 Editing Harmonic Filters

The characteristics of harmonic filters are modified using its property sheet. You can display the
property sheet for the selected harmonic filter from either the Equipment List View or the Diagram
View.
To display the Harmonic Filter Property sheet from the Diagram View:
1. Double-click on the desired harmonic filter; or,
2. Left-click on the harmonic filter to select it, then right-click to display a pop-up menu;
choose Properties. The Harmonic Filter Property sheet will display.
To display the harmonic filter from the Equipment List View:
1. Expand the tree section titled "Harmonic Filters" by clicking on the "+".
2. Double-click on the harmonic filter which will automatically display the Harmonic Filter
Property sheet; or,
3. Left-click on the harmonic filter to select it then right-click to display the pop-up menu;
choose Properties from the pop-up menu to display the Harmonic Filter Property
sheet.
As an alternative, you may also use the applications selection tools to select harmonic filters.
To change the properties of a harmonic filter:
1. Double-click on the harmonic filter or select the harmonic filter, right-click and choose
Properties. The Harmonic Filter Property sheet will display (Figure 8-5).
Figure 8-5. Harmonic Filter Property Sheet
8-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Editing Harmonic Filters
2. On the Main tab, enter/select the properties for the harmonic filter. Press the Tab key
to move to the next field or click in the field of interest, then add or change information
as needed.
Name: Each item in the network must have a unique name identifier. You may enter
an alphanumeric character name up to 12 characters. The name cannot contain
embedded blanks.
Type: You may choose several filter types from the available list containing high pass,
high pass 1st order, high pass 2nd order, high pass C type, and single tuned. Once you
have selected a filter, an illustration of the filters configuration displayed.
Rating: Specify the filter rating in kVA.
Resistance (pu on filter base): Specify the filter resistance in per unit on the filter base
rating.
Reactance (pu on filter base): Specify the filter reactance in per unit on the filter base
rating.
Inductance (pu on filter base): Specify the filter inductance in per unit on the filter
base rating.
For resistance, reactance, and inductance you can refer to the diagram for the filter type to identify which values correspond to the filter component.
Connection: Specify whether this filter is wye (grounded) or delta (ungrounded) connected. If the filter is delta connected, it is automatically ungrounded and the impedance controls are disabled.
You may specify a grounded or ungrounded wye-connected harmonic filter.
Ungrounded filters will not affect harmonics of the 3rd, 6th, 9th, 12th, etc. order.
3. To display the harmonic filter on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to
place a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected harmonic filter is in service, click the In service check box.
This is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the harmonic filter is out of
service.
5. Click the OK button to accept your changes.
Confidential
8-9
Harmonic Analysis
Setting Harmonic Analysis Options
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8.6 Setting Harmonic Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you some control over the harmonics algorithm; you can specify the harmonic
number range over which telephone influence factor (TIF) and total harmonic distortion (THD) are
to be calculated.
To set harmonic analysis options:
2. Click the Harmonics tab.
Figure 8-6. Analysis Options Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab

3. Enter/select the harmonics options you want for your calculation:
Harmonic: Specify the harmonic number to display results on the diagram. The diagram can only display results for one harmonic at a time.
Range (TIF, THD): Specify the minimum and maximum harmonic numbers to use to
calculate telephone influence factor (TIF) and total harmonic distortion (THD).
8-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Performing a Harmonic Analysis
8.7 Performing a Harmonic Analysis

To perform a harmonic analysis (Figure 8-7), do one of the following:
Choose Analysis>Harmonics from the Main Menu.
Click the Harmonics Calculation
The results for the harmonic number you specified in analysis options are displayed on the diagram.
Figure 8-7. Sample Harmonics Analysis Diagram
Confidential
8-11
Harmonic Analysis
Viewing Results of a Harmonic Analysis
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8.8 Viewing Results of a Harmonic Analysis

Once a harmonic analysis has been performed, a number of waveform plots become available in
the Harmonics Toolbar. All the harmonic waveform plots use the same basic display area (Figure 88). Enter/select the desired properties for your harmonic waveform plot.
Figure 8-8. Harmonic Plot Dialog

Additionally, the Harmonics Toolbar (Figure 8-9) can be used to select waveform plots, or to select
to view either total harmonic distortion or telephone interference factor on the diagram. The list box
is used to select the harmonic number you wish to view.
THD
Waveform
Spectrum
Impedance vs. Frequency
Nodal Impedance
Harmonic Number
Figure 8-9. Harmonics Toolbar

Scales and Ranges: Specify the region to be plotted. Click Reset Scale to reset scales and ranges
to their default values.
Options: Options will vary depending on the type of plot you have selected. Usually, options will
control the number of waveforms displayed in the plot area.
8-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Node name: Select the name of the node you are interested in. As soon as this name is selected
from the list, a plot will be generated. Some waveforms take longer to draw than others. A Progress
View is provided so that you may monitor the progress of the plot.
When a plot is being generated, the Pause and Abort buttons will become available to allow
you to interrupt or cancel the generation of the waveform.
Once the waveform is generated and the plot is complete, or immediately after the Pause or Abort
buttons are selected, you can select another node or modify the scales and ranges.
To display a waveform plot, select the desired plot from the toolbar. The following plots are
available:
Harmonic Voltage
Harmonic Spectrum
Impedance versus Frequency
Nodal Impedance
8.8.1 Harmonic Voltage

The harmonic voltage waveform shows the selected node voltage with respect to time (Figure 810). The Show Fundamental and Show Difference options can be used to show the node voltage
and fundamental plus harmonics at the selected node (Figure 8-11).
Figure 8-10. Harmonic Voltage Waveform
Confidential
8-13
Harmonic Analysis
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 8-11. Harmonic Voltage Waveform (extra detail)
8-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
8.8.2 Harmonics Spectrum

The harmonics spectrum shows the relative size of integer harmonics at a selected node (Figure 8-12).
Figure 8-12. Harmonics Spectrum
Confidential
8-15
Harmonic Analysis
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8.8.3 Impedance versus Frequency

The impedance versus frequency plot shows the harmonic impedance as seen from one node over
a range of frequencies (Figure 8-13).
For a large network, this waveform can take a significant amount of time to calculate.
Figure 8-13. Impedance versus Frequency
8-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
8.8.4 Nodal Impedance

The nodal impedance plot (Figure 8-14) shows the harmonic impedance as seen from on node over
a range of harmonics. Reactance is plotted against resistance at each harmonic. Whereas other
harmonic waveforms are produced in a left-to-right order, the nodal impedance plot is created all at
once with more detail being filled in as time goes by. As the plot is progressively updated with more
accurate information, older approximations begin to fade. Once complete, equally spaced points
are highlighted on the plot together with a corresponding harmonic number and frequency specified
in parentheses.
For a large network, this waveform can take a significant amount of time to calculate.
Figure 8-14. Nodal Impedance Plot
Confidential
8-17
Harmonic Analysis
Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8.9 Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT

For static loads, induction machines, synchronous machines, shunt capacitors, lines and cables,
and transformers, harmonic models are used to determine the impedance values at a given harmonic number. The equation used to calculate the impedance values are shown for each relevant
network item.
8.9.1 Static Loads

A static load is modeled in two parts, one with resistance and reactance in series, and one with
resistance and reactance in parallel.
For the static series portion of the load the resistance and reactance at fundamental frequency are:
2
V
R = real -------------
*
FsS
2
V
X = imag -------------
*
Fs S
where:
V = voltage
R = resistance
X = reactance
Fs = fundamental frequency (series portion)
S* = complex conjugate load power P jQ (per phase)
The variation of impedance with harmonic number is then given by:
Z( H) = H
C s1
R + jH
C s2
where:
Z(H) = impedance at harmonic number
For the static parallel portion of the load the resistance and reactance at fundamental frequency are:
2
V
R = ---------FpP
V
X = ----------Fp Q
where:
R = resistance
X = reactance
V = voltage
Fp = fundamental frequency (parallel portion)
P = kW
Q = kvar
8-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
The variation of impedance with harmonic number is given by:

jR ( H )X ( H )
Z ( H ) = ---------------------------------------( R ( H ) + jX ( H ) )
where:
R(H) = H
X( H) = H
C p1
C p2
R
X
where:
Cp1 = load skin effect exponent (parallel portion of load)
Cp2 = load reactance exponent (parallel portion of load)
8.9.2 Induction Machines

An induction machine is represented by a two-cage model whose impedances at a given slip are
adjusted for frequency. Induction machine resistances vary with harmonic as:
*
R (H) = H
C3
where:
R0(H) = zero-sequence resistance at harmonic number H
Induction machine reactances vary with harmonic as:
*
X (H) = H
C4
where:
X0(H) = zero-sequence reactance at harmonic number H
C4 = machine reactance exponent
Equivalent impedance at a given slip is calculated using resistances and reactances that have been
adjusted for frequency as just stated. At harmonic frequencies, slip is calculated as:
( 1.0 s 1 )
s ( H ) = 1.0 -----------------------H
where:
s(H) = slip at harmonic number
s1 = slip at fundamental frequency
Confidential
8-19
Harmonic Analysis
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
When the induction machine is grounded the grounding impedance is calculated as:
Zg ( H ) = H
C1
Rg + j H
C2
X g
where:
Zg(H) = grounding impedance at harmonic number H
Rg = grounding resistance
Xg = grounding reactance
C1 = grounding skin effect exponent
C2 = grounding reactance exponent
Grounding resistance and reactance are in series.
8.9.3 Synchronous Machines

A synchronous machine is represented by its subtransient and zero-sequence reactance and its
armature and negative-sequence resistance. Synchronous machine resistances vary with harmonic as:
Ra ( H ) = H
C3
Ra
R2 ( H ) = H
C3
R2
where:
Ra(H) = armature resistance at harmonic number
R2(H) = negative-sequence resistance at harmonic number
Synchronous machine reactances vary with harmonic as:
X d( H) = H
C4
X d
X0 ( H ) = H
C4
X0
where:
Xd(H) = subtransient reactance at harmonic number
X0 = zero-sequence reactance
C4 = machine reactance exponent
8-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Synchronous machine impedances in zero, positive, and negative sequence are:

Z 0 ( H ) = R a ( H ) + jX 0 ( H ) + 3 ( R g ( H ) + jX g ( H ) )
Z 1 ( H ) = R a ( H ) + jX d ( H )
Z 2 ( H ) = R 2 ( H ) + jX d ( H )
where:
Z0 = zero-sequence impedance
Z1 = positive-sequence impedance
Z2 = negative-sequence impedance
When the synchronous machine is grounded the grounding impedance is calculated as:
Zg ( H ) = H
C1
Rg + j H
C2
X g
where:
Zg(H) = the grounding impedance at the harmonic number
8.9.4 Shunt Capacitors

A shunt capacitor is defined by the reactive power (kvar) it supplies at nominal voltage. A shunt
reactor consumes reactive power. Shunt capacitor/reactor impedance varies with harmonic as:
jH
C3
( 1000kV KVAr a )
where:
kV = base kV of capacitor
KVAra = reactive power or capacitor
When the shunt capacitor/reactor is grounded the grounding impedance is calculated as:
Zg ( H ) = H
C1
Rg + j H
C2
X g
where:
Zg(H) = grounding impedance at harmonic number
Confidential
8-21
Harmonic Analysis
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Note that impedance type shunts are modeled in harmonic analysis as loads, while zig-zag
type shunts are modeled as transformers.
8.9.5 Lines and Cables

There are three harmonic models of a line. These are:
IEEE line
IEEE cable
Custom
Long line corrections are applied to all three models.

IEEE Line (Model 1)
2
0.646H
r 1 ( H ) = L r 1 1 + --------------------------------------------
2
192.0 + 0.518H
r0 ( H ) = r1 ( H ) + ( L H ( r0 r1 ) )
x1 ( H ) = L H x1
x0 ( H ) = L H x0
b1 ( H ) = L H b1
b0 ( H ) = L H b0
IEEE Cable (Model 2)

r 1 ( H ) = L r 1 ( 0.187 + 0.532H
0.5
r0 ( H ) = r1 ( H ) + L H ( r0 r1 )
x1 ( H ) = L H x1
x0 ( H ) = L H x0
b1 ( H ) = L H b1
b0 ( H ) = L H b0
Custom Line/Cable (Model 3)

r1 ( H ) = H
C1
x1 ( H ) = H
C3
b1 ( H ) = H
C5
C2
r1
r0 ( H ) = H
x1
x0 ( H ) = H
b1
b0 ( H ) = H
C4
C6
r0
x0
b0
where:
r1 = positive-sequence resistance
x1 = positive-sequence reactance
b1 = positive-sequence branch admittance
r0 = zero-sequence resistance
x0 = zero-sequence reactance
b0 = zero-sequence branch admittance
C1 = positive-sequence skin effect exponent
8-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
C2 = zero-sequence skin effect exponent

C3 = positive-sequence reactance exponent
C4 = zero-sequence reactance exponent
C5 = positive-sequence charging exponent
C6 = zero-sequence charging exponent
Long Line Corrections
The long line corrections must then be applied to [r1(H), x1(H), b1(H)] and [r0(H), x0(H), b0(H)] to
obtain the lines lumped-parameters [R1(H), X1(H), G1(H), B1(H)] and [R0(H), X0(H), G0(H), B0(H)]
as follows:
1 ( H ) =
Z c1 ( H ) =
0 ( H ) =
Z c0 ( H ) =
( r 1 ( H ) + jx 1 ( H ) ) ( 0.0 + j10
b1 ( H ) )
b0 ( H ) )
r 1 ( H ) + jx 1 ( H )
-------------------------------------------6
0.0 + j10 b 1 ( H )
( r 0 ( H ) + jx 0 ( H ) ) ( 0.0 + j10
r 0 ( H ) + jx 0 ( H )
-------------------------------------------6
0.0 + j10 b 0 ( H )
The lumped-parameter equivalents are calculated as:

R 1 ( H ) = real ( Z c1 ( H ) sin h ( 1 ( H ) L ) )
X 1 ( H ) = imag ( Z c1 ( H ) sin h ( 1 ( H ) L ) )
6
1 ( H ) L
10
G 1 ( H ) = real ------------------ tan h -----------------------
Z c1 ( H )
2
6
1 ( H ) L
10
B 1 ( H ) = imag ------------------ tan h -----------------------
2
Z c1 ( H )
R 0 ( H ) = real ( Z c0 ( H ) sin h ( 0 ( H ) L ) )
X 0 ( H ) = imag ( Z c0 ( H ) sin h ( 0 ( H ) L ) )
6
0 ( H ) L
10
G 0 ( H ) = real ------------------ tan h -----------------------
2
Z c0 ( H )
6
0 ( H ) L
10
B 0 ( H ) = imag ------------------ tan h -----------------------
Z c0 ( H )
2
Confidential
8-23
Harmonic Analysis
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
where:
R1 = positive-sequence resistance
X1 = positive-sequence reactance
B1 = positive-sequence branch admittance
R0 = zero-sequence resistance
X0 = zero-sequence reactance
B0 = zero-sequence branch admittance
G0 = lumped parameter zero-sequence shunt conductance
G1 = lumped parameter positive-sequence shunt conductance
8.9.6 Transformers
There are two harmonic models of a transformer:
IEEE model
Custom model
IEEE Transformer
Leakage impedance is given by:
Z1 ( H ) = H
1.15
R1 + j ( H X1 )
Custom Transformer
Leakage impedance is given by:
Z1 ( H ) = H
C3
R1 + j H
C4
X 1
Grounding impedance, if it exists, is treated the same for all models of the transformer:
Zg ( H ) = H
C1
Rg + j H
C2
X g

where:
R1 = resistance
X1 = reactance
H = harmonic number
C3 = transformer skin effect exponent
C4 = transformer reactance exponent
8-24
Confidential
Chapter 9
Distribution Reliability
Analysis
9.1 Overview: Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA)
The ability to determine service reliability is a growing concern, especially given that many customer
service interruptions are caused by problems with the distribution portion of the overall system. Reliability techniques can be used to measure past performance and predict future reliability
performance for a distribution system. Distribution reliability indices are used to quantify the performance of the system, and evaluate the effectiveness of enhancements and upgrades in order to
improve the reliability of distribution circuits.
The reliability of distribution systems is evaluated by using industry standard reliability indices.
PSS/ADEPTs Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA) option determines standard reliability indices
and interruption profiles of the distribution system based on system topology, location of protection
equipment and reliability data for each network branch item. The DRA analysis tool enables various
design options to be explored so that a system with the best or most appropriate level of reliability
can be chosen for the least possible cost before the system is built.
9.1.1 Nomenclature
Outage An outage signifies a network item that is not available to perform its intended function
due to some event. Depending on the network configuration, an outage may or may not cause service to a customer to be interrupted.
Failure A failure indicates the state of a network item when it is not available to perform its function
due to an event or circumstance. A failure normally results in an outage of the network item, however an outage does not necessarily indicate a failure.
Failure Rate The number of failures per unit length per time of a network item. The failure rate is
normally expressed in terms of the number of failures per mile per year. PSS/ADEPT does not
restrict unit classification as long as the failure rate is consistent across each network item. The unit
of failures per km per year is perfectly acceptable.
Failure Duration The time period from the initiation of a failure until the network item is repaired
or replaced so that it is able to perform its intended function. The failure duration is normally
expressed in hours or a fraction thereof (e.g., 1.5 = 1 hour, 30 minutes).
Switch Time The time period from the time a switching operation is required due to a forced
system outage until the actual switching operation occurs. The switch time is normally expressed
in hours or a fraction thereof (e.g., 0.5 = 30 minutes).
Confidential
9-1
Distribution Reliability Analysis

Overview: Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA)
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Interruption The loss of service to one or more customers caused by one or more outages to the
distribution system.
Interruption Duration The time period from the initial customer interruption until service to the
customer has been restored. The time period is normally expressed in hours.
Momentary Interruption A service interruption that is limited to the time period required to restore
customer service by automatic or controlled switching operations or by manual switching at locations where a system operator is immediately available. These switching operations must be
completed in a specified time (e.g., 5 minutes). The switch time indicating an automatic switching
operation is specified as 0.1 hours or 6 minutes to the DRA analysis module.
Sustained Interruption A service interruption that lasts for more than 0.1 hours.
9-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Using the Distribution Reliability Analysis Module
9.2 Using the Distribution Reliability Analysis Module

Distribution Reliability Analysis can be used as a tool to assist in:
Determining the reliability of existing systems.
Identifying poor areas of system reliability.
Quantifying the impact on reliability of proposed system upgrades and expansions.
The Distribution Reliability Analysis Module (DRA) module is an option in PSS/ADEPT. You will not
be able to access this module if you have not purchased a DRA license. If you wish to purchase a
license, please contact PTI for further assistance.
Calculations of reliability indices depend on reliability information such as failure rates and repair
times specified at each branch in the network. These reliability parameters are specified as properties of a branch device and can be entered either through the construction dictionary or a network
item property sheet. These specified reliability parameters are used to determine the reliability
indices for the entire system and each protection zone. A protection zone is an area of the network
that contains a piece of protection equipment (e.g., fuse). Network items downstream from one protection device and upstream of another protective device compose a protection zone. The network
below (Figure 9-1) illustrates a system with 3 protection zones.
Figure 9-1. Illustration of Protection Zones
Confidential
9-3

Using the Distribution Reliability Analysis Module
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
When a DRA analysis is performed, you will be able to obtain the following reliability indices for the
entire network and for each individual protection zone:
System Average Interruption Frequency Index (SAIFI) The average frequency

(number) of sustained interruptions per customer over a predefined area. The definition
is:
SAIFI
Customer interruptions duration

Total number of customers served
Customer Average Interruption Frequency Index (CAIFI) The average frequency

(number) of sustained interruptions for those customers experiencing sustained interruptions. The customer is counted once regardless of the number of times they are
interrupted. The definition is:
CAIFI
Total number of customer interruptions

Total number of customers served
System Average Interruption Duration Index (SAIDI) The average time the customers are interrupted. Also referred to as the customer minutes of interruptions or
customer hours. The definition is:
SAIDI
Total number of customer interruptions

Total number of customers interrupted
Customer Average Interruption Duration Index (CAIDI) The average time

required to restore service to the average customer per sustained interruption. The definition is:
CAIDI
Customer interruptions duration

Total number of customers interrupted
Additionally, customer information such as the number of customers served (Cs) and the total
number of customers interrupted (Ci) are also determined and can be displayed on the diagram or
in a text report.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
9-4
Specify reliability parameters at network items.
Perform DRA analysis on the network.
View results on the diagram.
Obtain a text report containing results from a DRA analysis.
Color code the diagram based on user-specified target reliability indices.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Using DRA Protection Equipment and Switches
9.3 Using DRA Protection Equipment and Switches

The DRA analysis requires reliability parameters to be specified for each branch in the network. If
you have branch items that use a construction type specified in the construction dictionary, the reliability parameters can be entered directly in the construction dictionary file and retrieved
automatically. If you need to specify a construction type not found in the construction dictionary, you
must set the reliability parameters for each branch directly on the network item property sheet.
Reliability parameters that are not loaded from the construction dictionary are stored in the native
data file (.adp), and in the network dump (Hub) file (.dmp), but not in a raw data file (.dat). If you
want to use the raw data file format and you want to preserve the reliability information, you must
define reliability parameters for each specified construction type in the construction dictionary. If you
do not, ADEPT will fill the reliability parameter fields with 999.
Within the construction dictionary file and the associated DRA tab on the Network Item Property
sheet, methods are available to model:
Automatic reclosing devices (breakers, reclosers, sectionalizers).
Switches (automatic and manual).
Fuses.
Tie switches.
9.3.1 Specifying Automatic Reclosing Devices

Automatic reclosing devices automatically reclose during or after a fault condition and should be
modeled as switch branches in the network.
In the case of breakers, relays and reclosers, the device will repeatedly interrupt fault current until
the fault is cleared or the device itself locks out. The switch types of "Breaker" and "Recloser" should
be specified to represent these reclosing devices.
A switch type of "Breaker" or "Recloser" can represent a device used to protect the substation.
The first branch specified in the network downstream of the source must be of a switch type
"Breaker" or "Recloser"; otherwise, an error message will display.
Sectionalizers do not have the ability to interrupt fault current, however you can model them as
switch branches with a switch type of "Sectionalizer" and a switch time set equal to 0.1 or less,
which identifies them as automatic switching devices.
9.3.2 Specifying Breakers

DRA analysis requires that you explicitly model protection at the substation. Because of this, a
switch of type breaker or recloser must be defined as the first branch downstream of the source. If
you violate this rule, you will get an error message:
Invalid DRA Protection - Source is not properly protected by
protective devices, or the first switching device is not a
recloser or breaker.
If you have a relay instead of a breaker protecting the substation, you must still classify this as a
breaker for the DRA analysis to work properly.
Confidential
9-5

Using DRA Protection Equipment and Switches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9.3.3 Specifying Switches

Switches are devices that can be manually or automatically operated after a fault condition. When
a switch is specified, additional parameters are entered that supply the associated switch time, that
is, the amount of time it takes for the switch to operate following a fault and the probability that the
operation is successful.
Manual switches should be modeled by specifying a switch type of "Manual" on the Switch Property
sheet DRA tab. Switches can be declared automatic by setting the switch time equal to or less than
the value of 0.1 and specifying an "Auto" switch type on the DRA tab.
Branches of type switch (Switch type = "Manual", "Auto") are considered to be normally closed
switches.
9.3.4 Specifying Fuses

Expulsion cutouts and current limiting fuses are used to provide one shot system protection that
blow when the fault current downstream is sensed. Fuses are represented to the DRA analysis by
specifying a switch type of "Fuse" in the DRA tab of the Switch Property sheet.
9.3.5 Specifying FuseSwitches

Previous versions of DRA allowed the user to have a construction type of FuseSwitch. If you wish
to continue to use this branch type, you should specify the construction type and the reliability
parameters in your construction dictionary. The present DRA in PSS/ADEPT will recognize this type
of construction and place a switch with a protection symbol on the diagram if you are licensed for
DRA. If you choose FuseSwitch, the DRA tab will show a switch type of "Fuse". If your *.dat file has
a FuseSwitch and it is not in the construction dictionary, the values for the DRA tab will be set to 999.
9.3.6 Specifying Tie Switches

Tie switches are modeled in DRA as switches that have normal behavior. Tie switches should be
entered into the switch branch as a tie switch by checking the appropriate box on the Switch Property sheet and specifying a switch type of "Tie" in the DRA tab.
Branches specified as tie switches (Switch type = "Tie switch") are considered to be normally open
and should be located at dead ends in the network.
9-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Specifying Reliability Parameters and Device Types
9.4 Specifying Reliability Parameters and Device Types

Reliability parameters can be supplied to the DRA analysis module by entering reliability information
directly on the Network Item Property sheet, or by retrieving the information from the construction
dictionary.
The following table (Table 9-1) illustrates data items that are used by the DRA analysis:
Sustained failure rate per year ().
Mean time to repair (MTTR).
Mean time to switch (MTTS).
Probability of successful switching (PSS) (for use in future releases.
Momentary failure rate per year (M) (for use in future releases).
Table 9-1. Data Item Requirements for DRA
Network Item
MTTR
MTTS
PSS
Line
Switch
Tie Switch
Fuse
Breaker
Recloser
Sectionalizer
Series Capacitor/Reactor
Transformer
R = Required, X = Not applicable, P = Not required
For each network branch item, DRA will consider the effects of installing protection equipment, such
as breakers, reclosers, sectionalizers, fuses and switches. Table 9-2 provides some sample reliability data not to be used as actual data but to show relative numbers.
Table 9-2. Sample Reliability Data
Component
MTTR
MTTS
PSS
Line
0.5
0.05
Switch
.03
10
Tie Switch
.03
10
Fuse
.01
Transformer
.001
Breaker
.03
12
Recloser
.03
12
Confidential
9-7

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9.4.1 Entering Reliability Parameters: Default

You can enter default reliability parameters for each branch device using the Default Item Property
sheets. Whenever you add a network item to the diagram, these defaults are used to set the properties for the newly created item.
To enter default reliability parameters:
1. In the Tree View, double-click the Default Items label or click on the corresponding "+"
box to expand the item tree. The Tree View will similarly expand from whats shown in
Figure 9-2 to what is shown in Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-2. Default Items Tree View
9-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Figure 9-3. Default Items Expanded Tree View
Confidential
9-9

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. Double-click on the item that you wish to modify (Line in this example). A default properties sheet will appear for the type of network item selected. Figure 9-4 displays the
Default Line Properties sheet for the selected Line item.
Figure 9-4. Default Line Properties Sheet
9-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

3. On the Main tab, either select a construction type from the construction dictionary by
selecting an item from the drop down list, or by manually entering a name in the field
provided. If the specified construction type name corresponds to an entry in the construction dictionary then the Impedance and Ratings fields are grayed out and not
editable. Otherwise, if a name is manually entered that does not correspond to an entry
in the construction dictionary and then the fields will be made editable as shown in
Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-5. Default Line Properties Sheet - Modifying the Construction Type
Confidential
9-11

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4. Select the DRA tab. If the selected construction type corresponded to an entry in the
construction dictionary, then the fields will be grayed out as shown in Figure 9-6. These
values must be modified within the construction dictionary.
Figure 9-6. Default Line Properties Sheet DRA Tab, from the Construction Dictionary
9-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Similarly, if the specified construction type does not correspond to an entry in the construction dictionary, then the fields will be editable as shown in Figure 9-7. These values can be
modified directly.
Figure 9-7. Default Line Properties Sheet DRA Tab, New Values for the Reliability
Parameters
5. Select OK to return to the Tree View. When a new line is added, the default reliability
parameters, specified in the previous step will be associated with the newly added line.
Default reliability parameters may be specified for any branch type including switches,
transformers, and series capacitors/reactors.
Confidential
9-13

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9.4.2 Entering Reliability Parameters: Property Sheet

1. Double-click on the network item in the Diagram View or Tree View to view its property
sheet. The Line Property sheet is shown in Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-8. Line Property Sheet: Main Tab

2. Select and modify the construction type.
9-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

3. Select the DRA tab. If the previously specified construction type does not correspond
to an entry in the construction dictionary then the reliability parameter fields will be set
to 999. New reliability parameter values can be entered directly into the fields, as
shown in Figure 9-9.
Figure 9-9. Line Property Sheet: DRA Tab, New Values for Reliability Parameters
The values entered are only for the device that was selected and can only be stored in the
native ADEPT file (*.adp) or in the network dump (Hub) file (*.dmp). If you wish to use the
specified construction type and corresponding reliability parameters again, it is recommended that you create a specific entry in the construction dictionary.
If the previously specified construction type corresponds to an entry in the construction dictionary, then the reliability parameters will be obtained directly from the construction dictionary and the fields will be grayed out and not editable. Refer to Section 9.4.3 for further
information on modifying these values.
Confidential
9-15

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The following fields may or may not be present depending on the device property sheet
selected.
Switch type: This is only used and shown on the Switch Property sheet. Select from
the available list one of the following available devices:
Tie: Tie switches are modeled as open switches having normal switch behavior.
Tie switches in the network are specified by checking the box labeled Tie Switch
on the General tab. To model a tie switch in DRA, select Open status and check
the Tie Switch box. On the DRA tab, select Tie. Automatic tie switches can be
modeled by setting the switch time to a value less than or equal to 0.1.
Manual: Specify this type for disconnects, bypass switches, airbrakes, load break
switches or any other switches that must be operated by a line crew.
Auto: Specify this type for motorized or automatic switches that do not require a
line crew to operate. Additionally, specify a switch time less than or equal to 0.l to
classify automatic operation.
Fuse: Specify this type for expulsion cutouts (fuses) and current limiting fuses used
to provide one shot system protection.
Recloser: Specify this type for devices that automatically reclose during or after a
fault condition. Reclosers will repeatedly interrupt fault current until the fault is
cleared or the device locks out.
Sectionalizer: Specify this type for devices that do not have the ability to interrupt
fault current such as sectionalizers.
Breaker: A breaker is an automatic relosing device that is normally used in DRA to

protect the substation. In DRA, the substation breaker plays an important role in
calculating reliability indices. Because of this, a switch of type breaker must be
defined as the first branch downstream of the source.
When a switch type of breaker, fuse, recloser, or sectionalizer is specified in a file,
a protection symbol will be placed on the branch indicating the location of a piece
of protection equipment. If you have a license to the optional protection and coordination module, you can view the Protection Equipment Property sheet by double
clicking on the protection equipment symbol. If you do not have a license to the protection and coordination module, the symbol is used to indicate a piece of protection equipment to the DRA analysis and is not editable.
Sustained failure rate: Enter the sustained failure rate of the item per unit length per
unit time.
Momentary failure rate: Enter the momentary failure rate of the item per unit length
per unit time.
Mean time to repair: Enter the mean time to repair the failed network item (hours).
Mean time to switch : Enter the mean time to switch (hours). This is the time it takes for
the switch to operate. If this time is less than or equal to 0.1 DRA will consider this an
automatic or motorized switch. This field is applicable to the Switch Property sheet only.
Probability of successful switch: Enter the probability that the switch will be operated
successfully. This value is specified between 0 and 1 with 1 indicating 100% probability
and 0 indicating 0% probability. This field is applicable to the Switch Property sheet only.
4. Select OK to return to the diagram.
9-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

9.4.3 Entering Reliability Parameters: Construction Dictionary

Reliability parameters can be specified for any branch type in conjunction with the construction dictionary file using a reliability record. The reliability parameters are indicated in the construction
dictionary by a line starting with a "*R". Appendix B, Section B.2.1 contains a description of the reliability parameters that need to be specified and their associated formats.
DRA can also recognize several reserved word construction types when a file is initially imported
into PSS/ADEPT. By using these reserved words you can identify particular switch types to the DRA
analysis. Specifying a construction type that is a reserved word in a supported PSS/ADEPT file
format causes the switch type on the DRA tab to be updated when the file is imported. Reserved
words map to a DRA switch type as shown in Table 9-3.
Table 9-3. Construction Type Mapping
Construction Type
Maps To
DRA Switch Type
BREAKER
Breaker
FUSE
Fuse
RECLOSER
Recloser
FUSESWITCH
Fuse
A reliability record in the construction dictionary that is specified with a switch time less than or equal
to 0.1 will be automatically set to a switch type of Auto.
Confidential
9-17

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To specify reliability parameters from the construction dictionary:

1. Select the construction type from drop down list shown on the Main tab (Figure 9-10).
Figure 9-10. Selecting a Construction Type
9-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

2. Click the DRA tab to view the associated reliability parameters. In this case the values
will appear disabled (grayed-out) indicating that the parameters were obtained directly
from the construction dictionary (Figure 9-11).
Figure 9-11. DRA Tab Indicating Parameters Obtained from Dictionary

9.4.4 Entering Reliability Parameters: Static Loads

In previous revisions of PSS/ADEPT, the number of customers served at a load was determined by
the value specified for kW per customer located on the DRA tab in Analysis>Options. Internally,
the number of customers served by the loads was determined by dividing the kW of each load by
the kW per customer. For example, a 300 kW load representing one customer with a kW per customer value equal to 3, would yield 100 as the total number of customers served. In this case, the
desired outcome of one customer served, would not be achieved.
The program can determine the number of customers served by an individual load by using either
a global kW per customer value as specified in Analysis>Options, a kW per customer value for an
individual or any group of selected loads. Additionally, the actual number of customers for an individual or any group of selected loads can be directly entered if the value is known. By default, the
Use Global kW/customer option will be automatically selected unless the default static load properties have been previously modified.
Confidential
9-19

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
It is not likely that all loads will have the same customer density on the distribution circuit. For a
selected static load, an over-ride of the global kW per customer value is provided to offer flexibility
in establishing the number of customers served at a static load.
For the unbalanced loads, the total number of customer served at the load is equal to the sum of
the phases.
To change the kW per customer value used to determine the number of customers served:
1. Select a load or group of loads in either the Diagram or Network View.
2. Double-click on the static load in the Diagram View or Network View to view its property
sheet.
3. Select either Balanced or Unbalanced on the Main tab and enter the appropriate kW
and kvar values.
4. Click the DRA tab and select kW per customer.
5. Enter the kW per customer value for each phase (unbalanced) or the total three phase
value (balanced).
6. Select OK.
If the number of customers served by a load is already known, this can be represented by choosing
to directly enter the number of customers served for a selected static load.
To directly enter the number of customers served for an individual or selected group of loads:
1. Select a load or group of loads in either the Diagram or Network View.
2. Double-click on the static load in the Diagram View or Network View to view its property
sheet.
3. Select either Balanced or Unbalanced on the Main tab and enter the appropriate kW
and kvar values.
4. Click the DRA tab and select Number of Customers Served.
5. Enter the number of customers served for each phase (unbalanced) or the total three
phase value (balanced).
6. Select OK. For unbalanced loads, the total number of customer served at the load is
equal to the sum of the values specified at each phase.
9-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Network and Analysis Limitations
Figure 9-12. Static Load Property Sheet: DRA Tab

The current DRA module does not recognize or use MWH loads to calculate reliability indices.
9.5 Network and Analysis Limitations

The following network limitations are imposed by the DRA analysis:
Any network loops in the system must be opened.
The supplementary dictionary previously used with PSS/U is not supported.
The command line mode of operation is not supported.
Economic analysis is not yet supported.
Confidential
9-21

Setting DRA Analysis Options
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9.6 Setting DRA Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify the kW hours per customer and reliability target indices used for
comparison following an analysis.
To set these options:
1. Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu and click the DRA tab. The DRA Analysis Options Property sheet will be displayed (Figure 9-13).
Figure 9-13. DRA Analysis Options Property Sheet

2. Enter the DRA options you want for the analysis:
kW per customer: Enter the number of kW per customer to use at each load point.
DRA will calculate the number of customers by dividing this value into the kW load
specified at a static load in the network. The default kW per customer value is 3.
Solution target value (SAIDI): Enter the target value that you want to compare against
the calculated index for SAIDI. The diagram can be color-coded based on the target
value you specify.
9-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Setting DRA Analysis Options
Solution target value (SAIFI): Enter the target value that you want to compare against
the calculated index for SAIFI. The diagram can be color-coded based on the target
value you specify.
Solution target value (CAIDI): Enter the target value that you want to compare against
the calculated index for CAIDI. The diagram can be color-coded based on the target
value you specify.
Solution target value (CAIFI): Enter the target value that you want to compare against
the calculated index for CAIFI. The diagram can be color-coded based on the target
value you specify.
Display messages in progress window: Check the box to display error and general
messages to the progress window.
Confidential
9-23

Setting DRA Analysis Result Display Options
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9.7 Setting DRA Analysis Result Display Options

DRA result options allow you to format and specify what results are displayed on your network diagram. The result display options for DRA are located on the DRA tab in the Tree View. When
selected, the results are updated on the diagram immediately.
DRA result options are saved as a program setting, meaning the application will remember the previous settings each time the program starts until they are subsequently modified.
After a DRA analysis, the system results for all indices and their target values will be displayed on
the diagram. Select the Show Results
button to view all the selected DRA analysis results on
the diagram.
To change the settings for results:
1. In the Tree View, select the DRA tab. DRA result options are displayed (Figure 9-14).
Figure 9-14. DRA Result Options
9-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Setting DRA Analysis Result Display Options
2. Select/modify the values according to your desired preferences:

Loads:
Customers served (Cs): Check this box to display the number of customers
served at each static load.
Customers interrupted (Ci): Check this box to display the number of customers
interrupted at each static load.
Color Coding:
Use DRA colors: Check this box to specify DRA color-coding following an analysis. Choosing this option will automatically set your diagram color-coding mode to
"Branches by DRA target comparison".
SAIFI: When selected, the diagram will be color-coded based on the calculated
SAIFI index and the target value specified for SAIFI in the DRA analysis options.
SAIDI: When selected, the diagram will be color-coded based on the calculated
SAIDI index and the target value specified for SAIDI in the DRA analysis options.
CAIFI: When selected, the diagram will be color-coded based on the calculated
CAIFI index and the target value specified for CAIFI in the DRA analysis options.
CAIDI: When selected, the diagram will be color-coded based on the calculated
CAIDI index and the target value specified for CAIDI in the DRA analysis options.
<50%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that fall below 50% of the
target value specified in the analysis options.
<75%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that fall below 75% of the
target value specified in the analysis options.
<100%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that fall below 100% of
the target value specified in the analysis options.
<125%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that fall below 125% of
the target value specified in the analysis options.
>125%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that are equal to or above
125% of the target value specified in the analysis options.
Enable Display:
Confidential
SAIFI: Check this box to show the calculated value for SAIFI for each protection
zone on the diagram.
SAIDI: Check this box to show the calculated value for SAIDI for each protection
CAIDI: Check this box to show the calculated value for CAIDI for each protection
CAIFI: Check this box to show the calculated value for CAIFI for each protection
9-25

Performing a DRA Analysis
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9.8 Performing a DRA Analysis

To perform a DRA analysis on the network, do one of the following:
choose Analysis>DRA from the Main menu, or,
click the DRA calculation
The results of the DRA analysis will be displayed on the diagram according to the results display
options you specified.
A text report is available that contains reliability indices, number of customers served and number
of customers interrupted. To obtain a DRA report, select Report>Distribution Reliability Analysis
from the Main Menu.
9.9 Calculating Reliability Indices: Application Examples

Reliability profiles of each protection zone using sustained interruption frequency and outage duration are determined during reliability analysis. These values are the basis for all non-storm related
reliability indices. Utility annual outage reports summarize the reliability of the system during the last
year. This is typically done by calculating reliability index values, such as SAIDI and SAIFI, for various parts of the system. It is important to note that these indices do not usually include interruptions
that have occurred during major outage events such as storms.
9.9.1 Using DRA for Basic Historical Analysis

A basic historical analysis assumes that all faults occurring on a system are mutually exclusive
events. Any fault occurring on the circuit will only operate the closest upstream device. Proper coordination of the devices can be verified with the Protection and Coordination module provided as an
option in PSS/ADEPT.
A basic historical analysis will compute the following expected values for each section on a system:
1. Number of annual sustained interruptions per customer served (SAIFI)
2. Total annual interruption duration per customer served by the circuit (SAIDI)
3. Number of annual sustained interruptions per customer served (CAIFI)
4. Average interruption duration per customer interrupted (CAIDI)
PSS/ADEPT requires the following data to perform the computations:
1. Outage (failure) rate for each section of the circuit (events/per unit length).
2. Outage (failure) duration for each section of the circuit (total time to restore in hours)
3. The average kW per customer served by the circuit
DRA assumes that a fault condition includes the following sequence of events:
1. A fault occurs on the system.
2. A protective device (breaker, recloser, fuse, etc.) will operate. Ideally this will be the
nearest upstream device to the fault. This will interrupt all customers downstream of the
device. The user should be aware that due to a malfunction or miscoordination, a protection device further upstream may operate.
3. A crew is dispatched to locate the fault and make repairs. Once the repairs are complete, service is restored.
9-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Calculating Reliability Indices: Application Examples
9.9.2 Example of Basic Analysis

To illustrate a calculation for reliability, consider the simple distribution system shown in Figure 915. The diagram consists of a recloser (B1), three fuses (F1, F2, F3) and three customer groups
(C1, C2, C3, and C4). Assume that the recloser (B1) has instantaneous settings specified. To keep
this simple, assume that no outages have occurred on any branch or device. The reliability parameters for all equipment shown equals zero. All of the indices will have a value of 0.0. Assume that
the global kw per customer is used for analysis and the value is equal to 3.
Figure 9-15. Example of a Simple Distribution System

Assume that a fault occurs somewhere on the line section Line9 (length = 2 units) which is supplying
the load C2 (Figure 9-16).
Figure 9-16. Fault at Line9
Confidential
9-27

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The following events will occur:

1. Since B1 has instantaneous settings, it will instantaneously trip to allow the fault to clear
itself. Customer groups C1, C2, C3, and C4 will experience a momentary interruption.
2. The fault does not clear and F2 operates, causing a sustained interruption to customers
in group C2. The customers call the utility.
3. A crew is dispatched, locates the problem, makes the necessary repairs, and restores
power to C2. The total elapsed time is 1 hour and 45 minutes.
If this is the only fault to occur in this line section, the outage rate is 0.5, and the duration is 1.75
hours. This would imply that the system shown would have the following indices:
SAIFI
SAIDI
CAIFI
CAIDI
=
=
=
=
0.17
0.29
1.00
1.75
Assume that a month later, a fault occurs on the same circuit somewhere on line section Line3
(length = 4.0 units), indicated in Figure 9-17.
Figure 9-17. Fault at Line3

The following events will occur:
1. Since B1 has instantaneous settings, it will instantaneously trip to allow the fault to clear
itself. Customer groups C1, C2, C3, and C4 will experience a momentary interruption.
2. The fault does not clear after two more operations and B1 opens, causing a sustained
interruption to customer groups C1, C2, C3, and C4. The customers call the Utility.
3. A crew is dispatched, locates the problem, makes the necessary repairs, and restores
power to the circuit. Total elapsed time is 3 hours and 30 minutes.
9-28
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

If this is the only fault to occur in this line section, the outage rate is 0.25, and the duration is 3.5
hours. This event does not impact the outage rate or duration for the previous case. It does however
impact the reliability indices, which will now include both events.
SAIFI
SAIDI
CAIFI
CAIDI
=
=
=
=
1.17
3.79
1.17
3.25
The analysis becomes more complicated the larger the circuit and the more protection devices
(zones) it contains. DRA is designed to perform the calculations on the larger, more complicated
systems.
This example illustrates the basic concepts used by DRA when analyzing the reliability of a distribution system in non-storm conditions. In summary, the basic analysis performed by DRA has the
following properties:
Assumes that all faults are mutually exclusive events.
Determines the effect of downstream fault isolation.
Includes the effect of upstream protection device operation.
9.9.3 Example of Predictive Analysis

The reliability of a system is impacted by changes due to serving new loads or circuit upgrades. The
DRA option will allow the user to calculate the impact on the reliability indices of proposed construction (Figure 9-18).
Assume that the mainline of the circuit will be extended to serve a new customer, C5. The new line
is to serve new customers with a demand of 200 kW, is 1.8 units long and has an assumed outage
rate of 0.3 and duration of 2 hours. What is the impact on the reliability indices?
Figure 9-18. Expansion of the Circuit Mainline

Confidential
9-29

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A permanent fault in this new section will result in the loss of power to all customers served. Based
upon the assumed reliability parameters, this addition will have the following results:
SAIFI
SAIDI
CAIFI
CAIDI
=
=
=
=
1.68
4.83
1.68
2.87
Figure 9-19. DRA Results Shown with Text Labels and Color-Coding
9-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Add a protection device downstream of node 5, between node 5 and node 9, and determine the
impact on the indices.
Figure 9-20. Expansion of the Circuit Mainline with Protection Added
Confidential
9-31

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A permanent fault in this new section will result in the loss of power to only the new customers
served. Based upon the assumed reliability parameters, this addition will have the following results:
SAIFI
SAIDI
CAIFI
CAIDI
=
=
=
=
1.22
3.90
1.22
3.50
Figure 9-21. DRA Results with New Protection Device Added
9-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

In Figure 9-21, the global kw per customer command was used. For the circuit shown in Figure 920, we have changed the analysis parameters to reflect the following customer served values of;
C1 = 100; C2 = 150; C3 = 120; C4 = 50; and C5 = 40. This will change the calculated values of the
reliability indices. The results are shown in the figure below.
Figure 9-22. DRA Results with Specified Customers Served
Confidential
9-33
9-34
Confidential
Appendix A
Modeling and File Differences
Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT
A.1 Transformer Modeling
A.1.1 Transformer Changes From PSS/U to PSS/ADEPT
Transformer modeling in PSS/ADEPT is on a more physical basis than that in PSS/U. In
PSS/ADEPT, the actual transformer windings are modeled making it easier to change the transformer by simply specifying the windings present. In addition, PSS/ADEPT has no restrictions on
loops or parallel branches; therefore, in a three-phase branch it is possible to have one phase be a
regulating transformer, one phase a switch, and the other phase a line (although the user may not
want to connect the network this way). The increased power and flexibility in PSS/ADEPT causes
some restrictions when sending data back and forth between PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U. Here, PTI
has attempted to provide guidelines on modeling transformers in PSS/ADEPT and trading the transformers back and forth between the two versions of the program.
A.1.2 Transformers in PSS/ADEPT

The transformers in PSS/ADEPT are:
Wye-wye.
Wye-delta (30).
Delta-wye (30).
Delta-delta.
Wye-connected autoregulator.
Delta-connected autoregulator.
Center-tapped delta.
Center-tapped wye (30).
Wye-wye with phase shift.
Wye-connected autotransformer.
Z Wye (30).
Z Wye (150).
Confidential
A-1
Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT

Transformer Modeling
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table A-1. PSS/ADEPT Transformer Types

Transformer
Phase
YY
ABC
Drawing
AB
Y +30
ABC
AB
A-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Table A-1. PSS/ADEPT Transformer Types (Cont.)

Transformer
Phase
Y +30
ABC
Drawing
AB
ABC
AB
Confidential
A-3

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Transformer
Phase
Y conn
Auto Reg
ABC
Drawing
AB
A-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual


Transformer
Phase
conn
Auto
ABC
Drawing
AB
(CA
open)
Confidential
A-5

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A.1.3 Reading Transformers From PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT
A.1.3.1 Conversion of Transformer Types
Due to modeling restrictions that exist in PSS/U, there are some special transformer types; the open
delta auto regulator (Type 4, 5, or 6), the line-to-line auto regulator (Type 7, 8, or 9) and the line-toneutral auto regulator (Type 13, 14, or 15). The modeling restrictions have been removed in
PSS/ADEPT; the above nine transformers can be modeled in PSS/ADEPT using the wye-wye, wyedelta, delta-wye, delta-delta, delta-connected regulator, or wye-connected regulator (with sometimes a switch in parallel). Therefore, when a Type 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 13, 14, or 15 transformer is
encountered in a raw data file, it is converted to one of the PSS/ADEPT types. The conversions for
all transformers read into PSS/ADEPT from a raw data file are shown in Table A-2.
Table A-2. Conversion of Transformers from PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT
PSS/U
Type
PSS/U Name
Phase
PSS/ADEPT
Name
Phase
Comments
Wye-wye
Any
Wye-wye
Same This transformer matches up directly

between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT for any
phasing.
Wye-delta (30)
ABC
Wye-delta (30)
ABC
Wye-delta (30)
AB
Wye-delta (30)
AB
Exact match.
Approximate match; PSS/ADEPT removes
the phase C (C to A) winding on both sides
of the transformer, while PSS/U does not
remove any of the transformer windings.
Wye-delta (30)
BC
Wye-delta (30)
BC
See comment for AB phasing above.
Wye-delta (30)
CA
Wye-delta (30)
CA
Wye-delta (30)
Wye-delta (30)

the phase B (B to C) and C (C to A) windings on both sides of the transformer, while
PSS/U does not remove any of the transformer windings.
Wye-delta (30)
Wye-delta (30)
See comment for A phasing above.
Wye-delta (30)
Wye-delta (30)
Delta-wye (30)
ABC
Delta-wye (30)
ABC
Delta-wye (30)
AB
Delta-wye (30)
AB

the phase C (C to A) winding on both sides
of the transformer, while PSS/U does not
remove any of the transformer windings.
Delta-wye (30)
BC
Delta-wye (30)
BC
Delta-wye (30)
CA
Delta-wye (30)
CA
See comment for AB phasing above
Delta-wye (30)
Delta-wye (30)

the phase B (B to C) and C (C to A) windings on both sides of the transformer, while
PSS/U does not remove any of the transformer windings.
Delta-wye (30)
Delta-wye (30)
Delta-wye (30)
Delta-wye (30)
A-6
Exact match.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Table A-2. Conversion of Transformers from PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT (Cont.)
PSS/U
Type
PSS/U Name
Phase
PSS/ADEPT
Name
Phase
Comments
Open delta
regulator AB
open
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
Open delta
regulator BC
open
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
CA
See comment for AB phasing above or BC

open.
Open delta
regulator CA
open
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
AB
See comment for AB phasing above or CA

open.
Phase AB
line-to-line auto
regulator
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
Phase ABV or AB not supported in

PSS/ADEPT. These phasings are modeled
with parallel switches.
Phase BC
line-to-line auto
regulator
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
Phase CA
line-to-line auto
regulator
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
10
Delta-connected
auto regulator
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
ABC
11
Delta-delta
Any
Delta-delta
Same In PSS/U, Type 11 transformers are

intended to be three-phase devices.
Answers obtained when a device is not
specified as three-phase will be different
than the results obtained from PSS/ADEPT.
12
Wye-connected
auto regulator
Any
Wye-connected
auto regulator
This is a direct-conversion transformer.

Select the same phasing in PSS/ADEPT as
in the raw data file.
13
AN auto
Any
Wye-connected
auto regulator
Similar comments as for Types 7, 8, and 9.
14
BN auto
Any
Wye-connected
auto regulator
15
CN auto
Any
Wye-connected
auto regulator
Confidential
BC or In PSS/U, the open delta auto regulator is

AB
inherently a three-phase device. Its approxiopen mate corresponding model in PSS/ADEPT
is the delta-connected auto regulator with
phases BC specified (A to B open). When
reading a Type 4 transformer, phasing specified in the PSS/U raw data file is ignored
and phasing is selected to make the same
phase go straight through in both PSS/U
and PSS/ADEPT.
In PSS/U, Type 10 transformers are

intended to be three-phase devices.
Answers obtained when a device is not
specified as three-phase are not what the
user would expect. With this conversion, PTI
will enforce the three-phase requirement.
A-7

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A.1.3.2 Calculation of Transformer Grounding Impedance

At PSS/ADEPT-5.0, transformer properties will include grounding impedance and leakage impedance with zero-sequence impedance being converted to the appropriate grounding impedance
based on the specification of postive and zero-sequence impedance in the raw data file or previous
PSS/ADEPT file. The value specified for the positive-sequence impedance is used as the leakage
impedance of the transformer.
The grounding impedance is in ohms determined as follows:
Z0 is zero-sequence impedance, pu.
Z1 is positive-sequence impedance, pu.
2
V
Z base = 1000
------------------------Rating
V is phase-to-ground voltage in kV.

Rating is per phase in kVA.
Z0 Z1
Z g = ------------------- Z base
3
Wye connected transformers:
Zg is split between the FROM and TO sides of the transformer.
Wye-delta connected transformers:
Zg is determined for the FROM side of the transformer.
Delta-wye connected transformers and wye auto regulators:
Zg is determined for the TO side of the transformer.
Delta-delta connected transformers and delta auto regulators:
No grounding impedances are allowed and any difference in Z0 and Z1 is ignored.
A.1.4 Transformer Conversions Not Supported

Some transformers are not supported in the conversion between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT. As an
example, consider the PSS/U Type 13 transformer, which is a three-phase branch with a wye-connected single-phase regulator in phase A and phases B and C going straight through. This
transformer is easily modeled in either program version, selecting the Type 13 in PSS/U or by
selecting a wye-connected regulator with A phasing in PSS/ADEPT and then placing a two-phase
switch in parallel. However, the conversion is not supported. When the Type 13 transformer is read
into PSS/ADEPT from a raw data file, it will be modeled only by the single-phase regulator, the parallel switch will not be placed. When the transformer is written back to a new raw data file, it will be
given a PSS/U Type 12 with A phasing. Therefore, it is possible to read a raw data file into
PSS/ADEPT and then immediately write back a raw data file that will have different transformer
types than those in the original file. However, this will happen only for transformer configurations
that are rarely used. Table A-3 shows the PSS/U transformers for which changes will occur on the
read/write round trip. Figure A-1 illustrates the PSS/U transformer conversion during the
PSS/ADEPT read/write operation.
A-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Table A-3. PSS/U Transformer/Phasing That Will Be Changed After PSS/ADEPT

Read Operation on Raw Data File
Original
PSS/U
Number
After Read Operation
PSS/U Type
Phasing
PSS/U
Number
PSS/U Type
Phasing
4, 5, 6
Open delta auto regulator
Any
4, 5, 6
Open delta auto regulator
ABC
Phase AB line-to-line auto

regulator
Any
Phase AB line-to-line auto

regulator
AB
Phase BC line-to-line auto

regulator
Any
Phase BC line-to-line auto

regulator
BC
Phase CA line-to-line auto

regulator
Any
Phase CA line-to-line auto

regulator
CA
10
Delta-connected auto
regulator
Any
10
regulator
ABC
11
Delta-delta
Any
11
Delta-delta
ABC
13
AN auto regulator
Any
13
AN auto regulator
14
BN auto regulator
Any
12
Wye-connected auto
regulator
15
CN auto regulator
Any
12
Wye-connected auto
regulator
ADEPT Raw Data After
ADEPT Raw Data After

Read/Write
Operation
Read Operation
PSS/ADEPT
PSS/ADEPT
Original PSS/U
PSS/U
Original
Type 12
Type 13
bN
b
c
98061
Figure A-1. Transformer Conversion During the Read Operation
Confidential
A-9

Transformer Modeling Rules and Hints
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A.2 Transformer Modeling Rules and Hints

A.2.1 Specifying Transformer Size
In both PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT, the transformer size (in kVA) is specified on a single-phase basis.
The single-phase basis is used because PSS/ADEPT allows modeling of single-phase branches.
In many cases, single-phase transformers are used. As an example, for a three-phase substation
transformer with a total (three-phase) rating of 30 MVA, enter 10,000 for the rating in PSS/ADEPT.
As another example, for a single-phase regulating transformer with a 500-kVA rating, enter 500 for
the rating. This rating value (along with the winding voltage) is used only to calculate the base
impedance for the transformer; use the manufacturer-supplied impedances. The rating value specified is not used to determine if the transformer is overloaded; that information is entered separately.
A.2.2 Transformer Impedance

For a two winding transformer, the manufacturer usually supplies the leakage reactance and
winding resistances, which can be combined to get the leakage impedance. In general, both the
positive- and zero-sequence transformer impedances should be set equal to this value. The exception is where there is a grounding impedance in a wye-connected winding; in this case, the zerosequence impedance should be increased by adding three times the grounding impedance (after
the grounding impedance is converted to pu on the transformer base). If a wye-configured winding
is ungrounded, simply set the zero-sequence impedance to a high value (e.g., 100 pu).
Example:
A 2-MVA (three-phase rating) transformer at an industrial site is 13.8-kV delta-connected
on the utility side, and 4-kV wye-connected on the plant side (line-to-line voltages specified), with the plant voltage lagging 30. The transformer winding resistance is 0.005 pu and
the leakage reactance is 0.045 pu. The transformer taps are on the delta side. There is a
4-ohm grounding resistor in the neutral of the wye winding.
How is this transformer specified, and what positive- and zero-sequence impedances
should be entered for this transformer? On the 4-kV side, the base impedance is:
2
4
Z base = ------ = 8
2
The grounding resistor is then 4/8 = 0.5 pu. Specify the transformer as: wye-delta (+30);
666.7 kVA; Z1 = 0.005 + j.045 pu; Z0 = 1.505 + j.045 pu.
For wye-delta or delta-wye transformers, there is no need for any impedance adjustment because
of the winding configuration. Assuming no grounding impedances in the wye windings, set the
positive- and zero-sequence impedances equal. The transformer model itself will provide the correct behavior, blocking zero-sequence flow on the delta side of the transformer and shunting zerosequence currents to ground on the wye side.
A.2.3 Three-Winding Transformers

Presently, there are no three-winding transformer models in PSS/ADEPT. They can be easily modeled by decomposing the three-winding transformer into three two-winding transformers and a
dummy node. For the three-winding transformer, the manufacturer should supply the leakage reactances X12, X13 and X23 between each pair of windings, along with the resistance in each winding.
These resistance and reactance values can be combined to get the leakage impedance for each
A-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

pair of windings, commonly called Z12, Z13 and Z23. The impedance for each of the three transformers is then found as:
Z 12 + Z 13 Z 23
Z 1 = ----------------------------------------2
Z 12 + Z 23 Z 13
Z 2 = ----------------------------------------2
Z 13 + Z 23 Z 12
Z 3 = ----------------------------------------2
Figure A-2 represents the composition of a three-winding transformer into three two-winding
transformers.
Node 1
Node 2
Node 1
Node 2
Dummy
Node
Node 3
Node 3
98062
Figure A-2. Modeling of Three-Winding Transformer

Assuming there are no grounding impedances, the positive- and zero-sequence impedance of each
transformer is set equal to Z1, Z2, Z3, respectively. Often one of the three reactances will come out
negative, which is no problem. Simply specify that transformer with the positive- and zero-sequence
reactance equal to this negative value. Place the dummy node in the center and connect each of
the three transformers to it. It does not matter what base voltage is selected for the dummy node;
it is suggested that the base voltage of one of the three actual transformer nodes be used.
A.2.4 Three-Legged Core Transformers

For a wye-wye transformer wound on a three-legged core, zero-sequence flux will flow through the
transformer case and/or out into the air around the transformer. A user may think the transformer
zero-sequence impedance should be changed to account for the flux path diversion, however, that
is not the way to model this type of transformer. The flux flowing through the case/air is a shunt
effect, not a series impedance effect. The way to model the shunt effect is to place a delta tertiary
in the transformer (i.e., use the three-winding transformer model with the added winding connected
in delta). In fact, wye-wye three-legged core transformers are sometimes said to have "phantom"
tertiaries.
Confidential
A-11

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To complete the three-winding model, Z12, Z13, and Z23 are needed. Z12 is just the leakage impedance of the transformer. Sometimes a manufacturer will also supply Z13 and Z23. Another possibility
is that the manufacturer will supply the zero-sequence excitation current for the two windings, and
the impedances over to the delta winding can be calculated from this current. If no information is
available on the impedances, and the grounding effect must be modeled, set Z13 and Z23 in the
0.50 to 0.75 pu range. For each of the three transformers, set the zero-sequence impedance equal
to the positive-sequence value (unless an adjustment of the zero-sequence impedance is needed
because of grounding impedances).
A.2.5 Regulating Transformers

It can be tricky to specify the impedance for a regulating transformer, because at a tap setting of 1.0
there is a straight-through connection and the transformer has no impedance. To add to the complexity, the regulating transformer impedance at maximum boost is not the same as at maximum
buck. Therefore, when the regulating transformer impedance is specified, an additional piece of
information must be supplied: the condition at which the impedance was measured. In present versions of PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT, the average of the impedance at maximum boost and maximum
buck is required. Suppose we call the impedance at maximum boost, Zmboost, and impedance at
maximum buck, Zmbuck. The user must specify as input:
Z mboost + Z mbuck
Z leak = -------------------------------------------------2
However, this impedance may not be the one viewed by the user; the manufacturer might specify
the impedance at maximum boost, at maximum buck, at a particular tap setting, or even the average
of all taps. The tabulation below shows how to convert the manufacturer-supplied value into the
value required by PSS/ADEPT. The symbol, D, is the range of the transformer from nominal (for a
13.8-kV regulating transformer that had an adjustment range from 0.90 to 1.10 pu, D = 0.1). The
symbol "a" represents the transformer tap setting (for the above transformer the tap ranges from
0.90, maximum buck, to 1.10, maximum boost).
Manufacturer-Supplied Value
Zleak, average of Zmboost and Zmbuck

Zmboost , impedance at maximum boost
Zmbuck, impedance at maximum buck
Za, impedance at tap position, a
Zavg, average impedance over all taps
A-12
PSS/ADEPT Value
Zleak
2
1+
Z mboost --------------------2
(1 )
2
1+
Z mbuck --------------------2
(1 )
2 2
a Za 1 + 2
--------------------- -----------------------2
2
( a 1 ) ( 1 2 )
2
1+
3 Z avg -----------------------2 2
(1 )
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

The model in PSS/ADEPT causes the impedance to vary with tap position as it does in the real
transformer. Set the zero-sequence impedance equal to the positive-sequence impedance unless
there is a grounding impedance inserted (in a delta-configured regulator, the zero-sequence would
always be equal to the positive-sequence value.
In PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U, the rating for a regulating transformer is the total apparent power
through the transformer. In a transformer specification sheet, the rating of the transformer is sometimes given as that of the series winding alone.
A.2.6 Grounding Transformers

Grounding transformers are often placed on power systems either to prevent voltage shifts when a
phase-to-ground fault occurs, or to provide a zero-sequence current path. A grounding transformer
is a shunt device, since it connects from a single node to ground. The most common grounding
transformer is the zig-zag, although the Scott T connection can also be used. In PSS/ADEPT,
grounding transformers are not currently implemented. However, it is easy to model the grounding
effect. Near the node at which the user wishes to place a grounding transformer, a dummy node
must be made. Connect a wye-delta transformer between the two nodes with the delta side of the
transformer connected to the dummy node. Set the transformer rating of the wye-delta equal to that
of the zig-zag (or whatever transformer is being modeled), and set the positive- and zero-sequence
impedances of the wye-delta the same and equal to the impedance of the zig-zag. The wye-delta
transformer will now act exactly as the zig-zag does.
A.2.7 Autotransformers
Presently, there are no autotransformer models in PSS/ADEPT. Autotransformers are invariably
wye connected, and they can be modeled using the wye-wye transformer. External to the transformer, all voltages and currents will be the same as if an actual autotransformer model had been
used. The autotransformer neutral current will not be modeled, but neutral currents are not available
to the user of any of the transformer models. For the case when the autotransformer has a
grounding impedance in it, it can be placed in either winding of the wye-wye transformer. Consider
T to be the ratio of the high-side nominal voltage to the low-side nominal voltage, and Zg the
grounding impedance (ohm) inserted at the neutral of the autotransformer. In the wye-wye transformer, the user can either insert (T-1)2 Zg in the neutral of the high-side winding, or (T-1)2 Zg/T2 in
the neutral of the low-voltage winding.
Example:
A 69-kV to 34.5-kV autotransformer is to be modeled. There is a 4-ohm grounding resistance in the neutral of the autotransformer. How should it be modeled as a wye-wye transformer?
For this autotransformer, T = 69/34.5 = 2.0. Use a wye-wye transformer with a primary
winding voltage of 69 kV and a secondary winding voltage of 34.5 kV. The grounding
impedance can be placed in either winding. On the high side, make the grounding resistance equal to 4 ohm; or, if the user wishes to place the grounding resistor in the low-side
winding, make it 1 ohm. After inserting the grounding resistance in the desired winding, proceed to calculate the positive- and zero-sequence impedances as would normally be done
for the transformer (i.e., set the positive-sequence impedance equal to the transformer
leakage impedance specified by the manufacturer and add three times the grounding resistance, after converting to pu, to get the zero-sequence impedance).
Confidential
A-13

Machine Modeling
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A.3 Machine Modeling

There are three aspects of machines that need to be discussed, namely their modeling and
behavior during load flow, short circuit, and motor starting conditions. There are two basic machines
modeled in PSS/ADEPT: three-phase synchronous and three-phase induction. Either machine can
be a motor or a generator. Setting the real power positive for a machine results in a motor; set the
real power negative to make it a generator. The synchronous and induction types are modeled quite
differently, and are discussed separately below.
A.3.1 Synchronous Machines

In PSS/ADEPT, the machine size and terminal voltage is specified and are used to convert the pu
impedance and var capability values into physical numbers. The real power is specified (positive
for a motor, negative for a generator); this value is power at the terminals, not at the output shaft.
The scheduled voltage is used to determine the reactive power output from the machine. The maximum and minimum reactive power limits are also specified on the property sheet by the user. To
keep compatibility with PSS/U, the reference direction is out of the machine, with the maximum
value generally being positive and the minimum value negative. On the property sheet, the var limit
values are in pu and, as mentioned above, converted to physical values using the machine size.
A.3.1.1 Synchronous Machine Load Flow Behavior

During a load flow simulation, the synchronous machine is modeled as a three-phase internal
source behind an impedance matrix, as shown in the drawing below. The internal source is balanced three-phase, positive sequence only. The internal source angle and magnitude are adjusted
so the machine draws the specified real power and supplies the reactive power necessary to support the terminal voltage (within the machine reactive power capability).
Z Matrix
Terminals
Internal
Source
98060
Although there is some interplay between the two at larger angles, the user can generally think of
the internal source angle controlling the real power and the magnitude controlling the reactive
power. In the real machine, these two values correspond to the internal machine angle and the field
excitation. The impedance matrix uses the machine armature resistance, machine subtransient
reactance, and machine zero-sequence impedance. Because the subtransient reactance is used,
for heavy real power flow, the machine will not slip poles as soon as an actual machine will, which
is essentially a source behind synchronous reactance. However, if the specified real power is large
enough, the machine will slip poles even with the subtransient reactance in the matrix. In that case,
the load flow will fail to converge. In other words, if the machine is grossly overloaded or if voltage
at the machines terminals is seriously depressed, the load flow will not converge. Either case is
abnormal and the machines should be taken out of service.
A-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Machine Modeling
Even though the internal voltage of the machine is balanced positive sequence, the terminal voltage
will not necessarily be so, if the rest of the network is unbalanced. The unbalanced terminal voltage
calculated by PSS/ADEPT should match well with the actual voltage in the field, if the rest of the
network is modeled accurately.
The present synchronous machine model automatically adjusts the field excitation (internal source
magnitude) during the load flow. There is no model for a synchronous motor with the field under
manual control.
As with a real machine, the PSS/ADEPT synchronous machine will run if only two phases are connected, or, if the machine zero-sequence impedance is small enough, will run even if only one
phase is connected. The machine is modeled wye connected; if the user wishes to model a deltaconnected machine, the zero-sequence impedance must be very high (20 to 50 pu is suggested).
Large synchronous machines with wye-connected armature windings are often grounded through
a transformer, with the output of the transformer connected to a relay. The effect of the relay burden
is a large grounding impedance, which the user models by specifying a high zero-sequence impedance of the machine. Therefore, it may be rare to find a synchronous machine with a small zerosequence impedance. In future versions of PSS/ADEPT, the machine grounding impedance will be
specified separately; currently, the user must bundle it into the machine zero-sequence impedance.
In the future, the user will also have a choice between wye- and delta-connected armature windings.
A.3.1.2 Comparison of Synchronous Machine Load Flow Calculations

The load flow results for the synchronous machine should be the same in both programs.
A.3.1.3 Synchronous Machine Short Circuit Behavior

For short circuit calculations, the synchronous machine is again modeled as an internal source
behind the impedance matrix. But, unlike the load flow, during the short circuit simulation neither
the angle or magnitude of the internal source is changed. The angle and magnitude are set to the
value from the preceding load flow and left there. The user can designate whether subtransient or
transient values are used in the impedance matrix. Use of the subtransient reactance gives the fault
current immediately after the fault occurs and the transient impedance calculates the current a few
cycles after the fault occurs (or maybe more than a few cycles after the fault occurrence if the
machine has a high-speed exciter). The calculated short circuit current is the symmetrical value, no
dc offset is included. The user can think of the short circuit machine model as being either the
voltage e behind the armature resistance in series with the subtransient reactance or the voltage
e behind the armature resistance in series with the transient reactance. As mentioned above, the
source value e or e is calculated from the preceding load flow. The actual model is slightly more
complicated than this because the impedance matrix also includes the zero and negative-sequence
impedances. As during the load flow, the q-axis parameters are set equal to the d-axis values.
A.3.1.4 Comparison of Synchronous Machine Short Circuit Calculation Between

PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U
Because the short circuit calculation technique in PSS/ADEPT is slightly different than that in
PSS/U, there can be differences in results between the two programs when faults occur near synchronous machines. An example here will illustrate the difference. These calculations were done
on the network in the raw data file "compare.dat," and the Machine Dictionary "compare.mot," which
are included with the program and are in the example directory. In this network there is a synchronous machine at node "A1" and calculations will be made for a three-phase fault at this node. The
subtransient machine reactance is .2 pu and that value must be manually set in PSS/ADEPT since
there is now no link with the machine dictionary. The results are shown in Table A-4.
Confidential
A-15

Machine Modeling
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table A-4. Synchronous Machine Short Circuit Calculation Results

Method
PSS/U, MTSC
PSS/U, LPSC
PSS/ADEPT
PSS/ADEPT
Condition
Xd and flat (only conditions available)
Xd and flat
Xd and var limits at 0.5, -0.5
Xd and var limits at 0.05, -0.05
Machine Current (A)

333
333
370
330
There are two short circuit routines in PSS/U: MTSC and LPSC. Both give the same results and
operate on a flat network with all internal voltages (sources and machines) set to unity. LPSC has
an option to partially consider nonflat conditions, but cannot be used on compare.dat because the
network is not balanced. The machine fault current calculated by PSS/ADEPT is considerably
higher (370 A). It is higher because PSS/ADEPT calculates the fault current for the actual system
condition. In this network, the synchronous machine at node A1 is supplying considerable reactive
power to try to hold its terminal voltage to schedule (1.0 pu). The result is a rather high internal
voltage for the machine and a resulting large fault current. If the var limits for the machine are
changed to a narrow range (as shown in the last line of Table A-4), then the machine will not supply
as much reactive power, the internal voltage will be closer to unity, and the fault current results will
be closer to those calculated by MTSC and LPSC. This illustrates the differences that may occur in
synchronous machine fault currents between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT. The most important thing for
the user to remember is that PSS/ADEPT calculates fault currents for the network conditions that
exist after a load flow simulation is done.
A.3.1.5 Synchronous Machine Starting in PSS/ADEPT

There are two aspects to discuss when considering machine starting and synchronous machines:
one is modeling the machine(s) being started, and the second is modeling other synchronous
machines that are already running at the time the motor starting simulation takes place.
Consider the running machines first; during the motor start simulation, a distinction is made
between motors and generators. Running synchronous motors are simply modeled the same way
they are during a load flow, and supply no current to help start the machine being started. This is
equivalent to assuming that the running synchronous motors do not have high-speed control of the
field excitation. However, for running synchronous generators it is assumed that high-speed control
of field excitation is available, and the running synchronous generators are modeled as a source
behind transient reactance, just as they would have been during the short circuit simulation if the
transient option were selected. Immediately after a motor is started, the running machines could be
modeled as sources behind the subtransient reactance, but this effect passes quickly and the
greatest dip happens when the transient impedance is used. If the running synchronous generators
do not have fast exciters, and the user does not wish them to help the machine(s) being started,
take these running machines out of service before doing the starting calculation, or convert them to
static loads.
The synchronous machine being started is represented simply by the locked rotor impedance. For
a synchronous machine started at full voltage the locked rotor impedance is essentially the series
combination of the armature resistance and the subtransient reactance, which means the synchronous machine is being started as an induction machine. The full voltage starting may be used for
small synchronous machines; for larger machines, different starting arrangements are often used
(including series impedance or start wye run delta) and these methods can be modeled by changing
the locked rotor impedance in the dictionary to an appropriate value.
A-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Machine Modeling
A common way to start large machines is with an autotransformer; on the property sheet of each
synchronous machine, the autotransformer starting method is offered. The user puts in the value of
the starting tap and the transformer leakage impedance. The size of the starting transformer is
assumed to be the same as the machine size. Since transformer sizes in PSS/ADEPT are specified
per phase, and machines sizes are specified three phase. If desired, the user can think of the transformer size per phase as being 1/3 of the machine size.
Some discussion of the starting transformer impedance is in order. The value specified is assumed
by PSS/ADEPT to be the impedance at a tap setting of 0.65. The impedance of the transformer is
a function of tap position, and actually goes to zero at a tap of unity, since the connection to the
machine is straight through. If we call T the tap position and Z0.65 the transformer leakage impedance when T = 0.65, then the impedance ZT at any tap position is given by:
2
4.449 Z 0.65 ( 1 T )
Z T = ---------------------------------------------------2 (T 1) + 1
Then, if the user has the impedance at any other tap, the value to enter is calculated as:
ZT [ 2 T ( T 1 ) + 1 ]
Z 0.65 = -----------------------------------------------2
4.449 ( 1 T )
The table below shows various values calculated from the equation.
Confidential
Impedance Tap
Value to Enter
0.9
18.4 Z0.90
0.8
0.75
3.82 Z0.80
2.25 Z0.75
0.65
Z0.65
0.5
0.45 Z0.5
A-17

Machine Modeling
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A.3.1.6 Comparison of Synchronous Machine Starting Between

PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U
If the synchronous machine is started without using a starting transformer, and the "poststart" option
is selected in PSS/U (use transient reactance for running machines), then the voltage dip should be
the same in both programs. However, if a starting transformer is used, results may be different
between the two programs, because the starting transformer model in PSS/U does not include the
change of impedance as a function of tap position; instead the value entered in the Machine
Dictionary is used at all taps. Therefore, the PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT calculated voltage dip will
agree only if the tap is set at 0.65. In PSS/U, if it is desired to start a machine without using the
starting transformer; the transformer impedance listed in the dictionary should be set equal to zero.
Again, the network in compare.dat and compare.mot will be used for illustration (in PSS/ADEPT the
locked rotor impedance and transformer starting impedance were manually set to the values in the
motor dictionary compare.mot). The table below shows the voltage magnitude at node A1 as the
synchronous machine is being started.
Method
Condition
Node A1 Voltage (pu)
PSS/ADEPT
No starting transformer
0.86
PSS/ADEPT
Starting transformer, tap = 1.0
0.86
PSS/ADEPT
0.93
PSS/U
Type 91, tap = 1
0.88
PSS/U
Type 91, tap = 0.65
0.93
PSS/U
Type 92, tap = 1
0.86
PSS/ADEPT
0.90
PSS/U
Type 91, tap = 0.80
0.91
The synchronous machine at node A1 is a type 91, and in the motor dictionary for this machine the
impedance of the starting transformer is listed as 0.0 + j0.05. The results for PSS/ADEPT and
PSS/U agree when the starting transformer tap is set at 0.65, but they do not agree when the tap is
set at 1.0 (PSS/ADEPT calculates 0.86 pu and PSS/U 0.88 pu). As mentioned above, the difference
is that PSS/U does not model the change of transformer impedance with tap change. If the machine
type is changed to 92 in PSS/U, then the results agree for a tap of 1.0. The reason is that the
Machine Dictionary listing for the type 92 machine has the starting transformer impedance set at
0.0 + j0.0. A starting simulation is also shown with the transformer taps set at 0.8; the results
between the two programs differ slightly, again because the simpler model in PSS/U is not modeling
the change of transformer impedance.
A.3.2 PSS/ADEPT Induction Machine Model and Changes from PSS/U

A.3.2.1 PSS/ADEPT Induction Machine Model
The steady state (power flow) induction machine model in PSS/U was very basic, consisting of a
load with constant real power and a power factor (pf) that varied with the machine terminal voltage.
The pf versus terminal voltage curve was contained in the machine dictionary. The PSS/ADEPT
model is more sophisticated; the pf, efficiency and machine slip all vary with changes in terminal
voltage and/or machine loading conditions. Even though the PSS/ADEPT model is more sophisticated, it is easier to use than the older PSS/U machine. When should you use the PSS/ADEPT
machine model? If you are interested in modeling the machine dependence on terminal voltage, are
A-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Machine Modeling
doing short circuit simulations or are doing motor starting simulations, then the explicit machine
model should be used. However, if you are doing only loadflow calculations, and a machine (or
group of machines) merely represent a real and reactive load, and you are not interested in the variance of the motor load with system voltage, then you should probably use one of the simpler loads,
like a constant power load.
The PSS/ADEPT induction machine steady state positive-sequence model is shown in Figure A-3.
This circuit, found in engineering textbooks, models a double cage machine, ra + jXa is the armature
impedance, Xm is the magnetizing reactance, and rn/s and jXn are the rotor cage values, where n
= 1 is the first cage and n = 2 refers to the second. On the Induction Machine Property sheet, the
inner cage is the first cage and the outer cage is the second. The machine slip is s, where s = 0 at
synchronous speed and s = 1 at standstill. The electrical input to the machine is:
S = V t I a*
And the shaft mechanical output power (neglecting friction and windage losses) is:
2 r1
2 r2
P m ( s ) = I 1 ( s ) ----- + I 2 ( s ) ----- ( 1 s )
s
s
The same model, with s = 2, is used to model the machine negative sequence behavior. At present,
all PSS/ADEPT induction machines are delta connected so zero-sequence parameters are not
needed. Since Y connected induction machines are almost always ungrounded, the present
PSS/ADEPT model can represent both Y and delta connections.
Xa
ra
+
Vt
Ia
r1/s
I1
r2/s
I2
Xm
X1
X2
Figure A-3. Induction Machine Model
A.3.2.2 The Basic Method to Specify an Induction Machine

With the new PSS/ADEPT model, all that the user needs do to model an induction machine is:
1. Specify the machine mechanical size, rated terminal voltage, and design letter. The
machine size can be either hp or kW, according to the flag on the Machine Property
sheet. Although not required, it is expected that hp units will be used for machines built
according to NEMA standard MG-1 and kW units for machines built under IEC standard
34. For the machine size either units, hp or kW refer to the machine mechanical size;
thus a 200 hp machine with the hp units selected is exactly the same as a 149 kW
Confidential
A-19

Machine Modeling
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
machine with the kW units selected. The design letters will be discussed in the next
section.
2. Specify the machine loading, either the electrical real power input (units of kW) or the
shaft power output in hp or kW, again according to the setting of the flag on the property
sheet.
Note again that a shaft power of output of 200 hp with the flag set to hp is the
same as a shaft power output of 149 kW with the flag set to kW units.
A.3.2.3 The Available Induction Machine Designs

A.3.2.3.1 NEMA Designs
Induction machines designed and constructed under the NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers
Association, http://www.nema.org/) MG-1 standard (an condensed version of the standard, MG 12000, is available free in pdf format from the NEMA website) have a set of designs, designated by
a letter. On some machines the design letter is shown on the machine nameplate. Within each
design classification there are other codes and classes, such as locked rotor codes and insulation
classes. There are a variety of manufacturers that produce NEMA design machines.
In PSS/ADEPT, NEMA A, B, C, D and E design machines are modeled. Internally, PSS/ADEPT
uses the equivalent circuit impedances ra, Xa, etc, and PTI has developed a set of impedances for
each of the NEMA designs. These impedances are shown in Table A-5. The values in the table are
per-unit, based on the machine apparent power input (kVA) at full load and full terminal voltage. The
locked rotor (s = 1.0) impedances are derived from the equivalent circuit impedances, as are the
subtransient and transient reactances ( X and X ).
Table A-5.
NEMA Design
Impedance
ra
0.03 pu
0.03
0.05
0.05
0.03
Xa
Xm
0.08
0.09
0.08
0.05
0.10
2.8
2.8
3.0
2.8
2.8
r1 (inner)
X1 (inner)
r2 (outer)
0.015
0.025
0.04
0.115
0.01
0.11
0.11
0.18
0.05
0.15
0.07
0.15
0.10
9999*
0.06
X2 (outer)
rlocked rotor
0.06
0.04
0.01
9999*
0.15
0.0565
0.0753
0.117
0.161
0.0461
Xlocked rotor
0.126
0.149
0.120
0.104
0.175
0.118
0.119
0.0894
0.0991
0.173
0.186
0.196
0.250
0.0991
0.242
*Single cage design.
As mentioned, some induction machines will have the design letter on the nameplate, but in most
cases the user who is modeling the machine probably does not have this information. Some additional information about each design is given in Table A.11 to assist the user in determining the
design to use. In the table, the efficiency and power factor are for a fully loaded machine, with rated
A-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Machine Modeling
terminal voltage. Pullout (breakdown) and starting torque are expressed as a multiple of the full load
torque, and starting current is expressed as a multiple of full load current. The locked rotor code,
shown on the bottom line of the table, is the code for each design if you accept the defaults. This
code can be changed, as discussed further below.
Table A-6.
NEMA Design
Parameter
Slip at full load
1.21%
2.11%
2.89%
11.4%
0.845%
Efficiency at full load
0.954
0.946
0.917
0.837
0.957
Power factor at full load
0.889
0.883
0.897
0.914
0.866
Starting current
7.25
5.99
5.98
5.22
5.53
Starting torque
1.62
1.91
2.81
3.50
0.59
Pullout torque
2.98
2.76
2.55
3.50
2.33
Slip at pullout
8.35
13.1
21.6
100
4.25
Power in (kVA)/power out (hp)
0.88
0.88
0.91
0.97
0.90
Power in (kVA)/power out (kw)
1.18
1.19
1.22
1.31
1.21
Locked rotor code
No friction or windage losses are included in the above values, and the magnetizing impedance
consists of only Xm, there is no resistive part. However, these omissions should result in only small
error.
As additional information, some of the normal uses of each NEMA design are:
NEMA A Older general purpose machine with a high starting current. Has been
largely replaced by the B design.
NEMA B General purpose motor.
NEMA C Used for constant power loads requiring higher starting torque, such as
pumps, compressors and conveyers.
NEMA D High starting torque motor used with punches, shears, elevators and hoists.
NEMA E Low starting torque and high efficiency at full load. Used for fans and similar
loads.
A.3.2.3.2 IEC Designs

Machines designed and constructed according to IEC specifications (http://www.iec.ch/) also have
standard designs, although they are not specifically listed in PSS/ADEPT. Two popular IEC motors
are design N and design H, which are very similar to NEMA designs B and C, and NEMA B can be
substituted for IEC N; likewise NEMA C for IEC H. Most IEC machines are 50 Hz.
A.3.2.4 Induction Machine Loadflow Comparison of PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U

As mentioned above, the PSS/U loadflow model of the induction machine consisted of a load with
constant real power and a power factor that varied with voltage. The pf versus voltage curve was
contained in the machine dictionary.
Confidential
A-21

Machine Modeling
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
In PSS/ADEPT, if the electrical real power at the machine terminals is specified, the machine will
draw this real power and the power factor will vary as determined by the equivalent circuit. If the
mechanical output power is specified, the real electrical input power will vary with voltage because
the machine efficiency changes with voltage. The power factor will again be determined from the
equivalent circuit. In an unbalanced network, the total power drawn by the machine will be as specified, but it will not be distributed equally among the three phases. The machine negative-sequence
impedance comes into play in the unbalanced case.
There is one case where the induction machine will not draw the specified power, and that is when
it stalls. When the machine stalls, the equivalent circuit is replaced by the locked rotor impedance
in the loadflow simulation. A machine can stall if it is overloaded and/or the terminal voltage is low.
A.3.2.5 Locked Rotor Codes and Motor Starting Comparison

NEMA compliant induction machines should have a locked rotor code (or sometimes starting current) on the nameplate; the code letter specifies, in a round about way, the machine starting
current/impedance. The code letter is connected to a value (actually a range of values) that specify
the starting apparent power divided by the machine size. The resulting units of the number range is
kVA/hp. The NEMA codes and allowed ranges are shown in the first two columns of Table A.11.
The third column shows the value used in PSS/ADEPT; the center of the range was selected for all
codes except the first and last (code A and V machines). On the Machine Property sheet, a locked
rotor code can be selected. If the code designation is made, the locked rotor impedances are set to
a value to reflect the code, and also "grayed out" so they cannot be changed by the user.
Table A-7.
Code
A-22
Input KVA/Output hp
Range
PSS/ADEPT
0 3.15
2.0
3.15 3.55
3.35
3.55 4.0
3.78
4.0 4.5
4.25
4.5 5.0
4.75
5.0 5.6
5.30
5.6 6.3
5.95
6.30 7.1
6.7
7.10 8.0
7.55
8.0 9.0
8.5
9.0 10.0
9.5
10.0 11.2
10.6
11.2 12.5
11.85
12.5 14.0
13.25
14.0 16.0
15.0
16.0 18.0
17.0
18.0 20.0
19.0
20.0 - 22.4
21.2
22.4 up
24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Machine Modeling
The NEMA codes dictate the absolute value of the starting machine impedance, while PSS/ADEPT
allows both a resistance and reactance to be used. The NEMA codes are implemented in
PSS/ADEPT using an Xlr/Rlr ratio of 1.5.
In PSS/ADEPT, the machine locked rotor impedance, whether derived from the code, from the
equivalent circuit, or directly specified by the user, represents the machine for starting simulations.
A loadflow is done to establish prestart conditions. An autotransformer is available for reduced
voltage starting. The use of the autotransformer starting is the same as for starting a synchronous
machine; please refer to Section A.3.1.5, Synchronous Machine Starting in PSS/ADEPT. Running
machines do not assist in the motor start; it is assumed that the transient fluxes in running machines
have decayed before the induction machine being started has reached normal speed. The omission
of the running machines results in the maximum voltage dip, which is what most users are interested in finding. An ungrounded machine will still contribute to a phase-to-ground fault if the system
(specifically the part of the system where the fault and machine are) is itself grounded.
In PSS/U, the locked rotor impedance also represented the machine when it was being started. A
prestart loadflow was done to set system conditions. A starting transformer was available, but the
transformer was simpler and less capable than the new one in PSS/ADEPT (in PSS/U the starting
transformer impedance did not change with tap setting). A starting simulation could be done with
running motors assisting the start, or not assisting the start. The simulation without assistance from
the surrounding motors was most important, since it calculated the greatest voltage dip. For this
reason, the simulation with assistance from running motors was dropped in PSS/ADEPT.
A.3.2.6 PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U Induction Machine Modeling

or Short Circuit Calculations
In PSS/ADEPT, for short circuit calculations, the induction machine is modeled as a source behind
the subtransient or transient impedance, according to the selection on the
Analysis>Options>Short Circuit tab. The magnitude and angle of the source behind the impedance is set from a loadflow done just before the short circuit calculation.
In PSS/U, for short circuit calculations the induction machine was also represented as a source
behind the transient or subtransient impedance.
At this point, although it is perhaps not directly related to the induction machine modeling in
PSS/ADEPT, some comments will be offered about short circuit currents from induction machines.
The use of X d and X d was first used for calculating short circuit currents and rotor swings in synchronous machines. The "d" subscript refers to the direct axis; for a salient pole (hydro-power)
synchronous generator the quadrature "q" axis values might also be used. A squirrel cage induction
machine has a symmetrical rotor and the d and q axis values are the same, so only the direct axis
need be considered.
For a three-phase short circuit at the terminals of a synchronous machine, the change in stator current is equal to the prefault terminal voltage behind an impedance which changes with time. This
time changing impedance is sometimes called the "operational" impedance (or at least it is in its
frequency domain form). Rather than try to model the time dependence in detail, often this impedance is represented at two points, the subtransient period immediately after the fault occurred and
the transient period a few cycles later. During the subtransient period the machine is represented
as a source ( e ) behind a subtransient impedance, of which the reactive part X d is the most
important. The prefault current must be accounted for, since as mentioned above, it is actually the
change in machine current that is found. The prefault conditions are included by setting the source
behind Xd equal to the terminal voltage minus the machine prefault current times the subtransient
impedance. A similar procedure is followed for the transient impedance.
Confidential
A-23

Machine Modeling
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The source voltage behind the transient impedance will probably be different than the voltage
behind the subtransient impedance. In the synchronous machine, the transient and subtransient reactances are calculated from the stator, field and damper winding leakage reactances and
the magnetizing reactances. In the induction machine, the first cage can be considered the field
winding and the second cage the damper winding. The expressions for X d and X d , using the
notation of our induction machine equivalent circuit are
Xm X1
X d = X a + --------------------X +X
m
1
X d = X a + ----------------------------------1
1
1
-------- + ------- + ------Xm X1 X2
This procedure, by its very nature, assumes that the subtransient and transient periods can be separated. For synchronous machines there are time constants that indicate how long each period
lasts. For example, when calculating the fault current immediately after the fault, the current begins
at e X d and decays exponentially with a time constant d . Therefore, the subtransient period
ends at approximately d , and is followed by the transient period, which decays with time constant
d . The values for the two time constants can be obtained several ways; there are standard formulas, derived formulas, values from short circuit tests and values from frequency response tests.
Paul Krause* gives a good description of the various methods. This procedure depends on d
being considerably larger than d . Given below are some values for large synchronous machines,
also taken from Krause. The reactances are in pu and the time constants are number of 60 Hz
cycles.
Table A-8.
Xd
Type
Xd
325 MVA hydro
.288
.202
111.7
2.28
835 MVA steam
.317
.240
54.3
2.86
As can be seen from Table A-8, there is a considerable difference in the magnitude of the transient
and subtransient time constants, so the idea of using the subtransient reactance for the first few
cycles followed by the transient reactance makes sense.
* Krause, Paul C., Analysis of Electric Machinery, McGraw Hill, 1986.
A-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Machine Modeling
Next, in Table A-9, are the reactances and time constants for the NEMA A, B, C, D and E induction
machines in PSS/ADEPT.
Table A-9.
Xd
Type
Xd
NEMA A
.186
.118
1.97
0.27
NEMA B
.196
.119
1.25
0.13
NEMA C
.250
.089
0.99
0.14
NEMA D
.099
.099
0.14
---
NEMA D
.242
.173
3.86
0.46
The transient time constants are several times larger than the subtransient values, which indicates
that the idea of separate transient and subtransient periods is valid. However, look at the absolute
value of the constants. The subtransient period is over in less than a cycle and the transient period
is complete in just a couple of cycles, except for the NEMA D machine when it lasts about four
cycles. The conclusion is that, for most induction machines, the fault current is gone in a very few
cycles. Generally the smaller the machine the faster the current decays. However, even a 2500 hp
induction motor fault current will probably be gone in four to five cycles. The user should be aware
of these short time constants when induction machine fault currents are used.
A suggested procedure for short circuit current for induction machines is to use the subtransient
impedance for all simulation. Assume the short circuit current exist only for a cycle or two for a
medium sized machine (few hundred hp) and perhaps up to four cycles for a larger machine.
A.3.2.7 Advanced Machine Specification

As already discussed, you can specify an induction machine simply by choosing its mechanical
size, terminal voltage, design and loading. Several levels of additional sophistication are available
(but not required). When the simple choice is made, the locked rotor impedance is calculated from
the equivalent circuit. Also already discussed, you can change the locked rotor impedance by
selecting a locked rotor code. If you happen to know the actual locked rotor impedance of the
machine, and it does not agree with the basic derived value or any of the locked rotor codes, you
can directly specify the impedance. A possible, if improbable, situation is that you know the machine
locked rotor code but also want to specify an Xlr/Rlr ratio different than the default 1.5 value. Being
devious, you select the appropriate code and note the resistance and reactance values that
PSS/ADEPT will be using. Using your handheld calculator you modify these values and then, after
deselecting the locked rotor code option, enter the modified values.
The subtransient and transient reactance values used for short circuit calculations are derived from
the equivalent circuit impedances. If you have a different impedance you wish to use, it can be substituted for the derived value. For these impedances, the base is the machine electrical apparent
power input at full load/voltage. If changing these values, you might want to review the preceding
section on short circuit calculations.
The NEMA machines do not allow user access directly to the equivalent circuit impedances. However, deselecting the NEMA designator uncovers the impedances and they can be modified. It is
not expected that many users will need or desire to make such detailed changes; possible instances
might be slight changes to the efficiency or power factor of a machine. The efficiency can be easily
adjusted by changing ra and the power factor by changing Xm. Each time an adjustment is made to
any of the equivalent circuit impedances the efficiency and power factor values displayed on the
Confidential
A-25

Machine Modeling
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
property sheet are updated. If desired, extensive changes can be made to the equivalent circuit
impedances; if this is done the user should be careful to design a realizable machine.
If you do change the impedances, PSS/ADEPT will check the values. Zero values of Xm, are not
allowed, and zero values of a reactance or resistance in either the inner or outer cage are not
allowed. The reason for this limitation is that such machines are not physically possible. If you wish
to model a single cage machine, then for R2 and X2 (the outer winding) put in values of 9999. These
large impedances will remove the cage from the machine.
In the discussion on induction machines it has been mentioned several times that the user simply
specifies the machine mechanical size while the equivalent circuit impedances are on the electrical
apparent power input base of the machine. PSS/ADEPT handles the conversions between the two
automatically, but some users would probably like to know the conversion details. For a NEMA
specified machine the equation is:
.746 Size hp
S B = -----------------------------------Eff PF
where SB is the electrical input apparent power base in kVA and Sizehp is the mechanical size in
hp. For and IEC machine, one less conversion is needed and the equation is:
Size kW
S B = --------------------Eff PF
where now the machine mechanical size is in kW.
A.3.2.8 Relationship between the New PSS/ADEPT Model

and the PSS/U Raw Data File
With the new PSS/ADEPT induction machine, the connection with the PSS/U Motor Dictionary
(*.mot) has been broken, and the dictionary is not consulted when an induction machine is placed
in the network. In addition, if a network is saved in the old PSS/U raw data format (*.dat), nothing is
written to the PSS/U Motor Dictionary. With the dictionary connection broken, there are a variety of
things to explain about reading of an older PSS/U raw data file into PSS/ADEPT.
First, when the raw data file is read, all induction machines are assigned a NEMA B design which,
as you recall, is the general purpose machine. The machine therefore gets the efficiency, power
factor, locked rotor impedance, subtransient impedance and transient impedance of the B design.
Subsequently, the user can modify the machine as desired, either changing the design letter or
adjusting the locked rotor, subtransient and transient impedances to those in the Motor Dictionary
that accompanied the old raw data file. For each network this would be a one time adjustment, as
it is assumed the network would subsequently be saved in the native PSS/ADEPT format. Second,
hp units are used for mechanical size for all units read from the raw data file. The units can later be
changed to kW, if desired.
In PSS/ADEPT, there is no longer any reference to the machine numbering system that was used
in PSS/U. However, the numbers must still be considered when the old raw data file is read. If a
machine in the raw data file has a machine type 51, 52, 69, 70 or 151, 152, 169, 170, then the
values in the raw data file specify the real electrical power in kW drawn by the machine and the electrical apparent power base in kVA of the machine. These two values were named "LOAD" and
"RATING" in PSS/U. To obtain an equivalent machine in PSS/ADEPT, the electrical input option is
selected and the power drawn by the machine is set to the "LOAD" value in the data file. The
mechanical size of the PSS/ADEPT machine is set to RATING/.3457.
A-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Machine Modeling
If a machine in the raw data file has a machine type 71, 72, 89, 90 or 171, 172, 189, 190 the
situation is somewhat more straightforward since the values in the raw data file specify the mechanical power delivered by the machine and the mechanical size of the machine. So, the mechanical
power option is selected, the PSS/ADEPT machine power output is set to "LOAD" and the
PSS/ADEPT machine size is set to "RATING".
It is expected that users will infrequently write an PSS/ADEPT case back to the old raw data format,
because doing so causes the loss of so much information, both for machines and other network
elements. In case it is done, the induction machines will be written to the raw data file using the
inverse of the logic described in the above two paragraphs and with the following logic used for
assigning the old machine number. A machine with NEMA design B is given a 51 or 71 number, ,
and the design E is assigned 55 or 75. A user custom designed machine is given a 56 or 76 number.
Whether the fifty or seventy series is used depends of course on how the machine loading is specified in PSS/ADEPT. Also supplied with PSS/ADEPT is a motor dictionary named nema1998.mot;
it is a motor dictionary that shows the new PSS/ADEPT machines as they would have been modeled in PSS/U. The motor dictionary is displayed at the end of this section.
A.3.2.9 Examples of Induction Machine Specification

Example: 1
An industrial plant on your system has a couple of large motors, one 600 hp and the other
700 hp. You would like to model them in your system, but they are old machines and
nobody remembers anything about them. You do know they are operating on a 2.3 kV bus.
Suggested procedure Set the machine units flag to hp for each machine and enter its mechanical size (600 and 700) and the rated voltage, 2.3 kV (assuming the system flag is set for line-to-line
voltage). For loading, set the flag to specify mechanical power output and enter 600 and 700, which
fully loads the machines. Specify NEMA B, the general purpose machine.
As an alternative you could set the machine units flag to kW, and enter the machine sizes as 448
and 522, and also set the shaft load to 448 and 522. This would be the same specification as the
above. But, why make extra work for yourself, youre busy enough already.
If you get a chance to talk to anybody in the industrial plant, ask them to look at the motor nameplate
to see if a locked rotor code is specified. Also ask what type of load each machine is driving.
Example: 2
You have a motors that in another simulation program were modeled as a load of 600 +
j360 kVA. You want to model them explicitly as motors in PSS/ADEPT to later do short circuit calculations. You are comparing loadflow results from the two programs, and you also
want PSS/ADEPT to model the machines as a 600 + j360 load.
Suggested procedure These requirements conflict to a certain extent. The reactive power drawn
by an induction machine varies with system conditions, and adept is trying to simulate actual conditions. So, requiring a constant reactive power load of 360 kvar defeats the purpose of the model.
It is possible to make the reactive load close or equal to 360 kvar at a particular terminal voltage.
The power factor of the 600 + j360 load is 0.857. The closest NEMA machine is the E design, with
a 0.866 PF at full load, so use the E model. The efficiency of this machine is 0.957, so its mechanical
size is 600 x .957 = 574 kW (770 hp). In the property sheet, select the NEMA E design, set the units
to hp (NEMA), and also select the electrical power input choice. Set the size of the machine to 770
hp and specify the 600 kW input power (or select kW (IEC) units and set machine size to 574 kW).
In the loadflow, if the machine terminal voltage solution is 1.0 pu, the machine will draw 600 + j346
kVA. This is pretty close to the original load; if you want a closer match on the reactive power, the
Confidential
A-27

Machine Modeling
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
easiest way is probably to increase the machine size. Setting the machine size to around 850 hp
will increase the reactive draw to 360 kvar. Another method to increase reactive power consumption
would be to lower the Xm value for the machine.
Example: 3
You are modeling a 575 kV 200 hp machine as a NEMA B model. The starting current for
the machine is about 1200 A. What locked rotor code should be selected for this machine?
Suggested procedure Calculate the kVA/hp number, which is:
3 1200 .575
-------------------------------------------- 6.0
200
Select the G locked rotor code for this machine.
Example: 4
You have an IEC model machine, the size is 100 kW, rated voltage is 500 V. The starting
current is about 750 A. What locked rotor code should by select?
Suggested procedure This is a 134 hp machine, so the NEMA kVA/hp value is:
3 750 .500
---------------------------------------- 4.8
134
Select the E locked rotor code, which in PSS/ADEPT uses a value of 4.75 for the E code, so the
starting current will be a little less than 750 A for a 1.0 pu terminal voltage. You can specify the
machine size either way, 100 kW with the kW (IEC) option or 134 hp with the hp (NEMA) option.
Example: 5
Consider a 500 hp NEMA B induction motor on a 2.3 kV bus. If it were initially unloaded and
the prefault terminal voltage were 1.0 pu, what fault current would be expected for a three
phase fault at the machine terminals if the default subtransient impedance were used.
Suggested procedure it is easy to explain how PSS/ADEPT calculates the fault current for a
machine, but it requires a considerable amount of complex arithmetic to get a numeric answer. For
the NEMA B design, the efficiency is .946 and the power factor .883 so the electrical base is 446.65
kVA. Assuming the machine is Y connected, the base impedance is then 2.30 x 2.30/.44665 = 11.84
. The armature resistance is .03 pu and the default subtransient reactance is .1190 pu, so the subtransient impedance in ohms is 1.45375.8. The unloaded machine still draws current for the
magnetizing reactance, a quick loadflow shows the current to be 38.78-89.4. For the fault calculation, the voltage e must be set up behind the subtransient impedance. With the prefault voltage
equal to 1.0 pu or 1328 V, the value for e is:
e = 1328 1.453 75.8 38.78 89.4 = 1273 .60V
Finally, the fault current for the three-phase fault at the terminals is:
1273 .60
I f = ------------------------------- = 876 75.2A
1.453 75.8
A quick simulation shows that this is close to the value PSS/ADEPT obtains. The PSS/ADEPT display shows the current reference into the device, while the above answer has a reference of current
out of the machine, so the PSS/ADEPT displayed angle will differ from our answer by 180.
A-28
Confidential
Zero
Sequence
2000
X0
99
51
R0
0
0.03
0.1183
52
2000
99
0.03
53
2000
99
54
2000
99
55
2000
71
2681
72
2681
99
0.03
0.119
0.03
0.196
0.0753
0.149
0.01
0.05
73
2681
99
0.05
0.0894
0.05
0.250
0.117
0.120
0.01
0.05
74
2681
99
0.05
0.0991
0.05
0.0991
0.161
0.104
0.01
0.05
75
2681
99
0.03
0.173
0.03
0.242
0.0461
0.175
0.01
0.05
Subtransient
Transient
Locked Rotor
Starting
Transformer
pf at 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0, 1.1 pu Voltage
Xlr
0.126
rxfr
0.01
Xxfr
0.05
pf0.7
pf0.8
pf0.9
pf1.0
pf1.1
Eff
0.03
rlr
0.1858 0.0565
0.886
0.904
0.906
0.897
0.882
100
0.119
0.03
0.196
0.0753
0.149
0.01
0.05
0.867
0.893
0.897
0.891
0.877
100
0.05
0.0894
0.05
0.250
0.117
0.120
0.01
0.05
0.878
0.903
0.908
0.903
0.891
100
0.05
0.0991
0.05
0.0991
0.161
0.104
0.01
0.05
0.943
0.943
0.936
0.922
0.904
100
99
0.03
0.173
0.03
0.242
0.0461
0.175
0.01
0.05
0.791
0.857
0.874
0.873
0.863
100
99
0.03
0.1183
0.03
0.1858 0.0565
0.126
0.01
0.05
0.886
0.904
0.906
0.897
0.882
100
0.867
0.893
0.897
0.891
0.877
100
0.878
0.903
0.908
0.903
0.891
100
0.943
0.943
0.936
0.922
0.904
100
0.791
0.857
0.874
0.873
0.863
100

A-29

Machine Modeling
Size
Type
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
Table A-10. PSS/U Dictionary

Machine Modeling
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The listed power factor versus voltage curve only holds when the machine is fully loaded; even if
an induction machine is drawing no real power it will absorb a significant amount of reactive power
because of the magnetizing impedance Xm, which might vary from 2 to 4 pu. Unfortunately, the
PSS/U induction machine model is not this sophisticated, and the power factor in the dictionary is
applied regardless of the specified real power. Therefore, if the specified power is equal to the
machine size, you can expect the PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U results to match very closely for these
NEMA machines. However, if the specified power is less (or more) than the size, there will be some
discrepancy in the loadflow results.
The PSS/U model also has no ability to stall the machine, so for heavy loading or low terminal voltages the results may not match for the induction machine.
A.3.2.9.1 Induction Machine Short Circuit Behavior

For short circuit calculations, the induction machine is represented as a source ( e or e ) behind
the armature resistance in series with the impedance matrix. The impedance matrix has either subtransient or transient values in it, depending on the user selection. This is the same model as is used
for the synchronous machine.
Comparison of Induction Machine Short Circuit Behavior in PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U
As long as the PSS/U Motor Dictionary contains armature resistance, subtransient reactance and
transient reactance values which agree with the NEMA machines, the short circuit currents from
PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT should match fairly well. There will be one difference, which was noted in
the synchronous machine; PSS/ADEPT calculates the machine internal voltage from the proceeding loadflow, while PSS/U does not (except LPSC can make this calculation for the balanced
network).
A.3.2.9.2 Induction Machine Starting Behavior

The induction machine being started is represented by its locked rotor impedance, just as the synchronous machine is. For the induction machine, the locked rotor impedance is entered on the
Machine Property sheet, it is not obtained from a dictionary (remember that is PSS/ADEPT there is
no connection between the induction machine and the PSS/U dictionary. A starting transformer can
also be used to start the induction machine, just as for the synchronous machine
During the starting simulation, other running induction machines are modeled just as they are in a
loadflow simulation.
Comparison of Induction Machine Starting Behavior in PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U
The induction machine motor starting simulation results should agree well between PSS/ADEPT
and PSS/U, if the "post-start" condition is selected in PSS/U.
A-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Data and Parameter File Differences
A.4 Data and Parameter File Differences

PSS/ADEPT can read PSS/U raw data files (*.dat); Construction Dictionary files (*.con);
PSS/ADEPT binary files (*.adp) or Slider/U binary files (*.slu); but will not read PSS/U binary CASE
files (*.cas). If the PSS/U raw data file contains graphical data and is opened in PSS/ADEPT, the
network diagram is automatically drawn. When a raw data file is saved from PSS/ADEPT, drawing
parameters: x-coordinate, y-coordinate, busbar length, node orientation, and text orientation are
written directly to the raw data file for use in activity DRAW.
PSS/ADEPT files are binary formatted files that can only be modified using PSS/ADEPT; they
cannot be viewed with a standard text editor. While the PSS/ADEPT data file contains raw data
information, it saves additional graphical information that PSS/U does not. The format of the
PSS/ADEPT data file is not compatible with PSS/U, and therefore activities CASE and READ
cannot be used to read a PSS/ADEPT data file.
The following file types and files are used by PSS/U but are not used by PSS/ADEPT:
File Types
Files
*.rel
parmpu.dat
*.eco
parmpr.dat
*.brk
parmps.dat
*.dev
pscript.dat
*.lvb
resource.prm
*.idv
windows.prm
*.drw
*.sgf
*.wrk
A.5 Editing Data Dictionaries

The Construction Dictionary is not editable in PSS/ADEPT. If the user wishes to edit these files, use
either the PSS/U spreadsheet editor or a text editor.
In PSS/U, dictionaries are set via activity OPTN when starting PSS/U or via an entry in the file,
PARMPU.DAT, which runs at program start-up. PARMPU.DAT is not used in PSS/ADEPT. Instead,
the dictionary is specified in File>Program Settings and are remembered by the program. The
next time PSS/ADEPT is started, the dictionary that was used the last time the program was run will
be the dictionary used for the current network. If another dictionary for the current PSS/ADEPT session are required, the user must change them using the Program Settings dialog.
Confidential
A-31

Diagram Differences
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A.6 Diagram Differences

A.6.1 Transformer Symbol Types
ISO transformer type symbols are the default in PSS/ADEPT, but PSS/U uses US transformer
symbol types (see Figure A-4). Initially, PSS/ADEPT draws all transformers with this symbol type.
The US transformer symbol type may be specified by selecting US transformer type symbols in the
File>Program Settings dialog. The transformer symbol designation will be remembered and
stored on application exit. Hence, when the application is restarted, the transformer symbol type will
be set to the last saved configuration (e.g., ISO or US).
Figure A-4. ISO and US Transformer Types
A.6.2 Node Labels

In PSS/ADEPT, the name of the node will be displayed at the lower right corner of the node symbol.
These node names can be moved on the diagram, either manually or with the Declutter Text option.
The new positions will be saved in a PSS/ADEPT file, but not a raw data file. PSS/U activity DRAW
allows users to select the node name orientation for each node. When a load flow solution is performed, PSS/ADEPT displays the voltage and angle below the node name. While the default
voltage is kV, node voltage may be displayed in pu or on a nominal delivery voltage base by
changing the Node voltages option on the Results tab. PSS/U will display only the node name and
nothing else; to see the resulting voltage and angle, users must use a PSS/U load flow report. Load
flow results may be removed from the diagram by clicking the Toggle Results button on the View
Toolbar.
A.6.3 Load and Branch Labels

PSS/U activity DRAW displays the construction type and length of each branch; PSS/ADEPT does
not provide this option. PSS/ADEPT displays load flow results for each branch at either end of the
From or To Nodes. Results may be displayed at both ends of the branch by checking the box labeled
Show Results at both ends under the Results tab. PSS/ADEPT displays the loss results in the
middle of the branch.
A.6.4 Load Flow Results

In PSS/ADEPT, all results consider the charging current on the line. The currents are given in magnitude and angle. The convention for showing the flow of power in both PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U is
to show power flowing out of the node and into the branch. Thus, if power is flowing from a source
to the right of a node, the power results shown to the left of the node will be negative to indicate
direction of flow (Figure A-5). A negative power flow means that the power is flowing out of the
branch.
A-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Acceleration Factors
Power Flow
Power Flow
Figure A-5. Power Flow
A.6.5 Shunt Device Labels

Shunt devices include loads, machines, and shunt capacitors. Results for these devices include
power and current. Results are shown next to the device. PSS/U activity DRAW does not show
results for shunt devices.
A.7 Acceleration Factors

In PSS/U, some systems require the user to manually modify acceleration factors in order to solve
the load flow. PSS/ADEPT employs a more robust solution algorithm, which does not require acceleration factors.
A.8 Unique Name Identifiers

PSS/U refers to branches, shunt capacitors, machines, and loads by their node name(s). While the
node name is unique, there is no unique name that identifies branches, loads, and shunt capacitors.
In PSS/ADEPT, every item in the network has its own unique name.
A.9 Network Limits

A.9.1 Network Size/Number of Loops
PSS/U limits the network size and number of loops in the network. PSS/ADEPT has no fixed limit
on network size, number of loops, or the number of individual components.
A.9.2 Loads
PSS/U limits the number of loads at a node to four (each load category) and the number of
in-service sources in a network to one. In PSS/ADEPT, there is no limit on the number of loads at
a node or the number of in-service sources in a network.
Confidential
A-33

MWh Loads
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A.10 MWh Loads

PSS/ADEPT has no provisions to modify or add MWh load data to the network. When it reads in a
PSS/U raw data file, it saves the MWh load records and writes them back to the raw data file exactly
as they were read in.
Normally, a node cannot be deleted as long as an item is connected to it. However, in the case of
MWh load, it is possible to read in a file containing these loads and delete the node(s) to which they
are connected because PSS/ADEPT does not account for them. If the user saves the network
model as a raw data file, PSS/ADEPT will write the MWh loads back into it. If that file is subsequently
read into PSS/U, an error will occur because the MWh loads are not connected to any nodes (i.e.,
the node was deleted in PSS/ADEPT).
A.11 Sources
A.11.1 Source Angle
You have the ability to enter the value of the source angle on the Source Device Property sheet.
This value is not used by PSS/U and hence will not be written out to a PSS/U raw data file.
A.11.2 Multiple In-Service Sources

In PSS/ADEPT you may have more that one in-service source. When you read a raw data file saved
from PSS/ADEPT into PSS/U, only the first in-service source in the file will have an in-service
status. The other in-service sources in the file will be set to out-of-service devices.
A.12 Load Categories and Device Groups

When a PSS/U raw data file is imported into PSS/ADEPT, the node area number will be converted
to a group in PSS/ADEPT. In addition, the load categories in the PSS/U raw data file will be converted to a load category in PSS/ADEPT. The group name will equal the text "Group" followed by
the area number (1-99) you specified in the raw data file. The load category name will equal the text
"Load Category" followed by the category number you specified in the raw data file (normally 1 to
4). In PSS/ADEPT you are allowed to have un-limited load categories and device groups. You may
also have devices belonging to one or more groups and/or load categories. PSS/U does not support
the device and load category grouping present in PSS/ADEPT. If you choose to use the new
grouping and load category definitions within PSS/ADEPT, this information will not be saved in a
raw data file and your data will be lost. If you wish to continue to use PSS/U do not modify or add
any device groups or load categories to your network.
A.13 Network Economics

The economics data used by PSS/ADEPT is not compatible with that used by PSS/U. Network economics are saved only in a PSS/ADEPT native file. In PSS/U, the network economics are stored in
a file with a .eco extension. You will need to create a new .eco file to use with PSS/U if you need to
use the economics in both PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT.
A.14 Load Snapshots

Load snapshots are named "pictures" of loads in your system. PSS/U has no mechanism to define
load snapshots, therefore, if you define load snapshots in your network they will not be saved to a
PSS/U raw data file.
A-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Static Loads
A.15 Static Loads

In a PSS/U raw data file you may have assigned in the Parameter record a nonzero scale factor
and a power factor to a particular load category. When a raw data file is read into PSS/ADEPT, the
scale factors and power factors will be used to determine the actual P (kW) and Q (kvar), or in the
case of polar representation, the actual S (kVA), pf, leading/lagging. In the Load Property sheet, you
will see the actual load as used by the solution algorithms in PSS/ADEPT. The value you have
entered for Q in the load data section of the PSS/U raw data file is ignored and Q is calculated based
on the given scale and power factors. For a description of the Parameter record in the PSS/U raw
data file refer to Appendix B. You can see the effect in PSS/ADEPT by viewing the Static Load Property sheet or selecting the network input data list report.
Confidential
A-35
A-36
Confidential
Appendix B
PSS/U Input File Formats
B.1 PSS/U Raw Data File Format
PSS/ADEPT can import and export a PSS/U raw data file, the primary source of input to the PSS/U
application. The raw data file is a text file with the suffix .DAT and is read into PSS/ADEPT in free
format with data items separated by a comma or one or more spaces. Each network item is grouped
together and terminated by END/ section-name where section-name indicates the group section
(e.g., NODES, BRANCH, LOADS, etc.). Explanation of data items, data restrictions, and general
comments or rules about some categories are included below.
B.1.1 Sample Three-Phase Feeder Raw Data File

EXAMPLE CASE
TO ILLUSTRATE
THE USE OF
PSS/U FOR A
10 NODE SYSTEM
PTI
APRIL 1996
END/ TITLE
EXPLCA ,
0.00 LN 1.000
1000.0
10.000 0.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 0.00 1.00
,
,
,
,
,
END/ PARAMS
SO
40.000
0.30
4.90
1.00 V
4
1
F1
10.000
1.70
5.00
0.75 V
4
1
F2
10.000
3.10
5.00
0.50 V
4
1
F3
10.000
4.80
5.00
0.50 V
4
1
F4
10.000
6.50
5.00
0.50 V
3
1
F5
5.0000
8.20
5.00
0.75 V
4
1
F6
5.0000
9.70
5.00
0.50 V
4
1
MOTOR NODE
A1
5.0000
3.90
3.60
0.75 H
4
1
GENERATOR NODE
A2
5.0000
3.90
1.80
0.50 H
4
1
B1
10.000
7.30
3.20
0.50 H
4
1
END/ NODES
SO
1
0.00000
0.00100
0.00000
0.00100 40.000
END/ SOURCE
F1 F2
L 1 ABC ,30
,
1.0000
F2 F3
L 1 ABC ,30
,
2.2000
F3 F4
L 1 ABC ,30
,
1.8000
F5 F6
L 1 ABC ,30
,
0.5000
A1 A2
L 1 AB ,10
,
1.5000
SO F1
T 3 ABC ,TNSF
,
1000.00
0.00000
0.10000
0.00000
F4 F5
T 1 ABC ,TNSF
,
1000.00
0.00000
0.10000
0.00000
F2 A1
T 3 ABC ,TNSF
,
1000.00
0.00000
0.10000
0.00000
F4 B1
S 1 ABC ,SWCH
,
,
, 0
END/ BRANCH
SO
F1
3 1.00000 1.10 0.90 0.00625 1.050 1.040
0.000
F4
F5
2 1.08750 1.10 0.90 0.00625 1.050 1.040
0.000
F2
A1
2 1.00000 1.10 0.90 0.00625 1.050 1.040
0.000
END/ TRANSF
F1
1
1
150.00
75.00
120.00
60.00
100.00
F2
1
1
200.00
100.00
200.00
100.00
200.00
F3
1
1
120.00
60.00
150.00
75.00
100.00
F4
1
1
100.00
50.00
100.00
50.00
100.00
F5
1 11
80.00
40.00
70.00
35.00
60.00
F6
2 51
100.00
200.00
5.0000
A1
2 91
-1000.00
1000.00
5.0000
1.030
0.500
A2
2 11
90.00
45.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
B1
2
1
30.00
10.00
50.00
20.00
40.00
END/ LOADS
END/ CONSUM
END/ CAPS
Confidential
0.10000
0.10000
0.10000
0.000
0.000
0.000
50.00
100.00
50.00
50.00
30.00
-0.500
0.00
10.00
B-1

PSS/U Raw Data File Format
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
B.1.2 Title Section

This description must contain the following eight lines; all seven lines must exist, even if they are
blank, before the END/TITLE demarcation occurs.
Title 1
Title 2
Comment 1
Comment 2
Comment 3
Comment 4
Comment 5
END/TITLE
60-character title line

60-character comment lines
B.1.3 System Parameters Section

Entries CKTID, PKCUR, and VFL are not mandatory entries.OHF, OHR, UGF, UGR, SWTIME,
SUBNAME, and PTIME provided for raw data file compatibility only and are currently ignored in
PSS/ADEPT.
CKTID, PKCUR, VFL, PTIME, REVNUM
SKVA, SKV, DEFSC, DEFPF, DEFSC, DEFPF, DEFSC, DEFPF, DEFSC, DEFPF
OHF, OHR, UGF, UGR, SWTIME, SUBNAME
END/ PARAMS
Table B-1. System Parameters

Data Item
Description
CKTID
1 to 8 character circuit identification
PKCUR
Peak current setting (ignored)
VFL
LN if input voltages are line-to-neutral or LL if input voltages are line-to-line
PTIME
Average fraction of time that load level specified within this data set is used for TOPO
(ignored)
REVNUM
Revision number is written into the file if the data is saved using the spreadsheet editor (it
is not necessary to add this number if you are creating a file from scratch)
SKVA
System three-phase base kVA
SKV
System standard base voltage, kV; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in VFL
DEFSC
Default scale factor for given category
DEFPF
Default load power factor for given category
OHF*
Overhead failure rate given in failures/unit length/yr
OHR*
The amount of time in hours it takes to repair overhead lines
UGF*
Underground failure rate given in failures/unit length/yr
UGR*
The amount of time in hours it takes to repair underground cables
SWTIME*
Time required to switch given in hours
SUBNAME*
Substation Name
*These items are used with the reliability option only.
B-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

B.1.4 Node Declaration Section

NAME, KV, X, Y, BUSBAR, V/H, N, IAR, DESC
END/ NODES
Table B-2. Node Data

Data Item
Description
NAME
Node name of up to 12 alphanumeric characters
KV
Node base voltage, kV; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter data
Node X screen coordinate 0 < X < 90.0, in inches
Node Y screen coordinate .75 < Y < 72.0, in inches
BUSBAR
Length of busbar symbol in one-line diagram, in inches; a value of zero will not draw a
busbar symbol
V/H
Orientation of busbar symbol in one-line diagram; V is vertical, H is horizontal (ignored if

BUSBAR=0)
Node name orientation; see Figure B-1 (N = 0 will not print node name)
IAR
Area number (1-100)
DESC
40-character node description
-2
-1
- possible positions
- default position
-3
-4
Figure B-1. Node Name Orientation Key
B.1.5 Source Data Section

NAME, STATUS, R1, X1, R0, X0, KVS
END/ SOURCE
Table B-3. Source Data

Data Item
Description
NAME
Name of node at which source is connected
STATUS
source status
0 - out-of-service
1 - in-service
Confidential
B-3

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table B-3. Source Data (Cont.)

R1
X1
Positive-sequence Thevenin resistance, pu on system kVA base
R0
X0
Zero-sequence Thevenin resistance, pu on system kVA base
KVS
Source open circuit voltage, kV; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter data.
Positive-sequence Thevenin reactance, pu on system kVA base

Zero-sequence Thevenin reactance, pu on system kVA base
B.1.6 Branch Data Section

Branch data will have different formats depending upon the type of branch being entered. If the
value of the construction type field corresponds to an entry in the Construction Dictionary the impedances will be directly obtained from the dictionary.
For calculation purposes, negative-sequence impedances equal positive-sequence impedances.
X, Y, Z designations for phasing are used for uncertain phasing designation and are equivalent to
A, B, C respectively.
B.1.6.1 Line or Cable Data

The length specified on a line or cable must be in the same units that were used to calculate the
impedances of that line or cable.
I, J,
L, STAT, PHAS, CONST, DIST, R1, X1, R0, X0, BC1, BC0
END/ BRANCH
Table B-4. Line or Cable Data

Data Item
Description
FROM node name
TO node name
Designates branch section is a line or cable
STAT
Line status
0 - open - disconnected at both ends
1 - in-service
PHAS
1 to 3 character string containing A, B, C or X, Y, Z as needed to indicate which phase conductors are present (e.g., ABC, XYZ, AC, B)
CONST
1 to 10 character alphanumeric construction type identifier; if the Construction Dictionary is

to be used, this name must correspond to a name in the dictionary
DIST
Length
R1
X1
Positive-sequence series resistance, ohm/unit length
R0
X0
Zero-sequence series resistance, ohm/unit length
BC1
BC0
Positive-sequence charging admittance, micromhos/unit length
B-4
Positive-sequence series reactance, ohm/unit length

Zero-sequence series reactance, ohm/unit length
Zero-sequence charging admittance, micromhos/unit length
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

B.1.6.2 Switch Data

I, J, S, STAT, PHAS, CONST, ID, blnk , OPERST
END/ BRANCH
Table B-5. Switch Data

Data Item
Description
FROM node name
TO node name
Designates branch section is a switch
STAT
Switch status
1 - in-service (closed)
PHAS
CONST

ID
1 to 3 character switch identification
'blnk'
mandatory blank space if OPERST is to be specified
OPERST
Operational status of switch used for TOPO

0 - unlocked (default)
1 - locked
B.1.6.3 Tie Switch Data

I, J, TS, STAT, PHAS, CONST, ID, CKTID, OPERST
END/ BRANCH
Table B-6. Tie Switch Data

Data Item
Description
FROM node name
TO node name
TS
Designates branch section is a tie switch
STAT
Switch status
1 - in-service (closed)
PHAS
CONST

ID
1 to 3 character switch identification
CKTID
1 to 8 character identifier for the other circuit to which this tie switch is connected
OPERST
Operational status of switch used for TOPO

0 - unlocked (default)
1 - locked
Confidential
B-5

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
B.1.6.4 Series Capacitor or Series Reactor Data

For series capacitor branches, both positive- and zero-sequence reactance must be negative. The
resistance should equal zero.
For series reactor branches, both positive- and zero-sequence reactance must be positive. The
resistance should equal zero.
I, J, SX, STAT, PHAS, CONST, KVAT, R1, X1, R0, X0
END/ BRANCH
Table B-7. Series Capacitor or Series Reactor Data

Data Item
Description
FROM node name
TO node name
SX
Designates branch section is a series capacitor or reactor
STAT
Series capacitor/reactor status

1 - in-service
PHAS
CONST

KVAT
Series capacitor or reactor rating in kVA per phase
R1
Positive-sequence resistance, per unit
X1
R0
Positive-sequence reactance, per unit
X0
Zero-sequence reactance, per unit
Zero-sequence resistance, per unit
B.1.6.5 Transformer Data

In PSS/ADEPT these are limitations where transformers are concerned. See Appendix A for further
details.
B.1.6.5.1 Rules:
Transformer impedances must be specified in per unit on transformer kVA base, not on system kVA
base.
For a three-phase transformer, the impedance entered in this record will normally be the nameplate
value, which is normally given in per unit (or percent) with respect to the three-phase rating, and the
value of KVAT will normally be one third of the nameplate kVA rating.
For a single phase transformer, KVAT, R1, X1, R0, X0 will normally be the nameplate values.
A nonregulating transformer has a tstp0 (use the default) and a branch status (Section B.1.6) of 3
(taps locked).
Compensating impedance takes precedence over remote node regulation.
B-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Per unit tap ratio is defined as:

Secondary actual open circuit voltage
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Primary actual supply voltage
The width of the voltage control band should be wider, in per unit, than the per unit tap step. For
example, the band for a transformer with 5/8 percent (0.00625 pu) steps should be 0.01 pu or wider.
For wye-delta or delta-wye transformers, the 30 phase shift is determined by the sign of the type
number.
I, J, T, STAT, PHAS, CONST, KVAT, R1, X1, R0, X0
END/ BRANCH
Table B-8. Transformer Data

Data Item
Description
FROM node name
TO node name (node to be voltage-controlled)
Designates branch section is a transformer
STAT
Transformer status
0 - transformer disconnected at primary and secondary
1 - transformer in service, taps adjusted independently in each phase
2 - transformer in service, taps in all phases in equal position, controlled by first phase
present (in ABC or XYZ order)
3 - transformer in service, taps locked in present position
PHAS
1 to 3 character string indicating which phases (A, B, C, or X, Y, Z) are present in the transformer bank; if the transformer is a wye-delta transformer (types + 2 and +3) define phasing
on wye side of the bank (refer to Section B.1.7 for the direction of the wye-delta connection with respect to the branch From and To node names)
CONST
1 to 10 character alphanumeric transformer type identifier; such as TNSF, REG, wye-wye,

delta-wye, or wye-delta; if the Construction Dictionary is to be used, this name must correspond to a name in the dictionary
KVAT
Transformer rating in kVA per phase
R1
Positive-sequence resistance, per unit
X1
R0
Positive-sequence reactance, per unit
X0
Zero-sequence reactance, per unit
Zero-sequence resistance, per unit
B.1.7 Transformer Tap Changing Data Section

I, J, TYPE, TAP, TMAX, TMIN, TSTP, VMAX, VMIN, RC, XC, REM
END/ TRANSF
Table B-9. Transformer Tap Changing Data Section

Data Item
Description
Default
FROM node name
TO node name (tapped side of transformer)
TYPE
Transformer connection type number: I, J above defines the direction of

the transformer connection
Confidential
B-7

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table B-9. Transformer Tap Changing Data Section (Cont.)

Data Item
Description
Default
TAP
Tap ratio, per unit (applies to all phases)
1.0
TMAX
Maximum tap ratio, pu
1.1
TMIN
Minimum tap ratio, pu
.9
TSTP
Tap ratio step, pu
VMAX
VMIN
Upper limit of target band for compensated voltage, pu
1.05
Lower limit of target band for compensated voltage, pu
1.04
RC
XC
Compensating resistance, ohm (applies to all phases)
0.0
Compensating reactance, ohm (applies to all phases)
0.0
REM
Regulated node name (node at which voltage regulation is to occur). If

this entry is left blank, the TO node of the branch data is regulated. REM
may be a node other than I and J (in this case, the sign of REM defines
the location of the controlled node relative to the transformer). If REM is
entered with a positive sign, the ratio will be adjusted as if node REM is
on the tapped side of the transformer. If REM is entered with a negative
sign, the ratio will be adjusted as if the node REM is on the untapped
(impedance) side of the transformer
0.00625
B.1.8 Transformer Type Codes

Table B-10. PSS/U Transformer Types
Code
B-8
Connection Type
Wye-wye
2
-2
Wye-delta -30
Wye-delta +30
3
-3
Delta-wye +30
Delta-wye -30
Open delta auto regulator AB (XY) open
Open delta auto regulator BC (YZ) open
Open delta auto regulator CA (ZX) open
L-L auto regulator AB (XY)
L-L auto regulator BC (YZ)
L-L auto regulator CA (ZX)
10
Delta-connected auto regulator
11
Delta-delta
12
Wye-connected auto regulator
13
Auto regulator AN (XN)
14
Auto regulator BN (YN)
15
Auto regulator CN (ZN)
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

To
From
Type 2 (-2)
Wye-Delta -30 (+30)
Type 1
Wye-Wye
Type 3 (-3)
Delta-Wye +30 (-30)
Type 4 Open Delta Auto Regulator AB (XY) Open

Type 5 Open Delta Auto Regulator BC (YZ) Open
Type 6 Open Delta Auto Regulator CA (ZX) Open
Type 7 AB (XY) L-L Auto Regulator

Type 8 BC (YZ) L-L Auto Regulator
Type 9 CA (ZX) L-L Auto Regulator
Type 11
Delta-Delta
Type 10
Delta-Connected Auto Regulator
Type 12
Wye-Connected Auto
Regulator
Type 13 AN (XN) Auto Regulator

Type 14 BN (YN) Auto Regulator
Type 15 CN (ZN) Auto Regulator
Figure B-2. PSSUT Transformer Bank Connections
Confidential
B-9

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
B.1.9 Load Data Section

In PSS/ADEPT there are limitations where static load data is concerned. See Appendix A, for further information.
The nominal load values Pa, Pb, Pc, Qa, Qb, Qc may be either:
(a)
used directly in power flow solutions in or
(b)
used as the basis for determining system loads from:

Pa = DEFSC * Pa
Qa = tan (arc cos (DEFPF)) * Pa
where
DEFSC < DEFPF
Option (a) is used when DEFSC = 0. This case would be used when the actual P and Q loads are
known and entered in the load data records.
Option (b) is intended to be used in distribution feeder work where it is more convenient to specify
load in terms of connected load transformer capacity than in terms of actual load P and Q. The loads
applied to the feeder are determined by the above equations, the values of Pa, Pb, Pc are connected load transformer capacity (kVA), and the values of Qa, Qb, Qc are not used. The load
adjustment given above is applied to all loads by category where DEFSC 0, but not to machines.
The values specified for constant power, constant impedance, and constant current load are the
real and reactive powers consumed by the load, when the applied voltage is 1.0 per unit.
Load data records may be entered in any order, with multiple records being entered for nodes at
which more than one type of load is connected. Balanced loads are divided equally among the
phases entering the node. Grounded loads are connected a-n, b-n, c-n. Ungrounded loads are connected a-b, b-c, c-a and placed in PA, PB, PC respectively.
B.1.9.1 Load Categories

Each load may be assigned to one of four categories. This permits loads to be grouped in a way
that is meaningful to the user; the categories could be associated with residential, industrial, and
commercial customers or with suburban, farming, irrigation, and water heating load.
B.1.9.2 Load Type Definitions

Table B-11. Load Categories
Constant Power Loads
Type 1
11
21
31
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced
Balanced
P + jQ
P + jQ
P + jQ
P + jQ
Grounded
Ungrounded
Grounded
Ungrounded
G + jB
G + jB
G + jB
G + jB
Grounded
Ungrounded
Grounded
Ungrounded
Constant Impedance Loads

Type 2
12
22
32
B-10
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced
Balanced
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Table B-11. Load Categories (Cont.)

Constant Current Loads
Type 3
13
23
33
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced
Balanced
P + jQ
P + jQ
P + jQ
P + jQ
Grounded
Ungrounded
Grounded
Ungrounded
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced
Balanced
MWh/month
MWh/month
MWh/month
MWh/month
Grounded
Ungrounded
Grounded
Ungrounded
MWh/month
MWh/month
MWh/month
MWh/month
Grounded
Ungrounded
Grounded
Ungrounded
MWh Loads
Type 5
15
25
35
Seasonal MWh Loads

Type 6
16
26
36
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced
Balanced
Asynchronous Machines
Types 51 - 70, 151-170, load in kW, rating in kVA
Types 71 - 90, 171-190, load in hp, rating in hp
Types 91 - 99, 191-199, load in kW, rating in kVA
B.1.9.3 kW, kvar Load

B.1.9.3.1 kW, kvar Load - Unbalanced (types 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13)
NAME, KCAT, KTYP, PA, QA, PB, QB, PC, QC
END/ LOADS
Table B-12. kW, kvar Load - Unbalanced (types 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13)
Data Item
Description
NAME
Node name
KCAT
Load category code (1, 2, 3, or 4); see Section B.1.9.1, Load Categories
KTYP
Load type code; see Section B.1.9.2, Load Type Definitions
PA
QA
Phase A nominal real power load, kW
PB
QB
Same as above for Phase B
PC
QC
Same as above for Phase C
Phase A nominal reactive power load, kvar
B.1.9.3.2 kW, kvar Load - Balanced (types 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 33)
NAME, KCAT, KTYP, PA, QA
END/ LOADS
Confidential
B-11

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table B-13. kW, kvar Load - Balanced (types 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 33)
Data Item
Description
NAME
Node name
KCAT
KTYP
PA
QA
Total nominal real power load

Total nominal reactive power load
B.1.9.4 Machine Loads

In PSS/ADEPT there are limitations regarding machines. For further information, see Appendix A.
B.1.9.4.1 Rules
A negative load value designates the machine is a generator.
A machine may be placed out-of-service by setting its machine type to the negative of its type
number.
Machine data records may be entered in any order, with multiple records being entered for nodes
at which more than one type of machine is connected.
B.1.9.4.2 Asynchronous Machine Load (types 51-90, 151-190)

NAME, KCAT, KTYP, LOAD, RATING, KVNOM
END/ LOADS
Table B-14. Asynchronous Machine Load (types 51-90, 151-190)

Data Item
Description
NAME
Node name
KCAT
KTYP
LOAD
Total real electrical power consumed by the machine in kW (types 51-70, 151-170, or total
mechanical power delivered by the machine in hp (types 71-90, 171-190)
RATING
Nominal electrical rating of the machine in kVA or nominal mechanical rating in hp depending
on type (defaults to SKVAM from Machine Dictionary)
KVNOM
Nominal voltage of machine; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter data,
start-up parameter file or activity OPTN (defaults to node base voltage)
B.1.9.4.3 Synchronous Machine Load (types 91-99, 191-199)

NAME, KCAT, KTYP, LOAD, RATING, KVNOM, VSCHED, QMAX, QMIN
END/ LOADS
B-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Table B-15. Synchronous Machine Load (types 91-99, 191-199)

Data Item
Description
NAME
Node name
KCAT
KTYP
LOAD
Total real electrical power consumed by the machine in kW
RATING
Nominal electrical rating of the machine in kVA (defaults to SKVAM from Machine
Dictionary)
KVNOM
Nominal voltage of machine; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter
data (defaults to node base voltage)
VSCHED
Scheduled terminal voltage to be held by machine voltage regulator, in per unit of base
voltage of node (defaults to Vs from Machine Dictionary)
QMAX
Maximum reactive power output of the machine in per unit of RATING (defaults to QMAX
from Machine Dictionary)
QMIN
Minimum reactive power output of the machine in per unit of RATING (defaults to QMIN
from Machine Dictionary)
B.1.10 MWh Load Data Section

B.1.10.1 MWh Load Data - Unbalanced (types 5, 6, 15, 16)
NAME,KTYP,LZ,LC,EA,CA,PFA,KWA,EB,CB,PFB,KWB,EC,CC,PFC,KWC
END/ CONSUMER
Table B-16. MWh Load Data - Unbalanced (types 5, 6, 15, 16)

Data Item
Description
NAME
Node name
KTYP
LZ
Percent of load to be constant impedance (0. < LZ < 100.)
LC
0 for nonconcentrated load at the node

1 for concentrated load at the node
EA
CA
Phase A nominal MWh/month load
PFA
Phase A power factor of load
kWA
Phase A resultant kW after load converted (setting this value to zero will enable the program to calculate the equivalent peak load demand)
EB
CB
Phase A number of consumers
PFB
kWB
EC
CC
PFC
KWC
Confidential
B-13

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
B.1.10.2 MWh Load Data - Balanced (types 25, 26, 35, 36)
NAME,KTYP, LZ, LC, EA, CA, PFA, KWA
END/ CONSUMER
Table B-17. MWh Load Data - Balanced (types 25, 26, 35, 36)
Data Item
Description
NAME
Node name
KTYP
LZ
Percent of load to be constant impedance (0. < LZ < 100.)
LC
0 for nonconcentrated load at the node

1 for concentrated load at the node
EA
CA
Total MWh/month load
PFA
Average power factor for load
kWA
Phase A resultant kW after load converted (setting this value to zero will enable the program to calculate the equivalent peak load demand)
CB
Total number of consumers
PFB
kWB
CC
PFC
KWC
B.1.11 Capacitor Data Section

The total capacitor kvar is divided equally between the phases present at the node. On single-phase
nodes the capacitor must be specified with a positive value of CVAR to indicate a phase-to-ground
connection. On three or two-phase nodes the capacitor bank is connected as grounded-wye if
CVAR is positive and as delta if CVAR is negative. A negative value of CVAR does not indicate a
shunt reactor or inductive load.
Up to two capacitors can be placed at each node; one fixed and the other switched. The total capacitance at each node is the sum of the fixed and switched kvar used.
B.1.11.1 Fixed Capacitors

Data definitions are the same as the first five elements of data records for switched capacitors
(Section B.1.11.2).
NAME, TYPE, CVAR, STATUS, KVNOM
END/ CAPS
B.1.11.2 Switched Capacitors

NAME, TYPE, CVAR, STATUS, KVNOM, LOWR, HIGHR, REGN, STEP, PRIOR
END/ CAPS
B-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Construction Data Dictionary File Format
Table B-18. Fixed Capacitors or Switched Capacitors Data

Data Item
Description
Default
NAME
Node name
TYPE
Capacitor type code

(F)ixed or (S)witched
CVAR
Total nominal capacitor reactive power capacity connected at the

node; (units are kvar at KVNOM base voltage)
STATUS
Status of capacitor bank

0.0 out-of-service
*fraction of kvar used for switched banks only
1.0 in-service
1.0
KVNOM
Nominal voltage of capacitor bank; line-to-neutral assumed unless

flag set in system parameter data
Node base voltage
LOWR
Lower boundary of regulated range
0.95 pu
HIGHR
Upper boundary of regulated range
1.05 pu
REGN
Regulated node
Local node
STEP
Switching increment
1.0
PRIOR
Switching priority
B.2 Construction Data Dictionary File Format

B.2.1 General Information
The Construction Data Dictionary File contains the line characteristics that will be referred to in
reading data into the working case. Each line type is identified by a name of one to ten alphanumeric
characters; and is specified by one or more records as required. A branch that is a line or cable has
impedances in ohm/unit length and charging in micromhos/unit length. If the branch is a transformer, series capacitor, or series reactor, impedances should be in pu on kVA base and charging
must equal zero. When the branch is a switch, all impedances and charging must equal zero.
The Construction Data Dictionary gets read when a PSS/U file is opened. Users must have a copy
of the default construction dictionary (PTI.CON).
Each entry in the construction data dictionary file must contain the basic data record (Section B.2.4)
and may contain any required number of the following records: two-phase data records, if different
from three-phase values (Section B.2.5), one-phase data records, if different from three- or
two-phase values (Section B.2.6), rating data record (Section B.2.7), reliability data record*
(Section B.2.8).
Comment lines may be used anywhere in the Construction Dictionary. Comment lines begin with
an exclamation point (!) as illustrated below:
! string
where string can be any information.
B.2.2 Data Assumptions

If no values are entered for two-phase and one-phase, the three-phase value will be assumed.
* This data record is used only with the optional reliability module, it is ignored in PSS/ADEPT.
Confidential
B-15

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
If BC1 either or BC0 is absent, their default value is zero.

For lines or cables, impedances are in ohm/unit length and charging is in micromhos/unit length.
For transformers, series capacitors, or series reactors, impedances are in pu on kVA base and
charging must equal zero.
A1, A2, A3, and A4 are specified in amps per phase if the branch is a line, cable, or switch. For a
transformer, series capacitor, or series reactor A1, A2, A3, and A4 are given by:
Desired Rating
Base kVA
where
Desired Rating is an actual thermal kVA rating such as winter, summer, or

fans-running rating, and 'Base kVA' is the nameplate kVA rating of the
device. Note that for an open-delta transformer, the kVA rating is 57.7% of
what it would be if all three windings were present.
TAB characters are not allowed - use spaces only. The last line in the file must be: END/.
B.2.3 Typical Construction Dictionary Data Record

Using all the options, a construction data dictionary entry will look as follows:
NAME
*2
*1
*
*R
END/
R1, X1, R0,

R1, X1, R0,
R1, X1, R0,
A1, A2, A3,
, RP, SWT,
X0, BC1,
X0, BC1,
X0, BC1,
A4
PSS, M,
!
!
!
!
!
BC0
BC0
BC0
S
Basic Data Record

Two-phase Data Record
One-phase Data Record
Rating Data Record
Reliability Data Record
The first line must always contain valid entries. For example, if a wire named 'LINE1' is a single
phase construction only, the construction file entry will read:
LINE10, R1, X1, R0, X0, BC1, BC0
Only the first line of a construction dictionary data record is required; all other lines (*2, *1, *, *R) are
optional.
B.2.4 Basic Data Record

NAME, R1, X1, R0, X0, BC1, BC0
Table B-19. Basic Data Record

Data Item
Description
NAME
Construction type name, 1 to 10 characters/numbers; may not be an asterisk (*)
R1
X1
Positive-sequence resistance
R0
X0
Zero-sequence resistance
BC1
Positive-sequence charging admittance
BC0
Zero-sequence charging admittance
B-16
Positive-sequence reactance
Zero-sequence reactance
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

B.2.5 Two-Phase Data Records

(if different from three-phase values)
*2, R1, X1, R0, X0, BC1, BC0
Table B-20. Two-Phase Data Record
Data Item
Description
*2
Mandatory continuation record
R1,X1
R0,X0
Same as above
BC1,BC0
B.2.6 One-Phase Data Records

(if different from three- or two-phase values)
*1, R1, X1, R0, X0, BC1, BC0
Table B-21. One-Phase Data Records

Data Item
Description
*1
Mandatory continuation record
R1,X1
R0,X0
BC1,BC0
Same as above
Same as above
B.2.7 Rating Data Record

* A1, A2, A3, A4
Table B-22. Rating Data Record
Data Item
Description
Mandatory continuation record symbol
A1
A2
Rating one
A3
A4
Rating three
Rating two
Rating four
B.2.8 Reliability Data Record

This record is used only with the optional reliability module, DRA.
*R , RP, SWT, PSS, M, S
Confidential
B-17

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table B-23. Reliability Data Record

Data Item
Description
*R
Mandatory continuation record symbol, R signifies reliability data
Failure Rate of construction type in failures/unit length/unit time
RP
Repair Time of construction type in unit time
SWT
Switch time for switches only; given in unit time
PSS
Probability of Successful Switching; a value between 0 and 1
Temporary Failure Rate of construction type in failures/unit length/unit time
Storm Failure Rate of construction type in storm failures/unit length/unit time
Two-phase (*2) and one-phase (*1) data records must precede rating (*) and reliability (*R) data
records.
B-18
Confidential
Appendix C
Validation Criteria
C.1 Data Validation Criteria
Validation Criteria
Action When Reading

Data File
Action in
Property Sheet
System
System base 0
Set to 100
Require user fix
Default system voltage 0
Set to 7.2
Require user fix
Nominal voltage 0 or blank
Set to system default
Require user fix
Name not unique
Reject case
Require user fix
Embedded spaces, commas, /, in name
Reject case, will generate invalid

format since commas, spaces, / are
delimeters.
Require user fix
Node length < 0
Set to abs value of
Require user fix
Node orientation not equal to V or H
Set to H
N/A
Considered delimeters, will cause

invalid format of data file
N/A
Given construction type not referenced in

dictionary and impedances not given
Reject case
N/A
FROM and/or TO nodes do not exist
Reject case
Require user fix
Branch not of type L,S,T,SX,TS
Reject case
N/A

N/A
Reject case
Require user fix
Branch not of type L, S, T, SX, TS
Reject case
N/A
Nodes
Lines
Switches
Confidential
C-1
Validation Criteria
Data Validation Criteria
Validation Criteria
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Action When Reading

Data File
Action in
Property Sheet
Loads

N/A
Connected node does not exist
Reject case
Require user fix

N/A
Reject case
Require user fix

N/A
Reject case
Require user fix

Reject case
Will not happen
Rating (kVA/phase) 0
Set to system base
Require user fix
Branch not of type L, S, T, SX, TS
Reject case
N/A
Sources
Series Capacitors/Reactors
Shunt Capacitors
Nominal voltage (kV) 0.
Require user fix

N/A
Reject case
Require user fix
Regulated node not specified
Set to connected node
Set to connected
node
Vmax 0
Set to 1.05
Require user fix
Vmin 0
Set to 0.95
Require user fix
Vmax < Vmin
Interchange
Require user fix
Single-phase size 0
Set to 1/3 system base
Require user fix
Regulated voltage limit Vmax 0
Set to 1.05
Require user fix
Transformers
Regulated voltage limit Vmin 0
Set to 0.95
Require user fix
Voltage limits Vmax < Vmin
Interchange
Require user fix
Tap limit Tmax 0
Set to 1.10
Require user fix
Tap limit Tmin 0
Set to 0.90
Require user fix
Tap limits Tmax < Tmin
Interchange
Require user fix

N/A
Adjustment data record for transformer

branch missing
Create adj record with defaults, no

message
N/A
Missing ranch data record for transformer

adjustment data
Reject case
N/A
Reject case
Require user fix
C-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Validation Criteria
Validation Criteria
Data Validation Criteria
Action When Reading

Data File
Action in
Property Sheet

Reject case
Will not happen
Tap step 0
Set to 0.00625
Require user fix
Tap setting > Tmax
Set to Tmax
Require user fix
Tap setting < Tmin
Set to Tmin
Require user fix
Tap step > (Tmax-Tmin)
Set to Tmax-Tmin
Require user fix
Branch not of type L,S,T,SX,TS
Reject case
N/A
Set to system base
Require user fix
Rating (kVA) 0
Nominal voltage (kV) 0.
Require user fix

N/A
Reject case
Require user fix
Given machine type not referenced in

dictionary
Reject case
N/A
Qmax < Qmin
Interchange
Require user fix
ra < 0
Set to 0
Require user fix
Xd' < 0
Xd" < 0
Set to 0
Require user fix
Set to 0
Require user fix
Locked rotor resistance < 0
Set to 0
Require user fix
Locked rotor reactance < 0
Set to 0
Require user fix
Xd' < Xd"

Induction Machines
Interchange
Require user fix
Rating (kVA) 0
Set to system base
Require user fix

N/A
Reject case
Require user fix
Given machine type not referenced in

dictionary
Reject case
N/A
Nominal voltage (kv) 0.
Require user fix
ra < 0
Set to 0
Require user fix
Xd' < 0
Xd" < 0
Set to 0
Require user fix
Set to 0
Require user fix
Locked rotor resistance < 0
Set to 0
Require user fix
Locked rotor reactance < 0
Set to 0
Require user fix
Xd' < Xd"
Interchange
Require user fix
Confidential
C-3
Validation Criteria
User-Specified Network Validation Criteria
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
C.2 User-Specified Network Validation Criteria

Sources
More than one source in service
Positive-sequence source impedance = 0
Zero-sequence source impedance = 0
Two or more swing sources are specified on the same bus
Capacitors
Capacitor size = 0
Lines
Nominal voltage of FROM node not equal to nominal voltage of TO node
Positive-sequence impedance = 0 (X1 and R1 =0)
Zero-sequence impedance = 0 (X0 and R0 =0)
Line length = 0 (L=0)
Transformers
Nominal voltage of FROM node not equal to nominal voltage of TO node
Nominal voltage of machine not equal to nominal voltage of node
Positive sequence impedance = 0 (Xd = 0)
Subtransient impedance = 0 (X"d = 0)
Transient impedance = 0 (Xd = 0)
Induction machines
Nominal voltage of machine not equal to nominal voltage of node
Subtransient impedance = 0 (Xd = 0)
C-4
Confidential
Appendix D
Modeling
D.1 Nodes
Nodes are the connection points of a network (see Figure D-1). The connectivity of branch devices
(lines, cables, transformers, switches, etc.) are defined by a starting point (the FROM node) and an
ending point (the TO node). Similarly, shunt devices (loads, sources, machines, etc.) are situated
at nodes. There are two types of nodes within the Base Engine: single-phase nodes and
three-phase nodes. Internally, each three-phase node expands into three single-phase nodes, one
each for phases A, B, and C.
Single-Phase Node
Single Connection Point
A
B
Three-Phase Node
Connection Points for
Phases A, B, and C
C
98003
Figure D-1. Nodes
D.1.1 Three-Phase Node

Each three-phase node also has a nominal voltage and optional name, both of which are specified
when the node is added to the network. Whenever a three-phase node is created, three singlephase nodes are automatically generated, one each for phases A, B, and C. The three single-phase
nodes are given the same nominal voltage as the three-phase node but are left unnamed.
Confidential
D-1
Modeling
Sources
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.2 Sources
A source is generally used to supply (or remove) power to a network or to provide a reference
voltage. In some cases it serves as an idealized equivalent for a connecting network. There are both
three-phase and single-phase sources in the Base Engine. A particularly important type is the threephase swing source, which sets a voltage magnitude and angle reference for the system, and also
supplies/absorbs whatever power is needed to make power consumption and generation match in
the network. A swing source is so important that every network in the Base Engine must have a
swing source or a synchronous generator operating in the swing mode.
In a distribution system, a source is often used to represent the transmission system; doing this
removes the need to model the transmission itself. As an example, a source might be connected to
a distribution substation, with all the distribution feeders connected to the substation modeled in
detail. The source would represent the outside world, i.e., all the connections to the transmission
system.
D.2.1 Three-Phase Source

A three-phase source consists of three single-phase voltage sources connected in a Y. Each phase
has an ideal voltage source in series with an impedance. The source has the same voltage magnitude in all three phases; the voltage angle in the B/C phases is displaced 120/240 from the A
phase. The three series impedances are equal to each other. There can also be mutual impedance
between the phases. A three-phase source is often represented by its zero/positive/negativesequence equivalent, shown in (Figure D-2). There are two three-phase source types:
Swing
A swing source holds the positive-sequence voltage magnitude and angle

at the terminals to a designated value, e.g., 1.0 pu at an angle of 0. The
control is accomplished by changing the magnitude and angle of E, shown
in the figure Figure D-2. If the network is unbalanced, the phase voltages
at the source terminals may not have equal magnitude, nor may they be
exactly displaced 120 in phase. It is the positive-sequence voltage that is
regulated, not each phase individually.
As mentioned before, every network, or disjoint portion of a network
(island), must contain a swing source or synchronous machine operating
in swing mode.
Voltage-Behind-ImpedanceA voltage-behind-impedance source has a constant internal voltage

magnitude (kV) and angle (degrees). Another way to think of this source is
that it is the same as a swing source except manipulation of E is not possible; E remains at a predesignated magnitude and angle.
Key to Symbols:
D-2
Complex voltage behind positive-sequence impedance.
R1 + jX1
Complex positive-sequence impedance of the source.
R0 + jX0
Complex zero-sequence impedance of the source.
Rg + jXg
Complex grounding impedance of the source: the impedance, if any, that is

placed between the source neutral and ground.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Sources
E
R1
X1
Positive Sequence
R1
X1
Negative Sequence
Ro + 3 R g
Xo + 3 X g
Zero Sequence
98004
Figure D-2. Sequence Representation of a Three-Phase Source

A drawing of the three-phase source is shown in Figure D-3. The source can have a grounding
impedance Zg = Rg + jXg. The impedances shown in this drawing are the self impedance Zs and
the mutual impedance Zm. We have two ways of looking at the source, the zero/positive/negativesequence model and the ABC phase model. The two models are equivalent and the impedances
are related. The positive-sequence impedance Z1 = Zs Zm and the zero-sequence impedance Z0
= Zs + 2Zm. The negative-sequence impedance is equal to the positive-sequence, Z2 = Z1. With
the addition of a grounding impedance, the total zero-sequence impedance of the source is Z0 = Zs
+ 2Zm + 3Zg. Usually engineers use the terms positive and zero-sequence impedance rather than
self (Zs) and mutual Zm) impedance. Going along with that preference it is the positive and zerosequence impedances which the user specifies for the source. Internally, the Base Engine does the
conversion calculations and builds the three-phase source with self and mutual values.
Confidential
D-3
Modeling
Sources
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure D-3. Three-Phase Representation of Source
D-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Loads
D.3 Loads
Loads are the consumers of power in an electric network. The Base Engine contains both
single-phase loads and three-phase loads. Either falls into one of three categories:
Constant-Power Load Power consumed by a constant-power load remains constant

over the normal range of operating voltage. If terminal voltage dips too far however, the
power consumed by the load is decreased.
Constant-Current Load The power consumed by a constant-current load varies linearly with terminal voltage over the normal range of operating voltage. When voltage
increases, power consumed by the load increases; when voltage decreases, power
consumed by the load decreases.
Constant-Impedance Load The constant-impedance load is simply an impedance

and the power it absorbs varies as the square of the magnitude of the voltage at the
load terminals. It can also be used in some unexpected ways. By specifying the reactive power appropriately it can be a shunt reactor or shunt capacitor. Using a grounding
impedance with a constant impedance load acting as a shunt reactor allows modeling
of the special four-legged reactors used on high voltage systems. If a single-phase
delta connected constant impedance is specified with an outrageously large value of
power it becomes a shorting bar for connecting different phases together. The inventive
user can probably think of other non-conventional uses.
Both the single-phase load and the three-phase load are shown in Figure D-4. Either may be connected line-to-line or line-to-ground. There is no restriction on the number of loads that can be
placed on a node.
Key to Symbols on Figure D-4:
P + jQ
The complex power (kW, kvar) of a single-phase load at nominal voltage.
Pa + jQa
Pb + jQb
Pc + jQc
The complex powers (kW, kvar) of a three-phase load at nominal voltage for
phases A, B, and C, respectively.
Rg + jXg
The complex grounding impedance of the load: the impedance, if any, that is
placed between the load neutral and ground (for wye-connected three-phase
loads).
Confidential
D-5
Modeling
Loads
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
P + jQ
P + jQ
Single-Phase Load
(Line-to-Ground)
Single-Phase Load
(Line-to-Line or Line-to-Neutral)
Pc + jQc
Pc + jQc
Pb + jQb
Pa + jQa
Pa + jQa
Pb + jQb
Rg + jXg
B
B
Three-Phase Load
(Delta)
Three-Phase Load
(Wye)
98006
Figure D-4. Single-Phase and Three-Phase Loads
D.3.1 Single-Phase Load

As shown in the Figure D-4, each single-phase load exists in the network in one of two ways: (1) the
load is attached to two single-phase nodes (line-to-line or line-to-neutral), or (2) the load is attached
between one single-phase node and ground (line-to-ground).
D.3.2 Three-Phase Load

Power, both real and reactive, consumed by a three-phase load at nominal terminal voltage is specified separately for phases A, B, and C. As shown in Figure D-4, the three-phase load may be wyeconnected (line-to-ground or line-to-neutral) or delta-connected (line-to-line). Wye-connected loads
may have a grounding impedance.
D-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Shunt Capacitors
D.4 Shunt Capacitors

Shunt capacitors are used to increase the voltage at certain locations in an electric network by supplying reactive power (see Figure D-5). Shunt capacitors are often installed in discrete blocks that
may be switched into or out of service as needed. A separate device, a shunt capacitor controller,
is used to automatically switch blocks of capacitors into or out of service to maintain selected voltages within a control range.
kvarc
kvarc
kvarb
kvara
Rg + jXg
kvara
kvarb
Three-Phase
Shunt Capacitor
(Delta)
Three-Phase
Shunt Capacitor
(Wye)
98007
Figure D-5. Shunt Capacitors
D.4.1 Three-Phase Shunt Capacitor

The reactive power produced by the capacitor at nominal terminal voltage is specified separately
for phases A, B, and C. If the specified power is negative (reactive power is consumed) the device
is a shunt reactor. As shown above, the three-phase shunt capacitor may be wye-connected
(line-to-neutral) or delta-connected (line-to-line). Wye-connected shunt capacitors may have a
grounding impedance.
Confidential
D-7
Modeling
Shunt Capacitor Controllers
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.5 Shunt Capacitor Controllers

A shunt capacitor controller is used to switch banks of shunt capacitors into and out of service to
maintain a particular voltage within a control range. During a load flow solution, each controller monitors a voltage at one location in the network and switches banks of capacitors into or out of service
to control that voltage.
D.5.1 Controller for a Three-Phase Shunt Capacitor

The controller determines how much of a three-phase shunt capacitor is in service. The controller
must know which capacitor is being controlled and which voltage is being monitored. Various
options are set using the controller type:
D-8
The phase or phases whose voltage(s) are regulated.
Whether average, maximum, or minimum voltage is controlled.
Whether line-to-ground or line-to-line voltage is controlled.
Whether blocks of capacitors on different phases are switched independently or are

switched together (ganged).
Time delay, used if more than one device is controlling the voltage at a single node. For
example, if a transformer controller and a shunt capacitor controller are both regulating
the voltage at a particular node, and if the capacitor controller has a time delay of 0.0
and the transformer controller time delay is 1.0 (any number larger than 0.0) the capacitor controller will have command until the shunt capacitor reaches the limit setting. If
at that time the node voltage is still not within the specified range the transformer controller will take over. This example assumes that the two controllers were both trying to
hold the node voltage in the same range.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
D.6 Synchronous Machines

Synchronous machines are wonderfully complicated, although some people might not use that
adverb. They have a lot of use in power systems. The large generators at nuclear and fossil fuel
generating plants are synchronous machines. They are also used at smaller generating plants, i.e.,
being driven by steam turbines or diesel motors. In these applications the synchronous generator
is driven at high rotational speeds, usually either 3600 or 1800 rpm. In size, the generators electrical
capability extends from near 1,400,000 kVA (1400 MVA) down to 20 MVA or smaller. The machine
rotors are a steel cylinder with the field windings placed in slots on the rotor, called a round rotor
design.
Synchronous machines are also used as generators in hydro plants. In this case they are driven at
slower speeds (80 to 500 rpm), and have a different type of rotor design described as salient pole.
In the past hydro generators ranged in size from less than 1 MVA up to around 150 MVA. Now, however, there are units rated 700 MVA each in service.
Synchronous machines are also used as motors, usually in industrial situations. Motors do not
come in sizes as large as the big generators; they are available from less than 1 MVA up to around
100 MVA. They are available in a wide range of speeds. Synchronous motors have salient pole
rotors.
Applications using the Base Engine might model synchronous machines running in any (or all) of
the above three categories. Detailed modeling of synchronous machines is complicated for a couple
of reasons. First, in addition to the regular windings on the stator and rotor synchronous many
machines have additional windings called damper windings. These dampers may be explicitly
wound on the rotor or they may be implicit, for example circulating currents in an iron round rotor
cause the same behavior as damper windings. The presence of the damper windings, explicit or
implicit, results in a large number of impedances and time constants (reactance/resistance ratios)
needed to describe synchronous machines. The second reason for the complexity is that synchronous generators normally have a control system to adjust field excitation in response to network
changes, and the excitation system must also be modeled.
The Base Engine can model synchronous machines in considerable detail. For some applications
this is appropriate. For example, there is an extension of the Base Engine which calculates the time
dependence of the fault current from synchronous machines; the detailed modeling is needed to do
that. For other applications, such as loadflow and simple short circuit calculations, the detailed
model is not necessary. There are functions in the engine that assist in simplifying synchronous
machine use. We will start by considering the machine loadflow model.
Confidential
D-9
Modeling
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.6.1 Three-Phase Synchronous Machine

The three-phase loadflow model of the synchronous machine is shown in Figure D-6. The synchronous machine can be connected either wye or delta. Looking at the wye connection, it can be seen
that the machine looks much like a source; in fact a source is essentially just a simplified model of
a machine. The self and mutual impedances required are calculated by the Base Engine from the
data supplied for the machine. The alternate sequence representation of the machine for a loadflow
is in Figure D-7. Again, the sequence impedances are calculated from the supplied data. Because
the machine is rotating, the positive and negative-sequence impedances are not equal, as assumed
in the source model. If the machine is delta connected, the zero-sequence impedance is infinite.
During a loadflow simulation, the internal voltage E is adjusted to model what is happening inside
the machine. Just how the adjustment is made depends on what type was designated, swing, PV
or PQ as explained below.
Swing
The internal voltage E will be adjusted so the machine terminal voltage

stays at the magnitude and angle dictated. The adjustment will be made
only up to the machine capabilities (the limits of reactive power that the
machine can absorb/supply).
PV
The internal voltage E will be adjusted so the machine terminal voltage

magnitude stays at the dictated value and the machine absorbs the real
power specified. Again, machine capabilities limit the control.
PQ
E will be adjusted so the machine draws the dictated real and reactive
power.
If a network were modeled that had a large number of generators in it, normally only one would be
set as the swing machine; the others would then run as type PV. Motors usually do not have the
capability to control their terminal voltage, and would be set as type PQ.
Key to Symbols:
D-10
Complex voltage behind positive-sequence impedance.
R1 + jX1
Complex positive-sequence impedance of the machine.
R2 + jX2
Complex negative-sequence impedance of the machine.
R0 + jX0
Complex zero-sequence impedance of the machine.
Rg + jXg
Complex grounding impedance of the machine: the impedance, if any, that is

placed between the machine neutral and ground.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Figure D-6. Phase Representation of Synchronous Machine
Confidential
D-11
Modeling
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
E
R1
X1
R2
X2
Ro + 3 R g
Xo + 3 X g
Positive Sequence
Negative Sequence
Zero Sequence
98008
Figure D-7. Sequence Representation of a Synchronous Machine
D-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
D.6.2 Short Circuit Model of Synchronous Machine

The short circuit model of a synchronous machine is simple the voltage E (determined from a previous loadflow simulation) behind the machine subtransient or transient impedance (the user
specifies which is to be used). There are subtransient and transient impedances for both the d and
q axes (Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq).
There are five synchronous machines included in PSS/ADEPT that the user can select. The five
machines are shown in the table below.
Machine Number
Description of Machine
Large round rotor, 500 to 1000 MVA, fossil or nuclear.
Small round rotor, 200 - 300 MVA, fossil.
Hydro with damper windings (also used for motors).
Hydro without damper windings.
Combustion turbine, 50 MVA.
Confidential
D-13
Parameter
Xd
Xd
Machine 1
Machine 2
Machine 3
Machine 4
Machine 5
Description
.20 pu
.20
.20
.30
.10
d-axis subtransient reactance (pu)
.30 pu
.30
.30
.40
.16
d-axis transient reactance (pu)
2.0 pu
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.65
d-axis synchronous reactance (pu)
.21 pu
.20
.30
.60
.10
q-axis subtransient reactance (pu)
.30 pu
.50
.60
.60
.30
q-axis transient reactance (pu)
Xq
1.7 pu
1.4
.60
.60
1.6
q-axis synchronous reactance (pu)
ra
.002 pu
.003
.003
.003
.03
Armature resistance (pu)
r2
.02 pu
.02
.03
.03
.35
Negative-sequence resistance (pu)
X0
.05 pu
.09
.15
.15
.05
Zero-sequence reactance (pu)
tdo
.035 s
.03
.035
.046
.05
d-axis open circuit subtransient time constant (s)
7.0 s
6.0
6.0
6.0
7.0
d-axis open circuit transient time constant (s)
Xd
Xq
Xq
tdo
tqo
.035 s
.08
.046
.11
d-axis open circuit subtransient time constant (s)
tqo
1.5 s
.6
1.5
d-axis open circuit transient time constant (s)
Sat1.0
.1 pu
.1
.2
.1
.1
Saturation at 1.0 pu voltage (pu)
.4 pu
.4
.6
.6
.3
Saturation at 1.2 pu voltage (pu)
4.0 s
4.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
Machine plus turbine inertia constant (s)
rlr
.002 pu
.003
.003
.003
.03
Locked rotor resistance (pu)
Xlr
Rotor type
.20 pu
.2
.2
.3
.1
Locked rotor reactance (pu)
Round
Round
Salient
Salient
Round
Indicator of round or salient pole rotor
Damper?
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Indicator for damper windings present
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
Sat1.2
Modeling
D-14
The machine parameters for each of the machines are shown in the table below.
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
D.6.3 Simplified Synchronous Machine Modeling

For a loadflow, if the synchronous machine is operating within normal limits the impedances do not
matter. The machine will consume (power specified positive) or generate (power specified negative)
the specified power. It will also attempt to regulate the voltage magnitude at its terminal node or
other node, if one is specified. Regulation is accomplished by varying the reactive power consumed
by the machine, so it is important to get the maximum and minimum reactive power consumption
capabilities correct, or reasonably close to correct. The ability of a generator to absorb/supply reactive power is described by a set of generator capability curves; the curves are a sometimes complex
function of field current limits, armature current limits, stability criteria, intake air temperature, etc.
etc. In some cases the exciter may have control limits programmed into it. If the machine real power
is about 80% of the rating, then a reasonable set of maximum/minimum values is (.25, -.50) or perhaps (.30, -.60). The values indicate that the machine can supply more reactive power than it can
absorb. If the machine real power is already at 100% of rating, then it can probably neither supply
nor absorb additional reactive power. If there is no real power load on the machine, then obviously
the machine can supply more reactive power than when it was loaded.
For short circuit calculations the d- and q-axis subtransient and transient impedances are used, so
it is important to specify these as accurately as possible. Impedance ratios for the four can be seen
in the 5 synchronous machines supplied in the Base Engine. For a round rotor machine a general
assumption is Xd = Xq. Motors are generally salient pole machines with a damper winding
included to assist in motor starting, so Machine 3, hydro with damper windings is a good starting
place for a motor model.
For synchronous motor starting, the d-axis subtransient reactance Xd is used to calculate starting
current, so it should be specified as accurately as possible if motor starting simulations are to be
performed.
Confidential
D-15
Modeling
Induction Machines
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.7 Induction Machines

Three-phase induction machines are modeled using a full two-circuit (double cage) representation
of the machines rotor (see Figure D-8). Either real electrical power (kW) consumed by the machine
or shaft power (hp) produced by the machine must be specified. Electrical power consumed by an
induction motor is a positive number; electrical power consumed by an induction generator is a negative number.
Key to Symbols:
s
Slip (pu).
jX0
Zero-sequence reactance, (pu on machine kVA base).
Ra + jXa
Armature impedance, (pu on machine kVA base).
R1 + jX1
Impedance of the first rotor circuit, (pu on machine kVA base).
R2 + jX2
Impedance of the second rotor circuit, (pu on machine kVA base).
jXm
Magnetizing reactance, (pu on machine kVA base).
Ra + jXa
R2
+ j X2
s
R1
+ j X1
s
Positive
Sequence
jXm
Ra + jXa
R2
+ j X2
2-s
R1
+ j X1
s
Negative
Sequence
jXm
Ra + jX0
3(Rg + jXg)
Zero
Sequence
98010
Figure D-8. Sequence Representation of Induction Machine
D-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Induction Machines
D.7.1 Three-Phase Induction Machine

Terminals of induction machines may be connected line-to-neutral (wye) or line-to-line (delta). Wyeconnected induction machines may have a grounding impedance.
Parameters needed to characterize an induction motor are tabulated below. These data are not
readily available from machine documentation or from the machine manufacturers. Instead they
must be inferred from torque-slip, current-slip, and/or power-factor-slip curves, which are readily
available. Parameters representative of induction motors in the four National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) classes (A, B, C, and D) are also shown below. Machine parameters are
defined in Figure D-8.
Confidential
NEMA A
NEMA B
NEMA C
NEMA D
Ra
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
Xa
0.065
0.065
0.065
0.065
X0
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
Xm
3.400
3.400
3.400
3.000
R1
0.080
0.090
0.095
0.055
X1
0.057
0.025
0.050
0.045
R2
0.013
0.025
0.017
0.0
X2
0.100
0.031
0.031
0.0
D-17
Modeling
Lines
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.8 Lines
Lines (and cables) carry power over long distances (see Figure D-9). Both single-phase lines and
three-phase lines may be added to the network. A single-phase line is placed between two singlephase nodes, one each at the FROM and TO ends of the line. Similarly, a three-phase line is placed
between two three-phase nodes, one each at the FROM and TO ends of the line. The phases (A,
B, and/or C) actually present in a three-phase line are specified when the line is added to the network. Therefore, it is possible to construct three-phase lines that have conductors on one, two, or
all three phases.
FROM
Single-Phase
Node
Single-Phase Line
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Single-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Three-Phase Line with Three Phases
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Three-Phase Line with Two Phases
(Phase BC Shown)
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Three-Phase Line with One Phase
(Phase C Shown)
98011
Figure D-9. Single-Phase and Three-Phase Lines
D.8.1 Single-Phase Line

As shown in Figure D-9, each single-phase line exists in the network between two single-phase
nodes.
D.8.2 Three-Phase Line

As shown in Figure D-9, each three-phase line is connected between two three-phase nodes, one
each at the FROM and TO ends of the line. The phases (A, B, and/or C) that actually have a conductor are specified. A three-phase line therefore may have conductors for one, two, or all three
phases.
D-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Switches
D.9 Switches
When closed, switches are a short circuit between two nodes of a network; when open, a switch
has no impact on currents and voltages (see Figure D-10). Three-phase switches may be defined
in the network. A three-phase switch joins two three-phase nodes.
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
Phase ABC
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Phase AB
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
Phase BC
Phase CA
TO
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
Phase A
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Phase B
98012
TO
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
Phase C
Figure D-10. Three-Phase Switches
D.9.1 Three-Phase Switch

As shown in Figure D-10, a three-phase switch is connected between two three-phase nodes, one
each at the FROM and TO ends of the switch. The phases in the switch (A, B, and/or C) must be
specified for each switch. A three-phase switch therefore may have one, two, or all three phases
present.
Confidential
D-19
Modeling
Transformers
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.10 Transformers
Transformers consist of two or more magnetically coupled windings; the ratio of the number of turns
in the windings is the turns ratio(s) of the transformer. Transformers are used to raise or lower
voltage levels in a network, provide zero-sequence grounding, isolate sections of a network, and
regulate voltages. In PSS/Engines, two-winding transformers have two terminals, named FROM
and TO. Transformers have taps that change the winding ratio. Network voltages can be controlled
within a range by adjusting the transformer taps. Most transformers can be grounded through an
impedance on the FROM, TO, or both sides.
D.10.1 Transformer Node Connection

A transformer is connected to two three-phase nodes, one on the FROM side and the other on the
TO side of the transformer. Although the FROM and TO nodes have connections for three phases,
the phases actually present in a transformer can be specified, enabling three phase, two phase and
single phase banks to be modeled. The phasing that is specified applies to the FROM side of the
transformer; this will be explained in more detail below.
In PSS/Engines the transformer configuration can be seen in its name. For example, a delta-wye
transformer has the windings on the FROM side delta () connected and those on the TO side wye
(Y) connected. This convention has nothing to do with which winding is the "primary" or "secondary"
or which is the "high voltage" or "low voltage" winding. The user can consider either side the primary
winding, and either side of the transformer could be connected to the node with the highest base
voltage.
D.10.2 Transformer Taps

In the physical transformer the taps are in one or more of the windings. Taps can be either load
changing (they operate while the transformer is on) or non load changing (the transformer must be
removed from the network before the taps can be changed). The transformer taps in PSS/Engines
are in the TO side winding. The single exception is the wye-connected auto transformer, which has
taps on both windings. The taps are load changing, although they can also be locked at a particular
setting to model non load changing. A second method can be used to model non load changing taps
in the FROM side winding; the method is to specify a transformer FROM side voltage slightly different from the actual value.
D.10.3 Transformer Phasing

In PSS/Engines the specified phasing applies to the FROM winding. If the FROM side is wye connected, the connection is straightforward. If the phasing is "A" there is a winding connected from
phase A of the FROM node to ground (possible through a grounding impedance). There are no
other FROM side windings. Similar logic applies when B, C, AB, BC or ABC phasing is specified.
The logic is slightly more complicated when the FROM side winding is delta connected. A lagging
sequence nomenclature is used, i.e., A to B, B to C, and C to A. So, if the FROM side is delta connected and the specified phasing is "A" the winding is connected between the A and B phases of
the FROM node. If the specified phasing is "AB" there are two windings on the FROM side, one
connected A to B and the other connected B to C.
What windings exist on the TO side of the transformer? First, there are the same number of windings on the TO side as on the FROM side. If the phasing specification was "A" there is one winding
on the FROM side and one winding on the TO side; the two windings are of course magnetically
D-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformers
coupled. If both sides of the transformer are wye, or both sides are delta, as would be expected the
same winding exists on both sides.
When one side of the transformer is delta connected and the other wye connected the connection
depends on whether the TO side voltage leads or lags the FROM side voltage. As an example, consider the delta-wye transformer and the delta-wye -30 transformer. Both are transformers
connected delta on the FROM side and wye on the TO side. Suppose a delta-wye transformer is
created and "A" phasing is specified. This means that on the FROM side the winding is connected
from A to B. On the TO side the winding is connected from A to ground. If a delta-wye -30 transformer with "A" phasing is created, again the winding on the FROM side is connected from A to B.
However, to provide the required phase shift the TO side winding is connected B to ground. The
magnetic coupling polarity is also flipped, but this is done automatically and need not concern the
user.
D.10.4 Transformer Grounding

Transformer windings that connect to ground can have an external impedance inserted between
the transformer terminal and the actual ground connection. This impedance is called the grounding
impedance. Wye connected windings have grounding impedance capability, and in PSS/Engines
you can specify a grounding impedance for a wye winding. If no impedance is specified a value of
0 Ohms is used; with zero grounding impedance the term "solidly grounded" is often used.
Delta connected windings have no opportunity to meet the ground, so a grounding impedance is
not possible.
There are some special grounding cases, such as the auto transformers, the center tapped transformers, and the zig-zag transformers. These special situations will be discussed later.
Confidential
D-21
There are many transformers supported by PSS/Engines. The table below summarizes transformer types and indicates the availability of threephase, two-phase, and single-phase versions of the transformer. Each transformer type is described more fully in the sections that follow.
Transformer Type
Description
Single
Phase
Two
Phase
Three
Phase
The TO side is the series winding and normally the high voltage connection.
The FROM side connects to the common winding and normally is the low
voltage side.
Grounding impedance for the autotransformer is specified on the FROM side.
There is no grounding impedance on the TO side.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delta-Connected Autoregulator
Connected lagging (A - B, B - C, C - A. The TO side is the series winding, the

FROM side connects to the common winding. Usually connected with series
winding on the source side and voltage on the FROM side regulated.
Taps are on the TO side (the series winding).
The two-phase regulator is configured with a common neutral.
There is no grounding impedance is for this transformer.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Wye-Connected Autoregulator
The TO side is the series winding, the FROM side connects to the common
winding. Usually connected with series winding on the source side and voltage
on the FROM side regulated.
Taps are on the TO side (the series winding).
The FROM side grounding impedance is used for the regulator ground.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Center-Tapped Delta +30
The FROM side of the transformer is connected line-to-line with the winding
center point grounded through any grounding impedance specified on the
FROM side.
The TO side is connected line-to-line (delta). Tap changer is on the TO side.
Only comes as a single-phase unit; three-phase unit can be constructed by
placing two single-phase or one two-phase delta/delta units in parallel,
resulting in a three-phase delta bank with one-winding center tapped on the
FROM side.
There is no grounding impedance on the TO side.
Two impedance values are used to specify the transformer, the full winding
leakage impedance and the half-winding leakage impedance.
Yes
No
No
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
Wye-Connected Autotransformer
Modeling
Transformers
D-22
D.10.5 Summary of Transformers Types
Description
Single
Phase
Two
Phase
Three
Phase
D-23
FROM side.
The TO side is connected line-to-ground (wye) through any grounding impedance specified on the TO side. There is a +30 phase change across the
FROM side to the TO side. Tap changer is on the TO side.
Only available as a single-phase unit; three-phase unit can be constructed by
placing two single-phase or one two-phase delta-wye units in parallel resulting
in a three-phase delta bank with one-winding center tapped on the FROM side.
Yes
No
No
Center-Tapped Delta -30
FROM side. The TO side is connected line-to-ground (inverted wye) through
any grounding impedance specified on the TO side. There is a -30 phase
change across the FROM side to the TO side. Tap changer is on the TO side.
Only available as a single-phase unit; three-phase unit can be constructed by
placing two single-phase or one two-phase delta-wye units in parallel, resulting
in a three-phase delta bank with one-winding center tapped on the FROM side.
Yes
No
No
Delta-Wye -30
FROM side is an inverted-delta; TO side is a wye. Also represents a transformer with FROM side delta and TO side inverted-wye. There is a -30 phase
shift from the FROM side to the TO side of the transformer.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delta-Delta +180
FROM side of the transformer is a delta; the TO side is an inverted-delta.

There is a 180 phase shift from the FROM side to the TO side of the transformer. There are no grounding impedances.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delta-Delta
FROM side is a delta; TO side is a delta. No phase shift across the transformer. There are no grounding impedances.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delta-Wye +30
FROM side is a delta; TO side is a wye. There is a +30 phase shift from the
FROM side to the TO side of the transformer. There is grounding impedance
on the FROM side.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Modeling
Transformers
Center-Tapped Wye
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
Transformer Type
Description
Single
Phase
Two
Phase
Three
Phase
FROM side of the transformer is a wye; the TO side is an inverted-wye. There

is a 180 phase shift from the FROM side to the TO side of the transformer.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Wye-Delta +30
FROM side is a wye; TO side is an inverted-delta. Also represents FROM side

inverted-wye and TO side delta. There is a +30 phase shift from the FROM
side to the TO side of the transformer. There is no grounding impedance on
the TO side.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Wye-Delta -30
FROM side is a wye; TO side is a delta. There is a phase shift of -30 across
FROM to TO side of the transformer. There is grounding impedance on the TO
side.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Wye-Wye
FROM side is a wye; TO side is a wye.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Z-Wye -30
FROM side is a zig-zag; TO side is a wye. Only comes as a three-phase unit.

A grounding impedance can be specified for the FROM side; there is no
grounding impedance on the TO side. Taps are on the TO side. The auxiliary
resistance and reactance are used to specify the transformer zero-sequence
impedance looking into the FROM side. The phase-to-ground voltage on the
TO side lags that on the FROM side by 30.
No
No
Yes
Z-Wye +30

TO side lags that on the FROM side by 330 (leads by 30).
No
No
Yes
Z-Wye -150

TO side lags that on the FROM side by 150.
No
No
Yes
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
Wye-Wye +180
Modeling
Transformers
D-24
Transformer Type
Z-Wye +150
Description
Single
Phase
Two
Phase
Three
Phase
No
No
Yes
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
Transformer Type
impedance looking into the FROM side. The phase-to-ground voltage

on the TO side lags that on the FROM side by 210 (leads by 150).
D-25
Modeling
Transformers
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.11 Transformer Details

D.11.1 Wye-Wye Transformers
Both FROM and TO sides are wye-connected and any phasing (A, B, and/or C) may be specified.
Grounding impedances can be specified for either or both sides. A grounding impedance of 0.0
solidly grounds the neutral on the side the zero impedance is specified. A wye-wye transformer with
phasing ABC is shown in Figure D-11. This transformer is shown in considerable detail because it
is the first to be considered.
The winding dots show the polarity of the magnetic linkage; here they are shown for the B phase
winding, the others are left out to keep the diagram simpler. Zl is the leakage impedance, shown
here on the FROM side of the transformer, although it could be drawn on either side. Notice that the
transformer is connected to a three-phase node on the FROM and TO side. If instead of specifying
the transformer phasing as ABC, it was AB, then the C windings on FROM and TO would disappear.
However, the FROM and TO nodes would still have three phases, there would simply be no connection from the transformer to the C phase terminal of either node. Remember that except for the
AUTO_Y, taps are on the TO side of the transformer, as shown in the figure. The phases on the
FROM side are labeled ABC and on the TO side abc in our diagram, but there is no special significance to this. There is no phase shift across the wye-wye transformer.
The wye-wye +180 is the same as the wye-wye except the polarity dots on the TO side of the transformer would flip to the other side of the winding (actually either side could be flipped). Because
voltages and currents on one side of the transformer are flipped, there is a 180 phase shift across
the wye-wye +180.
There is another notational method that is sometimes used to specify transformers. The FROM side
uses a capital letter to specify the winding type and the TO side uses a small letter. This is followed
by a number which indicates the number of 30 segments by which the TO side lags the FROM side.
Figure D-11. Wye-Wye Transformer with ABC Phasing
D-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Details
D.11.2 Delta-Delta Transformers

These transformers are delta-connected on both the FROM and TO sides. Any phasing combination may be specified. A delta-delta transformer with phasing ABC is shown in Figure D-12. This
diagram is less detailed than the one above for the wye-wye transformer; the FROM and TO nodes
are not shown. The taps and the leakage impedance are also omitted. No grounding impedances
are shown, as they are not possible with a delta-winding. There is no phase shift across this transformer. With the delta-delta, the "A" phase connects between phases A and B of the node, the "B"
phase between B and C, etc.
The delta-delta +180 has the winding polarity flipped on one of the windings and there is a 180
phase shift across the transformer. In the alternate notation these are Dd0 and Dd6 transformers.
Figure D-12. Delta-Delta Transformer with ABC Phasing

For illustration, Figure D-13 shows a delta-delta with "A" phasing specified. The FROM side winding
goes from A to B on the FROM node, and the TO side winding does the same.
Figure D-13. Delta-Delta Transformer with A Phasing
D.11.3 Wye-Delta Transformers

For a wye-delta, the FROM side of this transformer is wye-connected, and TO side is delta. Any
phasing may be specified. A wye-delta with phasing ABC is shown in Figure D-14. There can be a
grounding impedance on the FROM side in the neutral of the wye-winding, but none is possible in
the delta-winding. There is a -30 phase shift across the transformer, e.g., the phase A phase-toground voltage on the TO side lags the phase A phase-to-ground voltage on the FROM side by 30 when the transformer is unloaded (there is no current through it). When there is current flowing
through the transformer there is a voltage drop across the leakage impedance and the phase shift
will not be exactly 30. This transformer is Yd1 in the alternate notation.
Confidential
D-27
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
It can be tricky to trace through the winding configuration to see the phase shift across the transformer. Sometimes drawing a phasor diagram helps. Or, in words, consider the voltage across
winding "A" on the FROM side. Since the winding is wye-connected the winding voltage is the
phase-to-ground voltage. Neglecting the turns ratio, the voltage across the "A" winding on the TO
side is the same as the winding voltage on the FROM side. However, the TO side winding is connected phase-to-phase, which leads the phase-to-ground voltage by 30. Therefore the phase-toground voltage on the TO side is 30 behind that on the FROM side. The preceding explanation
illustrates why a picture is worth a thousand words!
Figure D-14. Wye-Delta Transformer with ABC Phasing

Figure D-15 shows a wye-delta with phasing specified as "A" instead of "ABC". The winding on the
FROM side is now wye-connected, and the "A" winding is the one from the A phase terminal-toground at the FROM node. It is coupled winding on the TO side goes between phases A and B on
the TO node.
Figure D-15. Wye-Delta Transformer with A Phasing
D-28
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Details
Physically, the wye-delta +30 is the same as the wye-delta; the difference is just some changes in
the labeling of the terminals. Shown below (Figure D-16) is a wye-delta +30 with phasing ABC; the
transformer is the same as the TRAN_YD above, except the labels of the B and C phases have
been flipped on the FROM and TO sides.
Notice that if the wye-delta +30 was specified with B phasing instead of ABC, the winding on the
FROM side would go from phase B to ground, the same as with the wye-delta. However, the TO
side winding would connect between phase A and B instead of B and C as for the wye-delta.
Figure D-16. Wye-Delta +30 Transformer with ABC Phasing
D.11.4 Delta-Wye Transformers

The delta-wye is exactly the same transformer as the wye-delta, except the FROM and TO terminals have been flipped. The reason for offering both relates to the taps, which are on the TO side.
Choose the wye-delta if the taps are in the delta winding, the delta-wye if the taps are in the Y
winding. The delta-wye with ABC phasing is shown in Figure D-17.
Figure D-17. Delta-Wye Transformer with ABC Phasing

The delta-wye -30 is exactly the same as the wye-delta +30 with the labeling flipped. Choose
between the wye-delta +30 and delta-wye -30 according to which winding has the tap on the physical transformer you are modeling.
Confidential
D-29
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.11.5 Wye Autotransformer

The wye autotransformer has the windings of each phase stacked on top of each other. A drawing
of an wye autotransformer with ABC phasing is shown in Figure D-18. Usually, when an autotransformer is constructed, the windings are stacked with additive polarity, as shown in the figure. In that
case, the FROM side is the low voltage side and the TO side is high voltage. However, it is possible
to construct an auto with subtractive polarity, and it can be modeled in the PSS/Engines if the FROM
is the high voltage side and the TO is low voltage.
The wye autotransformer model has load changing taps on both sides of the transformer, i.e., separate taps in the series and common windings. One set can be used for load changing taps and the
other for non-load changing taps.
Any neutral impedance for the wye autotransformer is specified on the FROM side; there is no
grounding on the TO side. The phasing of the auto is straightforward. If an wye autotransformer
were specified with A phasing, the other two sets of windings would simply disappear. There is no
phase shift across the transformer.
Figure D-18. Wye Autotransformer with ABC Phasing
D-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Details
D.11.6 Autoregulators
The autoregulators, wye autoregulator and delta autoregulator are simply autotransformers with the
turns in the series winding a fraction of those in the common winding, for example 10%. The transformers are configured the same as the wye autotransformer, the FROM side connects to the
common winding and the TO side to the series winding. The taps are in the series winding, and the
tap mechanism can also flip the series winding back and forth between additive and subtractive
polarity (compared to the common winding). Usually the nodes on the FROM and TO side of the
regulator have the same nominal voltage. When the taps are set at 1.0 the transformer is a short
circuit (zero turns in the series winding).
These transformers usually have a current transformer (CT) and potential transformer (PT) in the
case with the transformer and tap changer, and operate with the voltage on the FROM side being
controlled. However, in PSS/Engines they can operate to control the voltage on either side.
The leakage impedance of the autoregulator is a function of the tap position; as already mentioned
with a tap setting of 1.0 the transformer is a short circuit. The maximum transformer impedance
occurs when all the turns of the series winding are in service, and actually is slightly different when
the series winding is in additive polarity compared to subtractive polarity. This leads to the situation
of what impedance should be specified when the transformer is added to the network, i.e., maximum, average, or what? This subject is discussed further later.
The wye autoregulator is essentially the same as the wye autotransformer and the user can refer
to Figure D-18 for the wye autotransformer. Any number of phases can be specified, there is no
phase shift across the transformer and any grounding impedance is specified on the FROM side.
The delta autoregulator is a little more complicated than the wye autoregulator. A diagram of an
delta autoregulator with ABC phasing is shown in Figure D-19.
Figure D-19. Delta Autoregulator with ABC Phasing
Confidential
D-31
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Notice the tap mechanism in the series winding and also that the series winding can be flipped. The
transformer impedance varies with the tap; the user enters a characteristic impedance Zc; as
already mentioned there will be more discussion of this later. Either side can be the regulated side,
although commonly it is the FROM side. The regulator is connected lagging, the first phase of the
regulator (the only one that would be there if the regulator was specified with phase A) has the
common winding connected between the A and B terminals of the FROM side, and the other two
windings are connected with the same logic. At the present time, PSS/Engines does not have a regulator with a leading connection.
The delta autoregulator is obviously line-to-line connected, and PSS/Engines will automatically look
at the line-to-line voltage of the node at which the voltage is being regulated.
Delta-connected autoregulators are often connected with only two phases, called an open delta
configuration. However, the connection is not what would be obtained from the above drawn delta
autoregulator with phasing ABC if one of the phases were simply dropped. Instead the two phases
are connected with the common windings at the same neutral point. If the user specifies AB, BC or
CA phasing for the delta autoregulator, the transformer will be configured with the common neutral.
This is shown in Figure D-20. The drawing has been simplified; Zc is not shown. Notice that the
second winding has been flipped from what it was in the ABC phased regulator; this allows the B
phase to go directly through. The first regulator, operating between A and B is still lagging, but the
second regulator is operating leading. Similar transformers will be obtained if BC (C phase goes
straight through) or CA (A phase goes straight through) phasing is specified.
Figure D-20. Delta Autoregulator with AB Phasing
D-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Details
D.11.7 Specifying the Impedance of the Autoregulator Transformers

The leakage impedance that should be specified for an autoregulator is called here the characteristic impedance. The impedance is derived considering how the leakage impedance is specified on
the transformer nameplate. It will probably be specified in one of four ways:
At maximum boost (maximum tap position with polarity the same).
At maximum buck (minimum tap position with polarity the same).
The average of the leakage impedance at maximum boost and the impedance at maximum buck.
The average of leakage impedances for all tap positions.
The procedure below is used to calculate the "characteristic" impedance (R and X) for an
autoregulator.
Calculate a tap range parameter () for the

transformer.
MinTap
= Max
--------------------------------------2
For example, a transformer with 10% regulation:
MaxTap = 1.1
MinTap = 0.9
0.9- = 0.1
= 1.1
--------------------2
If nameplate leakage impedance (Rnp and Xnp) is
given at maximum boost (maximum tap position).
Calculate the scale factor, .

2
(1 + )
= -------------------2
The characteristic resistance, R, and reactance,

X, needed for arguments 13 and 14 are:
R = R np
X = X np
given at maximum buck (minimum tap position)

2
(1 )
= -------------------2

R = R np
X = X np
Confidential
D-33
Modeling
Transformer Details

the average for maximum boost and maximum buck.
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1
= ----2

R = R np
X = X np
the average for all tap positions
or
If the condition under which the nameplate leakage
impedance (Rnp and Xnp) was obtained is unknown.
0.5
= -------------------------------------------------------1+
+ --------------- + 1n ------------
1
2
1
R = R np
X = X np
unknown

2
(1 )
= -------------------2

R = 0.005
X = 0.040
D.11.8 Center-Tapped Split-Phase Transformers

The center-tapped transformers are used to obtain split single-phase voltages, e.g., the 120/240 V
used for residential wiring in the United States. The FROM side of the transformer has the center
tapped winding, and is connected line-to-line, with the center point of the winding grounded. In the
120/240 residential example the line-to-line voltage would be 240 V, while the phase-to-ground
voltage for either terminal on the FROM side would be 120 V. Notice that the voltage relationship
(240/120 = 2) is different than the ratio of line-to-line to phase-to-ground voltages for the threephase system (3). There will be more discussion of this difference later. The center tapped transformers come only as single-phase units, A, B, or C. The TO side of the transformer, which has the
taps as usual, can be connected either delta or wye.
The center-tapped transformers are actually a three-winding transformers; they can be connected
to the network using only two nodes because the two windings on the FROM side are in series. A
two-winding transformer requires the specification of a single leakage impedance. A three-winding
transformer requires three leakage impedances to be specified. Two of the three impedances are
assumed equal to each other, so only two have to be supplied by the engine user. The first is the
full winding leakage impedance, with the full winding used on the FROM side, and the other is the
half-winding value. As you might expect this is obtained with only half the winding used on the
FROM side. Generally, the half-winding value is about 1.5 times the full winding impedance.
D-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Details
Consider first the center-tapped delta, with the TO side connected delta (line-to-line) as shown in
Figure D-21.
Figure D-21. Center-Tapped Delta with A Phasing

A grounding impedance can be used on the FROM side of the center-tapped delta; none is possible
on the TO side. Usually, you would not put two center-tapped delta transformers with different phase
specification (e.g., one A and one B) in parallel because the center taps would create a network
short and some high fault currents. You can construct a three-phase bank by paralleling a centertapped delta with two single-phase delta-delta units or one two-phase unit. The combination models
a delta-delta with ABC phasing, except one of the banks on the FROM side is center-tapped. A
drawing of this transformer is shown in Figure D-22.
Figure D-22. "A Phase" Center-Tapped Delta and "BC Phase" Delta-Delta
in Parallel to make a Three-Phase Bank
The FROM side of the center-tapped delta is connected to a three-phase node. As mentioned
before, in a three-phase system the ratio of line-to-line voltage to line-to-ground is 3. This transformer does not conform to that rule, and the nominal voltage on the FROM side must be specified
as the line-to-line voltage divided by 3. Therefore, in the 240/120 V example we have been discussing, the FROM side nominal voltage should be 138.6 V.
The center-tapped wye and center-tapped delta -30 transformers are similar to the center-tapped
delta. The difference is that on the TO side the winding is connected line-to-ground instead of lineto-line. A drawing of the center-tapped wye with A phasing is shown in Figure D-23. A grounding
impedance on the TO side can be specified for the center-tapped wye. Grounding impedances can
be used on both the FROM and TO sides.
Confidential
D-35
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure D-23. Center-Tapped Wye with A Phasing

The center-tapped delta -30 with A phasing is shown in Figure D-24; notice the only change is the
inversion of the TO winding.
Figure D-24. Center-Tapped Delta -30 with A Phasing

A three-phase bank with one winding center tapped can be constructed using either the centertapped wye or center-tapped delta -30 transformer as long as ZgTO = 0. For the center-tapped wye,
parallel it with two single-phase delta-wye units (or one two-phase unit). For the center-tapped delta
-30, use delta-wye -30 units in parallel.
D.11.9 Z-Wye (ZY) Transformers (Zig-zag)

The ZY transformers are three-phase only. Single and two-phase versions are not available. The
FROM side of the transformer is Z (zig-zag) connected and the TO side is Y (wye) connected. As
usual, the taps are on the TO (wye) side.
The ZY transformers are actually three-winding transformers. However, because of the winding
interconnections they can be placed between two nodes; the third node is not needed. Two impedances are necessary for the ZY transformer. The first is the normal leakage impedance the
transformer positive-sequence impedance. The second is the zero-sequence impedance looking
into the FROM (zig-zag) side of the transformer. This zero-sequence impedance is smaller than the
positive-sequence impedance.
D-36
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Details
The interesting feature of the ZY transformers is that the zero-sequence impedance looking into the
TO (wye) side of the transformer is infinite. This is completely different than the usual behavior of a
Y connected set of windings. In fact, the zig-zag winding on the FROM side makes the wye winding
behave as if it were a delta winding.
A grounding impedance can be entered on the FROM side of the transformer. Since the zerosequence impedance looking into the TO side is already infinite, addition of a grounding impedance
would have no effect, and so is not allowed.
Figure D-25 shows a diagram of the Z-wye -30 transformer; the phase-to-ground voltage on the
TO (wye) side lags that on the FROM (zig-zag) side by 30. Perhaps the easiest way to see this is
to examine the A phase voltage on the FROM side. Ignoring turns ratios for the moment, notice it
is the sum of the A phase voltage on the TO side plus the negative of the B phase voltage on the
TO side. Drawing the phasor diagram shows that the A phase voltage on the FROM side leads the
A phase voltage on the TO side by 30.
Figure D-25. Z-Wye -30 Transformer with Voltage on the TO Side 30 Behind FROM Side
Confidential
D-37
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.11.10 All Transformers Single-Phase, Two-Phase and Three-Phase

Transformer
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Wye-Wye
D-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Modeling
Transformer Details
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Wye-Wye +180
Confidential
D-39
Modeling
Transformer Details
Transformer
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Delta-Delta
D-40
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Modeling
Transformer Details
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Delta-Delta +180
Confidential
D-41
Modeling
Transformer Details
Transformer
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Wye-Delta
D-42
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Modeling
Transformer Details
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Wye-Delta +30
Confidential
D-43
Modeling
Transformer Details
Transformer
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Delta-Wye
D-44
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Modeling
Transformer Details
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Delta-Wye -30
Confidential
D-45
Modeling
Transformer Details
Transformer
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Wye
Autotransformer
D-46
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Modeling
Transformer Details
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Wye
Autoregulator
Confidential
D-47
Modeling
Transformer Details
Transformer
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Delta
Autoregulator
Center-Tapped
Delta
D-48
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Modeling
Transformer Details
Phase
Drawing
ABC
Center-Tapped
Delta
and
Two-Phase
Delta-Delta
Center-Tapped
Wye
Center-Tapped
Delta -30
ABC
Z-Wye -30
Confidential
D-49
Modeling
Transformer Details
Transformer
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
Z-Wye +30
ABC
Z-Wye -150
ABC
Z-Wye +150
D-50
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Tap Controllers
D.12 Transformer Tap Controllers

A transformer tap controller is used to adjust transformer tap positions to maintain a particular
voltage within a control range. During a load flow solution, each controller monitors voltage at one
location in the network and moves a transformers taps to control that voltage.
Confidential
D-51
Modeling
Series Capacitor/Reactor
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.13 Series Capacitor/Reactor

Series capacitors are sometimes used to increase the amount of power that can be sent over a line;
a series reactor is sometimes used to limit fault current (Figure D-26). Either can be modeled by
specifying a positive-sequence and zero-sequence resistance and reactance for the device. Reactance for a series capacitor is a negative number. Reactance for a series reactor is a positive
number.
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
Phase AB
Phase ABC
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Phase CA
Phase BC
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Phase A
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Phase B
98023
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Phase C
Figure D-26. Three-Phase Series Capacitors/Inductors
D-52
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Faults
D.13.1 Three-Phase Series Capacitor/Reactor

A three-phase series capacitor is placed between two three-phase nodes, one each at the FROM
and TO ends of the capacitor. The phases (A, B, and/or C) actually present in a three-phase series
capacitor is specified when the series capacitor is added to the network. Therefore, it is possible to
construct three-phase series capacitors that have capacitors on one, two, or all three phases.
D.14 Faults
Three-phase faults are applied at three-phase nodes of a network. There are three types of
three-phase faults: (1) line-to-line faults, (2) line-to-ground faults, and (3) line-to-line-to-ground
faults.
D.14.1 Line-to-Line Fault

The specified fault impedance Zf is connected line-to-line as shown in Figure D-27. Impedance
between adjacent phases is Zf. Either one, two, or all three phases may be involved in the fault.
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
B
Phase ABC
C
B
Phase A
Zf
Zf
Zf
B
Phase AB
A
Zf
Zf
B
Phase CA
A
Zf
B
Phase B
Zf
Zf
B
Phase BC
A
Zf = Fault Impedance
B
Phase C
98024
Figure D-27. Line-to-Line Faults
Confidential
D-53
Modeling
Faults
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.14.2 Line-to-Ground Fault

The specified fault impedance Z f is connected line-to-ground as in Figure D-28. Impedance
between any phase and ground is Zf. Either one, two, or all three phases may be involved in the
fault.
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
B
Phase ABC
B
Phase AB
B
Phase BC
Zf
B
Phase CA
A
Zf
Zf
Zf = Fault Impedance
Zf
B
Phase A
Zf
Zf
B
Phase B
B
Phase C
98025
Figure D-28. Line-to-Ground Faults
D-54
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Faults
D.14.3 Line-to-Line-to-Ground Fault

The specified fault impedance Zf is connected line-to-neutral as shown in Figure D-29. A grounding
impedance Zg is connected from the neutral point of the fault to ground. Impedance between adjacent phases is 2 Zf. Impedance between a phase and ground is Zf + Zg. Either one, two, or all three
phases may be involved in the fault.
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zg
Zg
Zf
Zg
Zg
Zf
Zf
B
Phase ABC
B
Phase AB
B
Phase BC
Zf
Zg
Zf
B
Phase CA
Zf
Zg
Zg
Zf = fault impedance
Zg = grounding impedance
Zf
B
Phase A
Zf
Zf
B
Phase B
B
Phase C
98026
Figure D-29. Line-to-Line-to-Ground Faults
Confidential
D-55
D-56
Confidential
Appendix E
NEMA Machine Classes
Three-phase induction machines are modeled using a full two-circuit representation of the
machines rotor (see Figure E-1). This model describes the steady-state equivalent characteristics
of an induction machine. Electrical power consumed by an induction motor is represented by a positive r1,s and r2/s resistive number. Electrical power consumed by an induction generator is
represented by a negative r2/s number.
ra
Xa
r1/s
r2/s
X1
X2
Xm
98061-1
Figure E-1. Induction Machine Equivalent Circuit

The key standard that specifies dimensions, ratings, and characteristics of motors manufactured in
the United States is covered by the National electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard
MG 1-1993, Motors and Generators. Standard NEMA-frame squirrel-cage induction motors are
given a NEMA class design letter.
The equivalent parameters that are needed to characterize an induction motor for various NEMA
class designs (A, B, C, D, and E) are shown in Table E-1. If the equivalent parameters are not available, they must be inferred from torque slip, current slip, and/or power factor slip curves, which are
available from the manufacturers. The standard NEMA class design induction machine parameters
are available to the user in PSS/ADEPT. The program default machine type is NEMA class Type B.
Confidential
E-1
NEMA Machine Classes
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table E-1. Impedance Values for NEMA Machines

NEMA Design
ra
Xa
Xm
0.03
0.03
0.05
0.05
0.03
0.08
0.09
0.08
0.05
0.10
2.8
2.8
3.0
2.8
2.8
r1
0.015
0.025
0.04
0.115
0.01
X1
r2
0.11
0.11
0.18
0.05
0.15
0.07
0.15
0.10
0.06
X2
R1r
0.06
0.04
0.01
0.0*
0.0*
0.0565
0.0753
0.117
0.161
0.0461
X1r
0.126
0.149
0.120
0.104
0.175
0.15
*NEMA Type D machine has a single cage. The value 0.0 disables
the second cage.
E-2
Confidential
Appendix F
Device Properties Summary
F.1 Network
Table F-1. Network Properties: System
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Circuit ID
Circuit ID
Character
8-character maximum,
no embedded blanks,
not currently used
Blank
Peak current (A)
Substation peak current
Real
number
Not currently used
0.0
Input voltage type
Input voltage units
Character
Line-to-line
Line-to-neutral
Line-to-neutral
Root node
Starting node for tracing the Character

network tree
Must be an existing
node in the network
First active (inservice) source

found in the
network
System three-phase
base kVA
System base kVA used to

Real
calculate source impedance number
None
1000
System standard
base voltage (kV)
Default node voltage if none Real

specified in node properties number
None
7.2 (LN)
System frequency
(Hz)
Frequency of the network
Real
number
None
60
Comments
Title lines and comments
Character
None
Blank
Confidential
F-1

Network
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table F-2. Network Properties: Reliability

Device Property
Definition
Substation name
Identifier for the substation

where reliability is to be
considered
Overhead failure
rate (failures/unit
length/yr)
Type
Default
8-character maximum, no
embedded blanks
Blank
How often the overhead line Real

fails per year
number
None
0.0
Overhead repair
time (hr)
Amount of time it takes to

repair the failed overhead
line
Real
number
None
0.0
Underground
failure rate
(failures/unit
length/yr)
How often the underground

cable fails per year
Real
number
Applies to construction
types starting with UG
0.0
Underground
repair time (hr)

repair the failed underground cable
Real
number
types starting with UG
0.0
Switch time (hr)

open a switch
Real
number
types which indicate a
switch (zero impedance
line section)
0.0
F-2
Character
Restrictions
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Nodes
F.2 Nodes
Table F-3. Node Properties
Device
Property
Definition
Type
Default
Name
Unique name identifier
Base voltage
Nominal base voltage (kV) Real

of the node. Line-line or
number
line-neutral based on the
input voltages defined in
network properties.
None
7.2
Description
Description
None
Blank
X position
x-coordinate of node on
the diagram
Real
number
None
x-coordinate of
drawn node
Y position
y-coordinate of node on
the diagram
Real
number
None
y-coordinate of
drawn node
Type
Bus bar type on the

diagram
Busbar, point
User selected from

Item Toolbar
Rotation
Busbar rotation in degrees Real

number
Does not apply to point

type nodes
Label
configuration
Identifies where node

label is placed relative to
the node point
List box
Does not apply to busbar

type nodes
1 (first quadrant,
horizontal text)
Visibility flag
Flag indicating whether

item is visible or invisible
on the diagram
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility flag

results for this item are
visible on the diagram
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Confidential
Character
Restrictions
12-character maximum, no Automatically

embedded blanks
assigned
F-3

Lines/Cables
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.3 Lines/Cables
Table F-4. Lines/Cables Properties
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
12-character maximum, Automatically

no embedded blanks
assigned
Phasing
Phasing of line section
Character
ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B, ABC

C
Line length
Length of line section in user- Real

defined units
number
None
Construction type
Reference to construction
type in the construction dictionary file
10-character maximum, Blank

no embedded blanks
Positivesequence
resistance
Positive-sequence resistance Real

specified in ohm/unit length
number
None
0.05
Positivesequence
reactance
Positive-sequence reactance specified in ohm/unit

length
Real
number
None
0.65
Zero-sequence
resistance
Real
number
None
0.1
Zero-sequence
reactance
Real
number
None
1.55
Positivesequence
charging
admittance
Positive-sequence charging
admittance specified in
S/unit length
Real
number
None
6.5
Zero-sequence
charging
admittance
Zero-sequence charging
admittance specified in
S/unit length
Real
number
None
4.0
Ratings (A)
Ampere ratings used to calculate overloaded lines
Real
number
Up to a maximum of 4
Assigned from
ratings can be specified construction dictionary or default
properties
In-service flag
Flag indicating whether line

section is in or out of service
Check box
None
In Service
Visibility flag
Flag indicating whether item

is visible or invisible on the
diagram
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag

results for this item are visible on the diagram
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-4
Character
1.0
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Transformers
F.4 Transformers
Table F-5. Transformer Properties: General
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
no embedded blanks
Automatically
assigned
Phasing
Phasing of transformer
Character
ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B,

C
ABC
Type
Transformer type
Character
Wye-wye
Wye-wye
Wye-delta -30
Wye-delta +30
Delta-wye -30
Delta-wye +30
regulator
Delta-delta
Wye-connected auto
regulator
Center-tapped delta
Center-tapped wye
Wye-wye with phase shift
Wye-auto
Nameplate
Rating
kVA rating of the transformer per phase
Real
number
None
1000.0
Real
number
None
0.0
Construction type Reference to construction

Character
type in the construction dictionary file
no embedded blanks
Blank
Tapped node
Node where the tapped side Character

of the transformer is located
no embedded blanks
Specified TO
node
Leakage resistance (fullwinding

resistance)
Leakage resistance (fullwinding resistance)

specified in per
unit
Real
number
Must be >= 0.0
0.008
Leakage
reactance (fullwinding
reactance)
Leakage reactance (fullwinding reactance)

specified in per
unit
Real
number
Must be >= 0.0
0.08
Half-winding
resistance
Half-winding resistance
specified in pu
Real
number
Must be >=0.0.
0.008
Half-winding
reactance
Half-winding reactance
specified pu
Real
number
Must be >= 0.0. For

center-tapped delta and
center-tapped wyetransformers, halfwinding reactance must
be > full-winding
reactance
0.08
Phase shift (deg) Phase shift (wye-wye with

phase shift transformers
only)
Confidential
F-5

Transformers
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table F-5. Transformer Properties: General (Cont.)

Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
FROM grounding Grounding resistance at the Real

resistance
FROM side of the
number
(grounding resis- transformer.
tance for deltaconnected auto
regulators)
None
0.0
FROM grounding Grounding reactance at the

reactance
FROM side of the
(grounding reac- transformer.
tance for deltaconnected auto
regulators)
Real
number
None
0.0
TO grounding
resistance
Grounding resistance at the Real

TO side of the transformer. number
None
0.0
TO grounding
reactance
Grounding reactance at the

TO side of the transformer.
None
0.0
Ratings (A)
Per-unit ratings used to cal- Real

culate overloaded
number
transformers
ratings can be specified
Assigned from
construction dictionary or default
properties
In-service flag
Flag indicating whether line Check

section is in or out of service box
None
In Service
Visibility flag
Flag indicating whether item Check box

diagram
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag

None
Visible (checked)
F-6
Real
number
Check box
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Transformers
Table F-6. Transformer Properties: Tap Control

Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Tap adjustment
Voltage adjustment setting
Radio
buttons
Taps adjusted indepen- Taps locked in

dently in each phase.
present position
Taps in all phases in
equal position.
Taps locked in present
position.
Transformer disconnected at both primary
and secondary (out of
service).
Tap setting in
Phase A
Phase A tap setting in pu
Real
number
Must be between minimum and maximum

tap settings
1.0
Tap setting in
Phase B
Phase B tap setting in pu
Real
number

tap settings
1.0
Tap setting in
Phase C
Phase C tap setting in pu
Real
number

tap settings
1.0
Maximum tap
setting
Maximum allowed tap adjustment setting in pu
Real
number
None
1.1
Minimum tap
setting
Minimum allowed tap adjustment setting in pu
Real
number
Must be less than max- 0.9

imum pu tap setting
Tap step
Tap step increment specified

in pu
Real
number
Cannot exceed maximum minus minimum

tap setting
0.00625
Load tap side
Side where load tap is located Radio

button
Valued for wye-auto

transformers only
TO side
Time delay
Identifies the order in which

the transformer controllers
operate
Must be > 0
Confidential
Real
number
F-7

Transformers
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table F-7. Transformer Properties: Regulation

Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Max voltage
Maximum controlled voltage in Real

pu
number
Must be greater than

minimum voltage in pu
Min voltage
Minimum controlled voltage in Real

pu
number
Must be less than max- 0.9

imum voltage in pu
Regulated node
Node at which the voltage reg- Character

ulation is to occur
12 character maximum, no embedded

blanks
Tapped/Untapped
side
Side of the transformer where Radio

the regulated node is located button
Specified only when

Tapped side
regulated node is other
than the transformer
terminal nodes (FROM
or TO)
Compensating
resistance
Compensating resistance
specified in ohm
Real
number
None
0.0
Compensating
reactance
Compensating reactance
specified in ohm
Real
number
None
0.0
PT Ratio
Transformer PT Ratio
Real
number
None
CT Radio
Transformer CT Radio
Real
Number
None
Load center node
Node where load center is

located
Character
Must be an existing
node
None
Transformer side
Side of the transformer where Radio

compensating Z is to be
button
calculated
None
TO side
F-8
1.05
Specified TO
node
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Static Loads
F.5 Static Loads

Table F-8. Load Properties: Rectangular Representation
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character

no embedded blanks
assigned
Type
Load type
Character
Constant power.
Constant current.
Constant impedance.
Constant power
Balanced/
Unbalanced
Specified load is a balanced

load or unbalanced load
Radio
button
Balanced
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Groundedwye/delta
Load connected as grounded Radio

(wye) or ungrounded (delta) button
Grounded-wye
Delta
Grounded wye
Phase A kW, kvar Actual load at phase A speci- Real

fied in real and reactive
number
power or total load for balTotal
anced cases
None
kW = 200
kvar = 100
Phase B kW, kvar Actual load at phase B speci- Real

number
power
None
kW = 200
kvar = 100
Phase C kW, kvar Actual load at phase C speci- Real

number
power
None
kW = 200
kvar = 100
Grounding
resistance
Grounding resistance (ohms) Real

number
None
0.0
Grounding
reactance
Grounding reactance (ohms) Real

number
None
0.0
In-service flag
Flag indicating whether load

is in or out of service
Check box
None
In service
Visibility flag

diagram
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag

Check box
None
Visible (checked)
kW = 300
kvar = 150
If a load is specified as balanced, only the total kW and kvar is specified. The application will
divide the load equally amongst the phases present. If a scale and power factor has been
specified in the Network Properties: Load Factors tab, the application will calculate the kvar based
on the kW entered and the specified scale and power factors.
Confidential
F-9

Static Loads
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table F-9. Load Properties: Polar Representation

Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character

no embedded blanks
assigned
Type
Load type
Character
Constant power
Constant current
Constant impedance
Constant power
Balanced/
Unbalanced
Specified load is a balanced

load or unbalanced load
Radio
button
Balanced
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Groundedwye/delta
Load connected as grounded Radio

(wye) or ungrounded (delta) button
Grounded-wye
Delta
Grounded-wye
Phase A S (kVA)
Actual load at phase A speci- Real

fied in kVA or total load
number
None
111.803
Power factor for Phase A or

total pf
Real
number
None
.894
Phase A pf
lead/lag

power factor is leading or
lagging
Check box
None
Lagging
Phase B S (kVA)
Actual load at phase B speci- Real

fied in kVA
number
None
111.803
Phase B pf
Power factor or Phase B
Real
number
None
.894
Phase B pf
lead/lag

lagging
Check box
None
Lagging
Phase C S (kVA)
Actual load at phase C speci- Real

fied in kVA
number
None
111.803
Phase C pf
Power factor or Phase C
Real
number
None
.894
Phase C pf
lead/lag

lagging
Check box
None
Lagging
In-service flag
Flag indicating whether load

Check box
None
In service
Visibility flag

diagram
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag

Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Total
Phase A pf
Total
F-10
335.410
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

MWh Loads
F.6 MWh Loads

Table F-10. MWh Load Properties
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
no embedded blanks
Automatically
assigned
Category
Load category
Integer
number
1-4
Balanced/
unbalanced
Specified load as
balanced or unbalanced
Radio
button
Balanced
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Grounded-wye
delta
Load connected as
grounded (wye) or
ungrounded (delta)
Radio
button
Grounded-wye delta
Grounded-wye
Result display
Specify result display as

constant power or constant
impedance portion
Radio
button
Constant power
Constant impedance
Constant power
Seasonal
If checked, MWh loads are

seasonal
Check box
None
Non-seasonal
Concentrated at
the node
If checked, MWh loads are

concentrated at the node
Check box
None
Concentrated at
the node
Percent constant
impedance
Specify percentage of load

that is constant impedance
Real
number
None
0%
Phase A
MWh/month
MWh/month on Phase A
Real
number
None
100
Phase B
MWh/month
MWh/month on Phase B
Real
number
None
100
Phase C
MWh/month
MWh/month on Phase C
Real
number
None
100
Phase A number
of consumers
Number on consumers on
Phase A
Real
number
None
10
Phase B number
of consumers
Phase B
Real
number
None
10
Phase C number
of consumers
Phase C
Real
number
None
10
Phase A pf
Power factor or Phase A
Real
number
None
1.0
Phase B pf
Power factor or Phase B
Real
number
None
1.0
Phase C pf
Power factor or Phase C
Real
number
None
1.0
Resultant kW Phase A
Resultant kW - Phase A
Real
number
None
0.0
Resultant kW Phase B
Resultant kW - Phase B
Real
number
None
0.0
Resultant kW Phase C
Resultant kW - Phase C
Real
number
None
0.0
Confidential
F-11

MWh Loads
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table F-10. MWh Load Properties (Cont.)

Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
In-service flag
Flag indicating whether load Check box

None
In service
Visibility flag
Flag indicating whether item Check box

diagram
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag

None
Visible (checked)
F-12
Check box
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Source
F.7 Source
Table F-11. Source Properties
Device Property
Definition
Type
Name
Character
Scheduled
voltage (pu of
nominal)
Open circuit voltage of the Real

source node in pu of nom- number
inal voltage
Restrictions
Default
no embedded blanks
Automatically
assigned
None
Node voltage
specified at the
source node
location in pu
Base rating (kVA) The kVA rating of the

source
Real
number
None
System base kVA

as specified in
Network Properties
Source angle
The source angle in

degrees
Real
number
Greater than or equal to

180 and less than or
equal to 360
0.0
Positivesequence
resistance
Positive-sequence source Real

thevenin resistance in pu number
on the system kVA base
None
0.0
Positivesequence
reactance
Positive-sequence source Real

thevenin reactance in pu
number
None
0.001
Zero-sequence
resistance
Zero-sequence source
thevenin resistance in pu
Real
number
None
0.0
Zero-sequence
reactance
Zero-sequence source
thevenin reactance in pu
Real
number
None
0.001
Grounding
resistance
Grounding resistance in
ohms of the source
Real
number
None
0.0
Grounding
reactance
Grounding reactance in
ohms of the source
Real
number
None
0.0
In-service flag

source is in or out of
service
Check box
None
In service
Visibility flag

on the diagram
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag

Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Confidential
F-13

Induction Machines
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.8 Induction Machines

Table F-12. Induction Machines: General
Device Property
Name
Definition
Restrictions
Default
Character
12-character maximum, no Automatically

embedded blanks
assigned
Real electrical
Total real electrical power
power at machine at machine terminal
input terminal
(kW)
Real
number
A negative load value indicates a generator
Mechanical power Mechanical power at

at machine shaft machine shaft (kW or hp)
(hp or kW)
Real
number
Mechanical rating Mechanical rating of the

(shaft output)
machine
Real
number
None
200
Rated (nominal)
terminal voltage
(kV)
Nominal voltage of the

machine specified in kV
line-line or line-neutral
depending on network
property for input voltage
flag
Real
number
None
Nominal voltage
of the node
where the
machine is
located
Grounding
resistance
Grounding resistance
(ohms)
Real
number
None
0.0
Grounding
reactance
Grounding reactance
(ohms)
Real
number
None
0.0
In-service flag

induction machine is in or
out of service
Check box
None
In service
Visibility flag

on the diagram
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag

Check box
None
Visible
(checked)
F-14
Type
100
100
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Induction Machines
Table F-13. Induction Machines: Impedances

Device Property
Definition
Type
Specifies NEMA machine A,

B, C, D, E
Check box
None
NEMA Type B
List box
AY
Locked rotor
resistance
Locked rotor resistance in pu Real

number
None
0.0753
Locked rotor
reactance
Locked rotor reactance in pu
Real
number
None
0.149
Armature
resistance
Machines resistance at synchronous speed in pu
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
0.03
Armature
reactance
Machines reactance at synchronous speed in pu
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
0.09
Magnetizing
reactance
Machines magnetizing reactance in pu
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
2.8
Inner cage
resistance
Inner cage resistance in pu
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
0.025
Inner cage
reactance
Inner cage reactance in pu
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
0.11
Outer cage
resistance
Outer cage resistance in pu
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
0.15
Outer cage
reactance
Outer cage reactance in pu
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
0.04
Sub transient
reactance
Sub transient reactance in pu Real

number
Noneditable calculated value
0.119029
Transient
reactance
Transient reactance in pu
Noneditable calculated value
0.195841
NEMA
Locked rotor code NEMA locked rotor code

letter
Restrictions
Real
number
Default
Table F-14. Induction Machines: Start-Up

Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Use auto transformer flag
Flag indicating whether to

Check box
connect the starting machine
with a series auto transformer
starter
None
No auto transformer connected
Starting transformer resistance
The resistance of the transformer at the maximum tap

setting in pu
Real
number
None
0.01
Starting transformer reactance
The reactance of the transformer at the maximum tap

setting in pu
Real
number
None
0.05
Starting transformer tap
The starting transformer tap

position to be used in the
motor starting calculation
specified in pu
Real
number
Used only if the flag

to use an auto transformer has been
selected
1.0
Confidential
F-15

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.9 Synchronous Machines

Table F-15. Synchronous Machines: General
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
12-character
maximum, no
embedded blanks
Machine type
Machine type
List box
Constant power PV PV machine

machine, swing
source
Connection
Wye or delta machine
Radio
button
N/A
Wye
Regulated node
Node which machine

regulates
List box
N/A
Node when machine is

located
Total real power

consumed/
delivered
Total real electrical power Real

consumed by the machine number
A negative load
value indicates a
generator.
500
Nominal machine
size
Size of the machine in

kVA
Real
number
None
500 or value in the

Machine Dictionary corresponding to given
machine type
Nominal machine
voltage

flag
Real
number
None

node where the machine
is located
Scheduled real
power consumed
Real power consumed/delivered in kW
Real
number
Valid for PV and

constant power
500.0
Scheduled
reactive power
consumed
Reactive power consumed Real

in kvar
number
Valid for constant

power machine
types
-0.5
Scheduled
voltage
Scheduled terminal
Real
voltage to be held by the
number
machine voltage regulator
in pu of the node base
voltage
None
1.0 or value in the

machine type
Scheduled
voltage angle
Scheduled voltage angle

in degrees
Valid for swing

source machine
types
0.0
Max reactive
power
Maximum power output of Real

the machine in pu of the
number
nominal rating of the
machine
None
0.5 or value in the

machine type
Min reactive
power
Minimum power output of

the machine in pu of the
nominal rating of the
machine
Real
number
None
-0.5 or value in the

machine type
Grounding
resistance
Grounding resistance of
the synchronous machine
Real
number
None
0.0
F-16
Real
number
Automatically assigned
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Table F-15. Synchronous Machines: General (Cont.)

Device Property
Definition
Grounding
reactance
Grounding reactance of
the synchronous machine
In-service flag
Type
Default
None
0.0
Check box
synchronous machine is in
or out of service
None
In service
Visibility flag

on the diagram
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag

check box
None
Visible (checked)
Confidential
Real
number
Restrictions
F-17

PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table F-16. Synchronous Machines: Impedances

Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Impedance Model Steam Turbine - large

Steam Turbine - small
Hydro with damper
Hydro without damper
Combustion Turbine
Custom
List box
N/A
Steam turbine - small
Rotor type
Round rotor
Salient Pole
List box
Valid for custom

types
Round rotor
Machine has
damper winding
N\A
Cleck box
Valid for custom

types and salient
pole rotor types
Not checked
Subtransient
reactance
Subtransient reactance in
pu
Real
number
Valid for custom

types
0.2 D-axis
0.2 Q-axis
Transient
reactance
Transient reactance in pu
Real
number
Valid for custom

types
0.3 D-axis
0.5 Q-axis
Synchronous
reactance
Synchronous reactance in Real

pu
number
Valid for custom

types
1.5 D-axis
1.4 Q-axis
Open circuit
subtransient
Open circuit subtransient

time constant (sec)
Real
number
Valid for custom

types
0.03 D-axis
0.08 Q-axis
Open circuit
transient
Open circuit transient time Real

constant (sec)
number
Valid for custom

types
6 D-axis
0.6 Q-axis
Armature
resistance
Machine resistance at
synchronous speed in pu
Real
number
Valid for custom

types
.003
Negativesequence
resistance
Negative-sequence resistance in pu
Real
number
Valid for custom

types
0.02
Locked rotor
resistance
Locked rotor resistance of Real

the machine in pu
number
Noneditable
.003
Locked rotor
reactance
Locked rotor reactance of

the machine in pu
Real
number
Noneditable
0.2
Zero-sequence
reactance
of the machine in pu
Real
number
Noneditable
0.09
Grounding
resistance
Grounding resistance in
ohms
Real
number
Valid for custom

types
Grounding
reactance
Grounding reactance in
ohms
Real
number
Valid for custom

types
Saturation
coefficient
Saturation coefficient at
1.0 pu and 1.2 pu
Real
number
Valid for custom

types
0.1 at 1.0 pu
0.4 at 1.2 pu
Inertia constant
Mechanical inertia constant (sec)
Real
number
Valid for custom

types
F-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Table F-17. Synchronous Machines: Start-Up

Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Use auto transformer flag

Check box
connect the starting machine
with a series auto transformer starter
None
No auto transformer
connected
Starting transformer resistance
The resistance of the transformer at the maximum tap

setting in pu
Real
number
Non-editable
0.01 or value in the

Machine Dictionary
corresponding to given
machine type
Starting transformer reactance
The reactance of the transformer at the maximum tap

setting in pu
Real
number
Non-editable
0.05 or value in the

Machine Dictionary
machine type
Starting transformer tap
The starting transformer tap

position to be used in the
motor starting calculation
specified in pu
Real
number
Used only if the

flag to use an auto
transformer has
been selected.
1.0 or value in the

Machine Dictionary
machine type
Confidential
F-19

Shunt Capacitors
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.10 Shunt Capacitors

Table F-18. Shunt Capacitor Properties
Device Property
Name
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Character
no embedded blanks
Automatically
assigned
Real
number
None
Nominal voltage
of the node
where the
machine is
located
Reactive power
capacity
Capacitor reactive power

Real
capacity generated at nom- number
inal voltage (kvar)
None
100
300 total
Type
Type of the capacitor bank
Radio
button
Fixed
Switched
Fixed
Connection
Capacitor connection type
Radio
button
Delta
Wye
Wye
Balance
Balanced or unbalanced
capacitor bank
Radio
button
Balanced
Unbalanced
Balanced
Minimum regulated voltage
Lower boundary of regulated voltage range in pu
Real
number
Specified for switched

0.95
capacitor banks only, must
be less than maximum
regulated voltage
Maximum regulated voltage
Upper boundary of regulated voltage range in pu
Real
number
Specified for switched

1.05
capacitor banks only, must
be greater than minimum
regulated voltage
Regulated node
The node where the voltage List box

regulation occurs
selection
May be any node in the

system
The node where

the capacitor is
located
Switching
increment
How much kvar should be

placed at the node
Real
number
Used only when load flow

analysis option to switch
capacitors is selected
1.0
Switching priority
Order in which the capacitor is to be switched on
Integer
number
Not currently used
Fraction switched
in
Fraction of capacitor kvar in Real

use
number
May be adjusted by load

flow solution if the switch
capacitors option is
selected
1.0
Ungrounded
When checked, indicates

the shunt capacitor is solidly grounded
None
Grounded (not
checked)
Grounding
resistance
Grounding resistance of the Real

capacitor
number
None
0.0
Grounding
reactance
Grounding reactance of the Real

capacitor
number
None
0.0
Nominal voltage of Nominal voltage of the

capacitor bank
flag
F-20
Check box
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Shunt Capacitors
Table F-18. Shunt Capacitor Properties (Cont.)

Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Time delay
Identifies the order in which Real

the capacitor
number
controllers operate
Must be > 0
In-service flag

capacitor bank is in or out
of service
Capacitor bank may be in

service even though the
fraction switched in may
be specified as zero.
In service
Visibility flag

Check box
item is visible or invisible on
the diagram
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag

None
Visible
(checked)
Confidential
Check box
Check box
F-21

Switches
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.11 Switches
Table F-19. Switch Properties
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
no embedded blanks
Automatically
assigned
Phasing
Phasing of switch
Character
ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B,

C
ABC
Switch ID
Identifier for the switch
Character
no embedded blanks.
Not currently used, provided for raw data file
compatibility
Blank
Construction type
type in the construction
dictionary file
Character
no embedded blanks.
compatibility.
Blank
Ratings (A)
Ampere ratings used to

calculate overloaded
switches
Real
number
Assigned from construction dictionary

or default
properties
Tie switch flag

this switch is a tie switch
Check box

compatibility.
A normal switch
(unchecked).
Connection circuit Circuit to which a tie

switch is connected
Character
no embedded blanks.
compatibility. Used only
when a tie switch is
specified.
0.95
Status
Indicates whether the

switch is open or closed
Radio
button
Open
Closed
Closed
TOPO status
Specifies whether
Radio
switches are allowed to
button
freely open or close during
TOPO analysis
Not currently used, provided for raw data

compatibility for the tie
open point optimization
module
Locked
Visibility flag

on the diagram
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag

Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

F.12 Series Capacitors/Reactors

Table F-20. Series Capacitors/Reactors Properties
Device Property
Definition
Name
Phasing
Phasing of transformer
Type
Character
Restrictions
no embedded blanks
Default
Automatically
assigned
Character
ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B, C ABC
Nameplate Rating kVA rating per phase
Real
number
None
333.33
Construction type
type in the construction
dictionary file
Character
no embedded blanks
Blank
Positivesequence
resistance
Positive-sequence resistance specified in pu
Real
number
None
0.0
Positivesequence
reactance
Positive-sequence reactance specified in pu
Real
number
Negative value indicates

series capacitor. Positive
value indicates series
reactor.
-0.005
Zero-sequence
resistance
Zero-sequence resistance specified in pu
Real
number
None
0.0
Zero-sequence
reactance
specified in pu
Real
number
Negative value indicates

series capacitor. Positive
value indicates series
reactor.
-0.005
Ratings (A)
Per-unit ratings used to

calculate overloaded
series devices
Real
number
Assigned from
construction dictionary or default
properties
In-service flag

series capacitor/reactor is
in or out of service
Check box
Capacitor bank may be in In Service

service even though the
fraction switched in may
be specified as zero.
Visibility flag

on the diagram
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag

Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Confidential
F-23

Standard Faults
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.13 Standard Faults

Table F-21. Fault Properties
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
None
Automatically
assigned
Type
Fault type
List box
selection
Three-phase-to-ground
Phase-to-ground
Phase-to-ground
through an impedance
Phase-to-phase
Phase-to-phase-toground
Ungrounded
three-phase
Three-phase-toground
Phasing
Phase at which fault

occurs
List box
selection
Applies to fault types that

are not three-phase
In-service flag

fault is in or out of service
Check box
None
In Service
Visibility flag

on the diagram
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag

Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Protection Equipment
F.14 Protection Equipment

Table F-22. Protection Equipment Properties
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
None
Automatically
assigned
Description
Text describing protection Character

equipment
None
Blank
Branch
Branch location of protection equipment
Character
Noneditable
Location
Node location of protection equipment
Character
Noneditable
Selected device
list
List containing the protection equipment
Available device
list
List box
List containing available
devices that are currently
in the equipment database
Sort fields
Fields used to sort the

available device list
List box
Add sort field
Select list used to select

sort field
List box
Visibility flag

on the diagram
Check box
Confidential
Must be device from

supplied database
Blank
None
Visible
F-25

Fuses
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.15 Fuses
Table F-23. Fuses: General
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Name of the fuse
Character
None
Branch
Branch location of fuse
Character
Noneditable
Damage multiplier Used as a multiplier on

current to simulate a fuse
damage curve
Real
Number
None
1.0
Show I2T curve

show I2T (I-squared-T)
curve for the fuse
Check box
None
Un-checked (do not

show I2T curve)
Description
Identifier for fuse
Character
None
Manufacturer,
model rating
Visible
Indicator specifying
whether to show device
curve on plot
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Disabled

calculate and report operating time of the device
Check box
None
Un-checked
(enable operating
time calculations)
Table F-24. Fuses: Plot Options

Device Property
Definition
Plot color
Color of curve plot
Current multiple
Type
Default
Color palette
Red
Multiplier to use for current Real

number
None
1.0
Time multiple
Multiplier to use for time
Real
number
None
1.0
Time adder
Adder to use for time
Real
number
None
0.0
F-26
Color
window
Restrictions
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Over Current Relays
F.16 Over Current Relays

Table F-25. Over Current Relays: General
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Name
Name of the relay
Character
None
Branch
Branch location of relay
Character
Noneditable
Phasing
Indicates what phase current is used to calculate

operating time
List box
Description
Identifier for relay
Character
Time dial
Time dial setting
List or
slider
control
Pickup
Pickup (tap) setting
List or
slider
control
Instantaneous
Instantaneous setting
List or
slider
control
Primary Ct
Ct setting - primary
Secondary Ct
Instantaneous
operation time
Default
Max-phase
None
Manufacturer,
model, time char,
available tap
settings
Real
number
None
100
Ct setting - secondary
Real
number
None
5.0
Operation time for instantaneous (sec)
Real
number
Must be > 0
0.02
Multiple of pu flag Used to select/enter

instantaneous setting in
multiple of pickup (Tap)
Check box
Not checked
Instantaneous
setting specified in
Amps
Disable flag
Used to disable instantaneous portion of relay
Check box
Not checked
(enabled)
Visible
curve on plot
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Disabled

Check box
None
Un-checked
(enable operating
time calculations)
Confidential
F-27

Over Current Relays
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table F-26. Over Current Relays: Plot Options

Device Property
Definition
Plot color
Color of curve plot
Current multiple
Type
Default
Color palette
Red

number
None
1.0
Time multiple
Real
number
None
1.0
Time adder
Real
number
None
0.0
F-28
Color
window
Restrictions
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Transformer Damage
F.17 Transformer Damage

Table F-27. Transformer Damage Curves: General
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Transformer damage
curve name
Character
None
Blank
Description
Identifier for transformer

damage curve
Character
None
kVA rating,
category
3 Phase Rating
(kVA)
Nameplate rating
Real
number
None
kVA rating of the

transformer branch
<or> 1000
Inrushmultiplier
flag
If checked, inrush current

is displayed as point on
TCC curve
Real
number
None
ANSI factor
ANSI factor flag. If

checked factor is used to
determine damage curve
Real
number
None
Phasing
Transformer phasing
List box
None
Phasing of the
transformer branch
or <ABC>
Transformer
impedance (R1,
X1, R0, X0)
Transformer positive and Real

zero sequence impedance number
None
Impedance of the
transformer branch
or R1 = 0.01, X1 =
0.057, R0 = 0.01,
X0 = .057
System impedSystem (source) positive

ance (R1, X1, R0, and zero sequence
X0)
impedance
Real
number
None
Source impedance. If no source,

values default to 0.
Visible
curve on plot
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Disabled

Check box
None
Un-checked
(enable operating
time calculations)
Confidential
F-29

Transformer Damage
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table F-28. Transformer Damage Curve: Plot Options

Device Property
Definition
Plot color
Color of curve plot
Current multiple
Type
Default
Color palette
Red

number
None
1.0
Time multiple
Real
number
None
1.0
Time adder
Real
number
None
0.0
F-30
Color
window
Restrictions
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Conductor/Cable Damage
F.18 Conductor/Cable Damage

Table F-29. Conductor/Cable Damage Curve: General
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Conductor damage curve

name
Character
None
Blank
Description
Identifier for conductor

damage curve
Character
None
Blank
Type
Conductor type
Radio box
Overhead conductor
cable
Overhead
conductor
English, metric
English
Units
Units of conductor area
Radio box
Conductor area
Conductor size (area)
List box
User defined
Checked if you want to

Check box
enter a conductor area not
in the list
I/O AWG
unchecked, not
user defined
User defined area User specified conductor

area
Real
number
None
User-defined conductor area
Material
Conductor material
List box
ACSR (singlestrand)
Insulation type
Insulation type
List box
Bare
Maximum temper- Maximum conductor

ature (deg C)
temperature
Real
number
None
Defaults to temperature based on

conductor material
and insulation type
Minimum temperature (deg C)
Minimum conductor
temperature
Real
number
None
Defaults to temperature based on

conductor material
and insulation type
Visible
curve on plot
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Disabled

Check box
None
Un-checked
(enable operating
time calculations)
Confidential
F-31

Conductor/Cable Damage
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table F-30. Conductor/Cable Damage Curve: Plot Options

Device Property
Definition
Plot color
Color of curve plot
Current multiple
Type
Default
Color palette
Red

number
None
1.0
Time multiple
Real
number
None
1.0
Time adder
Real
number
None
0.0
F-32
Color
window
Restrictions
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Reclosers
F.19 Reclosers
Table F-31. Reclosers: General
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Recloser name
Character
None
Blank
Description
Identifier for recloser curve Character
None
Manufacturer, type,
nominal voltage
Nom voltage
Nominal voltage
Character
Not editable
Interrupting rating Interrupting rating
Number
Not editable
Curve annotation
Curve annotation
specification
Radio box
N/A
Trip coil rating
Trip coil rating
List box
N/A
Minimum trip
rating
Minimum trip rating
List box
N/A
Total clearing
Line-current curve TCC curve identifier
List box
N/A
Visible
curve on plot
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Disabled

Check box
None
Un-checked
(enable operating
time calculations)
Table F-32. Reclosers: Plot Options

Device Property
Definition
Plot color
Color of curve plot
Current multiple
Type
Default
Color palette
Red

number
None
1.0
Time multiple
Real
number
None
1.0
Time adder
Real
number
None
0.0
Confidential
Color
window
Restrictions
F-33

Machines
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.20 Machines
Table F-33. Machines: General
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Machine name
Character
None
Blank
Description
Identifier for motor

protection curve
Character
None
Blank
Mechanical
Power Units
Units of mechanical power Radio

in hp (NEMA) or kW (IEC) button
None
hp
Mechanical
Rating
Rating of machine in
either hp or kW
Number
None
Machine rating if
present at PEPack
location <or> 200
Rated (nominal)
terminal voltage
(kV)
Machine nominal rated

voltage
Number
None
Machine kV if
present at PEPack
location <or> Node
kV where machine
is located
Power factor
Machine power factor
Number
None
Machine power
factor if present at
PEPack location
<or> 1.000
Efficiency
Machine efficiency
Number
None
Machine efficiency
if present at
PEPack location
<or> 1.000
Full Load
Machine full load (amps)
Number
None
Calculated based
on efficiency,
rating, kV and
power factor if not
user defined. If
user-defined is
checked, enter the
value of the full load
amps
Locked rotor
Locked rotor current

(amps)
Number
None
Calculated as 6
times full load. If
user-defined is
checked, enter the
value of locked
rotor current.
Acceleration time
Machine acceleration time Number

(seconds)
None
10.0
Machine Starting
Characteristics
Full voltage or Auto trans- Radio

former reduced starting
button
method
None
Full voltage
Transformer
position
Autotransformer tap position in pu
Used for Auto transformer starting method

only
1.0
F-34
Number
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Machines
Table F-33. Machines: General (Cont.)

Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Visible
curve on plot
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Disabled

Check box
None
Un-checked
(enable operating
time calculations)
Confidential
F-35
F-36
Confidential
Appendix G
Database Field Formats
G.1 Branch Results
G.1.1 Filename: branch.dbf
Table G-1. Branch Results
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Number
Island number
NAME
Character
12
Device name
TYPE
Character
12
Device type
LIBRARY
Character
12
Library reference
NODE1
Character
12
First connected node
NODE2
Character
12
Second connected node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
VBASE
Number
18
Base voltage
RATING
Number
Branch rating index
IA
Number
18
Phase A current
IB
Number
18
Phase B current
IC
Number
18
Phase C current
IMAX
Number
18
Maximum current
TA
Number
12
Phase A angle
TB
Number
12
Phase B angle
TC
Number
12
Phase C angle
I0
Number
18
Zero-sequence current
I1
Number
18
Positive-sequence current
I2
Number
18
Negative-sequence current
Name
ISLAND
Confidential
Description
G-1

Branch Results
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table G-1. Branch Results (Cont.)
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
T0
Number
12
Zero-sequence angle
T1
Number
12
Positive-sequence angle
T2
Number
12
Negative-sequence angle
PA
Number
18
Phase A real power
PB
Number
18
Phase B real power
PC
Number
18
Phase C real power
PLOSS
Number
18
Total power loss
SA
Number
18
Phase A polar power
SB
Number
18
Phase B polar power
SC
Number
18
Phase C polar power
QA
Number
18
Phase A reactive power
QB
Number
18
Phase B reactive power
QC
Number
18
Phase C reactive power
QLOSS
Number
18
Reactive power loss
PFA
Number
18
Phase A power factor
PFB
Number
18
Phase B power factor
PFC
Number
18
Phase C power factor
LLA
Character
Phase A lead lag flag
LLB
Character
Phase B lead lag flag
LLC
Character
Phase C lead lag flag
TNODE
Character
10
Tapped node name
RNODE
Character
10
Regulated node name
XTYPE
Character
10
Transformer type
TAPA
Number
Phase A tap position
TAPB
Number
Phase B tap position
TAPC
Number
Phase C tap position
VREGA
Number
18
Phase A regulated voltage
VREGB
Number
18
Phase B regulated voltage
VREGC
Number
18
Phase C regulated voltage
LENGTH
Number
18
Line length
PCOST
Number
Real power cost
Name
G-2
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Branch Results
Table G-1. Branch Results (Cont.)
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
QCOST
Number
Reactive power cost
IUNBALPERC
Number
18
Percent unbalance
IAVG
Number
18
Average current
VA
Number
18
Voltage at Phase A, 2nd node
VB
Number
18
Voltage at Phase B, 2nd node
VC
Number
18
Voltage at Phase C, 2nd node
Vmin
Number
18
Minimum voltage
Dist
Number
18
Distance from 2nd node back to source
Total P
Number
18
Total real power
Total Q
Number
18
Total reactive power
Total S
Number
18
Total apparent power
Total PF
Number
18
Total power factor
Total L
Number
18
Total lead/lag flag
Nodeph
Character
Downstream node phasing
Name
Confidential
Description
G-3

Capacitor Placement Optimization Results
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
G.2 Capacitor Placement Optimization Results

G.2.1 Filename: capo.dbf
Table G-2. Capacitor Placement Optimization Results
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Number
Island number
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node name
CON
Character
Connection type (wye or delta)
TYPE
Character
10
Capacitor type (fixed or switched)
PLOSS0
Number
18
Initial loss (kW)
QLOSS0
Number
18
Initial loss (kvar)
PLOSS1
Number
18
Final loss (kW)
QLOSS1
Number
18
Final loss (kvar)
PVCOSTFX
Number
18
Present value cost of placing fixed banks
PVCOSTSW
Number
18
Present value cost of placing switched

banks
PV0
Number
18
Present value energy: initial
PV1
Number
18
Present value of energy: final
Name
ISLAND
Description
G.3 Capacitor Placement Optimization Summary

G.3.1 Filename: caposum.dbf
Table G-3. Capacitor Placement Optimization Summary
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Character
12
Node name
SIZE
Number
18
Total kvar place at node
TYPE
Character
Capacitor type (fixed or switched)
Name
NODE
G-4
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Capacitor Placement Optimization Switching Schedule
G.4 Capacitor Placement Optimization Switching Schedule

G.4.1 Filename: caposw.dbf
Table G-4. Capacitor Placement Optimization Switching Schedule
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
PROFILE
Character
20
Load snapshot name
NODE
Character
20
Node name
SIZE
Number
18
Total kvar size placed at node
STEP
Number
18
Switched capacitor increment
FRACTION
Number
18
Fraction of switched capacitor that is in

service
Name
Description
G.5 Capacitor Properties

G.5.1 Filename: cap.dbf
Table G-5. Capacitor Properties
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
TYPE
Character
Type (fixed/switched)
CVAR
Number
18
Capacitor reactive power capacity (kvar)
CVARA
Number
18

phase A
CVARB
Number
18

phase B
CVARC
Number
18

phase C
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
KVNOM
Number
18
Nominal voltage of capacitor bank (kV)
LOW
Number
18
Minimum regulated voltage (pu)
HIGH
Number
18
Maximum regulated voltage (pu)
STEP
Number
18
Switching step (pu)
PRIOR
Number
18
Switching priority
Name
Confidential
Description
G-5

Device Groups
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table G-5. Capacitor Properties (Cont.)
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
CON
Character
12
Connection (delta/wye)
RNODE
Character
12
Regulated node
Number
12
Time delay
Name
TIMEDELAY
Description
G.6 Device Groups

G.6.1 Filename: group.dbf
Table G-6. Device Groups
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
18
Group name
DESC
Character
250
Group description
Name
Description
G.7 Device Limits

G.7.1 Filename: limits.dbf
Table G-7. Device Limits
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
OVER
Number
Number of nodes over limit
UNDER
Number
Number of nodes under limit
OUT
Number
Number of out-of-service devices
BRANCH
Number
Number of branches over rating index
Name
G-6
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Fault All Current Results
G.8 Fault All Current Results

G.8.1 Filename: fault.dbf
Table G-8. Fault All Current
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Number
Island number
NODE
Character
12
Faulted node
PHS
Character
12
Phasing of branches connected to the

faulted node
VBASE
Number
18
Faulted node base voltage (kV)
3PH_G
Number
18
Fault current three-phase-to-ground
PH_G
Number
18
Fault current phase-to-ground
PH_GZ
Number
18
Fault current phase-to-ground through Z
PH_PH
Number
18
Fault current phase-to-phase
PH_PH_G
Number
18
Fault current phase-to-phase-to-ground
3PH
Number
18
Fault current three-phase
RP
Number
18
Fault resistance (ohm)
XP
Number
18
Fault reactance (ohm)
R0
Number
18
X0
Number
18
Name
ISLAND
Confidential
Description
G-7

Induction Machine Properties
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
G.9 Induction Machine Properties

G.9.1 Filename: indmach.dbf
Table G-9. Induction Machine Properties
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
LOAD
Number
18
Load
RATING
Number
18
Rating
KCAT
Number
18
Category
KTYP
Number
18
Type
KVNOM
Number
18
Nominal KV
NEMA
Character
NEMA identification
START
Character
Start (Y/N)
AUTOX
Character
Auto transformer (Y/N)
RLR
Number
18
Locked rotor resistance
XLR
Number
18
Locked rotor reactance
RT
Number
18
Auto transformer resistance
XT
Number
18
Auto transformer reactance
TAP
Number
18
Tap position where auto transformer

impedance was measured
EFF
Number
18
Machine efficiency
RA
Number
18
Armature resistance
XA
Number
18
Armature reactance
MAGX
Number
18
Magnetizing Reactance
INR
Number
18
Inner cage resistance
INX
Number
18
Inner cage reactance
OUTR
Number
18
Outer cage resistance
OUTX
Number
18
Outer cage reactance
SUBX
Number
18
Subtransient reactance
TRX
Number
18
Transient reactance
Name
G-8
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Line/Cable Properties
Table G-9. Induction Machine Properties (Cont.)
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
LUNITS
Character
Real power units (kW, hp)
RUNITS
Character
Shaft output units (KW, hp)
Name
Description
G.10 Line/Cable Properties

G.10.1 Filename: line.dbf
Table G-10. Line/Cable Properties
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
FROM
Character
12
FROM node
TO
Character
12
TO node
Number
18
Length
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
LIB
Character
12
Library reference
R1
Number
18
Positive-sequence resistance (ohm/unit

length)
X1
Number
18
Positive-sequence reactance (ohm/unit

length)
R0
Number
18
Zero-sequence resistance (ohm/unit length)
X0
Number
18
Zero-sequence reactance (ohm/unit length)
BC1
Number
18
Positive-sequence charging admittance

(microSiemens/unit length)
BC0
Number
18
Zero-sequence charging admittance (microSiemens/unit length)
A1
Number
18
Rating 1 (amps)
A2
Number
18
Rating 2 (amps)
A3
Number
18
Rating 3 (amps)
A4
Number
18
Rating 4 (amps)
Name
DIST
Confidential
Description
G-9

Load Flow Summary
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
G.11 Load Flow Summary

G.11.1 Filename: lfsum.dbf
Table G-11. Load Flow Summary
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
SRCKW
Number
18
Source real power
SRCKVAR
Number
18
Source reactive power
SYNKWP
Number
18
Synchronous machine real power (+)
SYNKWN
Number
18
Synchronous machine real power (-)
SYNKVARP
Number
18
Synchronous machine reactive power (+)
SYNKVARN
Number
18
Synchronous machine reactive power (-)
INDKWP
Number
18
Induction machine real power (+)
INDKWN
Number
18
Induction machine real power (-)
INDKVARP
Number
18
Induction machine reactive power (+)
INDKVARN
Number
18
Induction machine reactive power (-)
CAPKVAR
Number
18
Capacitor reactive power
NCAPS
Number
Number of capacitors
NSRCS
Number
Number of sources
NLINES
Number
Number of lines
NSYNP
Number
Number of synchronous machines (+)
NINDP
Number
Number of induction machines (+)
NSYNN
Number
Number of synchronous machines (-)
NINDN
Number
Number of induction machines (-)
LOSSKW
Number
18
Total real system losses
LOSSKVAR
Number
18
Total reactive system losses
Name
G-10
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Load Properties
G.12 Load Properties

G.12.1 Filename: load.dbf
Table G-12. Load Properties
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
KCAT
Number
Category
KTYP
Character
Type
GRND
Character
Grounded (Y/N)
BAL
Character
Balanced (Y/N)
CON
Character
Construction (delta/wye)
PA
Number
18
Phase A real power (kW)
QA
Number
18
Phase A reactive power (kvar)
PB
Number
18
Phase B real power (kW)
QB
Number
18
Phase B reactive power (kvar)
PC
Number
18
Phase C real power (kW)
QC
Number
18
Phase C reactive power (kvar)
SA
Number
18
Phase A power (kVA)
PFA
Number
18
Character
Phase A power lead/lag
SB
Number
18
Phase B power (kVA)
PFB
Number
18
Character
Phase B power lead/lag
SC
Number
18
Phase C power (kVA)
PFC
Number
18
Character
Phase C power lead/lag
Name
LEADA
LEADB
LEADC
Description
G.12.2 Filename: mwh.dbf
Confidential
G-11

Load Snapshots
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
G.13 Load Snapshots

G.13.1 Filename: snap.dbf
Table G-13. Load Snapshots
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
18
Snapshot name
CAT
Character
18
Load category
FACTOR
Number
18
Scale factor
TIME
Number
18
Duration (pu)
ACTIVE
Character
10
Active (Y/N)
TYPE
Character
10
Type (machine/load)
SCALE
Character
10
Scale (pwr/size)
Name
Description
G.14 Network Economics

G.14.1 Filename: econ.dbf
Table G-14. Network Economics
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
PPRICE
Number
Real power price (kWh)
QPRICE
Number
Reactive power price (kvar/hr)
PDPRICE
Number
Real power demand price (per kW)
QDPRICE
Number
Reactive power demand price (per kvar)
DISCOUNT
Number
Discount rate (pu/yr)
INFLATION
Number
Inflation rate (pu/yr)
PERIOD
Number
Evaluation period (yr)
FINSTCOST
Number
Fixed cap installation cost (per kvar)
SINSTCOST
Number
Switched cap installation cost (per kvar)
FMAINTCOST
Number
Fixed cap maintenance cost (per kvar)
SMAINTCOST
Number
Switched cap maintenance cost (per kvar)
Name
G-12
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Node Properties
G.15 Node Properties

G.15.1 Filename: bus.dbf
Table G-15. Node Properties
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
PHASE
Character
Device phases
STATUS
Character
Device status
KV
Number
18
Base voltage (kV)
IAR
Number
Area number
Number
12
Node name graphical orientation numerical -4 to +4; refer to Appendix B,
Name
Description
Section B.1.4
DESC
Character
250
Description
FIXED
Character
CAPO fixed (Y/N)
SWITCHED
Character
CAPO switched (Y/N)
Number
18
Graphical x-coordinate
Number
18
Graphical y-coordinate
Character
Device orientation (H,V,P) - horizontal,

vertical, point
ORIENT
G.16 Node Results

G.16.1 Filename: node.dbf
Table G-16. Node Results
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Number
Island
NAME
Character
12
Device name
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
AREA
Number
Area
VBASE
Number
18
Base voltage (kV)
VA
Number
18
Voltage phase A
VB
Number
18
Voltage phase B
Name
ISLAND
Confidential
Description
G-13

Node Results
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table G-16. Node Results (Cont.)
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
VC
Number
18
Voltage phase C
TA
Number
12
Angle phase A
TB
Number
12
Angle phase B
TC
Number
12
Angle phase C
V0
Number
18
Zero-sequence voltage
V1
Number
18
Positive-sequence voltage
V2
Number
18
Negative-sequence voltage
T0
Number
12
Zero-sequence angle
T1
Number
12
T2
Number
12
VPREA
Number
18
Voltage phase A pre-start
VPREB
Number
18
Voltage phase B pre-start
VPREC
Number
18
Voltage phase C pre-start
VPOSTA
Number
18
Voltage phase A starting
VPOSTB
Number
18
Voltage phase B starting
VPOSTC
Number
18
Voltage phase C starting
VDIFFA
Number
18
Voltage phase A difference
VDIFFB
Number
18
Voltage phase B difference
VDIFFC
Number
18
Voltage phase C difference
Vmin
Number
18
Minimum voltage
Vmax
Number
18
Maximum voltage
Vavg
Number
18
Average voltage
VUNBALPERC
Number
18
Percent unbalance
DISTANCE
Number
18
Distance form node back to source
Name
G-14
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties
G.17 Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties

G.17.1 Filename: reactor.dbf
Table G-17. Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
FROM
Character
12
FROM node
TO
Character
12
TO node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
LIB
Character
12
Library reference
R1
Number
18
Positive-sequence resistance (pu on

series device base kVA)
X1
Number
18
Positive-sequence reactance (pu on

series device base kVA)
R0
Number
18
Zero-sequence resistance (pu on series

device base kVA)
X0
Number
18
Zero-sequence reactance (pu on series

device base kVA)
BC1
Number
18
Charging admittance (0.0)
BC0
Number
18
Charging admittance (0.0)
A1
Number
18
Rating 1 (pu)
A2
Number
18
Rating 2 (pu)
A3
Number
18
Rating 3 (pu)
A4
Number
18
Rating 4 (pu)
KVAT
Number
18
Nameplate rating (kVA/phase)
Name
Confidential
Description
G-15

Shunt Status
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
G.18 Shunt Status

G.18.1 Filename: shunt.dbf
Table G-18. Shunt Status
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Number
Island
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
AREA
Number
Area
CON
Character
Connection (delta/wye)
TYPE
Character
12
Shunt type (source, induction machine,

sync machine, standard fault, etc.)
Number
Category
PHASE
Character
Valid phase
VBASE
Number
18
Base voltage (kV)
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
CAP
Character
Capacitor type (fixed/switched)
RNODE
Character
12
Regulated node
USED
Number
Capacitor pu used
STEP
Number
Capacitor step (pu)
SIZE
Number
18
Size
QMAX
Number
18
Maximum reactive power
QMIN
Number
18
Minimum reactive power
MACH
Character
Machine type
VSCHED
Number
18
Schedule voltage
PSCHED
Number
18
Schedule power
VTERM
Number
18
Terminal voltage
VOP
Number
18
Operating voltage
SLIP
Number
18
Machine slip
FAULT
Number
18
Fault type
RFAULT
Number
18
Fault resistance
XFAULT
Number
18
Fault reactance
IA
Number
18
Phase A current
IB
Number
18
Phase B current
Name
ISLAND
CAT
G-16
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Shunt Status
Table G-18. Shunt Status (Cont.)
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
IC
Number
18
Phase C current
TA
Number
12
Phase A angle
TB
Number
12
Phase B angle
TC
Number
12
Phase C angle
I0
Number
18
Zero-sequence current
I1
Number
18
Positive-sequence current
I2
Number
18
Negative-sequence current
T0
Number
12
Zero-sequence angle
T1
Number
12
T2
Number
12
PA
Number
18
Phase A power (kW)
PB
Number
18
Phase B power (kW)
PC
Number
18
Phase C power (kW)
SA
Number
18
Phase A power (kVA)
SB
Number
18
Phase B power (kVA)
SC
Number
18
Phase C power (kVA)
PFA
Number
PFB
Number
PFC
Number
PF
Number
Power factor
LLA
Character
Phase A lead/lag
LLB
Character
Phase B lead/lag
LLC
Character
Phase C lead/lag
QA
Number
18
Phase A reactive power
QB
Number
18
Phase B reactive power
QC
Number
18
Phase C reactive power
VREGA
Number
18
Phase A regulated voltage
VREGB
Number
18
Phase B regulated voltage
VREGC
Number
18
Phase C regulated voltage
TIMEDELAY
Number
18
Shunt capacitor time delay
Character
Induction machine units (kW, hp)
Name
RUNITS
Confidential
Description
G-17

Source Properties
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
G.19 Source Properties

G.19.1 Filename: source.dbf
Table G-19. Source Properties
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
TYPE
Character
12
Source type
kVA
Number
18
Source kVA rating
SRP
Number
18
Source reactive power (kW)
QMAX
Number
18
Maximum reactive power (kvar)
QMIN
Number
18
Minimum reactive power (kvar)
R1
Number
18
Positive-sequence resistance (pu on

system kVA base)
X1
Number
18
Positive-sequence reactance (pu on

system kVA base)
R0
Number
18
Zero-sequence resistance (pu on system

kVA base)
X0
Number
18
Zero-sequence reactance (pu on system

kVA base)
RG
Number
18
Grounding resistance (ohms)
XG
Number
18
Grounding reactance of the source (ohms
ANGLE
Number
18
Source angle
KVS
Number
18
Source voltage
Name
G-18
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Standard Fault Properties
G.20 Standard Fault Properties

G.20.1 Filename: stdfault.dbf
Table G-20. Standard Fault Properties
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Fault name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
TYPE
Character
10
Type
Name
Description
G.21 Static Load Summary

G.21.1 Filename: lsum.dbf
Table G-21. Static Load Summary
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
CAT
Character
30
Category
NKW
Number
18
Nominal kW
NKVAR
Number
18
Nominal kvar
NKVA
Number
18
Nominal kVA
NPF
Number
18
Nominal power factor
Character
Nominal lead or lag
AKW
Number
18
Actual kw
AKVAR
Number
18
Actual kvar
AKVA
Number
18
Actual kVA
APF
Number
18
Actual power factor
Character
Actual lead or lag
Name
NLEAD
ALEAD
Confidential
Description
G-19

MWh Load Summary
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
G.22 MWh Load Summary

G.22.1 Filename: mwhsum.dbf
Table G-22. MWh Load Summary
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
MWh load name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
KWACONSTP
Number
18
kW - Phase A of type constant power
KWBCONSTP
Number
18
kW - Phase B of type constant power
KWCCONSTP
Number
18
kW - Phase C of type constant power
KVARACONP
Number
18
kvar - Phase A of type constant power
KVARBCONP
Number
18
kvar - Phase B of type constant power
KVARCCONP
Number
18
kvar - Phase C of type constant power
KWACONSTZ
Number
18
kW - Phase A of type constant impedance
KWBCONSTZ
Number
18
kW - Phase B of type constant impedance
KWCCONSTZ
Number
18
kW - Phase C of type constant impedance
KVARACONZ
Number
18
kvar - Phase A of type constant

impedance
KVARBCONZ
Number
18
kvar - Phase B of type constant

impedance
KVARCCONZ
Number
18
kvar - Phase C of type constant

impedance
Name
G-20
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Switch Properties
G.23 Switch Properties

G.23.1 Filename: switch.dbf
Table G-23. Switch Properties
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
FROM
Character
12
FROM node
TO
Character
12
TO node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
12
Status (in/out)
LIB
Character
12
Library reference
R1
Number
18
0.0
X1
Number
18
0.0
R0
Number
18
0.0
X0
Number
18
0.0
BC1
Number
18
0.0
BC0
Number
18
0.0
A1
Number
18
Rating 1 (amps)
A2
Number
18
Rating 2 (amps)
A3
Number
18
Rating 3 (amps)
A4
Number
18
Rating 4 (amps)
TYPE
Character
Type (normal/tie)
ID
Character
12
Device ID
CKTID
Character
12
Circuit ID
TOPO
Character
TOPO status (locked/unlocked)
Name
Confidential
Description
G-21

Synchronous Machine Properties
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
G.24 Synchronous Machine Properties

G.24.1 Filename: synmach.dbf
Table G-24. Synchronous Machine Properties
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
REGNODE
Character
12
Regulated node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
CONNECT
Character
12
Delta or Wye
LOAD
Number
18
Load (kW)
RATING
Number
18
Rating
KCAT
Number
18
Category
KTYP
Number
18
Type
AUTOX
Character
Auto transformer (Y/N)
KVNOM
Number
18
Nominal kV
VSCHEDA
Number
18
Scheduled voltage (kV) phase A
VSCHEDB
Number
18
Scheduled voltage (kV) phase B
VSCHEDC
Number
18
Scheduled voltage (kV) phase C
SCHEDQ
Number
18
Scheduled reactive power (kvar)
QMAX
Number
18
Maximum reactive power (pu)
QMIN
Number
18
Minimum reactive power (pu)
TAP
Number
18
Starting tap position (pu)
Name
G-22
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

System Totals
G.25 System Totals

G.25.1 Filename: count.dbf
Table G-25. System Totals
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
ISLANDS
Number
Number of islands
NODES
Number
Number of nodes
BRANCHES
Number
Number of branches
SHUNTS
Number
Number of shunts
FAULTS
Number
Number of faults
LOOPS
Number
Number of loops
SOURCES
Number
Number of sources
TRANS
Number
Number of transformers
LINES
Number
Number of lines
SWITCHES
Number
Number of switches
SERCAPS
Number
Number of series capacitors/reactors
SMACHS
Number
Number of synchronous machines
IMACHS
Number
Number of induction machines
LOADS
Number
Number of loads
CAPS
Number
Number of capacitors
DIST
Number
Total line length
Name
Confidential
Description
G-23

Tie Open Point Optimization Results
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
G.26 Tie Open Point Optimization Results

G.26.1 Filename: topo.dbf
Table G-26. Tie Open Point Optimization Results
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Number
Island
NAME
Character
12
Device name
UPSTREAM
Character
12
Upstream node
DOWNSTREAM
Character
12
Downstream node
STATUS
Character
Status (open/closed)
CHANGED
Character
Status of device changed by TOPO (Y/N)
ID
Character
12
Device ID
PLOSS0
Number
18
Initial real power loss
QLOSS0
Number
18
Initial reactive power loss
PLOSS1
Number
18
Final real power loss
QLOSS1
Number
18
Final reactive power loss
EPCOST0
Number
18
Initial cost of real power
EQCOST0
Number
18
Initial cost of reactive power
DPCOST0
Number
18
Initial cost of real power demand
DQCOST0
Number
18
Initial cost of reactive power demand
EPCOST1
Number
18
Final cost of real power
EQCOST1
Number
18
Final cost of reactive power
DPCOST1
Number
18
Final cost of real power demand
DQCOST1
Number
18
Final cost of reactive power demand
Name
ISLAND
G-24
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Titles and Comments
G.27 Titles and Comments

G.27.1 Filename: comment.dbf
Table G-27. Titles and Comments
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
TITLE1
Character
132
Line 1 of title
TITLE2
Character
132
Line 2 of title
COMMENT1
Character
132
Line 1 of comments
COMMENT2
Character
132
Line 2 of comments
COMMENT3
Character
132
Line 3 of comments
COMMENT4
Character
132
Line 4 of comments
COMMENT5
Character
132
Line 5 of comments
Name
Description
G.28 Transformer Properties

G.28.1 Filename: trnsfrmr.dbf
Table G-28. Transformer Properties
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
FROM
Character
12
FROM node
FRPHASE
Character
FROM phases
TO
Character
12
TO node
TOPHASE
Character
TO phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
LIB
Character
12
Library reference
R1
Number
18
R1 positive-sequence resistance (pu on

transformer kVA base)
X1
Number
18
X1 positive-sequence reactance (pu on

R0
Number
18
R0 zero-sequence resistance (pu on

X0
Number
18
X0 zero-sequence reactance (pu on

Name
Confidential
Description
G-25

Transformer Properties
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table G-28. Transformer Properties (Cont.)
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
BC1
Number
18
BC1 0.0 for transformers
BC0
Number
18
BC0 0.0 for transformers
A1
Number
18
Rating 1 (pu)
A2
Number
18
Rating 2 (pu)
A3
Number
18
Rating 3 (pu)
A4
Number
18
Rating 4 (pu)
TYPE
Character
18
Transformer type
REMLOC
Character
18
Regulated node on tapped/untapped side
KVAT
Number
18
Transformer kVA per phase
TAP1
Number
18
Phase A tap position
TAP2
Number
18
Phase B tap position
TAP3
Number
18
Phase C tap position
Character
FROM or TO
TMAX
Number
18
Maximum tap position
TMIN
Number
18
Minimum tap position
STEP
Number
18
Tap step
VMAX
Number
18
Maximum voltage
VMIN
Number
18
Minimum voltage
RCA
Number
18
Compensating resistance (ohm) phase A
XCA
Number
18
Compensating reactance (ohm) phase A
RCB
Number
18
Compensating resistance (ohm) phase B
XCB
Number
18
Compensating reactance (ohm) phase B
RCC
Number
18
Compensating resistance (ohm) phase C
XCC
Number
18
Compensating reactance (ohm) phase C
PTA
Number
18
pt ratio phase A
CTA
Number
18
ct rating phase A
PTB
Number
18
pt ratio phase B
CTB
Number
18
ct rating phase B
PTC
Number
18
pt ratio phase C
CTC
Number
18
ct rating phase C
TNODE
Character
12
Tapped node
RNODE
Character
12
Regulated node
Name
TAPSIDE
G-26
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual

Transformer Properties
Table G-28. Transformer Properties (Cont.)
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
TIMEDELAY
Number
18
Time delay
PHASESHIFT
Number
18
Phase shift (deg)
FRVOLT
Number
18
FROM voltage (kV)
TOVOLT
Number
18
TO voltage (kV)
FRGR
Number
18
FROM grounding resistance
FRGX
Number
18
FROM grounding reactance
TOGR
Number
18
TO grounding resistance
TOGX
Number
18
TO grounding reactance
Character
Yes or No
Name
USERDEF
Confidential
Description
G-27

Voltage Levels
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
G.29 Voltage Levels

G.29.1 Filename: volts.dbf
Table G-29. Voltage Levels
Name
KV
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Character
10
Description
Voltage in KV
G.30 Distribution Reliability Analysis Results

G.30.1 Filename: dra.dbf
Table G-30. Distribution Reliability Analysis Results
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
PD
Character
20
Protective device name
NAME
Character
20
Associated branch
CS
Number
12
Customer count
CI
Number
12
Customer interruptions
SAIFI
Number
12
System Average Interruption Frequency

Index
SAIDI
Number
12
System Average Interruption Duration

Index
CAIFI
Number
12
Customer Average Interruption Frequency

Index
CAIDI
Number
12
Customer Average Interruption Duration

Index
Name
G-28
Description
Confidential
Appendix H
Conductor Database
Column Heading
Description
NAME
!-!--
Conductor Name.
TYPE
---
Conductor Type.
R_DC
-(ohm/mi)
dc resistance in ohm/mi at 25o C.
R_DC
-(ohm/km)
dc resistance in ohm/km at 25o C.
R_AC60
60 Hz
(ohm/mi)
ac resistance at 60 Hz in ohm/mi at 25o C.
R_AC60
60 Hz
(ohm/km)
ac resistance at 60 Hz in ohm/km at 25o C.
R_AC50
50 Hz
(ohm/mi)
ac resistance at 50 Hz in ohm/mi at 25o C.
R_AC50
50 Hz
(ohm/km)
ac resistance at 50 Hz in ohm/km at 25o C.
XL_60
60 Hz
(ohm/mi)
Inductive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 60 Hz in ohm/mi.
XL_60
60 Hz
(ohm/km)
Inductive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 60 Hz in ohm/km.
XL_50
50 Hz
(ohm/mi)
Inductive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 50 Hz in ohm/mi.
XL_50
50 Hz
(ohm/km)
Inductive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 50 Hz in ohm/km.
Confidential
H-1
Conductor Database
Column Heading
Description
XC_60
60 Hz
(mohm-mi)
Capacitive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 60 Hz in mohm-mi.
XC_60
60 Hz
(mohm-km)
Capacitive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 60 Hz in mohm-km.
XC_50
50 Hz
(mohm-mi)
Capacitive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 50 Hz in mohm-mi.
XC_50
50 Hz
(mohm-km)
Capacitive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 50 Hz in mohm-km.
AREA
Aluminum
(kcmil)
AREA
Total
(sq-in.)
AREA
Total
(sq-mm)
OD
-(in.)
OD
-(mm)
Aluminum cross-sectional area in thousands of circular mils.
Total cross-sectional area of the conductor in in.2 (includes core area).
Total cross-sectional area of the conductor in mm2 (includes core area).
Conductor diameter (in.).
Conductor diameter (mm).
STRAND
outer/core
--
Stranding coefficient defined as the number of aluminum strands per number of

core strands.
#STD-OL
outer
--
Number of aluminum strands in outer layer.
STR-DIA
outer
(in.)
Diameter of outer stands (in.).
STR-DIA
outer
(mm)
Diameter of outer stands (mm).
STR-DIA
core
(in.)
Diameter of core stands (in.).
STR-DIA
core
(mm)
Diameter of core stands (mm).
UTS
-(lb)
H-2
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Rated breaking strength of the conductor (lb).
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Column Heading
UTS
-(kg)
WGT
-(lb/1000 ft)
WGT
-(kg/km)
Amps
-(A)
Confidential
Conductor Database
Description
Rated breaking strength of the conductor (kg).
Total conductor weight (lb/1000 ft).
Total conductor weight (kg/km).
Ampacity based on 40oC conductor temperature rise over a 40oC ambient temperature with a 2ft/sec crosswind, 0.5 emissivity and no sun.
H-3
H-4
Confidential
Index
A
acceleration factors A-33
adding a branch 2-6
adding a shunt 2-5
adding items to a group 2-9
adding items to a load category 2-12
adding nodes 2-4
analysis conventions 4-2
phases 4-2
analysis options
CAPO 4-39
general 4-5
load flow 4-15
motor starting 4-33
short circuit 4-26
TOPO 4-45
B
branches
adding 2-6
copying 3-33
deleting 3-33
moving 3-32
C
cable/conductor damage curves
editing 7-18
capacitor
changing properties 3-81
properties F-20
user-specified validation criteria C-4
CAPO result options 4-14
color coding 1-33, 4-7
branches under power factor limit 4-8
by group 4-7
items by category 4-8
nodes by calculated voltage 4-7
nodes by nominal voltage 4-7
overloaded branches 4-7
unbalanced nodes, branches 4-8
compensating impedance 3-46
conductor/cable damage
Confidential
properties F-31
construction dictionary 1-27, 1-29, A-31
construction dictionary formats
basic data record B-16
one-phase data records B-17
rating data record B-17
reliability data record B-17
two-phase data records B-17
coordinate scale factors 1-28, 1-30
coordination view
annotation 7-29
list 7-30
menu bar 7-29
printing 7-31
settings 7-29
corridor files 6-21
adjusting circuit properties 6-26
analyzing 6-28
automatic validation 6-28
calculation results 6-32
copying a circuit 6-26
deleting a circuit 6-27
deleting all circuits 6-28
modifying 6-25
pasting a circuit 6-27
selecting a curcuit 6-25
user-initiated validation 6-29
creating a diagram 2-1
creating a network 2-1
D
defining a group 2-8
defining economics 2-14
defining item ordering method 2-15
defining load categories 2-11
deleting a group 2-10
deleting a load category 2-13
deselecting items
all 3-19
device database interface
adding fuses 7-42
adding reclosers 7-44
adding relays 7-43
modifying fuses 7-45
IX-1
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Index
modifying reclosers 7-47

modifying relays 7-46
removing devices 7-49
updating manufacturers 7-48
diagram
annotating 3-25
creating 2-1
knee points 2-32
layers 2-29
locking 2-34
navigating 2-28
panning 2-28
ports and links 2-39
symbol position 2-39
viewing results 4-5
diagram coordinates
scaling/offsetting 2-27
diagram differences
load and branch labels A-32
load flow results A-32
node labels A-32
shunt device labels A-33
transformer symbols A-32
diagram view 1-7
print preview 2-22
printing 2-20, 2-23
saving 2-28
zooming 2-26
displaying hidden diagram items 1-28, 1-30
distribution reliability analysis 9-1
automatic reclosing devices 9-5
breakers 9-5
construction dictionary 9-17
default parameters 9-8
fuses 9-6
fuseswitches 9-6
options 9-22
performing 9-26
reliability parameters 9-14
result display options 9-24
switches 9-6
tie switches 9-6
documentation conventions 1-2
abbreviations 1-2
click 1-2
double-click 1-2
right-click 1-2
F
fault all result options 4-11
nodes 4-11
filters
selecting 3-24
flat transformers 1-25
flow arrows 4-8
fuses
edting 7-11
properties F-26
G
getting help 1-2
grid editor 3-2
copy/paste 3-7
exporting data 3-8
finding data 3-8
formatting 3-9
modifying network items 3-4
opening 3-3
printing 3-11
zooming 3-14
groups A-34
adding items 2-9
defining 2-8
deleting 2-10
selecting 3-19
viewing 2-9
H
harmonic analysis 8-1
adding harmonic injections 8-2
analysis options 8-10
editing harmonic filters 8-8
editing harmonic injections 8-6
harmonic filters 8-7
harmonic models 8-18
nodes 8-5
shunt items 8-3
transformers 8-4
viewing results 8-12
help
online 1-3
technical support 1-3
economics A-34
defining 2-14
editing 7-3
IX-2
editing a network 3-1

equipment list view 1-9
image files 2-31

induction machine
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
automatic validation criteria C-3

available designs E-1
grounding impedance 3-69
properties F-14
input file 1-27, 1-29
islands
selecting 3-20
item ordering method
defining 2-15
items
centering 2-28
deselecting all 3-19
labels 2-34
rotating 2-39
selecting 3-15
selecting all 3-19
selecting multiple adjacent 3-17
selecting multiple nonadjacent 3-18
selecting single 3-16
K
knee points 2-32
L
labels 2-34
branch results 2-38
fonts 2-36
point nodes 2-37
result visibility 2-37
layers 2-29
limits
loads A-33
network size A-33
number loops A-33
power factor 4-54
line properties calculator 6-1
corridor view 6-46-5
menu bar 6-12
saving impedances 6-40
setting options 6-14
status bar 6-12
toolbar 6-13
lines
properties F-4
links 2-39
load categories A-34
adding items 2-12
defining 2-11
Confidential
Index
deleting 2-13
selecting 3-21
viewing 2-12
load flow and short circuit result options 4-9
all 4-11
branches 4-10
branches and shunts 4-11
nodes 4-9
shunts 4-10
load flow solutions
constant current load 4-24
constant impedance load 4-24
constant power load 4-23
induction machines 4-23
lines and cables 4-20
machine modeling 4-21
network representation 4-20
sources 4-20
static load modeling 4-23
synchronous machines 4-21, A-14
transformers 4-21
load snapshots A-34
creating 3-102
loads
locking the diagram 2-34
M
machine protection
edting 7-24
properties F-34
main menu
analysis 1-18
help 1-18
network 1-17
using 1-17
view 1-17
window 1-18
menus
file 1-17
main 1-17
merging files 1-40
motor starting result options 4-11
motor starting solutions
auto-transformer starting 4-35
machines being started 4-35, A-16
running machines 4-35
sources 4-35
MWh load
properties F-11
MWh loads A-34
IX-3
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Index
N
name identifiers A-33
navigating the diagram 2-28
network
creating 2-1
editing 3-1
properties F-1
rephasing 3-98
nodes
adding 2-4
copying 3-27
deleting 3-29
moving 3-27
properties F-3
resizing 3-29
selecting in base voltage range 3-22
toggling symbols 3-29
O
opening files 3-15
corridor files 6-21
Hub files 1-39
native files 1-38
raw data files 1-39, A-6
over current relays
properties F-27
P
panning the diagram 2-28
parameter file differences A-31
performing analysis
CAPO 4-43
load flow 4-19
motor starting 4-34
short circuit 4-28
TOPO 4-46
ports 2-39
print options 2-20
print preview
diagram view 2-22
print settings 2-21
printing files
corridor files 6-23
printing the diagram 2-20, 2-23
progress view 1-14
properties
diagram view 1-32
network 2-2
IX-4
nodes 3-30
reliability 2-3
protection and coordination 7-1
coordination study 7-27
coordination view 7-27
device database 7-32
device database interface 7-41
editing cable/conductor damage curves 718
editing fuses 7-11
editing machine protection curves 7-24
editing reclosers 7-21
editing relays 7-12
editing transformer damage curves 7-14
equipment packs 7-1, 7-3
fuse tables 7-32
importing customized database tables 7-53
printing device database 7-52
recloser tables 7-38
relay tables 7-35
protection equipment
properties F-25
R
raw data file
asynchronous machine load B-12
capacitor data section B-14
format B-1
line or cable data B-4
load data section B-10
load type definitions B-10
machine loads B-12
MWh load data section B-13
node declaration section B-3
series capacitor or series reactor data B-6
source data section B-3
switch data B-5
synchronous machine load B-12
system parameters section B-2
tie switch data B-5
title section B-2
transformer data B-6
transformer tap changing data section B-7
transformer type codes B-8
reclosers
edting 7-21
properties F-33
relays
edting 7-12
report database
branch results G-1
capacitor properties G-5
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
CAPO results G-4

CAPO summary G-4
CAPO switching schedule G-5
device groups G-6
device limits G-6
DRA G-28
fault all current results G-7
induction machine properties G-8
line/cable properties G-9
load flow summary G-10
load properties G-11
load snapshots G-12
network economics G-12
node properties G-13
node results G-13
series capacitor/reactor properties G-15
shunt status G-16
source properties G-18
standard fault properties G-19
static load summary G-19G-20
switch properties G-21
synchronous machine properties G-22
system totals G-23
titles and comments G-25
TOPO results G-24
transfomer properties G-25
voltage levels G-28
report file 1-27, 1-29
report options 5-8
description 5-8
sort by 5-8
report preview 1-15, 5-9
report units 5-6
angle 5-7
current 5-7
power and losses 5-7
voltage 5-6
reports
creating and designing 5-11
exporting 5-10
restoring last saved workspace 1-28, 1-30
root node 2-3, 2-15
S
saving diagram views 2-28
saving files 2-19
corridor files 6-22
image 2-31
raw data A-8
scaling
automatic 3-91
loads 3-87
Confidential
Index
machines 3-89
MWh loads 3-90
scaling/offsetting diagram coordinates 2-27
selecting groups 3-19
selecting islands 3-20
selecting items 3-15
all 3-19
filters 3-24
multiple adjacent 3-17
multiple nonadjacent 3-18
single 3-16
selecting load categories 3-21
series capacitor/reactor
properties F-23
setting default item properties 1-35
setting diagram view properties 1-32
color coding 1-33
colors 1-33
default 1-34
fonts 1-33
item labels 1-33
resetting 1-34
setting network properties 2-2
root node 2-3
setting program properties 1-27
construction dictionary 1-27, 1-29
coordinate scale factors 1-28, 1-30
displaying hidden diagram items 1-28, 1-30
input file 1-27, 1-29
report file 1-27, 1-29
restoring last saved workspace 1-28, 1-30
static load property sheet display 1-28, 130
tooltips 1-30
transformer symbols 1-28, 1-30
setting reliability properties 2-3
short circuit solutions
lines and cables 4-29
machine modeling 4-30, A-15
sources 4-29
static load modeling 4-30
transformers 4-29
shunt capacitors
shunts
adding 2-5
copying 3-55
deleting 3-55
moving 3-54
IX-5
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Index
source
angle A-34
multiple A-34
properties F-13
specifying print options 2-20
specifying print settings 2-21
standard fault
properties F-24
static load A-35
properties F-9
static load property sheet display 1-28, 1-30
status bar
using 1-16
switches
properties F-22
synchronous machine
properties F-16
T
tabular reports
branch current 5-2
branch power 5-2
branch power losses 5-2
CAPO 5-5
DRA 5-5
fault all current 5-5
input list of network data 5-2
network summary 5-4
node voltage 5-2
power flow summary 5-4
shunt current 5-3
shunt power 5-4
status 5-4
TOPO 5-5
thevenin equivalent impedance 4-30
toolbars 1-18
analysis 1-25
copying a button 1-21
creating 1-21
IX-6
customizing 1-20
deleting a button 1-22
diagram 1-23
file 1-23
hiding 1-21
moving 1-20
report 1-27
resetting 1-22
results 1-26
saving 1-22
tooltip 1-18
zoom 1-26
tooltips 1-30
TOPO result options 4-13
transformer damage
properties F-29
transformer damage curves
edting 7-14
transformer modeling A-1
auto A-13
grounding A-13
impedance A-10
regulating A-12
size A-10
three winding A-10
three-legged core A-11
transformer symbols 1-28, 1-30
transformers
calculating compensating impedance 3-46
compensating impedance 3-46
conversions not supported A-8
properties F-5
tree
selecting 3-23
U
unbalance
current 4-51
voltage 4-48
using PSS/ADEPT
diagram view 1-61-7
equipment list view 1-6, 1-9
exiting 1-5
installing 1-5
main menu 1-17
opening files 3-15
opening native files 1-38
opening PSS/Engines Hub files 1-39
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Index
opening raw data files 1-39

progress view 1-6, 1-14
report preview 1-6, 1-15, 5-9
saving files 2-19
starting 1-5
status bar 1-16
toolbars 1-18
V
validation
automatic 4-2
user-initiated 4-4
viewing a group 2-9
viewing a load category 2-12
views
diagram 1-7
docking 2-24
equipment list 1-9
floating 2-25
hiding 1-7, 2-23
progress list 1-14
report preview 1-15, 5-9
showing 1-7
W
workspace
creating 3-86
deleting 3-86
restoring last saved 3-85
retrieving 3-85
saving 3-86
Confidential
IX-7
IX-8
Confidential

Adept

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Adept

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

PSS/ADEPT 5

1482 Erie Boulevard

Copyright 1998-2004 Shaw Power Technologies, Inc.

About the PSS/ADEPT Application .............................................................................1-1

Getting Help ................................................................................................................1-2

Installing and Using PSS/ADEPT ................................................................................1-5

The PSS/ADEPT Application Window .........................................................................1-6

Setting PSS/ADEPT Program Properties ..................................................................1-27

Setting Diagram View Properties ..............................................................................1-32

Setting Default Item Properties .................................................................................1-35

Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT ................................................................1-38

Chapter 2 - Creating a Network Model

Overview: Creating a Network Model ..........................................................................2-1

Creating a New Diagram .............................................................................................2-1

Setting Network Model Properties ...............................................................................2-2

Adding a Node .............................................................................................................2-4

Adding a Shunt Device ................................................................................................2-5

Adding a Branch ..........................................................................................................2-6

Defining a Group .........................................................................................................2-8

Shaw Power Technologies, Inc.

Defining a Load Category ..........................................................................................2-11

Defining Network Economics ....................................................................................2-14

2.10 Defining Item Ordering Method .................................................................................2-15

Chapter 3 - Editing a Network Model

Overview: Editing a Network Model ............................................................................3-1

Shaw Power Technologies, Inc.

Opening an Existing Network Diagram .....................................................................3-15

Selecting Items ..........................................................................................................3-15

Annotating the Diagram .............................................................................................3-25

Editing Nodes ............................................................................................................3-27

Editing Branches .......................................................................................................3-32

Editing Shunt Devices ...............................................................................................3-54

Workspace Management ..........................................................................................3-85

Load and Machine Scaling ........................................................................................3-87

3.10 Rephasing the Network .............................................................................................3-98

Shaw Power Technologies, Inc.

Chapter 4 - Analyzing Network Models

Overview: Analyzing Network Models .........................................................................4-1

Built-In Data Validation Options ..................................................................................4-2

Viewing Results on the Diagram .................................................................................4-5

Calculating Load Flow ..............................................................................................4-15

Calculating Short Circuits ..........................................................................................4-25

Calculating Motor Starting .........................................................................................4-33

Optimal Capacitor Placement (CAPO) ......................................................................4-37

Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) ........................................................................4-44

How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Voltage and Current Unbalances ...............................4-48

4.10 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Power Factor Limits ...................................................4-54

Chapter 5 - Results Reporting

Overview: Reporting Results .......................................................................................5-1

Selectable Tabular Reports .........................................................................................5-1

Shaw Power Technologies, Inc.

Branch Power Report .....................................................................................5-2

Setting the Report File Location ..................................................................................5-5

Setting Report Units ....................................................................................................5-6

Setting Report Options ................................................................................................5-8

Reporting on a Selection .............................................................................................5-9

Previewing the Report .................................................................................................5-9

Exporting a Report to Another Format ......................................................................5-10

Creating and Designing Reports Using Crystal Reports ...........................................5-11

Chapter 6 - Line Properties Calculator

Overview: Line Properties Calculator ..........................................................................6-1

Using the Line Properties Calculator ...........................................................................6-3

Corridor Files .............................................................................................................6-21

Shaw Power Technologies, Inc.